VOL. 106, PARTS 1 & 2

30 JUNE, 1982

Transactions of the

Royal Society of South

Australia

Incorporated

Contents

Milnes, A. R., Cooper, B. J. & Cooper, J. A. The Jurassic Wisanger Basalt of

Kangaroo Island, South Australia - - = - - 1

King, M., Braithwaite, R. W. & Wombey, J. C. A new species of Diplodactylus

(Reptilia:Gekkonidae) from the Alligator Rivers Region,

Northern Territory - - - - - - - = 15

Mawson, P.M. Some Acuariinae (Nematoda) from Australian birds - - 19

Smales, L. R. Dorcopsistrongylus new genus (Nematoda: Strongyloidea) from

the Grey Scrub Wallaby Dorcopsis veterum Lesson, 1827 from

Papua New Guinea - - - - - - - - 31

Morton, J. G. G. Brachiopoda from the Early Cretaceous of the Southern Ero-

manga Basin, N.S.W. - - - - - - - - 35

Fatchen, T. J. Vegetation distribution and change on offshore islands of the

Investigator Group and Whidbey Isles, Great Australian Bight - 39

Smith, M. J. Reptiles from Late Pleistocene deposits on Kangaroo Island,

South Australia - - - - - - - - - 61

Fain, A. Sennertia Oudemans (Acari, Chaetodactylidae). on Australian

bees - - - - - - - - - - - 67

Edmonds, S. J... Australian Acanthocephala No. 15: Four species - - - 7i

Brief communications:

Lange, R. T. & Nicolson, K. P. Vegetation eeparenily recording former exten-

sions of a paleosol - - - - - - 77

Miller, B. & Schwaner, T. D. The speckled brown snake Pseudonaja guttata

Parker: An addition to the fauna of South Australia - - 719

Priess, W. V. Supergroup. classification in the Adelaide Geosyncline - - 81

PUBLISHED AND. SOLD AT THE SOCIETY’S ROOMS

STATE LIBRARY BUILDING, NORTH TERRACE, ADELAIDE, S.A. 5000

TRANSACTIONS OF THE

ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA INC.

CONTENTS, VOL. 106, 1982

PARTS 1 & 2, 30 JUNE

Milnes, A. R., Cooper, B. J. & Cooper, J. A. The Jurassic Wisanger Basalt of

Kangaroo Island, South Australia - - - - - -

King, M., Braithwaite, R. W. & Wombey, J. C. A new species of Diplodactylus

(Reptilia:Gekkonidae) from the Alligator Rivers Region,

Northern Territory - - - - - - - -

Mawson, P. M. Some Acuariinae (Nematoda) from Australian birds - -

Smales, L. R. Dorcopsistrongylus new genus (Nematoda: Strongyloidea) from

the Grey Scrub Wallaby Dorcopsis veterum Lesson, 1827 from

Papua New Guinea - - - - - - - -

Morton, J. G. G. Brachiopoda from the Early Cretaceous of the Southern Ero-

manga Basin, N.S.W. - - - - = z : “4

Fatchen, T. J. Vegetation distribution and change on offshore islands of the

Investigator Group and Whidbey Isles, Great Australian Bight -

Smith, M. J. Reptiles from Late Pleistocene deposits on Kangaroo Island,

South Australia - - - - - - - - -

Fain, A. Sennertia Oudemans (Acari, Chaetodactylidae) on Australian

bees - - - - - - - - - - -

Edmonds, 8. J. Australian Acanthocephala No. 15: Four species - - -

Brief communications:

Lange, R. T. & Nicolson, K. P. Vegetation apparently recording former exten-

sions of a paleosol - - - - - - - z

Miller, B. & Schwaner, T. D. The speck!ed brown snake Pseudonaja guttata

Parker: An addition to the fauna of South Australia - -

Priess, W. V. Supergroup classification in the Adelaide Geosyncline - -

719

PARTS 3 & 4, 30 NOVEMBER

Southcott, R. V. Vitamin A content of the liver of the Australian sea lion Neo-

phoca cinerea (Péron) and its toxicological significance - -

Hutchings, P. A. & Turvey, S. P. The Nereididae of South Australia - - -

De Deckker, P. Australian aquatic habitats and biota: their suitability for

palaeolimnological investigations - - - = . =

King, M. A new species of Gehyra (Reptilia: Gekkonidae) from Central

Australia - - - - - = = = . 3

Petney, T. N., Bull, C. M. & Andrews, R. H. A stable boundary between two

species of reptile ticks on Eyre Peninsula, South Australia -

Blackburn, G., Allison, G. B. & Leaney, F. W. J. Further evidence on the age of

tuff at Mt Gambier, South Australia = - - - x -

De Deckker, P., Bauld, J. & Burne, R. V. Pillie Lake, Eyre Peninsula, South

Australia: Modern environment and biota, dolomite sedimenta-

tion, and Holocene history - - - - - - -

Burton, T. E. Mangrove development north of Adelaide, 1935-1982 - -

Benbow, M.C. Stratigraphy of the Cambrian-?Early Ordovician, Mount Johns

Range, NE Officer Basin, South Australia = - - - -

Brief Communications:

Mirtschin, P. J. & Reid, R. B. Occurrence and distribution of the inland taipan

Oxyuranus microlepidotus (Reptilia: Elapidae) in South Aus-

tralia - - - - - - - - - -

Neverauskas, V. P. & Butler, A. J. Tolerance of blue crab, Portunus pelagicus

(L.), to high temperature - - - - - - -

von der Borch, C. C. & Grady, A. E. Wonoka Formation and Billy Springs Beds:

Reconnaissance interpretation - - - - :

McDonald, K. R. & Miller, J. D. On the status of Lechriodus fletcheri

(Boulenger) (Anura: Leptodactylidae) in northeast Queensland

Insert to Transactions of the Royal Society of South Australia, Vol. 106, Parts 3 & 4, 30 November, 1982

163

169

183

191

213

PANS}

217

220

THE JURASSIC WISANGER BASALT OF KANGAROO ISLAND, SOUTH

AUSTRALIA

BY A. R. MILNES, B. J. COOPER & J. A. COOPER

Summary

The Middle Jurassic tholeiitic Wisanger Basalt on Kangaroo Island appears to be the eroded

remnant of a formerly extensive basalt sheet of extrusive origin. It is significant as the only time-

stratigraphic marker between the well-studies glacigene sediments of Late Palaeozoic age and the

Tertiary non-marine and marine sequences in southern South Australia. A rapidly cooled

amygdaloidal basal zone is evident in some exposures where the basalt is shown to have flowed

over an Early Mesozoic weathered landscape containing leached and kaolinised fluviatile

sediments. Elsewhere on Kangaroo Island, composite lateritic weathering profiles formed during

the Cainozoic and Quaternary on remnants of this Early Mesozoic landscape. The Wisanger Basalt

is likely to have been protected from the weathering by a cover of Jurassic and younger sediments.

Major oxide and strontium isotope data for the Wisanger Basalt are consistent with the range of

compositions and differentiation trends reported for theoleiitic Gondwana mafic magmas of

Mesozoic age from Tasmania and Antarctica.

THE JURASSIC WISANGER BASALT OF KANGAROO ISLAND,

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

by A, R, Mitnes*, B,J. Coorerr & J, A, Coorery

Summary

Mines, A R,, Coorer, BJ & Cooper, J, A, (1982) The Jurassie Wisanger Basalt at Kan-

gatoo Island. South Australia. Tres. R. Soc. 8. Aust WEL). 1-13, 30 June, 1982,

The Middle Jurassic Wolvitic Wisanger Basalt on Kangyroo Island appears mo be dhe

eroded remnant of w formerly extensive busalt sheel of extrusive origin, tt is siwnificant as ther

only time-stratigraphic marker between the well-studied glacigene sediments of Late Palueazoic

age und the Tertiary non-marine und marine sequences in squthern South Australia A rapidly

cooled amygdaloidul basal zone is evident in some eaposures where the basalt is shown to

have flowed over an Early Mesozoic weathered landscape enntaining leached and Kauolinised

fluviatile sediments. Elsewhere on Kangaroo Island, composite Jateritic weathering profiles

formed during the Cainozoic and Quaternary on remnants of this Early Mesozoic landscape.

The: Wisanger Basalt is likely to have been protected from the weathering by aw cover of

Jurassic und younger sediments, Major oxide avd strontium isotope data for the Wisanger

Basalt are consistent with the range of compositions and differentiation trends reporice for

tholeiilic Gondwana mafic magmas of Mesozoic age fhom Tasimaiin and Antarctica,

Attention has been given to other basic volcanic rocks possibly related to the Wisunger

Basalt, A basalt at depth in Gemini No. 1 drilled im the offshore section of the Poldu Basin

is known only from cuttings which displuy variable rock textures, of which some are amygda-

loldal. It underlies 4 thiek sequence of Mesozoic and Cainozoic sediments, Voleanic rocks are

also associated with lower Olway Ciroup sediments in Robertson No. | drilled in the Glway

Busin near Penola. They are trachytes of similar camposition to the alkaline basalts and

trachytes subsurface and in outcrop neur the margins of the Otway Basin in western Victoria.

Mesozoic basic igneous rocks veeur in many places along the southern continental

margin of Australia, and include the extensive tholeiitic Tasmanian dolerites, They rellect

widespread igneous activily during the initial stages of fragmentation of Gondwanaland, and

are associated in part with the development of economically important intracratonie sedi-

mentary basins in the Early Jurassic along the rift gone between Australia and Antareticn,

Key Worps: Wisanger Basalt, Kangaroo tsand, Jurassic Gondwana tholeiites, deep

weathering,

Introdnetion

The existence of post-Palacozaie volcanic

rocks Of Kangaroo Island has been referred

to in some of the eurlics! geological Hleralure

on South Australia (Tate 1883, Brown L898)

Howchin (899, 1903). ‘They were classified

as tholeiitic basalls by Tilley (1921) and are

referred to in a review of Phanerozoic vol-

canism in the State (Forbes 1969), but have

not been extensively studied, Wellman (1971)

ahd McDougall & Wellman (1976) reported a

Middle Jurassic age from potussium-argor

measurements on this material, and so dispelled

earlier correlations with the Quaternary Mt

Gambier alkali voleanies or the Terliaty val-

canics of Victoria,

* CSIRO Division of Soils, Private Bug No. 2.

Glen Osmond, 8, Aust, 5064, ’

+ Depariment of Mines & Energy, South Australia

+ Department of Geology, University of Adelaide,

1Wellmun, P. (1971), The age and palaeomity

netism of the Australian Cenozoic voleante rocks.

Ph.D. thesis, Aust, Natl Univ. Canberri (un-

publ.),

We have named the volcanics on Kangaroo

Isiand the Wisanger Basalt after the small

agricultural grea between Smith Bay and

Rettic Bluff oo the northern side of the island

where extensive and characteristic outcrops

occur (Fig. 1). Excellent sections through the

basalt may be examined in quarries at The

Blulf and on the northern outskirts of Kings-

cole.

Our aim in lhiy paper is tu summarise the

geological und veomorphological relanonships

of jhe basalt, based on wu review of the

published information in conjunction with our

reconnaissalice field observations and Jabara-

lory data. We also myestigzale its correlation

with a basalr recently interseeted by drilling

in the offshore section of the Polda Basin west

of Eyre Peninsula (Fig, 2),

Geological setting and distribution

of the hayalt

Kangaroo Island js essentially nm stuth-

westward extention af the Mt Lofty Ranges

fold bel, which was uplifted hy black-faulling

2 A. R. MILNES, B. J. COOPER & J. A. COOPER

Terrairy maring sndutnnnts,

Wisanger Basal; _—

Late Palapoaoic daria) ond

Od Seyevement Guarry porsitle Early Mesozoic tloyatia sediments —_ —- —}

Brarack

Deeply weetelod materials tarruginous crusts — — —

Wes”

rrr

SS A

ae: oe

DUDLEY ¥72"* /PENINSU

Sttvely Bay

POLDA

oGemini J

mini No.) BASIN

FYRE

‘ 3 " De iirt Waletield

\\ PENINSULA 4’ Pr YORKE f)

al :

tx : )

: PENINGULA

. i

\\a ADELAIDE

A Murrey

Vridyy

S60 Dat dune

- 7 \

ited N VICTORIA

7 KANGAROO ISLAND

Tiree y shogies

gfirewu ston

SOUTHERN

@ Narneonete

i Wall —_oa 1

« Ratiartson No

0 100 200 OCEAN 'S Penilne

KILOMETRES hel

y Casterton Nod oye emster tity

Mouns Guwihiere

BASIN

Hawkedtelew

Woolstthorpes

Fig. 2. Broad scale locality plan,

THE JURASSIC WISANGER BASALT OF KANGAROO ISLAND, S.A- 5

and tilling during the Tertiary and Quaternary -

The vorthern part of the rland has a basement

of Cambrian sedimentary and metasedimentary

rocks, and a conspicuous fault-angle depres-

sion against one of these block faults (Fig.

L)=, Late Pslaeovoie glacigene deposils and

younger sediments, inéluding Tertiary fossili-

ferous marine limestones, are preserved within

the Nepean fowland and extend onto the

higher lands to the West, These higher Jands

generally have a bleached, mottled and ferru-

ginised regolith.

South ef the Cyenct Fault bounding the

Nepean lowland the main part of Kangaroo

Tsland including Dudley Peninsula has a bed-

rock of Curnbrian Kanmantoo Group meta-

sedimentary rocks with some upthrust Pre-

cambrian metasedimentary rock inliers, and a

bleached, imattled and ferruginised regolith

mantle equated wilh the lateritised summit

surface of the Mt Lofty Kanges (Daily cr al,

1974; Twidale 1976; Daily et al. 1979).

Foussiliferous marine limestones of Eocene to

Pliocene and Pleistueene ages occur bath

subsurface m embayments or palacobays, and

qs outcrop remnants at various levels in the

landscape,

The Wisanger Basalt erops aut as a Trag-

mented surficia) sheet between Smith ay

and Kingscore in the downfaulted Nepean

lowland, and as 4 small outher cast of Penne-

shaw on Dudicy Peninsula, Between Smith

Bay and Rettie Bluff, the basalt forms a cap-

ping less (han 20 m thick on the conspicuous

disseeted tablelands known as the Gup Hills,

rising to 185 m ubove sealevel near Smith

Bay wid about 120 m at Rettie Biull. A

small basalt knoll 3.5 km south of Rettic

Bluif oveyrs siznificantly tower in the land-

scape at about 50 m elevation, signilying

cither a considerable relicf on the base of the

sheet, or disruption of Ube sheet by faulting or

dissection and subsequent collapse through

a ee Ne

2*Nepesn Embayment’ as defined by Bauer

(1959) refers to the entire geomorphic lowland

beiween Smilh Bay and the Cyener Fault inun-

dated by the sca qt various times during the

Cainovuic. We prefer to use “Nepean lowland’

for (his region. The terms ‘Kingscote-Cygenet

Ausin’ and ‘Kingscote-Cygnet Embayment’ were

used by Glaessner & Wade (1958), Cooper &

Lindsay (1978) and Daily ve al. (1979) for the

area between Kingseote and the Cygnet Fault in

which surface and sabsurface sections of Caino-

zoic murine limestones were recorded.

& Buner, P. H. (1059), The regional gceogruplyy of

Kanearoo Island, Soulk Australia, 2 vols, Ph.D.

thesis, Aust, Natl Univ., Canberra Cunpubl),

sarp retreat. In general, the sheet slopes

downwards from west to east sq that narth of

Kingscole, the basalt is up to 30 m thick and

occupies the summits of rounded hills rising

only to about 60 m above sealevel. A poorly

exposed outller of the basalt near Alex Look-

out, cast of Penneshaw, is 160 m above seu-

level near the top of Lhe summit surface of

Dudley Peninsula.

In many parts of the Gap Hills and in the

Old Government Quarry on the coastline sonh

af Kingscete, the basalt unconformably over-

lics white, cross-bedded, clayey sands, grits

aid small-scale conglomerates of Muvial origin

(Fig. 3). These sediments are highly leached

and kaolinised, and in places in ihe shoreline

cliffs between Kingscote and The Bluff, they

contain conspicuous ferruginised zones and

coneretions. Previous workers have assigned

these sediments to the Late Palaeozoic Cupe

Jervis Beds (Ludbrook 1967), bur ir is alsa

possible that they belong to a Mesozoie fluvial

cycle in existence immediately prior to the

basalt extritsion. Obscure leaf remains have

been recorded in the sediments adjacent to

the basalt oureraps near Alex Lookout and

north of the Wisinger telephone exchange

(Sprigg et al, 1954). but these remain undared,

The field relationships of the basalt cuther east

of Penneshaw are not Clear due to poor expo-

sure, However, the basalt contains abundant

small amygdales (Howchin 1903; Tilley 1921)

and appeirs to oceppy an erosional hollow in

the northern edge of the dissected summit

surfuce of Dudley Peninsula, Steep slopes cut

in Kanmantoo Group metasediments flank the

northern limit of the outcrop, which we

interpret as an erosianal remnant of the base

of a formerly extensive basalt sheet,

Other basic igneous rocks occur on Kanga-

coo Island and have, at one time or another.

been tentatively correlated with the Wisanger

Basalt, Dyke rocks From Antechamber Bay

and Cape Hart are intrusive into Kanmantoa

Group metasediments and Jarm pact of the

Early Palaeozoic history of the region.

together with the distinetive granites and

pegmatites (Milnes ef af, 1977), Based on

their field rélationships and petrotogical

character, basic rocks on the property “Green-

slapes” in lhe southwestern part of the island

are alsa assigned to the Early Palacozaic-

Contact relationships

The contact between the underlying fluvial

sediments and ihe basall is irregular and

ALR

wee

Fig, 3, Shirp but irregular unconformable contact

between Wisanger Basalt and underlying leached

and kaclinised fluyiatile sediments in old

Government Quarry, Kingseote. Foreset beds

approximately | m thick, Note dark coloured

basal zone of rapidly cooled amygdaloidal basalt

below churacteristically jointed more coarsely

erystalline material.

4. Basal

Fig.

mfillin

in Of

fractured zones

zope of Wisanger Basalt sheer

follows in kaolinised fluviatile sands

Government Quarry, Kingseote. Nate

surrounding smal! massive

basalt lenses, Fissures filled with white car-

bonule occur in sands, Hammer 33 cm Jong.

sharply defined, with a local relief of up to

2m. Excellent exposures. in the Old Gevern-

ment Quarry near Kingscote show a thin basal

contact zone intilling small hollows and

irregularities in the white sandy sediments

(Pig. 4+). The basal zone is crudely laminated

and fractured parallel to the contact, but

remnunt basalt lenses display a very fine

groincd groundimass Wilh phenverysts of

plagioclase and pyroxene, and small amygdales

MILNES, B. J, COOPER & J, A, COOPER

similar to those im the Alex Lookout outcrop.

Although not obvious in the quarry, micro-

scopic studies show the basal contact zone is

largely altered to montmorillonite, with the

laminated and fractured material being

preferentially enriched ip iron oxide, There is

no evidence for soil or plant debris along the

contact in the exposures examined, or of

metamorphism of the underlying sediments

by the basalt. Moreover, contamination of the

nase of the basalt sheet by sedimentary

matcrial appears to have been quite limited

judging by the evidence in thin sections of

isolated quartz sand and silt grains.

At The Bluff Quarry, sands below the

basalt are vari-coloured due to iron oxide

impregnation, bul the contact is sharp. Thin

yveinlets of basalt penetrating the sands are

visible in thin sections of the contact and dis-

play textures indicating microphenoerysts of

plagioclase and pyroxene in an aphanitic

glassy groundmass, despite their alteration to

montmorillonite, We believe that the basalt

was a flow extruded onto a landscape that

was at least locally devoid of soil and vegeta-

tion, as in the valley of an active river or

stream. It has been argued elsewhere (Daily

eral, 1974) that this landscape was formed by

erosion and truncation of a laterite profile

correlated with that presently exposed west of

the Nepean lowland and on the uplifted

summit surface of the island, south of the

Cygnet Fault.

Above the basal contact zone, the basalt is

generally medium grained and doleritic in

texture. It is also characteristically highly

jointed and readily breaks into small prisms

with vertical oricntation. Because of this

silica mesostasis in fine

interstitigt

grained hypoerystalline basalt from Alex Look-

out. Tangential arrangement of plagioclase laths

around vesicles can just be discerned. Bar scale

is 1 mm.

areas of

THE JURASSIC WISANGER BASALT OF KANGAROO ISLAND, S.A 5

property, the basalt is actively quartied for

road metal and was even shipped to the main-

land for this purpose during the earliest period

of European settlement in South Aastralia.

Petrology, minerslogy and geochentistry

The Wisanger Basalt varies in colour from

black io dull green. Published observations

(Stanley 1910; Tilley 1921; Joplin 1964) and

jn examination of additional samples in thin

section and by X-ray diflraction indicate that

the basalt is composed dominantly of plagjo-

clase, clinopyroxene (pigeonile and augite)

and enstatite, with interserfal dark-coloured

glassy material studded with iron oxide erystal-

lites. Variable amounts of quartz are evident

in the X-ray diffraction traces, An olivine-

hearing variant containing a trace of metallic

cold was described hy Moulden (1895).

At Alex Lookout, the basalt is black and

camprises phehocrysts of augite, pigeantte and

plagioclase in a very fine grained groundmass

of plagioclase laths, granular crystals af angile

and iron oxide, and dark coloured glass.

Typical of the rock are small circular amyg-

dales (Fig. 5) filled with amber-coloured

chalcedonic silicn and red siderite (Table 1).

Several of these structures are rimmed by

tangentially arranged plagioclase laths stug-

gesting [their origin us gas bubbles moving

within a fluld magma. Many are associated

with irregular patches of chalcedonic silicy

mesastasis. (Table 1) free of iron oxide

inclusions and silicate microlites, and thos

clearly distinguishable front the devitrified

intersertal glass) Remnant basalt lenses fromm

the basal contact zone of the basalt sheet in

the Old Government Quarry near Kingscote

display similar structures and textures, despite

alleration of the rock to montmorillonite. ‘The

high proportion of gragndmass glass in these

materials. is consistent with rapid cooling.

Elsewhere, for example metres ubove the

basal zone in the Old Government Quarry and

in the low clevation outcrop. south of Rettie

Bluff. the basalt is hypocrystalline and signi-

ficantly coarser grained, Plagioclase 13 still the

dominant mineral, with augite and pigeonite.

Enstatite is also present. The lawer birefringent

enstauite is comimonly bordered by elino-

pyroxene, Intersertal glass contains abundant

iron oxide erystallites and devitrified silica

microlites, Vesicles or amygdales were not

observed.

The correlation of the basalt in the cisparate

locations on Kangaroo Island is further sup-

ported by major element chemical analyses

(Table 2) which confirm the tholenie

character of the basalt, and substantiate the

earlier identifications, However, the analyses

published by Jack (1912) ditfer significantly

from ours. in Al,Oy and MgQ. Jack's analyses

more closely resemble the composition of the

remnant lenses altered ta montmorillonite in

the basal zone of the basalt sheet, and so are

themselves assumed to represent altered

material.

The geochemical data for the Wisanger

Basalt samples. as plotted on ternary diagrams

in Figures 6 and 7. are well encompassed by

the range of compositions and the diflerentia-

tion trends of tholetilic basalts from Tasmania

(McDougall 1962, 1964) and Antarctica

(Gunn 1966; Elliott 1972), The Wisanger

Basalt samples occupy ua relatively restricted

part of the differentiatian curve, with 4

reasonable correspondence to the low silica

portion of the Kirkpatrick Basalt (Elliot 1972)

and the hypersthene tholeiites of the Ferrar

Dolerites (Gunn 1966). However, jt is

Tas.e |, Electron microprobe analyses of Wisanger Basalt samples from Alex Leakaut.

Amygdule infillings Tntersertal amber Plagioclase Pyroxene

aniber silica silica glass phenocrysts phenocrysts

glass siderite

(3)* (2) (2) (4) (2)

Sifs 73.6 0.20 74.7 46.5 $2.7

TiO. 0.55 0.02 0.47 0.02 0.21

AlsOy 433 0.01 4.54 33.3 1,89

FeoOs 4.69 4.3 4.57 OSI 9.19

MzO 1.40 1.26 1.43 0.14 18.2

Cad 0,7 6.75 0.78 16.8 16.4

NaoO ORS 0.05 O11 1.68 0,14

K.O 0,89 0.01 0.33 0.15 0,01

‘Total 86.9 48.6 86.9 99.1 98.7

* averaged number of analyses.

A. R. MILNES, B. J. COOPER & J. A. COOPER

WoYoo'T Xapy Bau © WOUIaA,, -G67EW “V6TEW

‘salzuaqy Py gg wONdsas -q— ‘Aung YMA ML :9°V—yove “Asiend) YOg sy], :Aajuvyg "jo"jUOd Jeseq saoqge [aM AleNd JsUMUIaAOH PIO :8Z¢ WN

“WII palaqyeaa — AM “3109 YsalJ = J

‘EQSa{ SB UOII [RIO] »

‘soydumes (7161) Yous pue (O16) Aajueig 10j jdaoxe aouadsaiony Aei-xK Aq sasTeuy

SK ee

L°66 6°66 9°66 £66 0001 9°66 S001 P00! Te}0.L

69'T Té'T LIL Lam SOT vel L60 001 TOT

ILO O10 t10 £10 80°0 STO yy 80°0 60°0 “O%d

soo ITO 00 +00 00 S00 —_ v0'0 £0°0 ®OS

L8°0 r3'0 90°1 orl £9°1 6$'1 4y L990 r60 0L'0 06°0 c6'0 Ow

81 07 sl 61 V7 9C q 6l'l £0°1 £0T Ll Ll O°8N

Sv'6 8r'6 TI'6 ct'6 amt OLY OL 01 r801 crol cr ol 666 Sool OP)

OL’ P8'r 00'r Il'y L9'T TL] 09° OTT 90'1 659 st 16°9 Os

810 £70 Ilo Plo Io c00 q qq 4 O10 LY0 LV0 OUW

“ea = = am a — ae cy mie LY9 xt _ Oe

«688 +916 alLP9 «99°L Trt 1€°8 «F0'6 «lOl «bP Ol 6S'I +6P01 C66 ®O%94

cst Ost Sol ssl Lol l6l T6OTC I8'Iz SHIT I9L1 srr! oo FI "ORV

8L0 9L°0 180 8L0 80 £80 9F'0 870 8P'0 8L0 19°0 £90 SOLL

6ss 6 FS 6LS cLs PoE LLY os'es 887s PO'ES sles oS PPS “OS

MA6TEIN JHOTEN MVS8TEIN JV6TEN auoz Sus] YIOI 3 q e

Paleuluey = paleyy yee AQ[URIS = MBZEIN I8TEW

Aliengd) JUsWIUIaA0L

PIO ‘}9e]U05 [eseg

NOYOoT xapy vale ajoossury

nnn

‘Jposvg sasupsi Ay yi fo Saskjpup jwruuayD *Z ATAVL

THE JURASSIC WISANGER BASALT OF KANGARGO ISLAND, §,A. 7

THTAL Fe

f WSANGER BASALT

ai a | AetY Conwour

f 7) Edi ma Wrthee

Urb eananan WY Man Sat Wh Heaven

Hawrennre wit ie Powuiie

vi war “

manne cane wana vasera sti Cy x

hatin

BLAIS My

wer

Fig. 6. Composition diagram for total Pe, Mg

and Na-+kK,

WISANGER BASALT

‘ ALLY hema!

\ OO ernie)

\ CO Sie reaeatae

\ @ sien rane

: 17 Metidinne imi meme

f Li Merammer tine orien fy step ogre

Nae Mount mernsaity. nT th es ~< Hae

ty marin nner

Fig. 7. Composition diagram for K, Nu and Ca.

inferesiing to nole the discrepancy in composi.

lion between the Alex Lookout samples, which

aré thought to represent the base of the sheet

on Dadley Peninsula, and those Kingscote

samples collected from well above the basal

contact. The higher Me/Ca ratio of the Kings-

cote samples compared with the Alex Lookour

sarmples relates ta observed differences in

pyroxene mineralogy, and imples a significant

variation in the composition of the Wisanger

Basalt that has not been within the scope of

this study fo investigate. The position of the

Alex Lookout samples on the ternary diagrams

is Consistent with a more highly differentiated

basalt. In this context, the silica-rich mesostasis

and vesicle-infillings could represent a silicic

final differentiate of the magma corresponding

to the quariz and potassium feldspar metostasts

in the Tasmanian dolerites and granophyres,

and as such would be expected to have con-

eenfrated im vesicles and miarolitie cavities

during the last stages of crystallisahon of the

sheel. The composition of the mesostasis does

in fact fall in the appropriate position on the

ternary diagrams. On the other hahd, the

association of siderite with the silica in some

amygdales might indicate deuteric alteration

of the busalt with the introduction of alloch-

thonous silica and carbonates,

Rubidium and strontium concentration and

strontium isotape ratio measurements have

been made on thiee samples af the Wisanger

Basalt which were individually hand-picked

to obtain fresh material. The cesults and

sample locations are reported in Table 3.

Based on the measured Rb/Sr ratios, the

strontium isotope ratios have been recalculated

back to what they would have been at the

time of crystallisation of the basalt |70Ma ago.

Which is the potassium-argon age reported by

McDougall & Wellman (1976).

The initial “'Sr/ "Sr ratios lie between 0.711

and 0,712 for all three samples. Such values

ace significantly higher than the maximum of

0.706 normally obtained from uncontaminated,

mantle-derived volcanic rocks of Mesozoic

and younger ages: They are, however, charac-

teristic of the abnormal values found for the

huge volumes of Tasmanian and Antarctic

tholeiitic dolerites (Compston ef al. 1968)

which are of similar age to the Wisunger

Basalt (McDougall 1961). Thus, there is now

strontium isotope, as well as petrological,

chemical and age data, to suggest a close

relationship between the Wisanger Basalt and

that group of tholeiitic Gondwana matic

magmas that have unusually high “Sr/**Sr

ratios,

Geomorphic significance of the Wisanger

Basalt

Together with stratigraphic and geomarphie

interpretations, the Jurassic age of the Wis-

anger Basalt has been used to argue that the

laterite of the summit surface of Kangaroo

Island is older than the Middle Jurassic (Daily

et al, 1974; Twidale 1976; Daily et al, 1979).

Of considerable importance to this contention

is the bleached and kaolinised nature of the

sub-basultic sediments. Others have argued,

on the basis of palacontagnetic doia for the

weathered sedimerits beneath the hasalt, that

the damimant period of Jateritic weathering

was Late Oligocene to Early Miocene, and

8 A. R. MILNES, B. J, COOPER & J. A. COOPER

TaBLe 3. Rubidium and strontitim concentrations and strontium isotupe ratios of three samples af

Wisunger Basalt.

Sample Rb Sr STRbS Ser STS" Sh yy STS 88h) po Mu

number ppm ppm

£71265 _

M328F 33.3 118 Rib ‘5135, | 71255 THOB:

4 7134, é a

M229AT 36,3 139 754 7) 340 7134; T1165

" 71320 |

M329BI 32,4 (31 WS 7130, | 713s T1130

Samples M329A. M329B are from Alex Lookout locality on Dudley Peninsula, and are regarded as

part of chilled basal contact of basalt. sheet.

Sample M328 was collected in Old Government Quarry north of Kingscote well above altered basal

contact zone.

Strontium isotope compositions at the time of crystallisation of the magma, 170Ma ago. were calcu-

lated from the measured present day rubidium «and strontium concentrations.

wat therefore younger than the basalt aid

probably the result of sub-basaltic weathering

(Schmidt ev al. 1976). However, preservation

of the sharp contact at the sole of the basalt

and the absence of leaching or kaolimsation

of the basal busalt zone favour a pre-basalt

ape for the weathering. Southwest of the Gap

Hills towards the Cygnet Searp where there is

no evidenee of basalt, Cambrian bedrock and

Late Palucozoic glacigene sediments cxhibil

mottled weathering zones overlain by ferru-

ginous gravel, These are likely to he composite

weathering profiles consisting of younger

modifications of ajcient leached and kaolinised

zones possibly inherited from the Barly

Mesozoic. Silicified plant roots are present in

these profiles in the vicinity of the Wisanger

telephone exchange indicating a relationship

to old soil environments, to which the palaeo-

magnetic data may refer,

Critical to the argument that the sub-

basalfic sediments were weathered prior to

basalt extrusion iy the fact that the basalt it-

self is largely unweathered, Tt is unvealistic

to suggest thal conditions favouring leaching

and deep weuthering have not occurred in this

area Since the Middle Jurassic, Thus, it is

likely that the lack of weathering evident in.

the basalt is duc cither to the complete erosion

of the upper parts of the basalt sheet contain-

ing stich weathered material, or to the burial

of the basall by a mantle of post-Middle

Jurassie sediments, In this latter case, exhuma-

tion would have taken place in comparatively

recent times. Soils developed on the basalt are

mainly shallow grey and brown cracking clay

soils with weakly expressed gilga: features and

accumulations of carbonate in the subsoil

(Bauer 1959"; Northcote 1979), However,

near ihe castern end of the Gap Hills, duplex

soils with ferruginous gravel occur on partly

ferruginised sandy sediments overlying the

basalt (Bauer 1959%), These sandy sediments

provide same evidence for a Former sediment

cover on the basalt, arid may be related to old

landsurfaces of which benches (in places

capped by calerete) cut across the leached

and kaolinised sub-basaltic sands up to 100 mm

ahove secalevel are an expression. Additionally.

the seitiered basalt outerops point to con-

siderable dissection and erosion of a formerly

extensive basalt sheet. On the other hand, the

only direct evidence for crosion of the basalt,

apart from modern colluvial debris, is the

eecurrence of ubundant basalt clasts in a car-

bonate-cemented fossiliferous Late Pleistocene

heach depasit overlying the Eocene limestones

at Kingseate, and highly weathered basalt

pebbles |i conglomerates within the Eocene

limestone section,

Other Mesozole basic volcanic rocks

Mesozoic basalts other than the Wisanger

Basalt are fot known to crop out if South

Australia. However, voleanic rocks that are

probably of similar age to the Wisanger Basalt

have been intersected at depth in the Polda

and Otway Basins (Fig. 2). Elsewhere in

southern Australia, there are the extensive

Tasmanian dolerites of tholefitic composition

emplaced [67Ma ago (McDougall 1961), as

well as Lute Triassic to Late Jurassic basic

THE JURASSIC WISANGER BASALT OF KANGAROO ISLAND, S.A. 9

Fig. 8. Fragment of basalt from 890-893 m in

Gemini No. 1 showing hypocrystalline texture

in which altered olivine crystals are set amongst

albite laths. Bar scale is 0.25 mm.

Fig. 9. Fragment of basalt from 887-890 m in

Gemini No, 1 showing conspicuous amygdales

in altered rock with hypocrystalline to hypohya-

line texture, Bar scale is 1 mm.

igneous rocks mainly of alkaline composition

in the highlands of Victoria and southern

New South Wales (McDougall & Wellman

1976), and tholeiitic basalts of Middle Cre-

taceous age in the Perth Basin of Western

Australia (Edwards 1938; Wellman 19711).

Gemini No, 1

Gemini No. 1, an exploration well drilled

in the offshore section of the Polda Basin west

of Eyre Peninsula, intersected an amygdaloidal

basalt between 856 m and the bottom of the

hole at 894 m underlying a thick sequence

of Mesozoic and Cainozoic sediments.4 A sub-

sequent reappraisal of the geophysical data

for the basin suggested that the basalt

occurs within a thick sedimentary sequence

(McInerny 1978*%), and consequently may be

related to the Wisanger Basalt.

Thin section studies and X-ray diffraction

data for samples of basalt fragments from the

core cuttings between 881-894 m indicate that

the basalt is variable in texture from hypo-

crystalline (Fig. 8) to hypohyaline with con-

spicuous amygdales (Fig. 9). It is composed

of plagioclase, relict augite, and opaque iron

oxide crystals with abundant chlorite and

montmorillonite representing significant altera-

tion. Despite the alteration, the rock textures

are well preserved. Lath-like plagioclases of

albite and andesine-labradorite compositions

(Table 4) occur both in the groundmass and

as phenocrysts, and are generally clouded by

fine grained clay-mineral alteration products.

The albite could have recrystallised from high

calcium plagioclase during burial metamor-

phism of the basalt. Relict augite (Table 4)

occurs in phenocrysts, and displays evidence

of chemical zoning from changes in extinction.

Opaque iron oxide crystals are common, and

altered olivine phenocrysts also occur. Con-

spicuous sulphide is present in some frag-

ments of the basalt. Quartz is evident in X-ray

diffraction traces of most basalt fragments

examined. In fact, the amygdales are rimmed

by brownish chalcedonic silica, and are filled

with chlorite (Table 4), or in some cases cai-

cite.

Geochemical analyses of fragments of the

basalt carefully hand-picked from five cuttings

samples between 881-894 m are given in

Table 5. The compositions of the five samples

are fairly uniform despite the observed varia-

tions in rock type and degree of alteration, and

at face value, fall within the composition range

of alkali basalts rather than tholeiites as in

the case of the Wisanger Basalt. However,

the degree of clay mineral alteration observed

in X-ray diffraction traces of the samples is

sufficiently great for us to doubt whether the

analyses are a valid representation of the

chemistry of the basalt. Nonetheless, the high

sodium and sulphur values.in the samples are

of particular interest and reflect the abundance

of albite and the presence of sulphide in thin

sections. Together with the occurrence of

olivine, these observations point to significant

mineralogical differences between the basalt

in Gemini No, 1 and the Wisanger Basalt

4 Gemini 1—Well completion report, 1975 (un-

published). Lodged S.A. Dept Mines & Energy.

= MclInerny, P. (1978) Progress report—Re-

appraisal of geophysical data offshore Polda

Basin. S.A. Dept Mines & Energy Rept Bk 78/31

Canpubl.).

A. R. MILNES, B. J. COOPER & J. A. COOPER

[R}0L

6°89 TCO 166 9°66 6°66 £6 66 v00T 0'€6 9°56 Lv6 'e6 S'£6

r0'0 170 10°0 £0°0 100 £70 10°0 £0°0 $00 £0°0 700 sO L0°0

ITO c£0 aa) 810 tc'0 6rt 69 176 68°01 $98 8e'8 £69 Cyl

v0 L0'0 0°6! 691 9°61 cei brs te0 se'0 670 170 95°0 8£'0

Osc TOI $91 L’st yor LET 6L0 020 ce£'0 90°0 700, S00 £0°0

= + 678 £0'6 £68 Ca = Oro 6c'0 wa)

eC! Ist STE 99°1 BCE DET SIc $07 8's Pol Vel 1'0e 8'6l

a — 9r'0 Oro £9°0 0 £0°0 0

£Te £'0E els LUs SOS Vis £°8¢ COL L79 19 8°99 9°P9 9°69

c if 4 T T 8 L 9 § P £ c I

SSUl[[YUr sjepsAury guaxolAg dLIOpesgey auigye

aiopyD aulsopux

Jedspja4

ORD

O3IN

£Q%04

FOV

®OLL

“OIS

*T (ON lunmuay wos Ijosvg fo Sjuauspsl fo sask]ouv agoddosa U01JI9]7Y “py AAV

THE JURASSIC WISANGER BASALT OF KANGAROO ISLAND, 8.4. in

Tanrté 5. Chemical analysey ef single hand-picked fragments of the basalt from Gemini No. 1-

2890) 2900 2910) 2920 2930

881-884 m 884-887 m 887-890 m 890-893 m 893-894 m

SiO. 48.4 50.1 45.6 47.3 47.8

Tide 1.52 1.62 15] 1.52 1.50

AleOs 14.2 14.9 13.3 13.4 14.4

FeO, 12.15 11.09 10,80 o.54 11.80

Mn 1.20 0.11 0.14 O13 0.13

Meo 6.94 772 8,37 7.73 §.22

Cad 7.86 3.97 6,09 5.71 4,53

NayO 4.4 SS 4B a §.3

Kz0 (L.67 0.44 25 1.26 0,27

SO, 0.07 0.29 0.53 034 98

P20; O14 O17 0.14 D.57 0.24

Lav, nm nm nm nm nm

Total 97.0 95,7 4.5 41s 95,1

All analyses by X-ray fluorescence.

nm = not mensured,

in support of the apparent chemical distine-

tion,

Potassium-argon isotope determinations on

samples of the basalt in Gemini No. 1 re-

sulted in inconchisive age data due to irre-

producible potassium and argon analyses on

hand-picked basalt fragments’,

The available stratigraphic information indi-

cates that the Mesozoic sediments overlying

the basalt are predominantly non-marite io

lacustrine in origin, but there is no unequi-

vocal evidence to suggest whether the basalt

was emplaced as a sill or extruded onfa an

existing landsurface, The occurrence of abun-

dant amygdales in the basalt fragments favours

the latter interpretation,

Rohertyan Na. |

Robertson No 1 was an exploration well

drilled by Allianee Oil Development N,1.,

north of Penola in the Otway Basin (Fig. 2).

Basic voleanie rocks underlying possible

Jurassic non-marine sediments assigned to the

Otway Group were intersected hetween 1765 m

ahd the bottom of the hole at (800 m, and a

single core was drilled in this Interval between

1782-1785 m, The volcanics were identified

petrologically as trachyte containing abundant

feldspar (dominantly sodic plagioclase), to-

vether with minor hypersthene and quartz,

X-ray Huorescene analyses af twa samples of

the rock selected from the drill-core are given

in Table 6 and confirm its identilication. The

trachyte js thought ta be of Jurassic age

(Wop!ner ef al, 1971), but is not related 10

the suite of thelentic magmas represented in

South Australia by the Wisanger Basalt

Basaltic rocks, also of Jurassic age. are

associated with non-marine sediments in the

lower part of the Otway Group in Casterton

No. | drilled by Planet Exploration Company

in the Otway Basin in western Victoria (Cun-

dill 19687). Trachytic and basaltic rocks of

similar age crop out in the Casterton area

(Fullarton & Tattam 1976) and also in the

Woolsthorpe-Hawksdale area further to the

southeast (Pig. 2). The compositions of these

rocks suggest an origin from alkali-olivine

magmas, but a hypersthene basalt with tho-

leiitic affinities has been reported east of

Casterton, (Fullarton & Tattam 1976),

Regional interpretation

The occurrence of basic igneous rocks of

Mesozoic age along the southern continental

margin of Australia, especially rocks such as

the Wisanger Basalt which have genetic

affinities with the tholeiilic Tasmanian dole-

rites, is believed to reflect widespread igneous

activity in response ta the tension within

Gondwanaland which altimately led to the

separation of the Australian and Antarctic

continental blocks. Tt was al ahoul this time,

in the Early Jurassic. that the intracratonic

Polda and Otway Basins developed os sites of

active non-marine sedimentation (Wopfner

1972), The continuation of sedimentation

alter extrusion of the volcanics provided a

thick sequence of Jurassic sediments in both

® Alliance Oil Development Australia N.L.. (1967).

Robertson No. 1—Well completion report Cin

published),

TCundill, FR. (1968). Casterion No, 1|—Well

completion report. Planet Exploration Co, (un-

published).

12 A, KR. MILNES, B,J, COOPER & J. A. COOPER

basins, which lends credence to our stigvestion

thal the Wisanger Basall also had a sedimene

tary cover. This would bave been eroded dur-

ing the major disruption and uplift ex-

perienced by the Mt Lofty Ranges fold belt

{including Kangaroo Island) in the Tertiary

ind Quaternary, Late Jurassic non-marine

sediments might still remain on Kangaroo

Island and Fleurieu Peninsula, but ure oot

yet differentiated from the Late Palaeozoic or

Camozoic sedimentary sequences,

Conclusions

‘The Wisunwer Basall constitutes an interest.

ing petrological problem from the viewpoint

of the origin of the Mesozoic tholciitic basalt

magmas emplaced or extruded along the

southern margin of Australia during the

mitial fragmentation of Gondwanaland. The

reconnaissance petrological, yeochemical and

strontium isotope data we have presented in-

theales that [he basall is variable in character,

seciny to be related to the Tasmanian type

Gondwana dolerites, and has significant late-

stage silica in ils rapidly cooled basal con-

tact zone. The origin of the silica is important

because of its Contribution to the major oxide

composition of the basalt, and hence to ils

tholeiitic status. OF equivalent interest, how-

ever are the geological and geomorpholoyical

relationships wl the basalt, especially with

regard to the indentification of levching and

kaolimisition of pre-basalt age. It is also pos-

sible ta speewate on an Karly Mesozoic ase

for the distinctive weathered fluviatile sedi-

menis that occur immediately beneath the

basall und overlie the Late Palacozoic Cape

Jervis Beds. Nevertheless, (he importance of

the Wisanger Hasalt lies in its value as a time-

steatigraphic marker between the Late Palaeo-

zoic and’ the Tertiary im the local region of

South Australia soath of Adelaide.

Acknowledgments

We thank Richard May for the X-ray

Nuorescence unalyses, i Bruee for the iso-

lopie analyses, John Coppi tor the photo-

graphic prints, and G, Blackiirn, B, Daily and

K.P, Bourrman for construerve eritiewm of the

manuscript. Mups and dingraimns were prepared

by the publications groups at CSIRO Division

of Sols and the Department of Mines &

Energy. Permission for I BoC, to publish was

Lranted by the Director-General of the Depart-

ment of Mines & Energy. South Australia.

References

Brown, H, Y, b, (1898) Kangaroo Isiand. Report

by the Government Geologist, Parl Pap.

1898/36,

Compston, W. MeDoucatt, | & Hew, KS,

(1968) Geochemical compurison of the Mesa-

zoic basaltic rocks of Antarctica, South Africa,

South America and Tasmania. Geoehim.

Cosmochim. eta 32, 129-149_

Cooprk, B. J, & Linpsay, J, M. (1978) Marine

entrance to the Cainozoic St. Vineent Fasin,

Quart. geol. Nate, Geol, Surv. 8. Auyi, @7, 4-t.

Dar, B. Twibare, ©, Ry, & Minnis. A, R.

(1974) The age of the laterized summit surface

on Kanguroo Island and adjacent areas al South

Australia. J. geol, Sac. Anst. 21, 387-392,

——, Mines, A, R,, TwindLe, C, Ro & BOURNE,

‘A. (1979) Geology and geomorphology. fr

Tyler. M. 4, ‘Twidale, C. Ro & Ling J. BR.

| Eds), ‘Natural History of Kangaroo Island’

Chap. 1 (Royal Society of South Australint

Adelaide}

Enwarns, A, B.

in Wester Austrilin. J. R, Soe, WF.

1-12.

Evuoer, BD. WH (1972) Major oxide chemisity of

the Kirkpatrick basalt, central Transantarctic

(L938) Tertiary tholeitic mazma

Aust, 24,

Mountains. fa Adie, R. J. (Ed.y, *Antaretic

ceology and geajhysies,” 4139-418, (Upiversi-

tuisfurlugel: Oslo),

Furwtis, B, G, )

volcanism in South Austeatia.

Soe. Aunt. J, 127-132.

(1969) A review of Pirinenoznic

Syeey Pulls vert

FULLARTON. DLJ, & Tariaow, ©, M, (1976) Vol-

cunies of the Dundas ‘Pableland. gn Doulas,

J, G. & Ferguson, J. A. (Rds), ‘Geology af Vic

bari Chap, 11, Geol see. Aust. Spec. Pub,

(5).

Grarsssei, MF. & Wane, M, (1958) The St

Vincent Busine dt Glaessners M2 F & Parkin,

|. W | Bads), ‘The Geology ot South Australia’

J. Geal Soc. Aust, 5, 015-126,

Guns, A.M, (1986) Mrdal and element variation

We Anturetic hat oot Geochim. Cagmoelim.

dtuns Sh, KRI-8

Howey, W. (sou) Noies on the geology of

Kangaroo Ishand, with speeu! reference to evi-

dences of eatinet phicial action, Lrans, Ro Soc,

S. Aush 23, (98-207.

——, (1903) Piurther nes on the geology of

Kangaroo tslund. ile 27, 75-90-

Jack, R. 1. (1912) Cine. lind cement io, Sourh

Australia. Geol, Sare, Ausr, Bull.

Torun, Gi. A. (1964) ‘A pelrography of rene

lian fereuus racks.” (Aneus & Robertson:

Svdnev),

Lomerock, NH. (1967) Permian deposits of

Soimh Australia and their fiuna. Tian R Soe.

Aiist. 9b, B5-87.

MEbioned b. 1. (1961) Determination of the age

of a baste jemenus intrusign by ihe polassium-

argon roelhiod, Matwee 190, 1184-1186,

- (1962) Differenriation of the Tasmunien

dalerites: Red Mill dolevire-granophyre wssocia-

tion, Geol See. Aimer Bull TA, 279-316

THE JURASSIC WISANGER BASALT OF KANGAROO ISLAND, S.A. 13

, (1964) Differentiation of the Great Lake

dclerite sheet, Tasmania. J. geol. Soc. Aust. 2,

107-132,

& WELLMAN, P. (1976) Potassium-Argon

ages for some Australian Mesozoic igneous

rocks. Ibid 23, 1-9.

Mitnes, A. R., Compston, W. & Datty, B,.

(1977) Pre- to syn-tectonic emplacement of

Early Palaeozoic granites in southeastern South

Australia, [bid 24, 87-106.

Moutpen, J. C. (1895) Petrographical obserya-

tions upon some South Australian rocks, Trans.

R. Soc. §S, Aust, 19, 70-78.

Nortucore, K. H. (1979) Soils. In Tyler, M. J.,

Twidale, C, R. & Ling, J. K. (Eds). ‘Natural

History of Kangaroo Island,” Chap. 2. (Royal

Society of South Australia: Adelaide).

Scumipt, P. W., Curry, D. T. & OxvLter, C. D.

(1976) Sub-basaltic weathering, damsites,

palaeomagnetism, and the age of lateritization.

J. geol, Soc. Aust. 23, 367-370.

Sericc, R. C., CAMPANA, B. & KinG, D, (1954)

KINGSCOTE map sheet, Geological Atlas of

South Australia, 1:253 440 series, (Geol. Surv.

S. Aust.: Adelaide),

STANLEY, E. R. (1910) Enstatite basalt from Kan-

garoo Island, Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 34, 69-74.

Tate, R, (1883) The botany of Kangaroo Island,

Ibid 6, 116-171.

Tittey, C. E. (1921) A tholeiitic basalt from

eastern Kangaroo Island. [bid 45, 276-277.

Twipace, C. R. (1976) Geomorphological evolu-

tion. In Twidale, C. R., Tyler, M. J. & Webb,

B. P. (Eds) ‘Natural History of the Adelaide

region.’ Chap. 2. (Royal Society of South Aus-

tralia: Adelaide).

Woprner, H. (1972) Depositional history and

tectonics of South Australian sedimentary basins.

Min, Resour. Rev., S. Aust. 133, 32-50.

KeNLeEY, P. R. & THoRNTON, R. C. N.

(1971) Hydrocarbon occurrences and potential

of the Otway Basin. Jn Wopfner, H. & Douglas,

J. G. (Eds). ‘The Otway Basin of southeastern

Australia,’ Spee. Bull, Geol. Survs S. Aust., Vic.

385-435,

A NEW SPECIES OF DIPLODACTYLUS (REPTILIA: GEKKONIDAE)

FROM THE ALLIGATOR RIVERS REGION, NORTHERN TERRITORY

BY MAX KING, RICHARD W. BRAITHWAITE & JOHN C. WOMBEY

Summary

A previously undetected diplodactyline gekko which lives in a specialized habitat in Northern

Australia is here described as Diplodactylus occultus sp. nov. Details of chromosome morphology

and habitat are provided.

A NEW SPECIES OF DIPLODACTYLUS (REPTILIA:GEKKONIDAE)

FROM THE ALLIGATOR RIVERS REGION, NORTHERN TERRITORY

by Max KinGc}{, RICHARD W. BRAITHWAITE* & JOHN C. WOMBEY**

Summary

Kinc, M., BRAITHWAITE, R, W. & WompBey, J. C. (1982). A new species of Diplodactylus

(Reptilia:Gekkonidae) from the Alligator Rivers Region, Northern Territory. Trans. R.

Soc. S. Aust. 106(1), 15-18, 30 June, 1982.

A previously undetected diplodactyline gekko which lives in a specialized habitat in

Northern Australia is here described as Diplodactylus occultus sp. nov. Details of chromo-

some morphology and habitat are provided.

Key Worps: Reptilia, Gekkonidae,

phology, habitat.

Introduction

The Alligator Rivers Region of tropical

northern Australia has received considerable

attention from biologists over the past decade.

The climate of this region is extreme, being

characterized by an intense monsoonal wet

season of about four months duration (Decem-

ber-March), followed by a dry season with

almost no rain. The mean annual rainfall is

approximately 1300 mm. The area is also

geographically diverse, consisting of a heavily

dissected and uplifted sandstone plateau which

terminates at an escarpment on the edge of an

extensive coastal plain (over 100 km wide).

A. series of sandstone massifs also occur as

outliers of the plateau on the plain. A series

of large rivers arise in the sandstone country

and cut across the coastal plain, which is itself

composed of a series of soil and vegetational

zones (Story et al. 1969), The higher areas

between the rivers and associated flood plains

are largely covered with low woodland.

Recent biological surveys have shown that a

number of vertebrate species are endemic to

this region, many being restricted in their dis-

tribution to the escarpment and its outliers.

Amongst the reptiles, Python oenpelliensis

Gow, Ctenotus arnhemensis Storr, and a series

of gekkonids (Pseudothecadactylus lindneri

Cogger, Gehyra pamela King, and an unde-

scribed Oedura) occur on the Arnhem Land

escarpment.

+ Department of Population Biology, Research

School of Biological Sciences, Australian

National University, P.O, Box 475, Canberra

City, A.C.T. 2601.

* CSIRO, Division of Wildlife Research, Winel-

lie, N.T.

** CSIRO, Division of Wildlife Research, Lyne-

ham, A.C.T.

Diplodactylus, New species, Chromosome mor-

The present paper describes a new species

of ground-dwelling diplodactyline gekko re-

cently collected in the woodlands of the West

Alligator-Wildman Rivers area during the

CSIRO Kakadu faunal survey.

Materials and Methods

Three specimens of the undescribed Diplo-

dactylus species were found at two localities.

They have been deposited in the CSIRO Aus-

tralian Wildlife Collection, Canberra.

Measurements were made using micrometer

adjusted callipers and a steel rule. Two speci-

mens were analysed chromosomally using the

techniques described by King & Rofe (1976).

Diplodactylus occultus sp. nov.

Holotype: CSIRO Australian Wildlife Collec-

tion, R3436, an adult male collected on 11-.viii.

1981 by R. W. Braithwaite at 12°34'°05"S,

132°18'30"E, Alligator Rivers Region, Nor-

thern Territory.

Paratypes: R3437, an immature male collected

with the holotype by R. W. Braithwaite;

R3363, an adult male collected at 12°40'30"S,

132°00'00"E Alligator Rivers Region, N.T. on

14.x.1980 by R. W. Braithwaite.

Diagnosis: A small, relatively erect, terrestrial

gekko with a long, thin body and a tapered,

round tail. Limbs are of moderate length with

long thin toes. The deep, short-snouted head

and body have a very characteristic colour

pattern (Fig. la).

Diplodactylus occultus sp. nov. is most simi-

lar in its morphological characteristics to the

species of the D. stenodactylus complex (sensu

Kluge 1967). This complex includes D. steno-

dactylus Boulenger, D. maini Kluge, D.

damaeus (Lucas & Frost), D. alboguttatus

Werner, D. squarrosus Kluge, D. fulleri Storr

and D. wombeyi Storr. D. occultus is distin-

M. KING, R. W. BRAITHWAITE & J. C. WOMBEY

Fig. 1. Diplodactylus oecultus holotype, a, Dorso-lateral view showing characteristic mark-

ings. Bar scale = 1 cm. b, Face showing markings and scalation. c, Chin showing scala-

tion. d, Right hind foot showing characteristic subdigital scalation. e, Lateral view showing

three white postanal tubercles. f, Lateral view of head showing scalation and markings.

NEW SPECIES OF DIPLODACTYLUS \7

guished from the above by its unusual back

pattern and colouration, Ut is also distinguished

by its subdigital lamellae which ace generally

rectangular following two moderately dilated

subapical plates, Other stenodactylus group

species generally have small granular sub-

divital lamellae.

Description of Holotype: Head 6.6 mm wide,

5.5 mm deep and 9.7 mm from tip of the

snout to anterior margin of ear opening. Snout

4.1 mm long from tip of rostral scale to

anterior margin of orbit. Nostrils separated

by (Wo large internusals, Each nostcil sur-

rounded by first labial, internasal, a supra-

nasal and five small round posterior nasals.

Rostral scale not in contact with nasal aper-

ture; oblong (1.6 mm wide, 0.8 mm high) and

divided by au distinct median groove (Fig,

[b), Two large internasals surmounted by

large median supranasal and two and three

smaller supranasals. Ten distinct stupralabials

and 10 infralabials on cach edge of mouth.

Mental scale large, rounded and spade shaped

(1.8 mm wide, 1.5 mm long) (Pig. te). First

infralabial directly adjacent to mental much

larger than remaining infralabials (Fig. 1f).

Three small, round postmental scales, Inter-

orbital scale count, mecluding scales on top

of eyelid 41,

Body (snout-vent length 40 mm), There are

135 rows of scales around body, Dorsal scales

round and granular, ventral scales flatter und

slighlly farger.

Limbs relatively long: right forelimb 14.1

mm and right fourth finger length 2.7 mm:

right hindlimb 17.7 mm and right fourth toc

lengih 3.7 mm, Toes terminate in claw lodged

between two moderately expanded apical

plates. Apical plates on fourth toe followed

by three pairs small round subdigital Jametilae

and by fine larger rectangular subdivital

lamellae (Pig. 1d).

Two distinet postanal tubercles on each side

of tail base, directly behind hind legs (Fig,

le). Tail thin, round in section, 34 mm long

and tapers (o point.

Colouration and dorsal pattern distinctive

in file, Face and lop of head reddish-brown.

Supraocular scales forming oyelid eream

coloured as is rostral, both internasals and

median supranasal scales, Dark brown patches

on cither side of face and reddish brown line

from nostril to each orbit. Dark brown bar

extends [rom posterior margin of orbit,

through ear area, und in are around back of

head to other side (Fig, 1f), This dark colour

borders reddish-brown top of head, Supra-

labigls and infralabials white as is throat and

abdomen (Fig. 1f). Dorsal surface of body

has four large and roughly square light brown

areas spaced along back. Each of these lighter

areas separated by a band of dark brown

which forms backgraund colour, A number of

distinct white spots scattered along sides, back

legs and tail. Tail and legs mottled red-brown

and dark brown (Fig. 1a).

TaaLe t, Summary of the morphametric characteristics of Diplodactylus sp. nav-

R3436

Character R3363 holory pe R3437

Snoul-venl length (mm) 41.0 40.0 32)

Tail length (rn) 32.0 34.0 315

Right hind limb length (rim) 18.5 17.7 14,5

Right. 4th toe length (mm) 4,2 a7 a5

Right front limb Jength (inn) 43 It 10.5

Right 4th finger length (men) 3,3 2,7 2.6

Head length (mm) Wh} 9,7 7.7

Head depth (mim) 57 5.5 did

Head width (mm) 8.0 6.6 5.6

Snout. length (mm) 5) 4 34

Bye diameter (mm) 2.9 a7 2.7

Rostral width (mm) 20 16 Ww

Rostral height (min) 1.0 0.8 0.7

Mental width (rn) 1.5 18 1.5

Mental length (mm) i) 1.3 {2

Number of postunal tubercles 2.1 2.2 1,1

Number of interarbitals 4) al 42

Number of midbady seales 133 38 136

Number of supralabials 11 iu TD

Number of infralabials 3 tt) tw

Number of subdigital lamellae 15 12 \4

18 M, KING, R. W. BRAITHWAITE & J.C. WOMBEY

Variaiton: Variation in measurements between

the three male specimens of D. occultus is

shown in Table 1. But for relative size, the

three specimens are very similar im their scala-

tion and general morphology, One of the few

differences in sealation is seen in the scales

surrounding the nostril in R3437,. In this

specimen the rostral makes contact with the

nasal aperture, so that the nostril is surrounded

by the first supralabial, rostral internasal,

supranasal and six posterior nasals,

Preanal pores were not observed in any

of the specimens.

The colouration and back pattern is rela-

lively similar. Ta R3363 there are four dis-

tinct and roughly square red-brown patches

down the back, whereas there are five such

patches in R3437 and four (two of which

have coulesced) in the holotype.

Chromosomes; The two specimens of JD.

occultuy karyotyped had 2n = 38 all acro-

centric chromosomes present. The karyotype

exhibited a gradual diminution in size from

the largest to the smallest elements. This

chromosome morphology is characteristic of

most Diplodactylay species and is believed to

be the ancestral state in this group (King

1977, 1981), Members of the stenodactylus

species complex to which this form is closely

allied also share this characteristic chromosome

morphology (King unpublished data).

Etymology; The specific name is the Latin ad-

jective oceultus, meaning hidden or secretive

and alludes to the species’ use of a micro-

habitat with a dense understory.

Distribution and Habitat

The vegetation of both localities is mixed

Eucalyptus woodland. The first is west of the

Wildman River with vegetation in four strata:

22,9% projective foliage cover at 8 m, 1.5%

at 5 m, 2.9% at 1.5 m, and 55.5% at 0.5 m,

in March 1981, The second locality is on

Kapalga Station (CSIRO Research Station)

and the vegetation structure was again in four

strata: 3.6% projective foliage coyer at 12 m,

1.8% at 6 m, 33.0% at 3 m, and 44.5% ai

1 om. At both localities the specimens were

encountered jn situations where they were

concealed under grass cover and abundant

litter,

Acknowledgments

R, W. B. and J. C. W. gratefully acknow-

ledge the financial support of the Australian

National Parks and Wildlife Service through

the Kakadu fauna survey consultancy agree-

ments.

References

Kine, M. (1977) Chromosomal and morpho-

metric yariation in the gekko Diploduciylus vit

tatus Gray, Aust, J, Zool. 25, 43-57.

(1981) “Chromosome Change and Speeu-

tion in Lizards” in W. Atchley & D. Woodruff,

(Fds)) “Evolution and Speciation.” (Cambridge

University Press, pp. 262-286.

, & Rorge, R. (1976) Karyotypic variation in

the Australian gekko Phyvllodactylus marma-

ratus (Gray) (Gekkonidae: Reptilia), Chroma-

youn (Berl) 54, 75-87.

Kiucr, A. G, (1967) Systematics, phylogeny, and

zoogeoeraphy of the lizard genus Diplodactvluy

Gray (Gekkonidae). Aust. J. Zeal. 18, 1007-

1108.

Srory, R.. Wittiams. M, A.T., Hoover, A.D, L..

O'FERRALL, R. E. & MCALPINE, J, R, (1969)

Lands of the Adelaice-Alligator Rivers area,

Northern Territory. Land Res. Ser. (25).

C.S,LR.O., Melbourne,

SOME ACUARINE (NEMATODA) FROM AUSTRALIAN BIRDS

BY PATRICIA M. MAWSON

Summary

Two new genera are proposed: Wilmottia, for W. australis n.sp., from Malurus cyaneus, is

distinguished by the presence of recurrent, non-anastomosing, symmetrical cordons and four

longitudinal symmetrical rows of body spines extending from the post-cordal cervical papillae to

the tail; Xenocordon, proposed for X. patonae n.sp., is distinguished from Cheilospirura by the

complex structure of the cordons and the shape of the female tail, and from Synhimantus

(Dispharynx) podargi from Podargus strigoides, S. (D.) lichenostomi from Lichenostomus

penicillatus, S. (D.) falco from Falco berigora and Phylidonytis novaehollandiae.

SOME ACUARIINAE (NEMATODA) FROM AUSTRALIAN BIRDS

by ParriciA M. Mawson”

Summary

Mawson, P. M. (1982) Same Acuariinae (Nematoda) from Australian birds. Trans. R. Sac.

S. Aust, 106(1), 19-30, 30 June, 1952.

Two new genera ure proposed: Willmoartia, for HW’. ausiralis sp., fram Malnrus cvarens,

is distinguished by the presence of recurrenl, non-anastomosing, symmetrical cordons und

four longitudinal symmetrical rows of body spines extending from the post-cordal cervical

papillae to the tail; Yenecerden, proposed for A. putanue n.sp., is distinguished from Cheilo-

spirura by the complex structure of the cordons and the shape of the feraale tail, and from

Synhimantuy by the cordon puittern and the presence of extra scales on the cordons, Other

new species proposed are Synhimaniis (Dispharynx) podargi from Podargus strigoides, S.

(D.) lichenostami trom Liehenostomus penicillaius, 8, (DJ falea from Faléo herivera and

Phylidonyris novaehallandiae,

The followint species are recorded, wit) some redeseription: Synhimanras (Synhimantus}

liticeps (Rud.) from Nivev novueseelumliac, S, (8) sirey Khalil syn. Dispharyine pelecani

lolnston & Mawson from Pelecanus conspicillans; Syncuaria contwra (Molin) from Tires-

kivrnix wethiopica, Cheilespirura gruveli (Genure) from Coturnix ypsilaphora.

Syncuaria sp. as recorded from Podiceps cristatus, Type material of Synhtmantus (Dis

pharvas) feldine’ (Baylis) has been examined and w figure of the anterior end is give.

The presence of Iwo groups among species generally attributed 10 Cheilospirura, one of

them with close resemblances to Synhimarnius in the character of the deirids, detail of

cordon structive, and shape of fomale tail, 15 noted and. discussed.

Key Worps: Nematoda, Acuariioac, taxonomy, bird hosts, cordon structure.

Introduction

Examination of Acuariinae from birds dis-

sected in the past 15 years has yielded some

new species, two new genera and recards of

other species not hitherto known Tram Austra-

lian birds. Classification of the Acuariinae in

the past depended largely on the pattern made

by the cordons on the surface of the apterior

end of the body. In the present work, iL is pro-

posed that the detail of the structure of the

cordons may also be of taxonomic importance.

The points noted below, in discussion of (he

cordons of Cheilospirura and Synrhierentus,

should be studied over a wider geographical

range and in many more species, than has been

possible in the present paper.

Materials and Methods

Holotypes and allotypes have been deposited

in the South Australian Museum (SAM) and

other material in the Australian Helmintho-

logical Collection (AHC), at present housed

in the South Australian Museum.

The nomenclature of the bird hasts follows

that adopted by the R.A.O.L), (Sehodde ef ul.,

1978).

*South Ausiralitm Museum, North Terrace.

Adelaide, 5, Aust. 5000

Measurements on the buccal capsule and

parts of the oesophagus are taken from the

anterior end of the worm to the posterior end

af the organ concerned, The photomicrograph

was taken by the E/T.E.C. Autoscan in the

Central Electron Optical Laboratory of the

University of Adelaide.

Syneuaria contorta (Molin. 1858)

FIGS 1-4

Host and localities: Threskiornis aethiopica

(Lathom), from Blanchetown, Tailem Bend,

and Robe, 8. Aust. and from Victoria,

Measurements of the single male worm [ram

Victoria are viven in parentheses. Long slender

worms 14.5-17.5 mm. Cordons wide, strongly

striated, reaching to 550-660 (700) jm fram

head in male, 860-900 ,.m in female, Cervical

papillac undivided, just posterior to cordons,

Exeretory pore at about midlength of cordon

length. Buceal capsule 220-290 (190) jum in

male. 270-290 jm in female. Distance of pos-

terior end of muscular oesophagus from

anterior end of body 900-970 (—) jam in

male, 1070-1450 ,m in female. End of glan-

dilor Ocsophagus not clear ia any specimen

Posterior cad of male alate and twisted as in

other species of the genus; four pairs precloacal

and five pairs postcloacal pendunculate papillae

20 PATRICIA M. MAWSON

300 um

Figs 1-4. Syncuaria contorta. 1, anterior end of male, 2, posterior end of male. 3, posterior end of

female 4, egg.

Fig. 5. Syneuaria sp. from Podiceps cristatus, posterior end of female.

Figs 6-9. Cheilospirura gruveli. 6, anterior end of male. 7, part of cuticle, showing annuli and cor-

don structure. 8, posterior end of male. 9, tail of female.

Figs 10-13. Synhimantus laticeps. 10, anterior end of female. 1, posterior end of male. 12, tail of

female. 13, part of a cordon.

Figs 1-3, 9-12 to same scale; figs 4 and 13 to same scale: figs 6 and 8 to same scale.

ACUARIINAE FROM

in alae, one pair sessile papillae ventrally near

tip of tail. Left spicule 450-500 (450) um long,

proximal and slightly enlarged, ‘hilt about

150 ym long, tip bluntly pointed. Right spicule

180-190 (190) ,.m long, stoutly built and blunt

tipped.

Body of female sharply flexed and markedly

narrowed just behind anus, giving the appear-

ance of terminal anus described by some

authors. Tail 90-95 ,m long, vulva 170-180

ym in front of anus, Uterus apparently single.

Eggs 20-22 25-30 pm, with very thick

shells and flat polar plugs at each end.

In Syncuaria the only species for which a

dorsally directed tail has been described are

from ibis and spoonbills. The specimens

described above differ from S. diacantha

Petter 1961, from a spoonbill, chiefly in the

spicule ratio. The two species from ibis, 5.

contorta (Molin, 1958) from Italy, and 8.

calcarata (Molin, 1860) from Brazil, are

insufficiently described for proper comparison.

From the figures given by Cram (1927) after

Drasche, the proportions of S. contorta appear

comparable with those of the Australian speci-

mens. The cordons are wider than in Drasche’s

figure, but this is possibly a matter of interpre-

tation.

Syncuaria sp.

FIG. 5

Host and locality: Podiceps cristatus L., from

Canberra, A.C.T.

Only one female, with damaged anterior end,

is present. It is 16.9 mm long. The anterior

cuticle is broken, but the shape of the cordons

shows that the species belongs to the genus

Syneuaria, Cervical papillae undivided. Tail

conical, 230 ym long; vulva 450 jm from tip

of tail. Eggs 31-33 X 20-22 ym; thick-shelled

polar openings present but not as obvious as

in eggs of S. contorta described above.

S. decorata Cram 1927, and S. longialula

Wang, 1976 have been described from Podi-

ceps spp., but the single female present now

cannot be properly compared with these.

Remarks on Cheilospirura and Synhimantus

Although according to the keys given by

various authors, notably and most recently by

Chabaud (1975), the genera of Acuariinae

are clear and definite, in practice there are

some difficulties in relying mainly on the pat-

tern made by the cordons. Among the speci-

mens described below, there are some which

suggest that the distinction between genera (or

at least, between sub-genera) may need to be

AUSTRALIAN BIRDS 21

carried further, and may rest partly on the

type of cordon: whether it is simple or com-

plex in structure.

Cheilospirura gruveli (Gendre) identified

and described below from an Australian

phasianid bird, is the only species of this genus

of which I have seen good specimens. C.

hamulosa (Diesing, 1851), the type species,

has only been identified in Australia once to

my knowledge. Three females held by the

Commonwealth Institute of Health (University

of Sydney), identified by Baylis as C. hamu-

losa. are in too poor a condition for study of the

cordons. However from a study of C. gruveli

and of available literature on other species, it

seems that Cheilospirura species are charac-

terised by the cordon pattern, the simple struc-

ture of the cordons (as described below for C.

gruveli), the digitiform tail of the female, the

simple deirids lying at or in front of the nerve

ring, the strongly annulate cuticle (in all these

points similar to Acuaria), and by the unequal

and dissimilar spicules.

In Synhimantus the deirids lie well behind

the nerve ring, the tail of the female is conical,

and the spicules are unequal and dissimilar. In

all the species of Synhimantus seen by me, the

cuticular annuli are distinctly closer together

and less marked than those of Cheilospirura

gruveli; in S, (Dispharynx) species annuli are

absent from the anterior end of the body as

far back as the cordons extend: in §. (S.)

laticeps and S. sirry Khalil, the only species of

the subgenus which I have seen, there are fine

striae between the cordons.

The cordon structure in the Synhimantus

species which I have seen differs markedly

from that described above for Cheilospirure.

The whole cordon is raised above the level of

the rest of the body surface (Fig, 41). Each

cordon consists of two longitudinal sections

separated by a groove. Inglis (1965) points

out that one of these sections arises from the

outer surface of the pseudolabium, the other

from the inner surface, The outer half-cordon

is formed of a series of plates one behind the

other, the inner half is mammillated, (Figs 13,

15, 19, 23, 28, 34. 41). The size of the plates

and width of each half-cordon varies from

species to species, but the basic structure is the

same in all. The plates may partly overlie the

groove.

There are several species at present assigned

to Cheilospirura in which the tail is conical,

and in these if the cordon structure is

described or figured, it seems to be complex.

22 PATRICIA M. MAWSON

200 um

1woOum

Figs 14-17, Synhimantus (Synhimantus) sirry. 14, anterior end of male. Fig. 15, part of cordon. 16,

posterior end of male, 17, tail of female.

Figs 18-21, Sythimanius (Dispharynx) pedargi. 18, anterior end of male. Fig. 19, part of a cordon.

20, posterior end of male. 21, tip of right spicule. Figs 14 and 18 to same scale; figs 15 and

19 to same scale.

Further study of these species may show that

they should belong in another genus.

At present Synhimantus is composed of

species of Acuariinae in which the cordons

arise simply (i.e. without a loop), are recur-

rent, and in which there is no other cuticular

development such as spines, swellings, or folds.

Two sub-genera have been proposed, (Syahi-

mantus) for species in which the cordons anas-

tomose, and (Dispharynx) for those in which

they do not. However, there is some variation

even among individuals of a species, as to the

ACUARTINAE FROM AUSTRALLAN BIRDS %

extent to which the cordons are recurrent (¢.2,

S. falco msp, or to which anastomosis

g¢tually occurs (eg. §. sirey, noted below).

lt may be necessary to erect another sub-

genous of Synhiniantus, to include species in

which the cordons are not recurrent or anas-

tomosing, but Which in characters of cordon

siruclure, deirics, and female tail agree with

Syeimantuys. Re-examination of Cheilospirura

fieldingi (lahnston & Mawson, 1941) shows

that the cordons are complex and the tail of

the female is canical, not digitiform, it is sug-

gested that other species which should be re-

examined are C. centrocerci Simon 1939, C.

plalacrocaracis, Smogorzheyskaya 1966, and

C. serpentocephala Gilbert 1913. Xenocordon

pdionde 16., T.Sp, described below, dilfers

from ©, fielding? (sie) (and from Syihimantus

spp.) in the detail of the cordon structure,

Cheilospirura eruveli (Gendre, 1913)

FIGS 6—9

Dixyphuragus greveli Gendre, 1913, p. 106,

from Francolinus bicalcaratus L., Dahomey,

Host and locality: Cotirnix ypsilaphora Bose

from Flinders 1,, Bass Strait.

Males 6.5-9.3 mm, females 19.6-21,.6 mim

in length, Cuticle coarsely annulated throagh-

out bady length, Cordons 440-740) pm long

in male, [040-1100 ym in female, reaching at

leyst to mid length af, and in some cases just

posterior to, the muscular oesophagus, Each

cordon cansists of two longitudinal rows of

plates, each pair of plates are alike, and

roughly, bat by no means exactly, correspond

to the adjacent cuticular annulus (Fig. 7). The

cordon itself ig not raised above the level of

the adjacent cuticle, This type of cordon js .also

present in Acuaria spp. (Gendre, 1912: Wil-

liams, 1929; Mawson, 1972); from infarmu-

tion given alt descriptions of figures, 1! appears

to be present in Cheilospirura gallinae Sul-

tanoy, 1961, C. rotundata (Linstow, 1907).

Huceal capsule Iength (60-190 jm in male,

200-240 jm in female.

Distance from anterior end of cervical papil-

lae 180-220 pm (#7), 220-250 (2); of

excretory pore 290-340 »m (4), 420-450 «um

(V)2 of nerve ting 195-250 pm (¢), 150-270

pint (?).

Postertar end of mule twisted, with wide

caudal alac, Number and orrangement of

papillae on male tail shown in Fig. 8, Left

spicule blunt tipped, 450-510 nm long, right

spicule 150-160 ym long, its sides turned in

to form a gutter. Spicule ratio 313.4.

Female with diguiform tad 190-200) ,m

long. Vulva in front of midlength, 38-49% of

body length from the head. Eggs +1-42 20

W1.

These specimens resemble 4, cotinicela

Semenov. 1926 and A. gruveli Gendre, 1913;

from the published measurements and descrip-

tions there is little to differentiate these two

species, especially as there appears to be ho

record of the female of A. coturnirola, The

new specimens have been wentified as C.

aruveli as thig Species has prionty, However,

the tail of the female differs very stightly from

that drawn by Gendre. and the eges are

longer, T have relied on Cram (1926) for a

descriplian of this species. as Gendre's paper

is unobtuinable in Australian Whraries,

Synhimantus (Syahimanius) laticeps

(Rudolphi, 1819)

FIGS 10-13

Most and locality: Niner navaeseeteradlue

Vigors & Horsfield, fram Adelaide. S. Aust.

The morphology and proportions of these

specimens agrees with those described for

Synhimarrus laticeps, which has not until now

heen recorded from Australian birds

Material consisis of one tale, 6.1 mm long,

and one female, 10.6 am. The measurements

of male and female respeetively ares cordon

length. 330, 400 jm: buceal capsule 180, 290

wm; muscular oesophagus 800, TI00 pn,

entire oesophagus 4.1, 3 mm; anterior end to

nerve ring 250, 350 ym; to trifid cervical

papillae 420, 450 pm, to exeretory pore 330,

350 ym; length of tail 350, 200 pm: of left

spicnle 600 am, of right spicule 150 jum,

Vulva 5.9 mm from head, about 58% al body

length; eggs 40 % 25 jam,

In these Specimens as in the figure of the

head by Schneider (reproduced by Cram 1927,

p. 276, fig. 341) there are fine outieulur striae

hetween the cordons, The cordon structure

(Fig. 13) is similar to that described above for

Syvehimantus (Dispharynx) spp.

Synhimantus (Svnhimanius) sivey Khalil, 1931

FIGS 14-|7

Synhimanius sirry Khalil, 1931, p, 455, from

Pelecanus enacrotalus, Egypt.

Dispharynx pelecani Johnston & Mawson,

1942. p. 185. from P. conspiciilarus, S. Aust

Host and localities. Pelecanity canypicillains

Temminck, from Queensland, and Vicioria-

The new specimens which agree otherwise

with the description of Pispharyna pelecant,

24 PATRICIA M, MAWSON

vary a$ to the state of the cordons. In some

the cordons unite completely, in athers the

recurrent branches remain distinctly separate,

and jin some the tips of the (Wo recurrent

branches approach cach other but do not

actually touch. It seems that there must be

some other eriterion or criteria on whith to

distinguish (Synhimanius) and (Disphurynx),

The only difference noted during this study

is that there are fine cuticular striae between

the cordons in (Sywhimantis) spp. but these

are not present in (Dispharynx), These are

present in material fram Australian pelicans.

Ip essentials, D, pelecan! is close to S. sirry';

the onty difference: is that the barb, present on

the tip of the left spicule, was not described

for S. yirey, bot as the spicule is inside the

body in the only male of S. sirry, it could

easily have been overlooked, In the light of

the new material, with its variable cordons, it

appears that DO. pelecani is a junior synonym

of S, siery.

The species is characterised by a long buccal

capsule, cordons reaching hardly further than

the nerve ring, with recurrent branches, snas-

lomosing of not, one third to one half the

cordon length; large tricuspid or bicuspid

cervical papillae lying well behind the cordon

in some cases at midlength of muscttlar ouse-

phagus: left spicule 270-410 ,m long. with

barbed tip, right spicule LOO-160 #m, and

spicule ratio 2.5 to 3.3; vulva 56-60% body

lenuth from head; eggs 37 * 25 ym (Khalil),

36 = 21 wm (Johnston & Mawson), 39 * 21

um (present material).

Synhimanius (Dispharynx) podargi n.sp.

FIGS {8-21

Host and localities: Padargus sirigoides

(Latham) from Callington (type locality) and

Adelaide, S, Aust,

Holotype male, 5.A.M. V3067.

Short worms, males only present, 7.0-0.3

mm long, with tail in single coil, Corndons

reach 450-700 pm from anterior end, recur-

rent a third to a half their length. Trifid cer

vical papillae 600-1000 ,m and excretory

pore 350-690 jam from anterior end, Buceal

Figs 22-26, Svehimantas (Dispharynx) falee. 22,

capsile 180-250 jum long, Muscular ocso-

phagus ends 810-1100 ,m, and glandulur

vesuphagus 2.5-3,8 mm, from anterior end of

body.

Tail 420-450 jm long, with marrow aluc.

Four pairs of peecloacul und five pairs of post

cloaca! pedunculated papillac, fifth postcloacul

Very short, and pair of sessile papillae between

this last pair, Left spicule slender, 610-630

wm long, its tip slightly enlarged and divided

into Wo spoonlike plates, fringed around free

edges, Right spictile 199-210 jm long. broad

with rounded tip. Spiewle mui 2.8-3,2 pm.

Cuticle just behind, and for some distance in

front of, cloaca pldged Jongitudinally,

This species lies close ia u group in which

the cordons ure shorter than the muscular

ocsophagus but extend well past the nerve

riny. the lip of the lef) spicule is simple, the

wpicule ratio is less than @.S, and the cervical

papillue lic behind the eordons. These species

all conte From birds of prey, (including owls

antl mehtyars) and appear to be distingswish-

able mainty by the length of the Jefe spicule

In 8. podargi this length is 600-630 am,

longer than that of §. (D,) neerae (Seurat.

1913), (260 em) S&. (D.) ecapitata (Molin,

1860) sensu Yamagutl, 1935 (450 »m) (not

Skrjabin, Soholev & Ivashkin, 1965), and §,

(D.) note® {Srith, 1927) (335 yim) but

shorier than that of 8, (2) ketnpae (Sanwal,

1951) (830 ym) and &. (.) indies (Rasheed.

1960) (950-1000 pam). §. (DL) pedarey is

distinguished from these species also by the

plates al the tp of the teft spicule.

Syohimantus (Dispharynx) falco np.

FIGS 22-26

Hosts and localilies: Faleo venehraides Vigors

& Horsfiehd (fype host) from Pt Turton, S.

Aust. FL berigora Vigors & Horstield. Crom

Rlanchetown, SS. Ausc. Phylidanyris trevee-

hellandiae (Latham) from near Goolwa, 3.

Aust.

Holotype of

V3071

The specimens from PAhyiidenyris (a honey-

eater) are in poor condition, the cuticle bene

SAM YV307U. Allotype ° SAM

unterior end of male. 23, part of uw cordon. 24,

posterior end of male, 25, right spicule 24, posterior end of female,

Figs 27-32, Synhimantas (OQ lichenesiom(. 27, antenor end of female. 20, part of a cordon, 29, and

30, Jateral and veniral views of posterior end of male, 41, mehr syeule, 92, dail ot female.

Figs 33-34, Synhimentuy (8) fielding’ 33. anterior end of male, drawn fram puratype immaterial. 34,

part of a cordon. Figs 22 and 33 to Same sciile; figs 23, 28 noe 34 lo same Seale} figs 25 and

31 to same scale; figs 27, 29 and 32 to same seule.

ACUARIINAE FROM AUSTRALIAN BIRDS 25

26 PATRICIA M. MAWSON

teluxed and easily broken; this state has the

appearance of being due to postmortem

changes, as all speciynens are well developed,

and the females full of firrmly-shelled embryo-

nated eggs. Measurements of these specimens

art given in brickets after those of type speci-

mers.

Length of males 5.0-6.5 (7.7-7.9) mm, of

females 62-72 (10.6) mm; cordons almost

straight to posterior loop, extending 550-630

(500-600) pm in the males and 750-900

(950) yim in females fron anterior end, recur-

rent part varying in length from barely per-

ceplible fo 200 pm, Excretory pore ani cervi-

cal papillae at almost same. level, at distance

from anterior end of 420-560 pn in male and

600-700 pm in female, Cervical papillac

hook-like in profile but have two small. lateral

cusps, Buceal capsule 140-150 (130-170) pm

in male, 160-200 (180) wm in female; most

twisted jn some degree, some too much far

acclirate Measurement.

Muscular ocsophagus teaches about level of

cordons in males, shorter than vordons i

females, its length 500-610 (640) pm in

mites, SOO-800 (730) ym in females, Tolal

length of oesophagus 2300-3300 ,»m in males.

2400-3200 yim in females, about $ ar 2/3

body length,

Male; Caudal alac not well developed: ver-

tral cuticle in preanal region somewhat inflated

and marked with short longitudinal <triac-

Four pairs pedanculated papillae preanally,

and five pairs postanally arranged as shown in

Fig. 20, as well as one pair sessile papillae and

au pair of phasmids at about level of most

posterior pedunculate papilla, Left spicule

680-800 (760-850) jam long, of which aboul

1/3 is hiltt Gp of spicule with dorsally directed

barb. Right spicule 190-210 (230-300) pr

lang. its terminal 20 ym narrowed but not

Iwisted. Spicule mug 34.0 (33-28) Tall

lengthy 180-200 (200) ym

Female: Tail rounded, anus abour 20-30

ym from apex. Vulva 17-2.) mim. or 25-1058

of body length from posterior end. Embryo-

nated epes 35 pm & 25-27 ,m.

The terminal barb of the left spicule is quire

distinct even whew not protruding outside the

heady, Other species for which such a barb has

heen deseribed are §, sirre Khalil, 1931 fsee

above) In Which the buccal capsule is almost

as l6ng as the cordons, and S. shviabini

Rasheed, (460, in which the valve ts very

close fo the anus, The only other species of

this subgenus deseribed from Australian birds

of prey is &. (D.) fieldivei Baylis, 1934, in

Which the spleule is Without a barb, the buceal

capsule is shorler and the muscular oesophagus

longer in relation to the vordon length than in

the species described here. The specimens from

Pivlidonyris ave longer and the spicules

slightly longer, but in details of the male tail

and of the sulerior end, there appears to be ne

doubt of their being the sume species,

Syohimantus (Dispharynx) lichenostomi n,sp,

PIGS 27-32

Hosts and Iocalities; Licheénestomus penicil-

lates (Gould) from St Peters S. Aust. Holo-

type J SAM V3068, Allotype F SAM V3069.

Meliphaga lewini? (Swainson) from Brisbane,

Qld (19).

These ate celatively small worms, the males

slightly longer than the females, more slender.

and With the posterior end In about two coils,

Length of males 7,7-85 mm. of fentales

71-8.0 mm. Female from L, Jewinii, 5.0

mm long, is paeked with unfertiised eges, and

measurements of this female are given in

brackels after those of olher femiules,

Curele finely annulate behind cordons,

Cordons wavy, reaching @ little more than 4

distance fram head to end of muscular ocso-

phagus, and four to five times length of buccal

capsule. Recurrent part of cordons about 2/3

the descending parts,

Cordon Jength In male 460-480 pm, in

females 330-600 (530) xm. recurrent part

220-300 yim im niales, 250-350 (200) ym in

fermales, Exeretory pore and bifid cervicol

papillae al same level 400-410 ym in males,

450-500 (340) »m in females, from anterior

vend of body.

Buccal capsule 100-110 jm long in males,

100-120 (100) ,m in fernales. Length of mus-

culir oesophagus 650-810 ym in males,

S00-000 (610) pm in females, Total length of

oesophagus 200-3100 jr in males, but net

noted in females as posterior end obscured by

epgs. Muscular part of uesophagus 650-810

wm in males, 8O0~900 (610) pm in females.

Distance from head of nerve ring 250-300 jum

in males, 320 (260) am in females,

Male: Coiled posterior end of body includes

all the postoesaphageal cogion. Ventral surface

o! postenor 7 mm of body. in front of cloaca,

thickened inte longiiudinal ridges. Cirticle

around tail and immediately anterior to cloaca

inflated, Four pairs pedunculate papillae pre-

anally, and five pairs postunally, as well as one

pir of sessile papillac near tip of tail between

ACUARIINAE FROM AUSTRALIAN BIRDS 2

filth pair of peduyneulated papillae, and behind

these a pair of phasniids. Left spicule 430-450

wn Jong, with hilt 130-160 jun, and with

simple tip, vight spieule 140-180 ,m long,

with slightly narrowed blunt tip, Spicule ratio

2.5-3.2, Tail length 420-480 jum.

Female: Tail 150-170 (120) xm long, more

or less conical in shape, with blunt lip. Vulva

posterior, at 44-76% of body length fram

anterior end. Eges 39-41 & 20 jum,

These Specimens belong to a group af | Pis-

pharynx) in which the body is short, the

Jomale tail more or tess conical, the male tail

coiled, and the buceal capsule short in relation

to lengths of cordons and muscular oeso-

phogus and fo head width. The species in this

group are (D.) nasufa (Rud. 1819), (Do)

paves, Sanwal, 1951, (D.) emberizae Yamea-

guli, 1935, (D,) pipilonis Olsen, 1939, and (B.)

sronae Harwood, 1933, The differences be-

tween these species are small, resting on

spicule lengths. shape of right spicules, and

number and arrangement of caudal papillae in

the male. However, withoul re-examination of

the types these differences cannot be properly

compared. There is also a wide geographical

aud host variation, Our specimens are there-

fore proposed as a new species.

Synhimaning (Dispharvns) fielding? (Baylis)

FIGS 33-34

syn, Acuaria (Dispharvinw) fielding? Baylis.

1934, p. 144, From Aecipiter novaehollan-

dige, Queensland

Cotypes of this species were deposited by

Baylis in what is now the Commonwealth

Instiiute of Heallh in the University of

Sydney, These have revenfly heen examined

for comparison with Syvithimunutiy — (Dis-

pharyex) falco nap. described below, Uh ts

unnecessary to amend the deseription given

by Buylis except te iterate that the tip of the

left spicule, though slightly curved dorsally.

does not have a barb us seen in that of 5.

falco, and in some other species. A figure of

the anterior end of the one of the specimens is

given. The corlen asffucture and cuticular

annul are typieal of the subgenus.

Xendcordan n.g,

Acuariime! Cordons not angstomosing, not

recurrent, cordon structure complex, with

scales over inner section of each cordon; cer-

vieal papillae well behind merve ring) Male:

four pairs precloacal and five pairs postcloacs|

papillae in caudal alae; left spicule longer than

right, tip slender; right spicule stout with

rounded tip: Female: tail conical, vulva ut

about |} hady length from head. Parasitic in

gizzard of Australian birds, Type species

Xenocordon paronae, sp.

Xenocerdon 1 Close to Syahiniantus, Crom

Which it is distinguished by the pattern of the

cordons aml the detail ot the cordon structure,

A species to be described by G. de Chanect

{in preparation) from Australia maxpies

(Craciicidae) alsa belongs to this genus (Fig

41). Cheilospirura flinders? Johnston & Maw-

son, Which was mentioned above as a variation

of Synhimanius, as the cordong are straight.

is not referred to Xerocordon because of the

detail af the cordon structure.

Xenocordon patenae ne, fsp.

FIGS 35-38

Host und Jocality: Phylidenyris neveelollan-

diae (Latham) from near Goolwa, S. Aust

Holotype 7 SAM V3065, Allolype 2 SAM

VA066,

Only one male $8.6 mm long and one female

44 mm long of this species are piesent.

Cordons, 800 ,m long in male, 1400 4m in

female, nol recutrent or adnustomosing.

Internal half of cordan mammillated, partly

overlain by series af thin oval scales, arranged

in a regular longitudinal row, external half

With series of wide, short, plates (Fig. 36).

Cuticle of anterior part af budy. im region of

cordons, not annulated, cuticle behind vordons

finely annulated,

Cervical pupillae bifid, 400 yan (3) and 690

yim (}) from anterior end, Exeretory pore

shortly behind these. Length of buccal eupsule

200 pm (a), 300 am (9), of muscular oeso-

phagus 1000 wm (c}, 1900 pm (%), and ot

glandular oesophagus 2600 pm (¢). 4300 pm

(2),

Lett spicule 1000 pm long, its tip simple:

right spicule 250 jm long, and spicule ratio 4.

Caudal alae with four pairs of precloucal and

five pairs postcloacal papillae; precloacal yen-

tral cuticle raised in broken ridges. Female

with conical tail 200 am tong, vulva 70% of

hody length from head. Eges numerous, about

40 “ 20 win.

These two specimens were taken from the

sume host individual as those identificd ahove

as Svuhimantus (Dispharynx) falco nsp. They

differ distinctly from 8, falee, not only in the

nonrecurrent form of the cordans, and their

detailed structure, but also in the length of

the buccal capsule, the shape of the muscular

oesophagus (Pigs 22, 35). the position of the

200 um

[VIVE RSet

rere

Wey ay

PATRICIA M. MAWSON

5Qum

‘

Figs 35-38, Xenocordon patonae. 35, anterior end of male, ventral view. 36, part of one cordon, with

lateral aspect to right of figure. 37, posterior end of male. 38, tail of female.

Figs 39-40, Willmoittia australis, 39, anterior end of female, 40, tail of female. Figs 36 and 37 to

same scale.

cervical papillae and exeretory pore, the

absence of a barb on the tip of the left spicule,

and the shape of the tail of the female (Figs

26, 38).

Willmottia n.g.

Acuarimae: Short worms, cordon symmetrical

recurrent, nol anaslomosing, two pairs of rows

of sublateral hooks on each side of the body,

from cervical papillae to tail; vulva at about

two-thirds body length from posterior end,

Male unknown, Parasitic in birds. Named for

Dr Sheila Willmott. Type species: Wil/motria

australis Tsp.

Willmettia is perhaps closest to Eehinuria

in the presence of longitudinal rows of hooks

on the body, but differs from this genus in

that the cordons are recurrent and do not

anustomose, and both hooks and cordons are

symmetrically arranged. It differs fram Chor-

danecephalus in the absence of anastomosis,

in the nature of the lateral “hooks”, and jn

the more forward position of the vulva,

Willmottia australis n.g., n.sp;

FIGS 39, 40

Host und locality; Malurus cyaneus Latham,

from Lilydale, Tas. Holotype female SAM

V3072, 29 in A.H.C.

Short straight worms, 1600-1700 ,m long,

widening to posterior quarter of body length,

narrowing suddenly just anterior to anus, end-

ing in short conical tail. Body slightly widened

by ring of thickened cuticle at level of cervical

pupillae, just belaw ends of cordons.

Cordons extend 130-150 ,m from anterior

end, with recurrent ends 20-30 4m, not anas-

tomosing. Cervical papillae digitiform, 160-

165 ym from head, Two rows of hooks on

each side of body extend from level of cervical

papillae to tail. Excretory pore 190-195 ym

from head.

Buccal capsule with striated walls, 90-110

wm long. Muscular part of oesophagus

250-280 jm long, glandular part ends

§20-1000 um from anterior end. Nerve ring

ACUARIINAE FROM AUSTRALIAN BIRDS 29

Fig. 41, photomicrograph of Xenocordon sp, from

a magpie, Gymnorhina tibicen, from South

Australia, The part of the cordon derived from

the internal surface of the pseudolabium is to

the right, and is overlain by the scales typical

of the genus. Scale bar 10 em,

130-150 »m from anterior end. Tail end 75

pm long, conical with rounded tip. Vulva at

66-75% of body length from anterior end.

There appears to be only uterus, the vagina

extending backward from the vulva a_ short

distance, and the uterus then forward. No

shelled eggs are present in any of the females.

Acknowledgements

The specimens described here (or their

hosts) were obtained from various sources:

Mrs Joan Paton and Mr Phil Kempster of

Adelaide, Dr Peter Green and Dr John Pear-

son of Brisbane, Mr R. Green of Launces-

ton, the Ornithology Section of the South

Australian Museum, and the C.S.1.R.O. Divi-

sion of Wildlife Management Research, Can-

berra, I am very grateful for all this help.

References

Bayuis, H. A. (1934) Some spiruroid nematodes

from Queensland. Ann. Mag. nat. hist. (ser.

10) 1, 142-53.

Cuapaup, A, G. (1975) C.1.H. Keys to the nema-

tode parasites of vertebrates. Jn R. C. Ander-

son, A, O. Chaubaud & S. Willmott (Eds) 3,

Pt 2. Spiruroidea, Habronematoidea, Acuarioi-

dea. Publ. Comm, Agr. Bureaux, Farnham

Royal, Engl. pp. 29-38.

Cram, E. B. (1927) Bird parasites of the nema-

tode suborders Strongylata, Ascaridata, and

Spiruratea. Bull, U.S. Nat. Mus., 140, 465 pp,

Diesinc, K. M.

Berlin, 588 pp.

Genpre, E. (1912) Sur quelques espéces

nouvelles de dispharages du Dahomey. Proc.

Verb. Soc. Linn, Bordeaux 66, 23-31.

(1913) Notes d’helminthologie Africaine

(quatriéme note). Ibid. 67, 16-112.

Harwoop,. P. D. (1933) Some spiruroid nema-

todes from Texas birds. Trans, Amer. Microsc.

Soc. 52, 173-176.

INGLis, W. G, (1965) The nematodes parasitic in

the gizzard of birds: a study in morphological

convergence. J. Helminth. 39, 207-24,

JoHNson, T. H. & Mawson, P. M. (1941) Some

nematodes from Australian birds of prey. Trans.

R. Soc. §. Aust. 65, 30-5,

—— (1942) Remarks on some parasitic nema-

todes. Rec. S. Aust. Mus, 7, 183-6.

KHALIL, W. (1931) On two new species of nema-

todes from Pelecanus onacrotalus. Ann. Trop.

Med. Parasit. 25, 455-8.

Mawson, P. M. (1972) The genus Acuaria

Bremser (Nematoda: Spirurida) in Australia.

Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 96, 139-47.

Mo.in, R. (1858) Prospectus helminthum quae

in prodromo faunae helmintologicae Venetiae

continentur. Sitzung K. Akad. Wiss. Wien.

Math-natur. Cl. 30, 127-58.

(1860) Una monografia del genere Disphara-

gus ed una monografia del genere Histioce-

phalus. Ibid. 39, 479-516.

OLSEN, O. W. (1939) Dispharynx pipilionis, a

new spiruroid nematode from the red-eyed

towhee, (Pipilio erythrophthalmus _ erythro-

phthalmus Linn.). Am. Midl. Nat, 21, 472-5.

Petrer, A. J. (1961) Un nouvel Acuariidae,

Syncuaria diacantha n.sp., parasite de la

spatule, Ajaja ajaja (L.). Annis Parasit. hum.

comp., 36, 764-769,

RASHEED, S. (1960) The nematode parasites of

birds of Hyderabad, India. Biologia, Lahore 6,

1-116.

Rupotpur, C, A. (1819) Entozoorum synopsis

cui accedunt mantissa duplex et indices locuple-

tissima. 811 pp. Berolini.

SANWAL, K. C. (1951) On a new avian nematode,

Dispharynx pavonis n.sp. (subfamily Acua-

riinae) Railliet, Henry & Sisoff,, 1912. Indian

J. Helminth. 3, 73-8.

ScHoppe, R., GLover, B., Krinsky, F. C.,

MARCHANT, S. McGitt, A. R., PARKER, S.

(1978) Recommended English names _ for

Australian birds. Emu 77, Suppl. 245-310.

SEMENOV, V. D. (1926) Uber die Nematoden-

fauna der Wachteln [Russ. text, German sum-

mary]. Nauk. Izvest. Smolensk. Goudarstv.

Univ. 3, 87-108.

Sreurat, L. G. (1963) Sur un dispharage de la

chevéche et les affinités du genre Acuaria

Bremser. C. R. Soc. Biol. 74, 103-6.

Simon, F. (1939) Cheilospirura centrocerci a new

nematode from the sage grouse, Centrocerus

urophasianus. Trans, Amer, Microsc. Soc. 58,

78-80.

SKRJABIN, K. I., Sopotev, A. A., & IVASHKIN,

Vv. M. (1965) Spirurata of man and animals.

Principles of Nematology, 14, In K. I.

Skrjabin (Ed.). [In Russian] Jzdatel slvo

Akademii Nauk SSSR, 572 pp.

(1951) Systema Helminthum.

30 PATRICIA M. MAWSON

SmitH, H. J. (1927) Nadere beschouwingen

omlrent “tien tweetal wormen vit den

digestic’tractus bij het hoen”. [Engl. summary].

Nederl. Ind. Blad. Diergeneesk. 39, 150-1.

WANG, P. (1976) Notes on some new nematodes

of the suborder Spirurata from Fujian, China

(in Chin.). Acta Zool. Sinica 22, 303-402.

WILLIAMS, O. L. (1929) A critical analysis of the

specific characters of the genus Acuwaria, nema-

todes of birds, with descriptions of new,

American species. Univ. Calif. Publ. Zool. 33,

69-107.

YAMAGUTI, S. (1935) Studies on the helminth

fauna of Japan, Pt. 12, Avian nematodes I.

Jap. J. Zool. 6, 403-31.

DORCOPSISTRONGYLUS NEW GENUS (NEMATODA:

STRONGYLOIDEA) FROM THE GREY SCRUB WALLABY DORCOPSIS

VETERUM LESSON, 1827 FROM PAPUA NEW GUINEA

BY LESLEY R. SMALES

Summary

Dorcopsistrongylus gen. n. (Nematoda: Strongyloidea) is described from the stomach of the grey

scrub wallaby, Dorcopsis veterum Lesson (Marsupialia, Macropodidae) from Papua New Guinea.

The new genus is placed in the Cloacininae Stossich, tribe Pharyngostrongylinea Popova, sensu

Beveridge (in press). It is most closely related to Pharyngostrongylus Yorke and Maplestone and

Rugopharynx Ménnig, differing chiefly in the presence of both labial crown and labial collar, and in

the structure of the lip-like elements of the labial crown. D. labiacarinatus sp. n. (type species) is

described and recorded only from D. veterum.

DORCOPSISTRONGYLUS NEW GENUS (NEMATODA:

STRONGYLOIDEA) FROM THE GREY SCRUB WALLABY

DORCOPSIS VETERUM LESSON, 1827 FROM PAPUA NEW GUINEA

by Lestey R, SMALES*

Summary

Smaces, L. R. (1982). Dorenpsistrongylus new genus (Nematoda: Strongyloidea) from the

Grey Serub Wallaby Dercepsiy veierwm Lesson, 1827 from Papua New Guinea. Trans, 2.

Soo. 8S, Aust. W6()), 31-34. 30 June, 1982.

Doreopsistrongylus: gen. 0, (Nematoda; Strongyloidea) is described from the stomach of

the grey scrul) wallahy, Dercopsiy velerem Lesson (Marsupislia, Macropodiaae) from Papua

New Guinea, The new venus is placed wy (he Claneininae Stossich, tribe Phuryngostrongylinen

Popova, sense Beveridge (if press), It is most closely related to Pharyigastrongylas, Yorke

and Muplestone and Ragepharyax Ménnig. differing chiefly in the presence of both labial

crown and labial collar, und in the structure of the lip-like elements of the lablal crown~

BD, labiacarinans sp. n (type species) ix described and recorded only fram 2, vetertim.

Key Woros: Nematoda, StrongvloWea, Dorcopsistrongylus, macropad, duxonomy-

Introduction

The nematode tribe Pharyngostrangylinea

Popova, 1952 from the marsupial sub-family

Macropodinae was revised by Beveridge (in

press), A new collection of nematodes from

Darcopsiy veterum Lesson, 1827 in Papua New

Guinea has been found to contain a species

which differs from described pharyngostron-

cyles and a new genus in the sub-family

Cloacininse Stossich, 1899 is proposed for tl.

The terminology used in the description of the

anlenor end 1s that of Beveridge (in press),

Methods

Specimens were examined after clearing in

lactophenol. Hand-cut sections were made to

exumine the anterior end. Specimens prepared

for SEM by dehydrating in ethanol, cleaning

in xylol, air drying and coating With gold were

examined with an ETEC Anutoscan. Drawings

were made with the ud of a Leite drawing

prism, Measurements are given in micrometers,

unless otherwise stated, as the range followed

by the mean in parcutheses,

Dorcopsistrongylus geno.

Cloacininae Stossich, 1899, Phuryngo-

strongylinea Popova, 1952; small nematodes,

up to 12 mm long, body covered with fine

transverse striations, Cephalic collar not dis-

tincl, picrced by two amphids and four suft-

median papillae. External labial crown of four

lip-lke elements and a Inbial collar, arising

from internal lining of buccal capsule. Buceal

capsule cylindrical, langer than wide. linmyg

with prominent transverse striations, Ocsopha-

* South Australian Museum, North Terrace, Ade-

laide, S, Aust. 5000,

gus long, lerminal bulb clavate, surrounded by

anteriorly directed extensions of intestine,

Male: Spicwles elongate, alate. Bursa short,

lobes distinet, ventral lobes deeply indented.

Ventral rays fused; externo-lateral arising

separately; medio-lateral and postero-lateral

rays fused; externo-dorsal originating close to

lateral trunk. Female; tail conical, vulva close

10 anus, vagina vera thick-walled, ovejectors

not parallel to long axis of body, vagina

ulvrinae passing anteriorly from ovejectors.

Parasitic in stamach of macropodid mar-

supials.

Type species:

canlnaiis sp. 11.

Dorcopsistronyylus labia-

Dorcopsistrongytus labiacarinatus spn,

FIGS 1-10

Host and localiries: Dorcapsis veterum Lesson,

1827 collected by t. Redmond from Middle

Strickland Area (locality of lype) (8 3, 9 2);

collected by J L, Owen from Veikabu Creek,

Central Province, Papua New Guinea (2 ¢).

Holotype ¢ 198).4537, allotype { 1981.4538

British Museum (Nutural History); additional

material: Breish Museum and Australian

Helminthological Collection, housed in South

Australian Museum,

Small nematodes, body covered with fine

iransverse striations. Anterior end with cephalic

collar, not well defined. bearing two amphids

and four submedian papillae with single setae,

Labial crown divided ipta four lip-like ele-

ments, unterior end of each raised into a ridge,

two laterals bilobed, ventral and dorsal slightly

bifid. Anterior end of buccal capsule with

labial eollar bearing fine longitudinal striac.

Mouth opening circular. Buecal capsule

——

———

——4

—

———

——

———

DORCOPSISTRONGYLUS NEW GENUS (NEMATODA: STRONGYLOIDEA) 33

cylindrical, thick walled lining with prominent

transverse striations. Oesophagus about 47 body

length, its lining strongly sclerotized, cylindri-

cal with clavate terminal bulb following slight

constriction. Nerve ring surrounds oesophagus

at about 4, its length, deirids with long setae

posterior to nerve ring; excretory pore at level

nearly halfway along the oesophageal region.

The anterior end of the intestine forming two

large blind diverticulae projecting forwards

about 250 um.

Male (measurements from eight specimens) :

body length 6-10 (9.4) mm; width 0.34-0.45

(0.4) mm; oesophagus 1290-1600 (1430);

anterior end-to nerve ring 340-430 (390), to

deirids 430-590 (520), to excretory pore

510-690 (634); buccal capsule 47-65 (57)

long, 26-29 (27) wide; spicules 1.7-2 (1.86)

mm, about 45 body length. Gubernaculum pre-

sent. Bursa; ventral lobes deeply indented, dor-

sal lobe, with median cleft, slightly longer than

laterals, arrangement of rays shown in Figs

6 & 7. Genital cone prominent, anterior lip

large, posterior lip with one pair bifid and four

other simple appendages.

Female (measurements of only entire speci-

men): length 11 mm; width 0.5 mm;

oesophagus 1530, anterior end-to nerve ring

410; to deirids 490, to excretory pore 630;

buccal capsule 68 long, 36 wide. Body narrow-

ing anterior to vulva; tail tapering to tip 350,

dorsally reflected; vulva close to anus 640 from

posterior end. Uteri parallel. Ovejector not

oriented parallel to long axis of body, vestibule

at right angles to body wall, sphincters thick-

walled 200, infundibulum relatively long, thin-

walled 250, vagina vera relatively short, thick-

walled 630. Eggs (10 measurements) thin-

shelled, elipsoidal 68-80 (76) * 34.5—44 (40).

Discussion

Dorcopsistrongylus differs from all the

pharyngostrongylinea in having a poorly de-

fined cephalic collar and both labial crown and

labial collar. It is similar to Pharyngostrongylus

Yorke & Maplestone (1926) in the characters

of the oesophagus but the lip-like elements of

the labial crown do not resemble the petaloid

elements present in most Pharyngostrongylus

sp. The buccal capsule resembles that of

Figs, 1-9. Dorcopsistrongylus labiacarinatus sp.n.:

Rugopharynx Ménnig (1927) (Syn. Spiro-

strongylus Ménnig, 1926), Cyclostrongylus

Johnston & Mawson (1939), Paraugopharynx

Magzoub (1964) and a new genus described

by Beveridge (in press), in having strongly

marked transverse _ striations. |§ Dorcopsi-

strongylus differs from each of these genera in

the characters of the oesophagus.

The elements of the ovejector are similar to

those of other members of the tribe and con-

form to the type II of Lichtenfels 1980. How-

ever the orientation of the vestibule, not

parallel to the long axis of the body, differs

from that of other members. This could have

been a fixation artefact, but other strongyle

material examined from the same source had

the vestibule of the type II ovejector longitu-

dinally disposed.

Acknowledgments

The material for this study was kindly lent

by the British Museum. My thanks to Mrs

P. M. Mawson and Dr I. Beveridge for help

with preparation of the manuscript, This work

is supported by a grant from A.B.R.S. The

photomicrographs were taken by ETEC Auto-

scan, University of Adelaide.

Fig.

terior end of male.

10. Dorcopsistrongylus labiacarinatus: an-

1. anterior end, ventral view. 2, head, lateral view.

3, head, ventral view. 4, head en face view. 5, genital cone, dorsal view. 6, bursa, apical view. 7.

bursa, lateral view. 8, gubernaculum, ventral view. 9, posterior end of female, lateral view. Figs 2-5

& 8 to same scale. Figs 7 & 9 to same scale.

34 LESLEY R. SMALES

References

BEVERIDGE, I, (1982) A taxonomic revision of the

Pharyngostrongylinea Popova, 1952 (Nema-

toda: Strongyloidea) from Macropodid mar-

supials. Aust. J. Zool,

Jounston, T. H. & Mawson, P. M. (1939)

Strongyle nematodes from Marsupials in New

South Wales. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W. 64, 513-

36.

LICHTENFELS, J. R. (1980) Keys to genera in the

superfamily Strongyloidea No. 7. In R. C. An-

derson, A. G, Chabaud and S. Wilmott (Eds.),

C.IL.H. Keys to the nematode parasites of ver-

tebrates. Commw. Agric. Bur,, Farnham Royal,

England.

Maczous, A. (1964) Three nematode species

(Strongyloidea: Trichoneminae) from Queens-

land wallabies. Trans. R. Soc. §. Aust. 88, 47-

Monnic, H. O. (1926) Three new helminths,

Trans. R. Soc. §. Afr, 13, 291-98.

(1927) On a new physalopteran from an

eagle and a trichostrongyle from the cane rat,

with notes on Polydelphis quadricornis and the

genus Spirostrongylus. Ibid. 14, 261-5.

Popova, T. I. (1958) Strongyloids of animals and

man: Trichonematidae. Essentials of Nemato-

dology 7. Ed. K. I. Skrjabin. Akad, Nauk, S.S.R.

(Translated English version available as TT65-

50073 from N.T.LS., Springfield, Vermont.)

YoORKE, W. & MAPLESTONE, P. A. (1926) The

Nematode Parasites of Vertebrates. (Churchill:

London).

BRACHIOPODA FROM THE EARLY CRETACEOUS OF THE SOUTHERN

EROMANGA BASIN, N.S.W.

BY J. G. G. MORTON

Summary

Lingula from the Early Cretaceous of Australia have previously been identified with the English

Cretaceous species L. subovalis Davidson. However locally abundant lingulids from the Tibooburra

area (north-western New South Wales) displaying muscle scars, show that the Australian specimens

differ and are herein described as Lingula sturti n.sp. Australiarcula artesiana Elliott is also

abundant in association with Lingula at two localities. The species was previously known only from

Santos No. 1 Well at Oodnadatta, South Australia.

BRACHIOPFODA FROM THE EARLY CRETACEOUS OF THE SOUTHERN

EROMANGA BASIN, N.5.W.

by J. G. G, Morton*

Summary

Morton, J, G. G, (1982), Brachiopoda from the Early Cretaceous of the Southern Eromanga

Basin, N.S.W. Trans, R, Soc, 8. Aust. 106(1), 35-38, 30 June, 1982,

Lingula from the Early Cretaceous of Australia have previously been identified with

the English Cretuceous species LZ. svhovaliy Davidson. However, locally abundant lingulids

from the Tiboobuira area (north-western New South Wales) displaying muscle scars, show

that the Australian specimens differ and are herein described as Lingula siurti n.sp. Ausira-

liarenla artesiana Elliott is also abundant in association with Lingula at two localities, The

species was previously known only from Santos No. 1 Well at Oodnadatta, South Australia.

The occurrence of these species (particularly 4, artesiana), a mixed assemblage of

Aptian and Albian molluscs, and similar lithologies suggests correlation of the Aptian/Albian

sundstone near Tibooburra with the Attraction Hill Sandstone and Coorikiana Member

(Oodnadutta Formation) in South Australia,

Kuy Worps: Linda, Australiurcula, Brachiopoda, Early Cretaceous, Eromanga. Basin.

Introduction similar, but more weathered, rocks occur

Lingulids have been known from the Early nearby and show cross-bedding, rippled. sand-

Cretaceous of Queensland and S.A, for many stones (symmetrical), veins of fibrous gypsum

years, Moore (1870) identified these as Lingula

ovaliy Sowerby, an English Jurassic species,

although subsequent workers (Tale 188%;

Rtheridge 1901) favoured identification with

the English Cenomanian L, subovalis Davide

son, 1952, However, Day (1967a) expressed

doubt that the Australian specimens were of

ihe same spceies, although he and previous

workers had not seen their muscular impres-

sions, Articulate brachiopods are by compari-

son rare in the southern margins of the Great

Artesian Basin, the only known terebratellid

being Anstraliarcila artesiana, previously

known from one locality, Both species occur

at localities near Tibooburra, N.S.W. (Pig. 1),

The lingulids are particularly well preserved

and affer careful preparation show internal

features. The species occur at North Eagle

Tunk (Fig. 1) in a well sorted, fine to medium

blue, calcareous, glauconitic sandstone

(weathering hbult-brown). The unit occurs

near the middle of the Early Cretaceous

marine shale sequence (with good Aptian

and Albian faunas below and above, respec-

tively). ‘Phe unit was mapped by Rose (1967),

on the MILPARINKA 1:250000 Geological ® North Sandy Well

sheet, which he correlated with the Tambo Tank

Formation in Queensland, Fossiliferous slabs

excavated during tank sinking are strewn a\Milparinka

* School of Applied Geology, University of eae

N.S.W,, P.O, Box 1, Kensington, N.S.W,,

2033. Fig. 1. Locality map.

36 IG

around the tank margin, and outerops of

and layers of cone-in-cone calcite. The

ussociuted fossils are a mixture of “Roma”

(Aptian) and Tambo’ (Albian) types, similar

to fruna described by Day (1967b), und in

elude Nuecitla (Leienncula) coopert (Moore),

fhopernd rugecesiala (Moore), Tatella maru-

nonna (Btheridge, jor), Eyren Lneuloiedey

(Hudleston), Cyrenopsis corrugata (Tate),

Diinitobeluy adiptvehus (MeCoy), Dy stimulus

( Whitehouse}, and Peratebeluy oxys (Tenison-

Woods). Ichnofossils are particularly diverse

in this unit (Morton in prep.), and include

Rhizocorallium, and a vew type of prapho-

glyptid burrow. At other localities, these

species occur i sandy shale, often with large

svhrounded baulders, and an associated fauna

which is generally Aption in age with some

Albian clements,

Systematic Palacontology

Family LINGULIDAE Menke, 1828

Genus LINGULA Bruguiere, 1797

Type Species Lingule attaiine Lamarek

Lingula sturti n.sp-

FIGS 2, 3. 4, 5A-C

Named after Charles Sturt, an early explorer

of NuS OW.

1879 Lingala evalis Sowerby; Moore 236, 239,

pl. LO. fig 14.

1889 Lingula sebvvalls Davidson, ‘Tate 230.

1892 Linegula wvaliv Sowerby; Etheridyve, jv. 444.

pl. 20, fiz, 14,

Lingula subovelis Davidson; Etheridge, jn

1902 Litienhi suhovalis Davidson; Etheridge, ine,

B, pl. i, fiz, be

1966 Lingule subavelis Davidson; Taidbrook 193,

1967a Lingala ef subuvalis Davidson Day 4,

pl. |, fiz, 1, 2.

Material vind Localities: Wolotype and paca-

types (AM! F62069) on a single slab from

North Bagle Tank, Gum Vale Station, and 4

other topotypic paratypes (AM F62065-

F62068, F62063). Poorly preserved specimens

were collected from 3 mile tank, Mr Sturt

Station (AM 62064), North Sandy Well

Tank, Peak Hill Station (all collected by the

tuthor), and 1 specimen “50 kim NNE Tiboo-

burta™ collected by H, O, Fletcher, 1945 (AM

F42221), Also recorded from “Minka”

{Whitehouse 1927), “Wollumbilla and Am-

bley River, Mitchell Downs” (Moore |870),

190)

1 Institutional abbreviations ares AM—Australian

Museuin:s SAM—South Australian Museum,

G. MORTON

Fig, 2. Shell structure of Lingula srurti n.sp. Note

outer cross-hatched layer. Shaded organic rich

layers: unshuded phosphatic layers. Scale bar

1.) mm.

tol

™ yl

Fig. 3, A, B. Lingula sturti n, sp, Showing possible

Mmusculur interpretation. A—pedicle valve, B—

brachial valve. Ujit-—-Umbonal. tm—trans-

median, he—body cavity. e—central, ol—out-

side lateral, ml—medial lateral, vl—vascula

lateralia, al—anterior Interals, C—L. subovaliy

(after Davidson, 1853) showing muscular

impressions, (7? pedicle valve)

‘Jones Valley and Allaru Members, Eromanga

Basin”, and “Minmi member" (Day 1967a)—

all From Queensland, Also Parabarana Sand-

stone and Attraction Hill Sandstone. S.A.

(Ludbrook 1966).

Diagnosis: Small, oval Lingula internal

structure with distinct narrow medial ridges

in pedicle valve, and outside lateral scars

relauvely central in brachial valve, Trans-

medial scars in brachial valve straight or gently

concave to posterior-lateral margin,

Description:

Shell Structure (Fig. 2). The shell wall

is aboul 0.2 mm thick, consisting (in the inner

2/3 of the shell) of alternating layers of in-

ferred phosphatic and organie rich layers

(from the structure of living Lineula) each

about 0.015 mm thick, somewhat \rregular

and discontinuous. The outer 1/3 of the shell

is apparently of cross-hatched structure (not

reported in living species of Lingula), Colour

is dark-brown to black, the surface is shiny

und polished,

Bateriar,

oval-clliptical

Shell small,

(length: width,

outline elongate

2:1), apical

EARLY CRETACEOUS BRACHIOPODA 37

wlOv?Hu

ee wee |

oe eee a oe a oa ae ieee ea,

9 we 15 tamm

T T

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 12 ~=«B

LENGTH

Fig. 4. Dimensions of Lingula sturti n. sp. Solid

circles—Tibooburra specimens, open square-

Holotype; open circles—Queensland specimens

from Day, 1967a); crosses—L. subovalis (from

Davidson, 1852).

angle large (c. 120°). Anterior-lateral margins

straight, slightly converging toward the an-

terior. All other margins are gently convex.

Both valves convex, maximum convexity near

middle posterior. There appear to be two weak

ridges on the posterior half of the holotype

(angle between them, measured from the apex,

about 20°) which delimits the area of maxi-

mum inflation. Ornament consist of fine

regular concentric growth lines over the whole

shell (about 10 per mm).

Pedicle Valve (Interior). The posterior

half of the shell has 2 narrow, but distinct,

medial ridges converging gently towards the

umbo. Immediately anterior to the beak are

Fig. 5 A-C. Lingula sturti n. sp. A. Holotype (exterior) x 3.5 (AM F62069c, North Eagle Tank). B.

Paratype (brachial valve) x 3.3 (AM F62063, “Gum Vale Station” ).

x 3.5 (AM F62069d, North Eagle Tank).

D.-E. Australiarcula artesiana

C. Paratype (pedicle valve)

(Elliott) (North Eagle

Tank). D AM F62079, x 4.5; E AM F62074, x 5.

38 ), Go G. MORTON

two short fateral scars, straight or slightly

concave towards the lateral margins, and di-

Verging anteriorly at ¢ 50°. Near the middle

are two smill oval scars, the medial margins

of which are the most distinctly marked.

Anterior, there is a much wider, Jess distinet

medial ridge.

Brachial Valve (Inierior). The medial

ridges on the posterior half are reduced or

absent, and towards the Jateral marains of the

two short subumbonal scars are two long scars

which are at first coneuve towards the lateral

margins, them convex, and finally concave,

converging to meet a small sobeircular scat

near the centre of the shell.

Remarks: The species (Pig. 5) is of a Very

similar shape to £, sabovalis, but ig never as

large as the two specimens figured by David-

son (1852). If is easily distinguished on dif-

ferences in the muscle scars (compare Figs 38

and C), and the external ornament (as re-

fmarked by Day 1976a), which is lacking

except for a few widely spaced growth lines tn

t- subovalis,

Class ARTICULATA

Fumily TEREBRATELLIDAE King,

1850

Subfamily MAGADINAE Davidson,

1896

Genus Ausiraliarcula Elijatt, 1960)

Australiarcula artesiana Elliott

FIGS sD, B

Australlarcula artesiana Fillott, 1960, 26, pl,

2. fig. 1-7. text. fig. 1-3.

Descriptian (External); Small ovoid shell,

narrowing anteriorly with a strane median

dorsal sulcus matched by a ventral keel giving

a triangular cross section to the ‘valves,

Exterior smooth, commissure sulcate,

crvet, foramen permesothyridid.

Holotype; SAM F15278

Material and Localities: (16 specimens) AM

F62070-F62080 (North Eagle Tank) and AM

F62081-F62085 (South Eagle Tank).

Remarks! These specimens appear identical

with those described from the type locality

Santos Oodnadatta Nao 1 Well, in S.A. This

is Apparently the first record of the species in

surface sediments,

Beak

Conclusions

The faunal and lithological similarity be-

tween the Attraction Hill Sandstone and the

Coorikiana Member (Oodnadatta Formation)

in SA, and the sandstones near Tibooburra,

suggests Chal ihe uniis are coeval. Sedimentary

structures, the general abrasian of the larger

molluscs, the abundance of trace fossils (par-

ticularly Riizecoralliven) and fossil logs,

sugeest a very shallow water palaeoenviron-

ment for these sediments. The occurrence of

abraded Aptian molluscs (particularly Maceco-

yella and Peratebelus) with characteristic

Albian molluses at North Bagle Tank, suggests

erosion of Aptian sediments in this area during

Early Albian time, as a major eustatie sea

level low in Barly to Middle Albian time was

recorded by Morgan (1980).

Acknowledgements

! thank Dr G, Neef for supervising this

study, and for critically reading the manu-

seript, I] also thank Mrs K, Goldie, and Mr C,

Fountain, for typing the manuscript, and Jeff

Vaughan for assistance with photography, T

was supported by » University of N.S.W, Re-

search Scholarship during this study.

References

Davioson, ‘To (1852) A Monograph of British

Cretaceous Hrachiopoda, Palarentege Sev

(Moneer,) 1-54,

Day, R, W. (19673) Marine Lower Cretaceaus

Fossils from the Minmi Member, Blythedale

Formation. Roma-Wallubilla Area, Geol, Surv,

Od Palacontal, Paps (9) (Publication Na, 325}.

rp.

11967b) A Mixed Roma-Tambo Fauna from

the Tambo Area, Od Gove Min. f. G8, 10-12.

tLuiorr, G, P, (1960) A New Mesozoic Tore-

bratellid Bruchiopod, Proc. Geol, Asvor. Th,

25-30, 2 pl

ETHeripce, R., jor. (1892) fe Jack, Ro L, &

Etheridge, R., jor. ‘The Geology and Palaeon-

tology of Queensland and New Guinea. PuAls.

geol, Surv. Qld 92, (2 vals).

(1901) Additional Notes on the Palneon-

tology of Queensland (Part 2). hid. LS8, 5-37,

—— (1902) The Cretaceous Mollusca of South

Australia and the Northern Territory. Mem, 8.

Soo, § Aust. 200), 1-54,

Lunurook, N. H. (1966) Cretaccous Biostrati-

graphy of the Great Artesian Basin in South

Australia, Bull. eweol Sure. 8, Ausi, 4, 223

nibone, C. (1870) Australian Mesozoic Geology

and Palaeontology, @. J! geal. Sor, Lond, 26,

226-61.

Morgan, R. (1980) Eustasy in the Australian

Early and Middle Cretaceous, Bull geol, Surv

NSW-_ 27, 105 pp.

Roser, G. (1967) MILPARINKA Map Sheet,

Geologicul Atlas of N.'S.\W. 1;250000 series

(Geol Surv NOS.W.: Sydney),

Tate, R. (1889) The Age of the Mesozoic Rocks

of the Lake Eyre Basin, Rep. Australas. Avs,

Adymt Sei. 1, 228-30,

VEGETATION DISTRIBUTION AND CHANGE OF OFFSHORE ISLANDS

OF THE INVESTIGATOR GROUP AND WHIDBEY ISLES, GREAT

AUSTRALIAN BIGHT

BY T. J. FATCHEN

Summary

Vegetation on Pearson I., Dorothee I. and Greenly I., South Australia is described and mapped.

Limits to potential distribution of woodland, shrubland and heath on the islands appear to be set by

physical factors, primarily salt load; but within these limits the distribution at any given time results

from successional processes following fire, and dependent on fire intensity and frequency. Multiple

successional paths are evident. The wallaby Macropus eugenii, introduced to Greenly I., may direct

post-fire succession to a grassland endpoint, markedly altering the vegetation relative to that of

ungrazed areas. In contrast, transfer of the wallaby Petrogale lateralis to previously unoccupied

areas does not appear to lead to marked changes in vegetation, although floristic richness is reduced

as a consequence. Other vertebrates, particularly seals and sea-birds, have little influence on the

vegetation.

VEGETATION DISTRIBUTION AND CHANGE ON OFFSHORE ISLANDS OF THE

INVESTIGATOR GROUP AND WHIDBEY ISLES, GREAT AUSTRALIAN BIGHT

by T. J. Farcuen*

Summary

Farcnen, T. J. (1982) Vegetation distribution and change on offshore islands of the (nvesu

gator Group and Whidbey Isles, Great Australian Bight Trans. R. Sac. 8. Avs. W6(2)

39-60, 30 June, 1982.

Venetation oo Pearson lL, Dorothee Lt. and Greenly T,, South Australia is described and

mapped, Limits to potential distribution of woodland, shrubland and heath on the islands appear

to be sel by physical factors, primarily salt loud; but within these limits the distribution we any

given lime results from successional processes following fire, and dependent on fire Intensity

and frequency. Multiple successional paths are evident. The wallaby Macropus eugenii, intro-

duced to Greenly L, may direct post-fire succession to a grassland endpoint, markedly altering

the vegetation relative to that of wngrazed areas, In contrast, transfer of the wallaby Pelregalte

lateralis to previously unoccupied areas does not appear to lead to marked changes in vegeta-

tion, although floristic richness is reduced as a consequence, Other vertebrates, particularly seals

and sea-birds, hive little influnce on the vegetation.

Human occupation and land vse have been minimal, but have altered vegetation through

changed fire regimes and introduction of macropods. Implications for the management ot the

vewetation are discussed m the light of (he ohserved vegetation change.

Introduction

Most reports of vegetation of olfshore islands

in South Australia are of Pearson 1, Investi-

gator Group (34°4'S, 134°L7'E). The initial

observations of Oshorn (1923) were supple-

mented by Specht (1969) and Syinon (1971),

There is also a number of related reports for

this island (Shepherd & Thomas 1971, anid

other papers in the same volume), There are

few published data on yveyetation of similar

islands in the region, apart. from limited floris-

lic records and brief notes for Dorothee I,

(34°S, 194° 15'B) (Symon 1971) and Greenly [,

(34°39'S, 134°45°F) (Pinlayson 1948a, 1948b,

Mitchell & Behrndt 1949; Cleland 1950),

Since Osborn’s visit in 1923, major vege-

tation changes have been noted on Pearson I,

by Specht (1969) and Symon (1971) without

consensus of causes, In addition, an expedi-

tian in 1960 created a new problem by acci-

dentully releusing Pearson {. Wallabies (Per-

ragale lateralis Gould) and so cresting a major

colony {Robinson 1980), The impact and

potential long-term effect of this introduction

have received little attention, There has been

no examinaion of the |mpact, on Greenly LT,

of on cartier wallaby introduction; ja this

case, the Dama Wallaby Macropus eugenii

(Desmarest) introduced in 1905 (Mitchell &

Behrndt 1949).

#106 Foucart Street, Roaelle. NSW, 2039

Other human influences on the islands have

been minimal, with littke impact from human

residence and few recorded plant introduc-

tians, The vegetation changes noted despite

the apparent lack of human modification may

involve processes of consequence ta coastal

land munagement elsewhere.

This paper reports the eesults of quantita-

tively based, comparative vegetation surveys of

Pearson, |, Dorothee |, and Greenly I, The

work formed part of a comprehensive bio-

logical survey undertaken by the South Aus-

tralian National Parks & Wildlife Service

(SANPWS) and the South Australian

Museum in November 1976, Information on

the verlebrate fauna has been published

(Parker & Cox 1978: Robinson 1980),

Methods

Plant collections

Comprehensive collecting was attempted an

Greenly I, but in View of the extent of cartier

collectians cited above, effort was directed to

secking species not previolisly noted on Pear-

son f. and Dorothee T. All material, mostly

vegetative, was deposited in the State Her-

barium, Adelaide (AD)_

Vegetation gnd soils

Base survey data for cach island came from

10 mx | m quadrats laid singly at intersec-

40 T, J. FATCHEN

tons ef an arbitrary, 250 m orthogonal grid

(Fig. |), The sampling established a pool of

quantitative information at readily relocatable

points for long-term monitoring programmes

of the SANPWS. It complemented the for-

malisation of photopoints used by Oshorn

(1924), Speeht (1969) and Symon (1971)

Fach species encountered in quadrats was

seared for extent of canopy {the area suh-

tended hy the limils of individual canapies),

density Where appropriate and frequency in ten

I m* cells, Only the first mensurement is con-

sidered here, being the parameter most readily

compared between unrelated species, The raw

data ure on file at SANPWS offices, Adclaide.

Quadrat data and subjective observation of

community structure were both used to define

vegelalion mapping units. Recent aerial photo-

gruphs were then interpreted for mapping pur-

poses, The photographs predated fires on Pear

son T. in April 1975 and Greently [. in Feb-

ruary 1974, and the maps display the prefire

Vegetnon,

Quadrat sampling was necessarily limited by

tine, While the data did indicate major site

and Vegetation interactions, laid quadrats alone

Were not sufficently numerous to place these

interictions in sharp focus, Clarification was

atlempled by an artificial augmentation of

sample size. A supplementary grid of 125 m

interval wis superimpased on the 250 m base

erid und the vegetation unit at each point read

from the compiled vevetatian maps. This in-

formation was later used in cortelating vege-

lation type (mapping unit) with sampling site

hopography and locution. The validity of this

approach js argued on two grounds: one

quarter of all such points did in fact have a

quadeat laid at them: and most of cach island

vais traversed by observers during survey.

Interpolation was replistic in these elreunm-

stances. The approach has the disadvantage

(hat discussion of relationships must meces-

sarily cancern Mapping units rather than

individial species,

Generalised soil types Cvense Osborn 1923

und Specht (969) were noted at each quadrat

und on general reconnaissance. hut few cores

were taken in view of the informatinn already

available and the simplicity of the soils [see

Twitlale 1977 |,

Verrebrates

Most observations of vertebrates came from

Parker & Cox (1978) and Robinson (1980),

hut some were made during the vegetation

suyyvey. Densilies of walluby pellets were

counted in quadvats an Pearsiin 1, und Greenly

I, The distribution and density of seal duny

Was noted, und the movements of seals ob-

served on all islands. OF the two species pre-

sent. the Australian Sea Lion Neophaca cinerea

(Peron & Lesueur) was observed frequently in

Vegetared reas. The New Zealand Fur Scal

Arctocephalus farstert (Lesson) did not appear

to move inland bevond bare rock near high

witer mark.

Homan influences on the islands

The three islands are uninhabited, They

have never been subject to domestic grazing

or cropping because of their topography and

relative jsolation, Some sealing took place iit

the 19th and early 20th century: Mitchell &

Behrndt (1049) mention a sealer who “spent

many months” on Greenly |. at the turn of the

century, Earlier sealing may have been as

intensive on Kangaroo J, and the Bass Strait

islands (Wood Jones 1923-25; p.373 ef seq.).

Sealers were Visiling the Nuyts Archipelago to

the west by the 1830's (N. Wace. pers.

comm.) No evidence remains of sealing

detivity,

Pearson 1. has a small, automatic taviza-

tional light whieh is serviced by belicoprer

Associated impacts are limited to a cleared

helipad and vised bultery dumps. The extensive

changes often assoeiated with munned light

stations have been avoided (see Hope &

Thompson (971),

The major human impacts ure caused by

cusual vistors. Walluby introductions are noted

above. Fires iv 1974 on Greenly I, were it

by (una fishermen (Robinson 1980), and

Osbern (1923) reported thai fires preceding

fis visi lo Pearson TL also had beeu de-

Nberately lit, The 1975 fires on Pearson. L.,

frowever, vesulied fram lightning strikes

(Robinson 1980), The introduction of the few

alien plant species fo The islands are also a

likely result of visits, Such influences are slight

by comparison with those dacumented else

where (Norman 1967, 1971: Hope & Thom-

san 1971) ‘They may nevertheless have

alfected the structure ahd composition of the

present vegetation more than is apparent,

Climate

The meteorological Stations nearest to the

islands are on the West Coast of Eyre Peninsula.

The following, based on these records (Anon.

OFFSHORE ISLAND VEGETATION 41

1961), represents only # general indication of

the island climates.

The climate is semi-arid; mean annual

rainfalls at Streaky Bay and Elliston are 380

mm afd 430 mm respectively. Mean annual

temperature at Streaky Bay is 17° C, with

mean maximum 23" © and mean minimum

12° C. Rainfall seasonality is pronounced,

with most rain in autumiewinter. The wind-

ticld in summer is dominated by southwesterly

sea breezes, but winter winds alternate between

northerly und southwesterly; the — latter

associated with ecastward-moving low pressure

systems and cold Fronts,

Prevailing ocean swells are from the south-

west with an approximate height range of 1-4

m, consequently the western faces of the

islands have higher energy coasts than other

aspects (Shepherd & Womersley 1971; Twidale

1971).

Physical features

Dorothee I. is a single land mass, but Pear-

son |. and Greenly [. are subdivided respee-

Fig. I,

tively by a floodway and a narrow chasm

(Fig. 1). The dividing seaways are dispersal

barriers to terrestrial mammals (Mitchell &

Behrndt 1949; Thomas & Delroy 1971;

Schmitt 1975, 1978). The sections are here

considered as individual islands tor con-

venience in later discussion: North and South

Greenly L, and North and South Pearson L.,

where the last comprises the connected

‘Middle’ and “South Sections’ of Osborn

(1923),

The islands are all inselbergs of Gawler

Block granites (Webb & Thomson 1977), and

the geomorphological discussion of Twidale

(1971) is relevant to all, Henee only those

physical characteristics most likely to be re-

flected in the vegetation are discussed here:

variation in the degree of protection from sea-

spray and cyclic salt, and variation in soil

lype.

The salt load is likely to be the initial de-

ierminant of plant distributions on small

islands (Parsons & Gill 1968, Specht 1972;

* my

—

2) ) NoRTH GREENLY

a FSLAND

Limestone Spat meignts lm)

Sand Bee a-\a0

b- 238

250m gridpomt # c~ 140

d- 749

425m. oridpoint ¢- 240

Fire boundaries oN 1. 110

Pearson, Greenly and Dorothee Is, showing topography, extent of limestone terraces, and

sampling grids. Burnt areas discussed in fext are indicated. Maps compiled from uncontrolled acrial

photographs; form lines upproximate 30 m contours.

an T, J. FALCHEN

TABLE 1. Geographic data.

Area:

Planimetric area Mapped shoreline shoreline ratio Maximum altitude

Island (ha) (km) (ha: 100m) (m)

N, Peiurson 70 64 27 238

8. Greenly 125 63 2.0 230

Dorothee 57 5,2 1 i40

S. Peatson 50 4.6 1.1 116

N. Greenly 37 3.0 1:2 140

TABLE 2. Fluristic summaries.

(a) Number of plant species in commen (data from all records)

Pourson I, Dorothee I, Greenly I.

80 38 30 Pearson I.

40 21 Dorothee I,

37 Greenly [.

(b) Number of species in common (data from 1976 survey)

N. Pearson J. 8. Pearson I. Dorothee T, N. Greenly 1, S. Greenly I,

53 22 28 28 24 N. Pearson ft.

22 Is 17 14 S. Pearson I.

3] 19 16 Dorothee I,

37 29 N. Greenly lL.

29 S. Greenly L

Randall 1970a). Even on the smallest of the

islands examined, significant variation in salt

load can be expected because of the very

tapid reduction in the amount of ait-borne

salt with increasing altitude and distance from

the sea (Yaalon & Lomas 1970; Waisel 1972)

and the variation of the initial salt input in

relation to aspect, waye action and prevailing

winds (Randall 1970b). In these terms N.

Pearson 1, 8. Greenly L, N. Greenly 1, and

Dorothee I, form a graded series, with the first

(the highest, most compact and topographi-

cally most varied: Table |, Fig. 1) providing

the greatest range of protected sites, The series

is also almost one of size, The diminutive N,

Greenly 1, precedes the larger Dorothee TI.

primarily because of the protection offered by

its precipitous western cliffs and the shelter

of its immediate neighbour.

S, Pearson J. does not readily fit the series

because of its soils. On all the other islands,

the predominant soil is a uniform granitic

fine gravel or coarse sand on a basement of

granite, but on S, Pearson IL. limestone is

equally important as a basement, with super-

ficial soils ranging from loam to coarse granitic

sand, Limestone terraces are found on N,

Pearson f, but account for a much lower pro-

portion of the total land area than on S.

Pearson — (Fig 1), There is no limestone on

Dorothee }. or N- Greenly T., but remnants

were observed on S. Greenly I. at approxi-

mately the same level as the Pearson I, ter-

races. Two additional, minor soil types exist.

Blown sand is found on S. Pearson L. and S.

Greenly J,, the latter containing a sea-bird

colony, A calcareous sandy loam of high

organic content occurs over less than 1 ha on

Dorothee I.

Flora

Records ard additions

Floristic records are presented in Appendix

| and summarised in Table 2, New additions

lo the Known floras are (a) Pearson L.: Mono-

toea scoparia (Sm.) R. Br. on East and North

Hills; (b) Dorothee I.: Brachyscome iberiili-

folia Benth, in the southern part, Cotula vul-

weris Leuths over most of the island, and

Olearia ramulosa (Labill.) Benth.; (¢) Greenly

1.) Notedanthonia racemosa (R. Br.) Zotov,,

Arthrocnemum halocnemoides Nees, Enchty-

laena tomentosa R. Br... Maireana oppositi-

folia (FP. Muell.) P. G, Wilson, Rhagadia

haceata (Labill,) Mog., Carpobrorus rassii

(Haw.) Schwantes, Disphyma australe ( Ait.)

N. EB. Brown, Scleranthus pungens R, Br,

The identity of Qlearia bushes is uncertain:

a result partly of the lack of flowering material

in colleetions and partly of the marked pheno-

typic plasticity of species, O- raimulosa only

has been reported from Pearson I, (Osborn

OFFSHORE ISLAND VEGETATION 43

1923; Specht 1969) and O. axillaris only from

Dorothee I. and Greenly I. (Symon 1971;

Cleland 1950). Field recording followed the

reported nomenclature. A recheck of AD

specimens brought to light a vegetative

voucher from Dorothee I., collected by Symon

and placed in QO. axillaris, which appears to

be O. ramulosa. Unfortunately, the wide in-

dividual variation of specimens in the field

prevented detection of this at the time of sur-

vey. Hence the two species are treated as one

taxon, Olearia, in subsequent discussion,

Comparison of island floras

Only species recorded during field survey

should be considered for comparative pur-

poses, on grounds of equivalent observational

effort between islands. N. Pearson I. had the

most varied flora. All species on S. Pearson L.,

almost all species on Dorothee I. and S.

Greenly I., and three quarters of species on

N. Greenly I. were in common with the N.

Pearson I. flora (Table 2). Fourteen species

were found only on N. Pearson I. (Table 3):

on the mainland the majority comprises heath

or understorey plants which are uncommon on

the immediate coast (Specht 1972), N. Pear-

son I,’s extensive limestone areas did not

appear to influence species richness, as no

species restricted to such areas were found.

Thirty-seven species were found on Greenly

J, All were present on the northern section,

but a number were missing from §S. Greenly

I. Six species were found only on Greenly I.;

Stipa elegantissima, Scirpus nodosus, Maireana

oppositifolia, Helichrysum bracteatum, Mueh-

TABLE 3. Species restricted to N. Pearson I.

(a) Species characteristic of coastal land systems

(including saltmarsh)#

Beyeria lechenaultia

Crassula sieberiana

Daucas glochidiatus

Melaleuca halmaturorum

Suaeda australis

(b) Species characteristic of non-coastal land

systems4

Calytrix tetragona

Cassinia spectabilis

Galium murale (alien)

Monotoca scoparia

Myoporum deserti

Senecio cunninghamii

Spyridium phylicoides

Stellaria media

Westringia rigida

* Definition follows Specht (1972) in which

“coastal” is used in the strict sense of imme-

diately coastal systems such as dunes and cliffs,

lenbeckia adpressa and Euphrasia collina var

tetragona. All are common in immediately

coastal habitats on Eyre Peninsula (Specht

1972). Atriplex cinerea was not found at all

on the island, despite its abundance on both

the Eyre Peninsula and the Investigator

Group.

Another enigmatic distribution is that of

Albizzia lophantha, the only species restricted

to Dorothee I. Symon (1971) suggested that

its absence from Pearson I. may have resulted

from wallaby grazing. However, no individuals

were found on the ungrazed sections of

Greenly I., despite appropriate habitat.

There are few exotics: only Galium murale,

Minuartia sp., Sonchus asper and_ Stellaria

media have been recorded to date, in a total

flora of 92 species.

For present purposes, the significant feature

of the island floras is the number of species

in common (Table 2). This combined with

the geophysical similarity of the islands facili-

tates joint classification and mapping of the

island vegetations. Little else is to be gleaned

from the floristic data alone.

Vegetation classification and description

Derivation of mapping units

Ten mapping units with some subdivision

are presented (Fig. 2). Broadly, these follow

the communities recognised by previous

authors (Table 4) but there are differences in

detail. My original intent was to maintain the

Pearson I, community classifications of Osborn

(1923) and Specht (1969), and extend them

to the other islands. This proved not to be

feasible: successional changes had obscured

some of Osborn’s communities, a number of

Specht’s units could not be separated satis-

factorily on aerial photographs, Specht’s units

were not in all cases equivalent to those of

Osborn, and communities defined by Osborn

but not noted by Specht still existed. The

present classification was derived to resolve

the apparent interpretation problem but might

be seen to compound the confusion. Accord-

ingly, its derivation is given here in full.

Each mapping unit is an interpretation of a

particular aerial photographic ‘signature’ or

pattern. The ‘signature’ is usually determined

by the emergent species with the greatest

foliage cover. These species could be identified

using the 250 m grid data. Mapping units so

defined are thus factual statements of character

species, for which they have been named

da T. J, FATCHEN

SUUT HY

PEARSOW

ISt ANE

DOROTHEE

ISLAND.

Fig. 2. Vegetation.

(Table 4), They do not define plant communi-

ties in the sense of Specht (1969) und Osborn

(1923), although these may be inferred from

the character species.

Actual mapping etetains a degree of sub-

jectivity. Osborn (1923) first described the

mosiic nature of communities on much of

Pearson 1, and his comments are equally

applicable to the other islands. A number of

disparate comunities may be within a relatively

small area because of sharp disjunctions in sub-

strate und degree of protection, In such cases,

hroau-scale mapping is necessarily an approxi

mation, and boundaries between units largely

a personal interpretation. The approximation

still permits comparisons to be made provided

its shortcomings ure known, Henee the fallow-

ing brief descriptions of the mapping units

indicate the degree of Yariation in species

conjposition and abundance encompassed by

individual units,

Descriptian oe] mapping units

Casuarina stricta forest or woodland is equiva-

lent Io the Caswarina communities of granitic

NOATH GREENLY

Istana

BUTH GREENLY

ISLAND

Casuayina sticta Atriplee poludesa 4, .

S Idense Stands) == Pod podetormis ¥ |

tapes

Melaleuca.

halmaturorum, Lissy Oisphyrnd aystrale tr

Melalevea | | | Pele -

Forum ==

lanceolata ok ==

oense stands) |\\|||

Bore rock im

Alriples cinerec a8,

Glearia = 300m N

ear eo —

soils described by previous authors, The unit

was found primarily on the two largest islands,

with a small outlier on N, Greenly |. (Fig.

2). The last had been burnt four to six years

previously but trees were regenerating from

rootstocks. Parts of the woodland on S. Greenly

J, formed « low open forest with cunopies >

80%. Equivalent areas on N. Pearson I, had

been destroyed by the 1975 fires, Otherwise,

Casuaring canopies were of the same order

on both the larger islands (Table 5), Mela-

levea lanceolata was a frequent understorey

Species on both islands, but otherwise under-

storeys contrusted, The minimal cover on S.

Greenly J, was provided almost solely by

Lepiditiin foliosum with occasional Lufts of

Poa poaejermis, and only six species were

recorded in quadrats. The understorey on N,

Pearson [, was denser and much more: varied

(Table 5) und so constant assemblage of

species could be defined, Seleranthuy pungens,

Qlearia, Enchylaena tomentosa, Rhagedia

crassifolia, Monoloca scapariau, Poa sp.,

Senecio cunnighamii and Calytrix tetragona

were all locally abundant (canopy extent >

OFFSHORE ISLAND VEGETATION 45

Tasie 4, Relationship of mapping units ta previous classificanons

Structural formation

Unit (Specht 1972)

Casuarina stricta 1, Low open forest

2, Low woodland

C. strict low open Forest

©. stricta low woodland

Equivalents

Specht (1969) Osborn (1923)

©. stricta woodland

C_ stricta woodland

Melaleuca Closed scrub M_ halmaturornm closed M, halmaturorum serub

halmaturorum scrub

Melaleuca lanceolata |, Closed scrub None None

2 Open scrub M, lanceolata open scrub M. wanting

seru

A. cinerea low open scrub

Mat pliant community

und Nirrdria sehaberi open

heath

O, ranmulosa-Leucopogon

parviflaruy open beuth,

Rhagedia crassifalia-Zyego-

O. ramulosa-L. parviflorus

thicket, Atr/plex paludosa

dwarf shrubland in part

ployliim low shrubland in

purt, Nv schober! low

shrubland

Atriplex cinerea Closed heath

Olearia Open heuth

Atriplex paludosa Low shrubland

A, palidasa low shrub-

land, A. paludosa-R.

A, paludosxa dwarf

shrubland

crassifolia low shrubland,

R. erassifalia-Zygophyllum

low shrubland in part

Disphyma australe Low shrubland

D. australe-Enchylaena

lomentosa low open shrub

Ciranile cliff community,

mul plan community in

part

Pelargonium littarale Low openshrubland None Pelargoniurn-Carpabrotis-

Poa

Paa poaeformis Tussock grassland None None

Bare rock a Bare rock Bare rock

10%) but patchily distributed, so that almost

each quadrat returned u different main under-

storey species. Within burnt stands of Cayua-

rina, Carpabrotuy rossii and Olearia were the

mau? perennials found, with annuals Aplin

prostratum, Calandrinia calypirata and Paric-

taria debilis, Under the fire-opened canopies

of Casuarina on N, Greenly 1, the lwo peren-

nials were also major species, with Stripe cle-

gantissime atid Pelargoniwn littorale. Casuarina

woodland on N. Greenly 1, had more in com-

mon, in terms of cover and species tichness,

with that on N. Pearson T, than with the smme-

diately neighbouring S, Greenly T. woodland

(Table 5).

Melaleuvea halmaturorum closed scrub was

limited to N. Pearson L., largely about Main

Ck but with some small outliers, The unit has

been adequately deseribed by Osborn (1923),

Where burnt, M. fialmaturorum was killed

outright. A sparse colonising caver of Carpe-

brotus rossit, Apfun prosiratwnu and Calan-

driniqg celypirata was noted in burnt areas, as

under burnt Casvarind woodland.

Melaleuca lanceolata open and closed seruby

were found on N. Pearson [. and N, and §.

Greenly L, Relatively open on the first two

ishinds, thickets provided dense cover on §,

Greenly I, (Table 5), In places, thickets were

impenetrable and almost monospecific. Rha-

godia crassifolia, Threlkeldia diffusa, Tetra-

gonia tmplexicoma and Enchylaenu tomentosa

were associated, usually growing as climbers

through the M, lanceolata canopies. The more

open communities of N. Pearson L have been

deseribed adequately by previous authors,

whose comments apply equally to N. Greenly

J, The main colonisers of burnt areas within

this unit were again the species given above.

Regeneration of M. lanceolata alter burning

was both from s¢ed and rootstock.

Atriplex cinerea closed heath occurred on lime-

stone terraces of N, and 8. Pearson f., in

blown sand on the latter, and on the caleareous

loam of Dorothee I, (Fig. 2). Osborn (1923)

described this unit as a ‘mat plant commu-

nity’. Specht (1969) distinguished three com-

Thunities within Osborn’s broad grouping. The

three were observed in 1976 at the sites Specht

indicated, bur two had bee much reduced

by extension of 4, einereq over the interven-

ing 16 years aid could not be mapped ade-

T. J. FATCHEN

_ = = — = = = 69 IdS

_ ae = —_ —< _* 7 —_ 6s Id

— = = > a = —_ — 6£ ION

aos = = =. ail — = — ve IDS

“ — a — — om. — — Te IdN yooy weg

pueyjsseis

Or-$ L OS-01 ral r v7 € br S| IDS snusofavod ‘

cr g = 0c c | c I I> Id$

St-07 = O¢-01 —_ ral 6-L —< vA 6 Id

a —= — “F ha a ia — zc IDS pueyqniys

— s —_ 0@ v —_ ¥ I I IldN a]V40}1] “d

7? I 4 c £ = £ i I IdS

OS-0¢ == O&-Se = val 01-9 = c L 1d

—_ ot a a = = — _— 9 IDN

0c 8 Or-1 £ L ye r £ g IDs pueyqnays

— Of —_ vr v = r T I IdN apDaisnn

SP-0e Se Se-Ol OF 9 £-€ £ £ va! IdS

SL-07 = 8I-sI 7 9 Sr — c 6 Id

Oc Or S$6-ST St L se £ P g IDs puerqniys

re-0 ST 08-07 OL el scl £ L 8I TdN psopnjod *y

cI = Of-ST = £ e-€ £ ra L IdS

OS—-0Z Of O0¢-c OL Fl cI-9 6 4 rl Id

OS-OP ry St-07 —_ £1 6-$ a c Sy ION qieoy

08-01 St SE-ST st OI OI-¢ 9 L cl IdN DLDaIO

~~ 0 = 06 ! - if 1 € 1d

0c-Z ST O8-0F 09 a LZ + v Ol IdS yreoy

> 1! — i = = —_ = I> IdN DaddUld

at Os — Sc Il an Il l s TON

SI-S i. 06-08 a s S-E = c s IDSs Sqnios

OP-SI Of Or-ST 0c SI 6-€ L S 6 IdN DIDIOIIUD] “We

qnios

Or-SI ST OF-SI O¢ ral 9-+ ¢ € - IdN WNAOANIDULJDY "JA

OL-Os — OI-s = Or 8-9 am c g ION

L-0 s OF-0¢ ST 9 -l € 9 ST IDS PUB[POOM /]S310}

OF-O1 Sc OF-S 0c 1d 9-1 g & 07 IdN DIIUIS *D

asuel ueIpsw asuel ueipsur sjeipenb asuri uelpaul s}eipenb vale pues] uy

Sarsads 19430 satdeds 1ajae1eyo Ul papi0sal s}eipenb utr JOON = [BJO] Jo %

Jo Adoues % jo Adouvs % saidads [R10 SSSUYSII sarsedg

ESSE

‘syun Suiddput fo ssauyou saizads puv 49402 Juvjd Jo Juajxa ‘svasv aa Yopay *$ avy

OFFSHORE ISLAND VEGETATION 47

quately at the scales used here. A. elnerea

lypically had a high density and a thick and

luxurious cover (Table 5), (Individual bushes

Were procumbent, usually fess than 20 cm

high, The population appears to be of an

ecolype distinct from that of the mainland,

the Jatter being relatively tall and erect. The

procumbent habit on limestone terraces might

conceivably result from a combination of

water stress und damage by basking sea-lions,

but these found in sand and subject to less

pressure miintain the procummbent habit,

Associated species within the unit have been

listed by Osborn (1923). A, eénerca heaths

on Dorothee £ were much thicker than else-

where, with other species contributing less to

the total] cover, The one quadrat laid within

the uit on this istand was monospecific. All

stands had escaped recent burning.

Olearia open heath was found on granitic soils

on all islands but S. Greenly I. from which

not only the unit but also the characicr specics

was entirely absent. The character species did

not necessarily predominate within the the

vegelation, bur rather was the ane consistently

occurring member of a group of assaciated

speeres, the relative abundance of which varied

from site fo site. Rhagodia erasstfolia and

Correa reflexa were the most commonly asso-

clated species on N, Pearson I, N. Greenly 1

and Dorothee T. On the last, C. reflexa generally

cantnbuted more to the total cover than did

Olearia, Wut in two small, rocky areas Albizzia

lophantha dominated (canopy extent > 70% ),

Brachyscome ciliariy, Frankenta pauciflora,

Curpobrotus possii and Pelargonium littorale

were (requent and abundant within the unit an

the three islands also, but otherwise local

assemblages varied with each island's flara, For

example, Hevitingia rlgida and Spyriditin

phylicoides were \acally significant in heaths

on N. Pearson LL, but were not found clse-

Where. Despite such varialion, the total cover

of the unit was comparable on all three islands,

as was species richness (Table 5).

ta contrast, low cover and low diversity

were characteristic of Olearia heath on §&.

Pearson I. The low cover might have resulted

from the greater relative proportion of hare

rock on this island, but this should not have

greatly changed the species richness. Only

Olearia, Rhagedia baceata and R. crassifolia

were found in quadrats. The latter two spectes

were heavily grazed by wallabies.

Osborn (1923) used Levcepogen parviflorits

as a character plant of his equivalent com-

munity. This species was observed infrequently,

on N Pearson 1, only, and was not encoun-

tered in quadrats. The vegetatively similar

Monetoca scoparia was also infrequent. Pos-

sible misidentifieation aside, these observations

indicate a major decline in the importance, of

the species smce Oshorn’s visit (see Symon

1971).

Vegetation within burnt @/earta heath com-

prised Qlearia and Carpobrotus rossit (as for

other mapping units) with some Lepidiiwn

Joliaswm,

Atriplex palidosa low shrubland was found on

granitic soils on all islands, but its occurrence

on N. Greenly I, was. too limited for mapping.

Shrubland also covered much of the limestone

terraces on N. Pearson [—a point noted by

Specht (1969) but not evident from Osbarn’s

observations. Canopies were variable, with N,

Pearson [, having the densest stands (Table

5). The most frequently oecurring associated

species were Threlkedia diffusa, Baechvlaena

rementosa and Rhagodia crassifolia, with

Maireana oppositifolia on S. Greenly t. anly.

inal.

Cover rank

Fig, 3. Relative importance of Rhagadia crussi-

folia (A) and Qlearia (B) im 15 quadrats

mapped as Olearia heath; and of R. erassifolia

mapped as 4. paludesa shrubland Bart sites

are not included. Cover rank is relative to other

species in the quailrat, where rank = | indicates

greatest cover,

quadrats

assent]

48 7, J. FATCHEN

Boundaries between A. paludosa shrubland

and Olearia heath were diffuse. They were

frequently obscured by a belt of R. cravsifatia,

a major component of both mapping writs

und treated by Specht (1969) a9 a distinot

unit, Interpretation problems may have led in

some cases lo incorrect quadral classification

(Fig. 3). Problems of definition appear to be

linked to successional processes discussed

below,

The 1975 fires on N, Pearson 1, had com-

pletely destroyed parts of the shrubland, kill-

ing not only the individual Atriplex but

apparently seed stocks as well, No live Arri+

plex seedlings were present in fire zones in

1976, Little else was present for that matter

—ocenasional young Olearia bushes and the

annuals Api prestratwn and Culandrintu

calyprrata,

Disphyma australe low shrubland was found

on substantially bare ground in the immediate

coast. The community is well described by pre-

vious authors, Few species were present. with

Disphyma on N. and §, Pearson T. and §.

Greenly [, relative to Dorothee [, (Table 5).

No quadrats were laid in Disphwne shrubland

on N, Greenly 1, but the impression was of a

more diverse flora similar to that of Dorothee T

Pelargonitnm Jitfurale Jow open shrublanil

occurred on N. Pearson 1. Dorothee f. and

§. Greenly |, on substantially bare rack distant

Trom the sea, Plant cover was generally sparse,

with most provided by Pelargoninn and Car

pobroius rossii, Species richness was much

higher on Dorothee I. than elsewhere (Table

5).

Poa poacformis Mmissock sraysland as au dis-

cernible unit was found only on S. Greenly 1

it was characterised hy a very law species

richness: apart front P. powefarmis, the only

commonly cncountered species were Nice-

viana suaveolens, Muehlenheckia adpressa and

Lepidivn foliosuin, Previously burnt areas

Within grassland could be recognised only with

the aid of maps drawn up immediately after

the 1974 fires.

Bare reck was present withiit all mapping units,

and major outeropping of bare granite was

commen on all islands, Bare rock has heen

mapped us such for major outcroppings and

(he coastal Fringe only. Some vettetation may

be present in crevices of arens shown as bure,

Sumundry coriprarisans

The foregomg deseriplions and Pig. 2 to-

wether show the broad similarities between

islands bul alsa expose significant variation itt

detail, vias the restriction of woodland and

seruh units to the larger land rrasses; ihe

tedency fo grealer species diversity in heaths

and shrublands en ungrazed islands: and the

pecularity of S. Greenly J, In particular, the

last possesses grassland vegetation wot re-

corded elsewhere, has comparatively sparse

and Gepauperate woodland understoreys, and

lacks the otherwise common Qlearia and Atri-

plex einerea heaths, The island's most striking

feature, however, is the contrast between its

Vegetation and thal of its immediate neighbour.

Attention is alse drawn to the: sameness of

post-fire colonising vegetation, Whatever the

origihal Vegetation, Ihe main calonising species

remain the perenuials Qlearia gud C'arpobratis

rossi? and the annuals Apion prastratum,

Culandrinia calyptrata, and less frequently

Lepldium foallosum.

Factors determining vegetation distribution

and change

PHYSICAL FACTORS

dalt load

Orditation of vegetated sites with respect to

ultitude and horizontal distance fram the

coast points ta the importanee of salt load

as a primary determinant of the vegetation

distribution, This is particularly so for those

sites wilh a Westerly component in their aspect,

partially or whally faeing the general direction

of prevailing swells, winds and storms (Pig.

4), Cusuarina sirictn woodlands are not found

below 100 m, and at this altitude are observed

only in very protected localities (for example,

ravines sheliered by granite tors), The bulk of

woodland occurs both above 140 m and be-

yond 150 m from the shore. The distribution

of Melalevea Janceolata scrubs overlaps that

of the woodlands, with slightly lower limits.

The ghsenee of both vegetations trom Dorothee

1, and 8, Pearson 1, can be simply explained

by the lack of sites suffieiently bigh and distant

froin the sea. At the other extreme, the Die

pliyme australe shrubland, with its highly salt-

(olerantt species (Parsons & Gill 1468)

occupies most of lhe proximal sites. Olearist

heath. Atriplex palndosa sheubland and. on S.

Grecily 1 only. Poa poaefernis geusslunds are

found at intermediate levels with equivalent

relative distributions.

This pattern ix still evident, though diffuse,

for the more protected leeward aspects (Fig.

5), The mosaic distribution of the various

OFFSHORE ISLAND VEGETATION 49

200

nol

= 100

100 200 300 400

Distance from sea (m)

® Casuarina stricta

O Melaleuca lanceolata

200

h M. halmaturorum

£ C Atriplex cinerea

A Olearia

2 100 A Poa poaeformis

= © Atriplex paludosa

X Pelargonium littorale

+ Disphyma australe

*® other vegetated

100 200 300 sites

Distance from sea (m)

Fig. 4. Distribution of mapping units in relation to altitude and distance to nearest shoreline for sites

with aspects in southwest and northwest quadrats. Two plots are provided for clarity. All vegetated

sites are indicated.

mapping units in the ordination suggests a Recherche Archipelago, despite differences in

much greater influence of site-specific charac- character species (for example Eucalyptus

teristics other than salt load, although wood- rather than Casuarina forming woodlands).

land distributions indicate that salt load is still The mutually exclusive possession of Poa

a significant, if no longer over-riding factor. grassland by S. Greenly I. and Olearia heaths

The pattern is similar to that described by by all other islands begs the question of re-

Abbott & Black (1978) for islands in the placement of heath by grassland on the former

50 T. J. FATCHEN

island. Figure 6 compares the relative distribu-

tion of the two mapping units on granitic soils

and the northerly aspects on which the bulk of

Poa grassland is found. There is little dif-

ference in the relative distributions.

The distribution of Melaleuca halmaturorum

closed scrub on N. Pearson 1. appears to be

an indirect result of the morphology of the

island and the transport of cyclic salt. The

catchment for the Main Creek system in which

the scrub is located drains approximately one-

third of the island. Salt deposited within the

catchment would eventually make its way to

the creeks by groundwater movement through

the shallow, coarse soils over the largely

impermeable substrate. On the other hand, the

Main Creek area is well protected from the

200

E .

e .

. = * o

a 100 " @e. ces 4

a3 . ef e

= a ° e :

z a °

a rane. te

direct effects of salt-laden winds. These two

factors together permit the establishment of

salt-tolerant scrubs rather than shrublands

(Parsons & Gill 1968), but only on N. Pear-

son I. is the combination sufficiently pro-

nounced for scrubs to develop.

Substrates

Substrates play only a minor part in deter-

mining the distribution of mapping units,

partly because of the preponderance of granite-

derived soils and granite basement, and partly

through the location of subsidiary soil types.

Limestone terraces would normally restrict

the distribution of woodlands, the soils having

poor water holding characteristics and the

hardpan layer limiting the wetting profile.

However, terraces occur in areas too exposed

oe oe

se « x

2 ht hb f

. e

h 8

wD de bit. 6

nohok .

100 200 300 400 500

Distance from sea (m)

200

3 A A id - 150 .

_ . “ . — A a 4 £E x * - .

* . .

2 it: Sega] THe ee

ak . tet . cr "ee te e

sat Ags a . oe a tc ce ee eee ©

0 a

100 200

Distance from sea (m)

100

Distance from sea (m)

200

300

Fig. 5. Distribution of mapping units in relation to altitude and distance to nearest shoreline for sites

with aspects in southeast and northeast quadrats. Separate plots are provided for clarity, with all

vegetated sites indicated. See Fig. 4 for key to symbols.

OFFSHORE ISLAND VEGETATION 51

200

Distance from sea (m)

Fig, 6, Distribution of Olearia heath ( @) and Poa

300

pouefoymis grassland (Q) mapping units im

relation te allitude and distance to newrest

shoreline ai sites with pspects i northern

quadrats. Only sites With either unit present

are plotted,

to permit the establishment of woodland

species in the first place, Exposure is alsa

the most probable reason for the absence of a

specifically associated flora.

Some negative correlations between vegeta-

tion and substrate remain, The A, cinerea

heath is nol found on eranitre soils, while the

Pelargonium litterale and Disphyma australe

shrublands do not appear on limestone, blown

sand or loam, OF more signifleance are the

frequently encountered — situations where

Vurlous siles shure not only the same substrate

but also the same relative location and pro-

tection, yet support different vegetatian,

Fire and succession on Pearson J.

Symon (1971) compared the field photo-

vraphs of Osborn (1923) with photosraphs

taken in 1969. He noted the following quali-

tative chonges. in distribution, of major specics:

(a) Atripley elnerea replacing Olearia and its

associaied species (Figs 1, 7 of Symon); (b)

A. cinerea teplacing Osbarn’s ‘annual planc

community’ of Apivnt prosiratam, Lepidium

Joliasum and Senecio lautus (Figs 6, 7 of

Symon); (c) Atriplex paludasa replacing

Olearla and related species (Fiks 3, 8 of

Symon); (d) A, paludosa replacing Rhapudia

crassifolia (Figs 2. 3, 4, 5, 8 of Symon); (2)

A_ paludaxa colonising previously bare sreas

(Fig. 3 of Symon); (f) a “great reduction”

in the number of dead and dying trees.

These processes were continumg in 1976

eXcept in recently burnt areas: in which, fram

the mapping unit descriptions above, the re-

verse had occurred, In all Vegetation burnt,

colonisers were the annuals Apiuim prastratiny,

Calandyinia calypirata und to ws lesser extent

Lepidium. folivsum (ie. the nucleus of Os-

born's “annual plant cammumity") and the

perennials Olearia and Carpebrotuy rassii, The

islands were visited by A, C. Robinson shortly

after the fires, and at that stage only the

annuals were in evidenes, This combined with

the total destruction of Atriplex paludexa sug-

gests that those areas mapped as A. paludosa

shrubland prefire will tend to become Glearia

heaths, while those mapped as heath wall re-

main so—a return to the situation described

by Osborn. Eventually, reinvasion of Atriplex

from unburnt areas would diminish the im-

portance of Olearia once more, The same

argument could well apply to the A. elnerea

heathy which having cscaped hurning were

still extending into Qlearia heath areas.

The apparent equivalence of sites supporting

A. paludosa shrubland with those supporting

Olearia heath ig thus a reality: which of the

(Wo species 1s charactetistic depends on fire

frequency and the rate of reinvasion by

Atriplex,

Rhaeedia crassifolia shrublands may be

postilated to be mtermediate in succession

from Olearia heath to Atriplex shrubland, This

accounts for the occurrence of Rhagodla ag a

major associaled species in hoth vegetations,

the number of Symon's (1971) comparisons

in which Atriplex is replacing Rhagodia rather

than Qlearia, the tendency meted here and

by Specht (1969) for Rhagodia to form a

Vegetation unit in ils own right as belts af

shrubland separating the A/rplex shrubland

and Qlearia heath, and the consequent prob-

lem of boundary definition between the last

two mapping units,

There was less evidence of such a succes-

sional mterchange m the burnt portions ot

scrub and woodland vegetation. Casuarina

strieta On N. Greenly 1, burnt 4-6 years pre-

viously, had tegenerated sufficiently to warrant

recarding as woodland once more. The re-

peneration was primarily vegetative. Similarly.

burnt Melaleuca lanceolata individuals an N,

Pearson J. were already regenerating from

rootstock by November 1976, little more than

a year after the fire, Both examples indicate

a process of the kind deseribed by Russell &

Parsons (1978) for sclerophyllous heaths,

where the pretire community reappears

rapidly as a resule of vegetative regeneration

rather than successional change. On the other

hand, the intensity of fire in C. strfera and

32 T. J, FATCHEN

hgh <————— — In

Relatwe sadit {oad

Fis, 7, Scheme outhning observed and suggested

successional paths followine fire, us modified by

salt load, applicable to communities on granitic

soils. The extent of the rectangles Indicates the

relative distribution of mapping unils in relation

to sull load, as inferred from Figs 2, 4 and 5.

Observed successional puths are represented by

solid Iines, suggested paths by broken lines.

Turnback loups are 4 consequence of [Ow-inten-

sity fires followed by vegetalive regeneration

rather thin successional processes. Same time

scales are sugeested?: numbers indicate vears for

changes. Data sources: “® original, from €.

stricta on N. Greenty f5 © original, AW. laneee-

lata regrowth from tootstock on N. Pearson Ly

author on N, Pearson L; ? based on changes

Jocumented by Specht (1969), Symon (1971)

and the (976 survey in relation to Oshora’s

(1923) initia) observations; © based on Osborn’s

(1923) description of C. stricns stinds killed by

fire at locutions at which no f stricta was ub-

served ja 1976, The additional impact of wal-

Jaby grazing has not been included.

Af, halmaiurerum woodland and scrub on N.

Pearsoo T. was sufficient both to kill individuals

outright aud to remove seed stores. Replace-

ment by another community must be expected:

in view of the observed colonising specics,

Olearid would again become the character

plant after a short interregnum of annuals.

Further evidence for this is given by Osbarn’s

record of destruction of C, strieta woodland

“south of Main Creck”, an area now con-

tailing Clearia heath (Fig. 2).

The previous section indicated that the

potential limits to distribution of vegetation

were set by physical site factors, wilh salt

load dominating. Within this framework, the

actual wecutreuce of units appears to be de-

termined by fire frequency and intensity, and

the rate of spread of the major species. Suc-

cessional and site relationships ure summarised

schematically, with a tentative time scale, in

Fig, 7, Lack of information on fires between

1923 and 1989 logether with the variable

dispersal rates of the species concerned prevent

estimation of time scales for many paths.

BIOTIC INFLUENCES

Macropus eugesii on S. Green/y ¢

Relative to the other ishunds, 8, Greenly J.

Uixplays low floristic diversity, depauperate

woodlands understoreys, possession of grass

lands and an absence of Olearia both asa map-

ping unit and us individuals. These charac

teristics caniot be explained by reference to site

features and fire etfeets only. fn particular, the

absence of Olearig must result from 4 con-

tinving exclusion process rather than an inter-

miltent one such as fire, as a ready seed source

was found on N, Greenly [. and the dispersal

and establishment abilities of the species were

well demonstrated on Pearson 1,

Grazing by Muacrapuy was the only con-

tinuing Factor observed which would readily

account for the differences. A comparison of

species distribution between N. aud S. Greenly

J. shows two mutually exclusive sets of species

over a Yaricty of sites afd vegetation. The

restriction of u species lo one or other island

relates only to the presence or absence of

Brazing.

Few published data are available on the

interaction between the wallaby and vegetation

elsewhere. As with other Macropodicdae, it is

known to prefer herbage to browse (Anidre-

Wartha & Barker 1969), Prior lo lhe species”

introduction, the “pasture” vegetation should

hive been similar in composition to those

of the other islands, primarily shrub with very

little herb or forb,

Twa mechanisms can be suggested for the

vegelation changes, First, grazing pressures

may have led to a reduction in’ preferred

species, their subsequent climijiation, eventual

destruction of the perennial shrub cover and

ifs replacement by a grassland in a sequence

akin to effects of ungulate over-grazing in

semi-arid sheublands. Tranipling may also

have assisted this process (see Gillham 1955)

Alternatively, fire may have initiated the reduc+

tion of slirub amd heath, wallaby grazing: sub-

seguenily preventing the re-establishment of

shrubby species. This second mechanism

would be homologous with the effects of fire

and rabbits of similar islands in Bass Strait

OFFSHORE ISLAND VEGETATION 53

TABLE 6: Community composition and structure under Petrogale grazing: Olearia, Pelargonium

littorale and Disphyma australe wnits.

(a) Composition in quadrats

Island Island

N. Ss. N. Ss.

Dorothee Pearson Pearson Dorothee Pearson Pearson

Quadrats

laid 8 9 4 8 9 4

Stocking Stocking

pressure nil mod high — pressure nil mod high

SHRUB SUCCULENT

Olearia spp. ‘ail “3 me Carpobrotus rossii *# ee Me

Albizzia lophantha * — _— Disphyma australe ** ae +e

Arthrocnemum Threlkeldia diffusa — =

halocnemoides ~ % — HERBACEOUS

Atriplex paluaeise : = = Agropyron. scabrum 4 =

Correa reflexa Apium prostratum +7 + —

Enchylaena tomentosa * — = Brachyscome

Frankenia pauciflora — * = ib ori difolia +4 + =

Monotoca scoparia — 7 — Bulbinopsis

Myoporum insulare = F E-— semibarhate + _ _

Nitraria billardieri + a4) ‘a Calandrinia calyptrata + + —

Pelargonium littorale ** bs = , “ x - _

Rhavodia b wis 4 + Cotula vulgaris

Bhar tn wih dk Aa me, Daucus glochidiatus = + —

Ss int “ ribs = 4 — + Nicotiana suaveolens + = =

PEE Blyton’ Scleranthus pungens — + — aa

Senecio cunninghamii — + =

Senecio lautus + + —

Sonchus asper + — =

(** character species; * locally abundant; + present)

(b) Relative cover of shrub, succulent and herbaceous species in quadrats

Island

Dorothee N. Pearson S. Pearson

Quadrats laid 8 9 4

Stocking pressure nil mod high

No. of species

Shrub 9 10 3

Succulent 2 3 2

Herbaceous 11 5 0

Total cover (%)

Median 48 66 26

Range 33-80 24-105 3-3]

Relative cover of shrub species (% )

Median 51 60 63

Range 30-71 11-99 25-100

Relative cover of succulent species (% )

Median 22 36 40

Range 0-58 0-87 0-75

Relative cover of herbaceous species (% )

Median 27 23 0

Range 11-52 0-66 0

TABLE 7: Community composition and structure

T. J. FATCHEN

under Petrogale grazing: Atriplex paludosa and

A. cinerea units.

(a) Composition in quadrats

Island Island

N. S. N. Ss.

Dorothee Pearson Pearson Dorothee Pearson Pearson

Quadrats laid 3. 6 7 3 6 7

Stocking Stocking

pressure nil mod high pressure nil mod high

SHRUB SUCCULENT

Atriplex cinerea lal — ili Carpobrotus rossii a + so

Atriplex paludosa ae ar ** Disphyma_ australe + sm 7

Enchylaena tomentosa * + + Tetragonia amplexicoma * = —

Rhagodia crassifolia + * * Threlkeldia diffusa + + +

ae Re og + HERBACEOUS

pa ar HGrarers Apium prostratum = — +

} Seay SPP: lifoli = oa + Calandrinia calyptrata — — +

ae ea serpy ap ia = a a Calocephalus brownii = — 73 =

estringia rigiaa y i” Agrostis avenacea ~- + —

(** character species; * locally abundant; + present)

(b) Relative cover of shrub, succulent and herbaceous species in quadrats

Island

Dorothee N. Pearson S. Pearson

Quadrats laid 3 6 7

Stocking pressure nil mod high

No. of species

Shrub 5 7 7

Succulent 3 3 3

Herbaceous 0 2 2:

Total cover (%)

Median 88 71 68

Range 88-96 54-79 45-86

Relative cover of shrub species (%)

Median 96 71 92

Range 90-100 43-100 42-100

Relative cover of succulent species (% )

Median 4 0 7

Range 0-10 0-20 0-58

Relative cover of herbaceous species (% )

Median 0 0 0

Range 0 0-17 0-1

described by Bechervaise (1947), Guiler ful on all levels on all the islands” almost

(1967), Norman (1967) and Hope & Thom-

son (1971).

The second mechanism seems more pro-

bable, as the disappearance of Olearia from

S. Greenly I. is recent. Although Mitchell &

Behrndt (1949) referred to the elimination

of “many of the smaller plants which are

abundant on the subsidiary islands”, Cleland

(1950) reported that Olearia was still ‘plenti-

fifty years after the introduction of the wallaby.

This suggests that grazing of itself had been

insufficient to eliminate the Olearia. The second

mechanism also allows for the continued pre-

sence of Atriplex shrub populations which

otherwise might also have been expected to

disappear under a grazing pressure sufficient to

eliminate Olearia. The level of grazing pressure

required to prevent recolonisation by Olearia

OFFSHORE

is not known; Mitchell & Behrodi (1949)

estimated the population then to be “upproach-

ing three figures” while Robinson (1980) esti

mated “about 50 individuals” present in 1976.

Petrogale lateralis on S. Pearson 1,

The Pearson 1. wallaby colony expanded

from 6 individuals in 1960 ta LO0-150 by 1969

(Thomas & Delroy 1971) with “at least 150"

present in 1976 (Robinson 1980), The parent

population on N. Pearson L had remained

relatively Constant aver the same period at

250-300 individuals. The figures indicate a

inuch higher grazing pressure on S. Pearson

t. than on N- Pearson £. in terms of vegetated

land areas of the two islands, Changes similar

to those indicated for Macropus grazing on §,

Greenly f. might be expected, hut gross

changes. do not appear to he taking place,

Dorothee I. pravides an uUngrazed vexeta-

tion for comparison with that of S. Pearson I.

Herbaceous species contributed litde to any

of the vegetation units of S. Pearson L, bus

on Doroihee | were significant components

in Olearia heath, Pelarganiiim litterale and

Disphyma australe shrublands (Table 6), N.

Pearson T., with a lower grazing pressure than

ity immediate neighbour, yielded intermediate

data, Further, the diversity of the shrub com-

ponent was much the same in umis on N,

Pearson I. and Dorothee T., hut was com-

paratively low en S, Pearson I, On the other

hand, Atviplex communities showed little dif-

ference belween islands (Table 7), Herbaceous

species were relatively unimportant and there

wis little if any difference in diversity, Overall

shenh cover in Atriplex shrubland and heath

did not vary significantly between islands, but

cover in Olewria heath and other shrubland

\nits was considerably lower on S, Pearson J,

than elsewhere.

The impact of Petrogale on 8. Pearson 1, has

produced #4 mixed response tn the vewetatian.

The low floristic diversity of the island might

be attributed in part to the removal of herba-

ceous species by the wallaby, particularly in

the vegetation mapping units of Table 6; but

it may also have stemmed from the large pra-

portion of the island (ahout §0% af the

Vegetuted area) under Afriplex shrubland or

heath. dtrinlex communities elsewhere showed

low diversity even in the absence of grazing,

Further, perennial cover in these A rriplex com-

munities does not seem to have altered signi-

ticantly, and so erosional processes are un-

likely to have increased and the long-term

ISLAND VEGETATION 44

primary production levels should be muin-

tained over most of the sland. A future major

change from one plant community lo another

seems unlikely.

Miteraction berween seé-lions and Atriplex

cinerea

Specht (1969), in seeking reasons for the

increase in Atriplex cinerea on S. Pearson f.,

Suggested thal the sea-lion Neephocn ciieres

may have “devastated stands prior to Og-

born’s visit in 1923; hut that subsequently

cither the Neophoca population had decreased

or the 4. cineree bad became “temporarily

undesirable" as a busking ares He apparenuy

hised these suggestions on Osborn’s lack of

mention of the seo-lions. The Pearson I

calony, however, was a significant one at the

lime of Oshorn’s visit (Wood Jones 1923-

TY25. p. 372). Further, direct observation anc

dung counts in 1976 showed A. einerea heaths

to be thé preferred hasking sites,

The situation may be the reverse of that

suggested hy Specht. Basking grounds rela-

live to other similarly sited locations should

display differences ip salt and nutrient loads

resulting from the considerable urination anc

defecation of the searlions, A. citerea, typically

a specits of the immediate shoreline, could

well be advantaged as a result, particularly as

its growth habit on the islands would mim-

mise mechanical destruction,

Lifecry af sea birds

The often severe impact of sea-hirds bur-

rowing on vegetation is well documented (e.2

Gillham 1956, 1960. 1961, 1962; Norman

1967). The Fairy Penguin Evdyprela sninor

(Forster) in particular is noted for iis effect

on coastal heaths jn Victoria (Gillham 1960)

Large populations of this species were present

on all islands hut rookeries were dispersed.

with rack creviees favoured for butraws

(Parker & Cox 1978); 4 contras! with the

situations examined hy Gillham, Dispersed

burrows combined with the preference for

rocky areas reduced the impact of penguins

to the point where no overt differences were

noied between vegetation of rnokery and non-

rookery areas,

Colonies of the Short-talled Shearwater

Puffinus tenuiresiris {Temminck) and White-

faced Storm Petrel Pelurgodrama tnarina

(Latham) may have madified some vegela-

tions on Dorothce 1. Burrows of the former

56 T, J. FATCHEN

Fig. &. Incidences of various species in qaadraty on N. and §. Greenly Ll. (a) Carpobrotus rassiis

(b) Stipa elegantissima (@) and Brachyscome iheridifolia (++); (c) Danthonia sp.; (d) Dianella

revolutas (e) Correa reflexa; (£) Olearia axillaris; (2) Pelargonium littorale, (h) Nicotiana suaveo-

lens; Ci) Lepidium foliosum: (j)) Muehlenbeckia adpressa (@) and Maireana oppesitifalia (+).

were found primarily within Disphyma aus-

trale shrubland, while those of the latter

species were confined to stands of Alriplex

paludosa shrubland. The correlation between

vegetation type and bird species distribution

may have resulted in part from the birds’

activities, although the relative distribution of

the two shrubland types can be readily

accounted for by physical site characteristics,

The influence of sea-birds on vegetation

may still be more pronounced than indicated

above, Sampling of vegetation was nol inten-

sive, atid possibly missed localised vegetation

modification brought about by birds. Abbott &

Black (1978) reported marked bul localised

vegetation change resulting from sea-bird

breeding on the Recherche Archipelago. They

emphasised, however, that their findings dif-

fered from those reported elsewhere because

of the localised nature of the impacts.

Discussion

The direction of vegetation change on the

islands appears lo be determined by the rela-

tive importance of two sets of factors, fire

with its consequent regeneration and colonisa-

lion processes, and the impact of the larger

vertebrates. The available flora and physical

factors such as salt load and substrate limil

the extent to which change can proceed rather

ihan influence the direction of change. For

example, at a rocky site on the immediate

coast, high levels of cyclic salt will preclude

the establishment of all but the most hulo-

phytic species. Whatever changes might take

place, the result will still be a halophytic

community (in the present context, a Dis-

phyma australe low shrubland). Factors such

us macropod grazing may change some

characteristies of this community, but it re-

mains recognisable. Physical constraints re-

quire a halophytic communtiy, while the

limited flora cannot provide an alternative

character species to Displiyma within those

constraints,

At sites with less extreme physical charac-

teristics, the vegetation at any given time will

depend initially on the particular combination

of intensity and date of previous fires, dis-

persal rates and location of seed sources for

colonising species, and vertebrate grazing,

OFFSHORE ISILANID VEGETATION ¥

trampling und burrowing. Maintenance of or

succession between the various communities

may proceed without reference to site charac-

teristics. For instance, sufficiently frequent

burning on N, Pearson 1, may maintain an

Oleariu heath and coiminued Macrepus grazing

on S. Greenly ba Pea grassland. Limits only

become significant where change proceeds

ihraugh continued exclusion of fire in the first

case or a release from grazing in the second

instance to the point of establishment of serub

or Woodland species,

This viewpoint and the specific findings of

the study have a strong bearine on island

Management, The introduced vertebrates need

to be considered un integral component in

the functioning of island vegetation and not,

ay is Offen the case, an alien influence which

can be removed with only beneficial conse-

quences. ‘The fire regime 1s of more importance

than has generally been recognised, controlling

as it does much of the kind and distribution

of vegetation,

The above information can form the basis

of manipulative management of the island

vegelation, bul requires a clear purpose for jts

rational application. Clearly, management

Strategies will differ markedly between various

goals such as maintenance of current condi

tion. maxinised floristic diversity, preserva-

tion of particular plant communities or even

use of the islands as breeding centres for tare

vertebrates. Until specific goals for the islands

are set, the appropriate management option

would appear to be the minimisation of human

interference. This would permit continuation

uF the dynamic processes outlined im this

report, but would alsa require recagnition and

acceptance of the changes consequent on their

operation,

Acknowledgments

Field work for this study was undertaken

within the South Australian National Parks &

Wildlife Service, 1 thank A, ©. Robinson who

organised and led the expedition, and who

also provided part of the data used in this

report. Taxonomic ussistance from the State

Heebarium of South Ausiralia i gratefully

acknowledged.

References

Anmorr, 1 & Brack, R. (1978) An ecological

reconmuissanee of four islands in the Archi-

pélavo of the Recherche, Western Australia. /.

R, Soc. We. dust. 60, TTS-28.

ANDREWARTHA, H, G. & Barrer, S, (1969) Intro-

Quetion to a study of the Kangaroo [shun

Wallaby Proreninodon ecugenii (Desmarest)

wilhin Flinders Chase, Kangaroo Island, South

Austratin, Trans, R, Soe, 8, beaxt, 93, 127-33

Anon. (1961) “Climatological survey region 12—

Nuvis, South Australia’? Australia: Bureate af

Meteorology, Melbourne,

Recuervaise, J. (1947) Plant and animal life on

Rodonda Island. Wildlife April 1947, 129-132,

Cheianp, J. Bo (1950) Fauna and flora of the

tireenly Uslands Parl WT, The flora. Ree. §. Aust

Mus, 9 34931.

FINLAYSON, H. H, (1¥dka) Greenly Ssland, South

Nust(alia. 9, Auyt. Orn. 1H, 72-3,

( 1948b) apeuy Tsland, South Australia.

Walkabout 14,

GILLHAM, M. E. i088) Ecology of the Pembroke-

shire Istiunds IH. The ettect of grazing on the

vegetation, ¢. keel, 43, 172-206,

(1956) Eeolovy of the Pembrokeshire

Islands IV, Effects of reading und burrowing by

birds und maromals. (ved, 44, 51-82.

11960) Destraction of indigenous heath

Temetniion in Victorinn sea-bird colonies. Aist.

J. Boi. 8, 277-317.

—— (1961) Plants and

in south east Vietoria

21.35.

(1962) Granite islands of south-east Vietaria

us a seu-bird habylal. fied, TS, 46-63,

seabirds of granite islands

Prov, R. Soc, let, TA,

Goer, E. R. (1967) The Cape Barren Goose, its

eqvironment, number und breeding. Emu 66.

211-35.

Hare, G. §. & THemson, G. RK. (1971) The vege

ration of Cliffy Islund, Victoria, Australia, Proc,

R. Soc. Wiel. ®L, 121-7,

Mrrcnece, Pd, & Benewor, A.C, (1949) Fauna

and flora of the Grevnly Islands Part 1. litre.

duetory narrative and Vertabrute fauna, Ree. 8

Aust. Mix 9, 167-79,

Noaman, Ff. (1967) The interaction of plants

and animals On Robhit tsland. Wilsun's Promon-

tory, Victoria, Pree RB Sov. Veer, 80, 193-200.

(1971) Pipblems affecting jhe ecology of

islands in the West Gippsland region, /hid, 84,

7-17.

Osnors, T, G. B. (1923) The flota and fauna of

Nuyts Archipelago and the [nvestigalor Group

No. 8. The ccolazy af Pearson Islands, Tres,

R. bala SN. Ast, 47. 97-118.

Parker, S. A, & Cox, J, B. (1978) Notes on the

hirds of Pearson, Dorothee and Greenly ¥slands,

South Australia. (bid. 102, 191-207.

Parsons. RoP.& Gut, A.M. (1988) The effects

of sale spray On coastal vegetation at Wilson's

Promontory, Voetoria, Australia. Prac. Ro Sac.

Vict, St, 1-10,

Ranoate, R. EB (1970a) Vegetation and environ

metitan the Burbacos eoash ¢ Eeol. 58, 155-172.

—— (1970b) Salt measurements on the coast of

Barbados, West Indies. Oikos 31, 65-70.

Ropmsom, A. ©, (L980) Notes on the mammals

und reptiles of Peurson, Dorothee and Greenly

as, South Austratia, Tras. Ro Sac. 8. Aust.

93-9,

58 T, J. FATCHEN

Russert, R, P. & Parsons, R. F. (1978) Effects of

time since fire on heath floristics at Wilson's

Promontory, Southern Australia. Aust, J, Bot,

25, 53-61. ,

Scumirr, L. H. (1975) Genetic evidence for the

exislence of two separate populations of Ratius

fuscipes greyit on Pearson Island, South Aus-

trulia, Trans, R. Soe. S. Aust. 99, 35-8,

—— (1978) Genetic variation in isolated popula-

tions of the Australian Bush Rat Rartus fuseipes,

Evalution 32, 1-4, :

SHEPHERD, 8, A, & THoMas, I, M. (1971) Pearson

Island expedition 1969,—1, Narrative, Trans. R.

Sac. 8S, Aust. 95, 121-2.

& Womersiey, H. B. S. (1971) Pearson

Island expedition 1969.—7. The sub-tidal

ecology of benthic algae. Jhid, 95, 155-68,

Srecur, R. L. (1969) The vegetation of the Pear-

son Islands, South Australia: a re-examination,

February, 1960. /bid. 93, 143-52.

(1972) “The vegetation of South Australia.”

2nd edn. Govt Printer, Adelaide.

Symon, D. E. (1971) Pearson [sland expedition

1969,—3, Contributions to the land flora. Tranny.

R. Sac. 8. Aust, 93, 131-42,

Tomas, LL. M. & DeLwoy, L. B. (1971) Pearson

Island expedition 1969.—4, The Pearson Island

Wallaby. bid. 95, 143-6,

TwIpaLe, C. R. (1971) Pearson Island expedition

1969 —2, Geomorphology. Jhid, 95, 123-30.

WAISEL, Y, (1972) “Biology of halophytes.”

Academic Press, New York,

Wess, A, W. & THOMson, B. P. (1977) Archean

rocks in the Gawler Craton, South Australia.

Search 8, 34-6.

Woop Jones, F. (1923-25) “The mammals of

South Australia.” Photolitho reprint 1968. Govt

Prinier, Adelaide.

YaAaLon, D, H. & Lomas, J, (1970) Factors con-

trolling the supply and the chemical composition

of aerosols in a near shore and coastal environ-

ment. 4er. Meteoro|, 7, 443-54.

Appendix 1: Waseular plani species recorded by various expeditions to Pearson, Dorothee, and

Greenly Islands.

-++ present: ~-

absent; N restricted to northern sections (Pearson and Greenly Is,)

Sources: @Osborn (1923); Specht (1969), "Symon (1971), $Cleland (1950), original.

Pearson Dorothee Greenly

Tsland Island Island

abe e coe doc

POLYPODIACEAE

Cheilanthes tenufolia

(Burm.f.) Swartz

SCHEUCHZERIACEAE

Triglochin

mueller? Buch,

POACEAE

Axropyron scabrum

(Labill.) Beauv. + WN + + —_- —

Aureos avenacea

Gmelin

Distichlts distichophylla

(Labill.) Fusset —_ — + +

Netedantharnia racemosa

(R.Br) Zotoy, + WN —

Poa poaeformis

(Labill.) Druce

Vulpia hromoldes

(L.) S, F, Grey

Stipa

eleyani|ssima Labill, — — = + N

CYPERACEAE

Sciipus congruuy

(Nees) S. T, Blake

S. nedosus Rattb,

LILIACEAE

Bulbinopsis semibarbata

(R.Br) Borai a SS + +

Dianella reveluia R.Br + ON + +-

CENTROLEPIDACEAE

CentYolepis murray)

J, M. Black > => — ==

C. strigosa (R.Br.)

Roem, & Schult, + — —= — _- —

+ oN —— + +

+—- —- +

+ — — =

+ — ——

Pearson Dorothee Greenly

Islaned Island Island

abe e c eg die

CASUARINACEAR

Casuarina stricta Ail, + +> ~ + +

URTICACEAE

Fariviaria dehilix

(DC) Bail. + N —_—- — — —

POLYGONACEAE

Muehlenheckia adpressa

(Labill.) Meisn. — + +

CHENOPODIACEAE

Arthrecnemum

halocnemoides Nees + + — — — +

Atriplex cinerea Poir + + + + — =

A, paludeasn R.Br. + + + + + +

Chenopodium deseriorumn

J, M. Black + —_ — iit

Enchylaena tomentosa :

K.Br, + + oe — +

Muaireana uppasitfola

(PF. Muell.)

P. G, Wilson — => — — +

Rhagedia baceata

(Lubill.) Mog. + + qo — +

R. erassifolia R.Br, + + + + + +

Salicarnia quingueflora

Bunge ex Unp.-Sterb, + — — +A:

Sudeda aystralis

(R.Br.) Mog, 4+ + —_—— —- —

Thretkeldia

diffusa R.Br. + + + + ae

AIZOACEAE

Carpohrotus ressil

(Haw.) Sehwante + + + + t

Disphyma ausirale

(Ait.) N. E Brown + | 5 — +

OFFSHORE ISLAND VEGETATION

Pearson Dorothee Greenly

Tsland Island Island

abe e ce die

Tetrangonia amplexicoma

(Miq.) Hook.f, + Ff kt + + +

PORTULACACEAE

Calandrinia calyptrata

Hook.f. + + + + + —

CARYOPHYLLACEAE

Minuartia sp, + — — -_-_

Sagina apetala Ard. -- — — = —

S, maritima

Don ex Sm. & Sow. + — + —_—_ —

Scleranthus pungens

R.Br. + sN + + — +

Spergularia sp. + — + — —_- =

Stellaria media

(L.) Vill. +N —— ——

BRASSICACEAE

Hymenolobus procumbens

(L.) Nuttall ex Schinz

& Thell + — + - ——

Lepidium foliosum Desy.4+- N + + + +

CRASSULACEAE

Crassula sieberiana

(Schultes) Druce + +N _ — —

MIMOSACEAE

Albizzia lophantha

(Willd.) Benth, —- — + + _- —

GERANIACEAE

Pelargonium littorale

Huegel + 4N + + + ++

OXALIDACEAE

Oxalis corniculataL. + — — — a

ZYGOPHYLLACEAE

Nitraria billardieri DC. + +- s+ ot —_- —

Zygophyllum hillardieri

DC. — —— ao

RUTACEAE

Correa reflexa

(Labill.) Vent. + + + + + N

EUPHORBIACEAE

Beyeria lechenaultii

(DC,) Bail, + N —- —

SAPINDACEAE

Dodonaea viscosa ,

Jacq. +N +4 44

RHAMNACEAE

Spyridium phylicoides

Reiss + N —_- — —- —

MALVACEAE

Lavatera plebeia Sims

var fomerntosa

Hook.f, + N + + - —

FRANKENIACEAE

Frankenia paucifiora

be. + - b + +

THY MELIACEAE

Pimelea serpyllifolia

R.Br. + =4N —_— — + =N

MYRTACEAE

Melaleuca lanceolata

Otto + WN —_- — + +

M. halmaturorum

F, Muell. ex Mig.

Calytrix tetragrona

Labill.

APIACEAE

Apium prosiratium

Labill. ex Vent.

Daucus glochidiatus

(Labill.) Fisch. Mey.

et Avé-Lall.

Pearson Dorothee Greenly

Island Island Tsland

abe e c .e die

+ +N

+ N

+ +

Hydrocotyle comocarpa

F, Muell,

Trachymene pilosa

Sm.

EPACRIDACEAE

Leucopogon parvifiorus

(Andr.) Lindl,

Monoteca scoparia

(Sm.) R.Br.

LAMIACEAE

Westringia rigida R.Br,

var dolichophylla

Ostenf,

PRIMULACEAE

Samolus repens

(Forst.) Pers.

GENTIANACEAE

Erythraea australis

R.Br.

SOLANACEAE

Lycium australe

F, Muel,

Nicotiana suaveolens

Lehm,

Solanum nigrum L.

SCROPHULARIACEAE

Euphrasia collina

| +

var tetragona (R.Br.)

Barker

MYOPORACEAE

Myoporum insidare

R.Br,

M,. deserti A. Cunn.

ex Benth,

PLANTAGINACEAE

Plantago varia

R.Br. (s.1.)

RUBIACEAE

Galium gaudichaudii

DC,

G, murale (L.) All.

ASTERACEAE

+ |

Brachyscome iberidifolia

Benth.

Cotula coronopifolia

C. vulgaris Leutns

Cassinia spectabilis

R.Br,

Calocephalus brownii

(Cass.) F. Muelil.

+ +

Gnaphalium involucratum

Forst.f.

+ —

60 T. J. FATCHEN

Pearson Dorothee Greenly Pearson Dorothee Greenly

Island Island Island Island Island Island

abc e ce d" 2 abc e Gaixe de

Helichrysum bracteatum Senecio cunninghamii

(Vent.) Andrews -_- -— _-_ = + N DC. + N - - -

Ixiolaena supina S. lautus Forst.f.

F, Muell, ee ++ ++ ++

Olearia axillaris ms hia Net Mein x

(DC.) F. Muell, ex Fe ail a aa ¢

Ben, . ¥3 a or a Sonchus asper var

O. ramulosa Labilll + + + 2? — — littoralis J. M. Black + N — — + +4

Podolepis rugata Stuartina muelleri

Labill. Si _- = + + Sond. =

REPTILES FROM LATE PLEISTOCENE DEPOSITS ON KANGAROO

ISLAND, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY MEREDITH J. SMITH

Summary

Trachydosaurus rugosus and Tiliqua nigrolutea bones were abundant in a deposit laid down about

16 000-10 000 years BP, in Seton Rock Shelter near the south coast of Kangaroo Island. These two

species do not occur naturally on Kangaroo Island now. Much less abundant in the deposit are

bones of two unidentified elapid snakes and Varanus sp., Egernia sp. cf. E. whitti, Amphibolorus sp.

cf. A. decresii and an unidentified species of the A. barbatus species group. No species of A.

barbatus group lives on the island at present. The possible causes of the extinction of the lizards are

discussed.

REPTILES FROM LATE PLEISTOCENE DEPOSITS ON KANGAROO

ISLAND, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

by MEREDITH J. SMITH*

Summary

Situ, M. J. (1982) Reptiles from Late Pleistocene deposits on Kangaroo Island, South Aus-

tralia. Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 106(2), 61-66, 30 June, 1982.

Trachydosaurus rugosus and Tiliqua nigrolutea bones were abundant in a deposit laid

down about 16 000-10 000 years BP, in Seton Rock Shelter near the south coast of Kangaroo

Island. These two species do not occur naturally on Kangaroo Island now. Much less abundant

in the deposit are bones of two unidentified elapid snakes and Varanus sp., Egernia sp. cf. E.

whitii, Amphibolurus sp. cf. A. decresii and an unidentified species of the A. barbatus species

group. No species of A, barbatus group lives on the island at present. The possible causes

of the extinction of the lizards are discussed.

Key Worps: Reptilia, Pleistocene, Australia, Kangaroo Island.

Introduction

The reptile fauna of Kangaroo Island, South

Australia, is poor in species compared with

nearby mainland areas offering an equal

diversity of habitats (Houston & Tyler 1979).

Only 20 reptile species are natural inhabitants,

the fauna comprising five species of elapids,

ten scincids, two gekkonids and a_ single

pygopodid, agamid and varanid (Houston &

Tyler 1979). The historical background of

this impoverished fauna might perhaps be in-

dicated in fossil deposits laid down before the

island was last cut off from the mainland.

Kangaroo Island is about 145 km long and

has a land area of 4400 km?. Depths read from

Admiralty Charts and a derived glacioeustatic

curve allowed Hope et al. (1977) to infer that

Kangaroo Island was continuous with the

South Australian mainland during the late

Pleistocene. Backstairs Passage, the _ strait

between Kangaroo Island and Fleurieu Penin-

sula, would have opened between 10500 and

9300 years BP and the slightly shallower In-

vestigator Strait between Kangaroo Island and

Yorke Peninsula would have formed soon

after (9900-8800 years BP, Hope et al. 1977).

In the Seton Rock Shelter on the south

coast of Kangaroo Island a stratified, bone-

bearing deposit was found that had been laid

down before the straits formed. Two radio-

carbon dates are available, both from char-

coal (Hope et al. 1977): 10940 + 160 years

BP from the upper cultural horizen and

* Department of Zoology, University of Adelaide.

Present address: Institute of Medical and Veteri-

nary Science, Box 14, Rundle St P.O., Adelaide,

S.A. 5000.

16110 +

horizon.

The fauna of this deposit has been listed

and the implications of the differences be-

tween Late Pleistocene and present day

faunas discussed, mainly with respect to

mammals (Hope ef al. 1977). In the present

paper the reptile fossils from this deposit are

described and details are given of their identi-

fication.

100 BP from the lower cultural

Methods

Seton Rock Shelter is in the northern face

of a limestone ridge in undulating country

supporting mallee scrub. The deposit was ex-

cavated by R. J. Lampert. Two adjacent pits,

each 1 m?, were excavated in spits that varied

from 5-10 cm in depth, depending on the

stratum. The excavated material was hand-

sorted except for a few samples which were

sieved (Hope et al. 1977).

The spits were grouped into four horizons

in descending sequence: (1) an upper cultural

horizon; (2) a noncultural predator horizon;

(3) a lower cultural horizon; (4) a lower

noncultural horizon (Hope et al. 1977).

Results

Reptile bones were abundant at all levels

except the upper 3. of the upper cultural level

(Table 1). In most units the most abundant

reptile, Tiliqua nigrolutea, was represented by

a far greater minimum number of specimens

than the most abundant mammal. AIl the

bones were damaged and, in fact, very few

fragments exceeded 20 mm length. All the

62 MEREDITH J. SMITH

Pasre 1, Minimum numbers of reptiles and minimum number of all imainmals froin each

harizon of Seton Rock Shelter.

Upper Upper Lower Lower Total

cultural noncultiiral cultural noncultural

Trachydosaurus rugasus 3 37 5 13 58

Tiliqua alevaluwa 12 35 21 69 337

ef Bvernia whitti i 25 2 5 33

Voranus sp, — 1 — — 1

Amphibolurus sp. 3 j4 1 12 30

Elapid snake 1 2 | 1 5

(ray (234) (19) (101) 37D

Total mamas 127 542 62 178 909

(9) Data from Hope. ef al, 1977, Table t.

reptile bones are now lodged in the palaconto-

logical collection of the South Australian

Muscum,

SCINCIDAE

Trachydosauruy rurosus Gray

Material: Osteaderms (480); quadrates (25);

parietals (16); frontals (22); articulurs (13);

dentaries (39 left (L.), 35 right (RI); maxillue

(42L, 39R); premaxillae (2L, 1R). tooth-

bearing, fragments (15); vertebrae—cervical

(37). dorsal (105), saural (4), pygal (3),

caudal (10); humen (441; femora (14),

claviele (1), ilia (2), angulars (3), basioccipi-

tal (1),

Registered exaniples of T. rugesux; P23303,

a left dentary from the upper noneultural

horizon and P23306, parictals from the lower

noncullural horizon.

The more abundant bones listed above all

show the specific characteristics of 7, rugesus

(Smith 1976). The quadrates and articulurs

ure also distinetive. The quadrate (Pigs 1, 5)

is wider (W > 283 L) than in species of

Tilique (W = 2/3 L) and this is mainly due

to a wall of bone extending mesially from the

quadrate’s thickened strut between squaniosal

and articular facets, Hence, in 7) rugosis the

strut tics almost in the middle of the quadrate

(as viewed from behind) but in species of

Tiliqui (Pigs 2-4) the strut lies hearer the

inner edge of the quadrate, This 1s especially

conspicuous in 7, vivrolutea (Pig, 2) where

the inner border of the yuadrate js alinost

at the strut, In 7. seineoides (Fig, 3) the

squamosal articulation facet is at the inher

posterodorsal comer. In T. rugosuy and 7,

oecipitalis the posterior process of the parictal

does mot reuch the opisthotic, while in 7.

nigrolutea and T. scincoides the long parietal

process is in contact with the opisthotic dorsal

to the articulation of opisthotic and quadrate

of each side of the skull, The opiathotic articu-

Jales with the squamosal in 7) rugesus, 7.

nigrolutea and T. eccipitaliy whereas in T.

séincoidey the tiny supratemporal separates

opisthotic and squamosal.

The retroarticular process of 7, rugosits

(Figs 7,8) is infjurned mesially and is shorter

than wide, whereas in 7, seicoides and T,

oecipialis it is longer than wide (Figs 9, 10),

In 7. nivrolited the retroarticular process is

relatively Wide as in 7. ragesus, but it is only

slightly inturned (Fig. 11). 7, oeeinitaliv

differs from VT. seineaides in having a distinet

mesial process about halfway slung the inner

border of the retroarticular process (Figs 9,

1),

Titiqua nigroluted Gray

This species was abundant throughout the

deposits, except for the four uppermost units.

In one unit, the lower unit of the upper non-

cullural horizon, a minimum number of 112

T, nigrvlutea were represented, while the total

ninimum number of mammals (marsupial and

rodent) was only 203 (Table 1). Bven at the

lowest level, where bone was relatively sparse,

uminimum of 14 7. ityrolited Were recovered

compared with 42. manmimals, Considering that

an adult 7. nigrolutea weighs over 200 2 ans

that the three Psendeniy species that aceount

for most of the mammals weigh 30-70 @ the

contribution of 7, Argrelutea is significant in

terms of bulk as well as of individuals.

Material: Quadrates (55); parictals (7);

fvortals (15)) articulars (14); dentaties (327L,

269R); maxillae (213L, 206R); premaxillae

(10L, 17K); other tooth-bearing fragments

(175): vertebrae—vervical (91), dorsal (327)-

LATE PLEISTOCENE REPTILES FROM KANGAROO ISLAND 63

5mm

Figs 1-12, 1-6 quadrates, 7-12 retroarticular processes. 1. 7. rugosus, posterior view of right quadrate

in position in skull, specimen from Cunnamulla, Qld, 2. T. nigrolutea, posterior view of isolated

right quadrate, specimen from Mt Gambier, S.A. 3. T. scincoides lateral view of left quadrate in

position in skull, specimen from Murray Bridge, S.A. 4. T. occipitalis, posterior view of left quad-

rate in position, locality of origin not known. 5. 7. rugosus, P23304, right quadrate. 6. T. nigro-

lutea, P23308, right quadrate, posterior view. 7. 7, rugosus left mandible, dorsal view, specimen

from Cunnamulla, Qld. 8. 7. rugosus, P 23305, right mandible, dorsal view. 9. T. scincoides left

mandible, dorsal view, specimen from Armidale, N.S.W. 10. T. occipitalis left mandible, dorsal

view, locality of origin not known. 11. T. nigrolutea left mandible, dorsal view, specimen from near

Mt Gambier, S.A, 12. T. nigrolutea, P23309, right mandible, dorsal view.

op, opisthotic; pt, pterygoid; qu, quadrate: sq, squamosal.

64 MEREDITH J. SMITH

sacral (6), pygal (6), caudal (65); humer

(99)> femora (23); bastavcipitals. (2),

Registered exatnples of T, nierolutea: P23307,

a left dentary und P23310, parictals from the

upper nonecultural bovizori.

The osteological differences between T

nigrolutea and T. scincoidey are slight (Smith

1976) and specific determination can be made

only on complete bones. The number of com-

plete bones from Selon Rook Shelter is low,

despite the abundance of materivl, However,

wherever the diagnostic features are preserved

they are these of 7. nigrolurea. eg. the retro-

arlicalar processes en the articulars are short

aud broad (Fig, 12); in the quadrates the

strut lies close to the inner edge (Ply, 6)) the

denlaries are curved outwards; the neural

spines are usually bifid. The only exeeptions

are five dorsal vertebrae from (he upper pot-

cullural horizon which have the neural spine

undivided, though marked by a median

groove.

Because only a small amount of the material

can be specifically determined, the possibility

cannot be excluded that I. seinceldes is also

represented.

Egernia sp, ef. Exernia whit) (Lacépede)

Material Fragments af dentaries (261, 22K);

maxillae (51, SR); cervical vertebrae (1).

Registered example of Egernia sp.: P23312, a

night dentary from the upper foncultural

horizon,

The dentiries have a closed Meekelian

groove as in species of Ayernia, and they and

the maxillae are consistent with E. whirii in

size, shape and tooth-form. However the

Material may include some £, wrultlseutatea

Mitchell & Behrndt,

VARANIDAE

Vardnus sp.

Malerial; Fragments of caudal vertebrac (5),

distal end of humerus (1), Registered

cxample of Faranis spo: P2331), 9 cuudal

vertebra from the upper noncultural horizon.

This material is insufficient for specific diag-

nosis. Poranus gouldii (Gray) is abundatit on

Kangaroo Island wt present.

AGAMIDAE

Aimphibylurus spp.

Murevial> Fraginents of parietals (1); dentarles

(241, 13R); maxillae (4L, 4R); other iooth-

bearing fragments (30); verfebrae—dorsal

(3), caudal (1),

Registered exsumples of Amplibolurus spp.

Larger species: P23314, a lragment of teft

dentary, with 3 tecth. from the upper cultural

horizon, Smaller species! P23313, a left

mixilla from the upper noncultural horizon.

Becuuse size alone penerally is not a

reliable criterion four identifying reptile frag-

ments the agamid specimens are lumped in

Table 4 and in “Material” above.

Larger species Aniphiholuruy sp. ef. Ay bar-

Auris (Ouvier) and ef. A. villicepy Ahk

This species is represented only by a few

(ooth-bearing Fragments, none of them found

deeper than “level hin the upper moncultural

horizon. They conform in size and shape with

A, barbatus and A, vittierps and cannot be

positively identified, The individual tecth are

ip to tf mom tong (measured slong the jaw),

and depth of the dentary is up to 4.4 mm

No agamid now living on Kangaroo Island

altains this size.

Soaller species Amphtibolirrus sp,

deereytt (Duméril & Bibron).

Dentary tooth rows of the smaller Anphiho-

luruy species from Seton Rock Shelter are

about 11 nim long and contain up to 16

teeth, They are compuarahle with those of A

decresii which lives on Ratigaroo Island al

present.

ch. A.

ELAPIDAE

Marertals Vertebrae—dorsal (372), caudal

(2),

Identificntion of clapid vertebrae depends on

subtle differences in proportions of the cen-

trum and shape of the neural spine, accessory

processes and other processes (eu, Smith

1975). Not one of the many vertchrae from

Seton Rock Shelter Was coniplete, und very

few were sufficiently intact for the determinu-

tion of even basie characters such as relative

with of relative length of ucural spine.

Al least two species are present, one of

which appears to be referable to a species of

Notevhis, Notechis ater and Austrelaps superba

are found on Kangaroo Island at present,

Discussion

The very high in¢idence of reptile material

is unusual in Late Pleistocene or Recent

deposits i Australia, This difference may have

arisen hecause the Seton Rock Shelter deposit

accumulated largely from prey and earfion

eslen there by Tasmanian Devils (Surcophilits

herrisit) (Hope et vl, 1977). whereas in most

LATE PLEISTOCENE REPTILES FROM KANGAROO ISLAND 65

other cave deposits much of the bane was

deposited by roosting owls (eg. Archer &

Baynes 1972, Snuth 1977). In the deposit in

Devils Lair, Western Australia, which. despite

the oame of the cave, probably accumulated

from Several sources, the relative ubundance

of lizards fluctuates. throughout the 335 000

year span of accumulation, Significantly, the

proportion af lizards relative to mammals in-

creased in terminal Pleistocene time to a peuk

in one particulur layer in Devils Lair where

a minimum of 80 lizards were found aod a

lotal minimum of 49 mammals, The propor

tion of lizards declined rapidly in the early

Holocene. Although the Leards were not

specifically identified, yery small! skinks were

predominant (Balme e¢/ of, 1978), Lizards

were present but did not dominate the fauna

of several deposits which were thought to have

originated almost! entirely as the foou remains

ot Davvurus viverrinuy (Wakefield 1960),

The Seton Rock Shelter fauna includes three

species of lizard thal do not now occur

naturally on Kangaroo Island. Tiliqua nigeo-

lutea was abundant on Kangaroo tsland

between 16 000-10 000 years BP; since then it

has become extinet on Kangaroo Island.

However it has survived on several Bass

Strait islands, most of which Were isolated by

the rising sea level about 12 000-10 000 years

ago (Rawlinson 1974) and all of which ure

smaller than Karigaroo Island. Trachydosaurts

rigosus and also the larger agamid species died

out on Kangaroo Island, th 1926, 100 indi-

viduals of T. puvosus were released pear Rocky

River homestend and specimens are seen

occasionally in that area (Houston & Tyler

1979), Some individuals of TWiqua seineoides

were released al a luler lime (Houston &

Tyler 1979).

In the search for 4 cause for these local

extinctions several factors can be considered.

Climate is ane factur. Tiligua nigrolutea is now

confined ta the cool temperate gone in saulh-

eusiern New South Wules. southern Victoria,

Buss Scrait istands, Tasmania and southeastern

South Australia where it does pot oceur

further north or west than Mt Gambier (Raw-

linson 1974). Such a distribution suggests that

T. nivrolutea might be adversely affected by

increusing aridity. On the other hand, the

present distribution of T. rugosus extends inio

semi-arid areas (Cogger 1975) where the eli-

mate is far hotter und drier than on Kangaroo

Island, For both species to have died oul

because of climahe ¢hatige would have re-

quired a drastic climatic reversal in the

Holocene.

Another factor that can be considered is

habitat chanye occurring in the absence of

marked climatic change, Considering the mam-

malian and avian faumal changes too Hope

et al. (1977) hypothesized that most of the

extinctions on the island vould be ateributed

to an inerease in dense scrub ahd reduction

of open areas im Tesponse to increasing rain-

fall and reduction in burning after the dis-

appearanee of the Aboriginal population

(Hope et al. 1977), Traeclydosaurus rugosis

und species of the 4, barbatus group live in

woodland and tore open habitats (Cogger

(975, Houston 1978): reduction in open areas

would be imintical to these species, However,

the preferred habital of 7. nigrolutea includes.

not only woodland but also heath and dry

sclerophyll forest, although it is most active

in clearings surrounded by dense heath or

arboreal vewelation (Rawlinson 1974),

A third factor might be the interaction with

other animal species, The disappearance of the

Aborigines may have allowed the population

of Varwius gould] to inerease (Hope 1981)

Varanus gouldii s represented by only six frag-

ments In the material recovered from Seton

Rock Shelter, yet it is now abundant (Houston

& Tyler 1979), Lizards are eaten by WV. gould

(Houstan 1978).

The contributions of the various facters to

the extinction of the lizard speeies cannot be

determined except very broadly. However the

presence of 7. nigralutea. VT. rugasus anc the

agumid species of the 4. harbatis group shows

that the impoverished reptile fauna of Kan-

mirod Island has resulled by attrition of a

richer fauna.

Acknowledgments

Dr J. Ho Hope, Australiin National Univer-

sity. made the material available to me for

study. Ms Ruth Hughes prepared the figures,

References

Arcuen, M, & Baynes, Ay (1972) Prehistoric

mammal faunas from two soisll eaves in the

extreme southwest of Western Ausiralin, J. FR

ae. (ho atast. BS. 80-89.

Bacme. .. Mrrrivers, D.. & Porter, J. K. (1978)

Lite Quaternary remains, spinning ubaut

sH000 years from excavations in Devil's. Luit,

Western Austrulia, Sofa @1, 33-65,

66 MEREDITH J. SMITH

CoccerR, H. G. (1975) Reptiles & Amphibians of

Australia. Reed, Sydney.

Hope, J. (1981) A goanna in the works. Austra-

lian Archaeology 12, 115-122.

Hope, J. H., Lampert, G. J., EpMonpson, E.,

Situ, M. J., & Van TeTs, G. F, (1977). Late

Pleistocene faunal remains from Seton rock

shelter, Kangaroo Island, South Australia. J.

Biogeog, 4, 363-385.

Houston, T. F. (1978) Dragon Lizards and

Goannas of South Australia. South Australian

Museum, Adelaide.

Houston, T, F. & TyLer, M. J. (1979) Reptiles

and amphibians. Jn Tyler, M. J., Twidale, C. R.

& Ling, J. K., eds “Natural History of Kan-

garoo Island”. Royal Society of South Austra-

lia Inc., Adelaide.

RAWLINSON, P. A. (1974) Biogeography and

ecology of the reptiles of Tasmania and the

Bass Strait area. Jn Williams, W. D., ed. “Bio-

geography and ecology in Tasmania”. Junk, The

Hague.

Situ, M. J. (1975) The vertebrae of four Aus-

tralian elapid snakes. Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust.

99, 71-84,

SmitH, M. J. (1976) Small fossil vertebrates from

Victoria Cave, Naracoorte, South Australia, IV,

Reptiles. /bid. 100, 39-51,

SmitTuH, M. J. (1977) Remains of small mammals

including Notomys longicaudatus (Gould)

(Rodentia: Muridae) in owl pellets from the

Flinders Ranges, S.A. Aust. J. Wildl. Res. 4,

159-170,

WAKEFIELD, N, (1960) Recent mammal bones in

the Buchan district. Vict. Nat. 77, 164-178.

SENNERTIA OUDEMANS (ACARI, CHAETODACTYLIDAE) ON

AUSTRALIAN BEES

BY A. FAIN

Summary

The hypopodial stages of Sennertia described by Womersley from Australian bees are reidentified

as S. (Afrosennertia) queenslandica Womersley, S. (S.) leei sp. nov. and alfkeni Oudemans.

SENNERTIA OUDEMANS (ACARI, CHAETODACTYLIDAE) ON

AUSTRALIAN BEES

by A. Fatn*

Summary

Fain, A. (1982). Serinertia Oudemans (Acari, Chuetaductylidue) on Australian bees. Trans. R.

Sac. 8. Aust. 106(2), 67-70, 30 June, 1982.

The hypopodial stages of Sennerriq described by Womersley from Australian bees are

reidentified as 8. (4 frosennertia) queenslandica Womersley, &. (5.) leei sp. nov. and alfkeni

Oudemars,

KEY Woros: Acari, Chactoductylidae, Sennertia, beck, taxonomy.

Introduction

In a revision of Sennertia Oudemans, 1905

by Fain (1981), the hypopi described by

Womersley (1941) as S. queenslandica, sp.

noy, and §. ?difilis Canestrini were not in-

cluded as they were unavailable, J have since

examined them and can repert that 8. queeny-

landica belongs i) the subgenus Afrovennertia

and that none of the hypopr referred to as §

*hifilis belongs to that species, some being §.

(§.) leeé sp. noy. whilst others are 8. (S.)

alfken’ Oudemans. These are the only speci-

mens of Sennertia recorded from Australia.

All are from xylocopid bees, and are de-

posited in the South Australian Museum, Ade-

laide unless otherwise stated,

Sennerlia (A frosernnertia) queenslandica

Womersley

FIGS 1-2

Sennertia queenslandica Womersley. 1941: 479,

figs 16.

Sennertla (Aslosennertia)

1981: 176.

Deseriplion of hypopi> Lectotype 435, long,

378), wide. Three paralectotypes—430, *

350u, 420, % 435, 410, % 360. Posterior

margin of soma rounded.

Dorsum: Cuticular striations thin. Cuticle

very finely punctate. WHysteranotal shield

triangular, 160, long, 159), wide posteriorty:

without median selerites prolonged ventrally

and bearing setae d3, d4, d5 and J5. Setac

wef tl and d2 microsetae, Setae se e, /1, 12, 13,

ho 70, TS, 45, Sly, 63. long respectively.

Setae /5 200-230), lang, 66), apart.

Venter: Setac sh 27 long, other ventral

setae very thin. Suctorial plate surrounded by

sclerotized frame 63» wide, Diameter of

queenslandica: Fain,

"Institute of Tropical Medicine, Antwerp B-2000,

Belgium.

anterior suckers 12), of posterior suckers

19-21, latter slightly longer (214) than wide

(18-19),). Conaids small, situated on slightly

concave line.

Legs: Claws very large (GIL 55p, UL 48y

long). Pretarsi with long triangular process.

Tarsi 1V 63, long, 1S wide at base (para-

types 61 to 69, % 15,), bearmg 4 micro-

sefac and | long apical setae. Tarsi 1-I1 with

3 thin, short subapical setae and 2 longer,

stronger non-follate ¢nediodorsal setae, tarsi

MYT with 1 thin apicoventral seta and 3 long

non-folrate dorsal setae. Solenidia wl and w2

distinetly shorter than «wd.

Material examined: Lectotype (N198112) and

12 paralectotypes (N1981135-N198124), ex

Mesotrichia bryaruim, Moa td, Torres Strait,

Queensland, S, W, Schomberg, On two slides.

Remarks: As Womersley only designated the

above specimens as syntypes, | have designated

a lectotype, S. queenslandica was provisionally

placed in the subgenus Astayennertia by Fain

(1981) but, after examination, T now include

it in Afrosennertia, [lt is distinguished from

S. (AL) feanalext Bain and 8. (A.) hasilewskyi

Fain by the very thin dorsal striations. It is

distinguished from $8. (A.) monicae Fain by

the relatively smaller length of tarsus TV (ratio

leneth/width = 1:4 to 1:4, 6), the more

apical placement of the ventral setae of tarsus

IV, the more rounded shape of the dorsal

shield, the much greater length of selac se e,

Hand 73 compared with /2 and h, and the

greater size of the body and claws

Sennertia (Sennertia) leei sp. nov.

FIGS 3-4

Deseriptian af hypepi. Holotype 310, long,

240), wile.

Dorsum; Cuticular striations separated from

each other by punctate bands. Hysteronotal

shield 220, long, 135y, wide (maximum), with

68 A: FAIN

Figs 1-2. Sennertia (Afrosennertia) queenslandica Hypopus: 1, Ventral view; 2. Dorsal view.

irregular borders, attenuated in anterior third,

and with short posteromedian sclerite; pro-

longed ventrally and bearing setae dl to d5

(all very short and thin). Setae se i microsetae.

Setae se e, /1, 12, 13, and h 62y, 48y, 45, 37

and 60, long respectively. Setae /5 180, long

(in paratype) and 39), apart.

Venter; Setae sh thin, 27 long. All ventral

setae very thin, some long (cx I, cx III).

Suctorial plate 60, wide; diameter of anterior

suckers 12, of posterior suckers 15. Conoids

small, lateral ones on same line as posterior

suckers.

Legs: Claws I-lIf 33, long. Pretarsi without

process. Tarsi IV 12, long, 11. wide at base,

bearing 1 short ventral seta, 2 very short

AUSTRALIAN SENNERTIA 69

Figs 3-4. Sennertia (Sennertia) leei spmov. Hypopus: 3, Dorsal view; 4. Ventral view.

upicoventral setae and very long apical seta.

Tarsi [-Il with 3 short preapical setae, one

ventral being rod-like, slightly curved in apical

half and 18, long. Tarsus I] with thin api-

coventral seta. Dorsal surface of tarsi I-III

with 3 long non-foliate setae. Solenidion 3

much longer than wl.

Material examined: Holotype (N19811) and

12 paratypes (N19812-N198111; 1 in author's

collection). ex Lestis hombylans, near

Ku-rin-gai. N.S.W., “Ratm. Coll.” On three

slides.

Remarks: Species named after Mr D. C. Lee.

South Australian Museum. S. /eei belongs to

70 A. FAIN

the “cerambycina” group. It is well charac-

terized by the unusual nature of the dorsal

striations, these being thin but separated from

each other by very finely punctate bands. In

all the other species of this group the striations

are either thick and punctate, or very thin

and not separated by punctate bands.

Sennertia (Sennertia) alfkeni Oudemans

Ti eRe alfkeni Oudemans, 1901: 115, figs

18-20.

Seavert alfkeni: Fain, 1974: 229 (fig. 11, 12, 15,

Sennertia ?bifilis: Womersley, 1941: 480 (figs 17

in part) (not Sennertia bifilis Canestrini, 1897).

Material examined: Four hypopi (N198129,

N198130, 2 in author’s collection), ex Meso-

trichia bryorum, Moa Id, Torres Strait,

Queensland, S. W. Schomberg. Four hypopi

(N198125-N198128), ex M. bryorum, Bowen,

Queensland. On four slides.

Remarks: S. bifilis Canestrini was described

from Xylocopa combinata from Astrolabe

Bay, New Guinea. I redescribed the type

material of S. alfkeni from Xylocopa circum-

volans from Japan (Fain 1974); this corre-

sponds very well with the specimens called

“Sennertia ?bifilis’ by Womersley (1941).

References

Fain, A. (1974) The hypopi of the genus Sen-

nertia Qudemans, 1905, described by Oudemans

(Acarina, Sarcoptiformes). Zool. Meded.,

Leiden 48 (20), 219-231.

(1981) A revision of the phoretic deuto-

nymphs (hypopi) of the genus Sennertia OQude-

mans, 1905 (Acari, Astigmata, Chaetodactyli-

dae). Syst. Parasit. 3, 145-183.

WomersLey, H. (1941) Studies in Australian

Acarina (2) Tyroglyphidae (s.l.) Rec. S. Aust,

Mus. 6 (4), 451-488.

AUSTRALIAN ACANTHOCEPHALA NO. 15: FOUR SPECIES

BY S. J. EDMONDS

Summary

Four species of Acanthocephala are reported from Australian hosts. The parasites are

Nipporhynchus carangis (Yamaguti), Prosthorhynchus cylindraceus (Goeze), Neoechinorhynchus

tylosuri Yamaguti and N. aglis (Rudolphi).

AUSTRALIAN ACANTHOCEPHALA No. 15: FOUR SPECIES

by S. J. EpmMonbs*

Summary

Fpmonns, 8. J. (1982) Australian Acanthocephala No. 15:

S, dust, 106(2), 71-76, 30 Tune, 1982,

Four species. Trans. R. Sac.

Four species of Acanthocephala are reported from Australian hosts. The parasites are

Nipporhynchus carangis (Yamaguti), Prosthorhynchus cylindraceus (Goeze), Nearchino-

rhynehus tylosuri Yamaguti and N. agilis (Rudolphi).

Key Woros; Acanthocephala, Australia, taxonomy.

Introduction

Four acanihocephalans are reported trom

Australia. The parasites, their hosts and the

localities where they were collected are

stated in Table 1. The following abbreviations

are used in this paper; S.A, (South Australia),

N.S.W. (New South Wales), Vic. (Victoria)

and Ql. (Queensland).

Account of species

Nipporhynchuy carangiy CYamaguti, 1939)

FIGS 1-3

Rhadinoriynchus carangis Yamaguti, 1939: 341;

Golyan, 1969; 65-66,

Nipporhynechus carangis: Ward, 1951: 293,

Protorhadinorhynchus — carangis: Petroschenko,

1956, figs 795-796; Yamaguti, 1963; 110,

Host and locality of specimens examined:

Trachinotus russelli Cuvier: Heron L, Qld;

coll. H, M. Manter.

Type host: Caranx mertensi Cuvier & Valen-

ciennes, from Inland Sea, Japan: type speci-

men; Yamaguti Helminthological Museum,

Material: One female and three males

examined,

Description

Trunk: Long, slender, cylindrical. Male 11-14

* 04-08 mm, female 13° * O4-0.6 mm,

Anterior region of both sexes with strong body

spines, extending mote posteriorly on ventral

side (for about | of trunk length), Spines

arise from a cuticular sheath. No posterior

or genital spines,

Introvert; Very long, cylindrical, offen curved

and fully extended in two specimens; length

2.1-2.4 mm, width slightly variable about 0.2

mm and usually narrower in posterior 4s.

Introvert hooks in 10 longitudinal rows of

34-38 hooks per row: hooks placed ventrally

usually slightly longer and always more

slender than dorsal hooks which are stouter

and more curved. Largest ventral hooks

0.070-0.078 mm, largest dorsal hooks 0,065—-

0.070 mm. Posterior hooks smaller, especially

towards base, about 0.04 mm long, Most

posterior row, however, most prominent, con-

sisting of longer (about 0,055-0,070 mm) and

sharper hooks placed almost at right angles

to introvert surface, Short unarmed neck,

0.1-0.2 mm long.

Introvert sheath: Very Jong, 3.1-4.3) mm,

double walled? (single-walled according to

Yamaputi), Position of ganglion not clear.

Lemnisci: One-half to ? length of sheath,

tending to broaden posteriorly,

TABLE 1. Parasites, hosts and loculities

Parasite Host

Locality

Nipporhynchus carangis

(Yamaguti, 1939)

Prosthorhynchus cylindraceus

(Gocee,, 1782)

Neoechinorhynchus tvlosurus

(Yamaguti, 1939)

Nevechinorhynchus agilis

(Rudatphi, 1819)

Tylasurus sp.

Trachinotus russell? Cuvier

(syn. T. botla Cuvier & Valenciennes)

Tardrs merula Linnaeus

Acridetheres tristiy Linnaeus

Crenimugil crenilabis (Forskal)

Muvil cephalus Linnaeus

Heron Ts., QL.

Werrihie, Vic.

Heidelberg, Vic.

Heron Is,, Qh,

Heron Is.. Ql.

Heron [z., QI.

* South Australian Museum, North Terrace,

Adelaide, S. Aust, 5000,

8S. J. EDMONDS

(

——

=— SYS

Figs 1-3. Nipporhynchus carangis. |. introvert, 2. posterior region of introvert. 3. trunk spines (scale

in mm)

Figs 4—

Testes: Ellipsoidal, 0.9-1.3 X 0,35-0.45 mm,

tandem or slightly overlapping.

Cement glands: Long, tubular to pyriform,

pressed closely together; number not known.

Female complex; Uterus very long, about 4.5

mm, slender; embryonated eggs slender and

fusiform 0.053-0.058 ™* 0.008-0.012) mm,

m).

. Prosthorhynchus cylindraceus. 4. male. 5, introvert.

with pronounced polar prolongations. Genital

pore sub-terminal.

Systematic position

These specimens resemble most closely

Rhadinorhynchus carangis Yamaguti, especially

in the length and armature of the introvert.

AUSTRALIAN ACANTHOCEPHALA 73

The introvert sheath of his specimens, how-

ever, fy said to be single-walled

The generne position of the species seems,

however, to be uncertain. Ward (1951: 293)

considered if as a Nipporhynchus “chiefly be-

cuuse of the presenee of four cement glands

and the prominent arcuate hooks at the base

al the prohuseis”, Petroschenko (1956) and

Yumaguti (1963) transferred ou to Pretor-

hadinorhynchus in whieh (1) the sheath js

single-walled and (2) the egg is elliptical,

Golvau (1964) udmitted Nipporhyuchiy

cadenan Golvan & Houin but deeded against

the validity of the genus in 1969. There seems

little doubt to me that the Australian speci-

mens are the same as Yamaguti'’s species and,

like Ward (1951), 1 consider them as

Nipporhynchus corangis.

The specimens resemble in some respects

Rhadinerhynchuy cadenali (Golvan & Houin

1964) but differ significantly beeause the

latler possesses 1h rows of 25-26 hooks and

not 10 rows af 34-36 hooks per row, Golyarn

(1969) gives Trachinatus yereensiy as one of

the hosts of RR. eadenati,

T have also compared the parasites fromm

Trachinojus rasselli with those af Mleserntiy

edmondsi Golvan 1960 ( - Elioventis furcatus

of Johnston & Edmonds, 1957) in my posses-

sian, In #. edmeandsi the number of rows of

introvert hooks is greater, the field of trunk

spines extends to the posterior of the warn,

the eggs are elliptical and larger and the uterus

1% short anc not very Tong.

Prastharhynchus evlindrdceus (Goeze |

FIGS 4-5

Frosthortiyvachus evlindracens (Goere 1782);

Yamiiguti, 1963: 152,

Prasthorhyachus iransversus (Rudolphi, 1819);

Meyer. 1932: 123; Golvun, 1960: 578.

Hosts: (1) Taurdus mervla Linnaeus, coll, P.

Whitely. Heidelberg, Vie.. 23.ii.74. (2)

Acridatheres tristis Lannaeus, coll, I Beveridge,

Wertibie, Vie. 3.11.74

Both are introduced birds.

Devcription

Trunk: Smooth, without hady spines. Male,

length 5-8 mm, maximum width (in anterior

half) 1.9+1.3 mm; subeylindrical, tending te

taper slightly at extrennlies, Female. larger

und siouier, fengtlh 6-13 mm. maximum width

1.4+1.9 mm.

Intrevert: Cylindrical, Male, length of armed

region 0.93-1.0 mm, maximum width 0.22—

0.27 mm, Female, length 0.98-1.1 mm, width

0,25-0.30 mm, Armed with 14-16 rows of

12-14 hooks per raw. Size of hoaks almost

uniform (0.080-0.086 mm. measured from tip

to anterior-most point), except last two of

each raw which are smaller (0.055—-0,070 mm)

and more spinifarm. Shor, sspinose neck

0,14-0,.20 mm long. Introvert arises slightly on

yertal side of longitudinal midline.

Introvert sheath: Length t.7-2.1 mm, width

0.30-0.45 mm. Double-walled. Cerebral

ganglion im posterior third.

Lemnisci: Two, tubular, up to twice length of

sheath,

Male system; Two ovoid lestes, contiguous ar

tandem, 0.5-0.9 mm long, Cement glands tong

and pressed Closely together, extending

anteriorly usually to base of second testis. Male

aperture terminal.

Female system: Eges, none with fully de-

veloped embryos: length 0.045-0.052 mm,

width 0.016-0.020 mm, without polar pro-

longations, Female complex with total length

1.2-1.9 mm. Female aperture subterminal on

ventral side

Systematic position

J have been unable to distinguish these

parasites. from FP. cylindraceus (Goeze, 1872)

described from 2» oumber of European birds

including Tyrdas merula. According to Golvan

(1960) P. cylindracensy and P. iransversus

(Rudolphi, 1819) are synonymous. The Aus-

tralian specimens resemble in a number of

respects both = Praythorhyachus — pittaruin

Tubangui, 1935 (rom Pitre atricapiller) and

P. limnobaeni Tubanwui, 1933 (fram Porzane

fused). They differ from the former largely

in the size of the egg (0.105-0.130 mm) *

(0,045-0.050 mm). and from the latter in the

number of introvert hooks. Prostherhyvnehus

charadriti Yamaguti, 1939, reported from

Charadrins eneullanis in SA. by Johnston &

Edmonds, 1947, possesses 17 raws of 17-18

hooks per raw.

Both Vurdus and Acridatherey are ttro-

duced genera und it is possible that the birds

brought the parasites with them. How the life

eyele ot the parasite then managed ta become

estublished in Australia ts puezling in many

ways. Yamaguti (1963) lists Mernla (from

New Caledoniu and Mesalutus (from north

Australia) as hosts of Po eylindracens, Tf P.

74 8S. J. EDMONDS

cylintraceuy Was already established in a

native bird it is possible that the parasite found

its way into blackbirds when they were intro-

duced, Schmidt (1981: 597) reports two

juvenile specimens of P. cylindraceus trom an

Australian “pigeon”. There seems little doubt,

then, that the species is present in a number

of birds in Australia.

Neoechinorhynchus tylesuri Yamaguti

FIG. 6

Neoechinarhynchus tylosuri Yamaguti, 1939; 347,

figs 25, 35, 49-50,

Host: Single male specimen collected from

gul of Ty/losurus sp. at Heron Is., QL, by

H, Manter in Aug, 1963; SAM V2932. The

Great Barrier Reef Handbook, Series No. 1,

lists. Tylosurus crocodilus, T. giganteum, T.

incisus and T. macleayanus among the fishes

of the island.

Type host; Tylosurus schismatorhyuchus; type

locality, Lake Hamana, Koti, Japan,

Description

Trunk: Long, very slender and cylindrical;

length 24 mm, width 0.5-0.8 mm; without

spmes and hooks,

Introvert: Small in comparison with size of

trunk, subspherical, 0.11 mm long, maximum

width 013 mm. Although some hooks

damaged, clearly it is armed with six spiral

rows cach of three hooks per row. Anterior-

most hook is about 0.06 mm long, second

about 0.03 mm and last 0.023-0,028 mm,

Introvert sheath: Length 0.22 mm, width 0.13

mm and single-walled,

Lemnisci: Long and of unequal length, 2.0 and

3.4 mm,

Testis: Two, arranged in tandem in posterior

half of trunk, 1,6-2.2 mm long.

Cement gland: Long (4.5 mm), syncytial, con-

taining about 20 nuclei. Male aperture ter-

minal.

Syslematics

The details of this specimen correspond very

closely with those of Neoechinorhynchus

iylosuri Yamaguti, the type host of which is

Tylosurus sehismatorhynchus from Japan.

Southwell & Macfie (1925) described

Nevechinerhynchus magnus trom an unknown

Queensland fish. Their rather brief description

ig bused on a single immature (?), female

specimen 90 mm long. The introvert of N.

imagnus, however, is reported to be small, sub-

Fig. 6. Neoechinorhynchus tylosuri, Male (scale

in mm),

globular and armed with 18 hooks placed in

three rows. The largest (terminal) hook was

0,060-0.071 mm long, the middle one 0.030-

0.037 mm and the smallest about 0.018 mm,

Since the length of the female trunk of N.

tylosuri is given by Yamaguti as 21-70 mm it

seems just possible that N. magnus and N,

tylosuri are conspecific. I have recently exam-

ined the type of N. magnus (lodged at the

Liverpool School of Tropical Medicine and

AUSTRALIAN ACANTHOCEPHALA 7

Hygiene). It is much less than 90 mm long,

almost opaque and seems to lack an introvert.

No other specimen of N, magnus is known.

Consequently the question about the synonymy

of the two species has not yet been answered.

Neoechinorhynachus agilis (Rudolphi)

FIGS 7-8

Nevechinorhynchus —agilixs, —(Rudolphi,

Yamaguli, 1935: 275-6; 1939; 345,

Hosts: About 20 specimens from the small

intestine of Crenimugil crenilahis and Mugil

cephalus from Heron Is., Ql. Coll. H. Manter

in Aug. 1963.

1819),

Type host: Mugil cephalus; type locality,

Mediterranean Sea.

Description

Trunk: Tends to be slender and taper

posteriorly, Body wall thick, without spines

and containing numerous circular lacunae in

hypodermis; with eight subcuticular giant

nuclei, Male, length 8.2-11.8 mm, maximum

width 0,7-1.2 mm, Female, length 8.1-13.2

mm, width 0.7-1.3 mm.

Introvert: Globular, arising from a_ short,

unarmed neck. In male, length 0,11-0.14 mm,

width 0.12-0.15 mm; in female corresponding

measurements are 0.13-0,15 mm and 0.12-

0.15 mm, Armed with six spiral rows of three

books per row. Length of first hook (measured

from tip to highest point on anterior curve)

0.089-0.12 mm, of second 0.040-0.051 mm

and third 0.030-0.040 mm, Well developed

posteriorly directed rooting processes present

in hooks 1 and 2. Unarmed neck, 0.12-0.18

mm Jong, 0,09-0.14 mm wide (where it joins

trunk).

Introvert sheath: Subeylindrical and long for

such a short introvert; length 0.51-0.60 mm,

maximum width 0.13-0.17 mm.. Single-walled

Cerebral ganglion towards posterior extremity

in most specimens.

Lemnisci: Two, long, approximately equal in

size, tubular, sometimes reaching to mid-

region of trunk.

Male system: Two ovoid testes, tandem or

contiguous, in middle third of trunk; 0.45—1,1

mm long, 0.22-0.50 mm wide, Cement gland

(as long as 1,1 mm), a syncytial mass con-

taining 8-14 nuclei. Male aperture terminal.

Female system: Rather small, total length

0,55-0.87 mm. Eggs small, most containing

not fully developed embryos, 0.023-0.029 mm

0-05

Figs 7-8. Neoechinorhynchus agilis. 7, male. 84.

hooks from introvert. 8b, hooks from introvert

of Fx uldrichettae (figs 8a and 8b to same

scale).

76 S.J. EDMONDS

long, 0,008-0,010 mm wide. Female aperture

lerminal to slightly ventro-terminal,

Syslematics

Yamaguti (1963) lists 39 species of

Nevechinorhynchus trom fishes and more have

been described since 1963, Ir is very difficult,

however, to find significant differences between

some of them and it seems likely that a

number will eventually be shown to be synonye

mous.

N. avilix was described from Mugil cephalus

caught at Spezia, Italy. Van Cleave (1919)

thought that N. agilis was probably restricted

ta species of Mupil of the Mediterranean,

Yamaguti (1935, 1939), however, reported

and redescribed the species from Mugil

cephalus caught in Japan, The parasites from

the mullets caught at Heron Is. resemble

closely those from Japan wnd Ttaly and are

considered to be N. ayilis.

The specimens from Heron Is. also closely

resemble N, aldrichettae Edmonds, 1971 from

S.A. The main difference is in the size and

shape of the introvert hooks, particularly the

first of each row. Fig, 8 shows hooks from

both N. aldrichettae and N. agilis (the latter

from Heron I[s.). They are drawn to the same

scale. The differences are marked and con-

sistent.

References

Epmonos, 8. J. (1971) Australian Acanthocephala

No, 13: Three new species. Trans, R, Soe, 8.

Aust. 95 (2), 55-60.

Gorvas, Y. J. (1960) Le Phylum des Acantho-

cephala (3. note). Lu classe de Palueacantho-

cephala Meyer, 1931, Ann, Parasit, 35 (1-2),

138-165; 350-386; 713-723.

, (1961) Le Phylum des Acanthocephala (3.

note). La classe de Palaeacanthocephala

Meyer, 193], /bid, 34 (1), 76-91,

——, (1969) Systématique des Acanthocéphales.

Liordre des Palaeacanthocephala Meyer 1931,

Mem, Mus. National d'Hist, Natur. as. A

(Zool) 57 (1), 1-373,

——, & Houin, R. (1964) Révision des Palaca-

canthocephala. 2. note. La famille des

Gorgorhynchidac Van Cleave & Lincicome. Ann,

Parastl, hum, comp. 39 (5), 535-605.

Jounsron, T, H. & EoMonns, S. J, (1947) Austra-

lian Acanthocephala No. 6. Rec. 8. Aust. Mus.

8 (4), 555-562.

— &«k » (1957) Acanthocephala.

B.A.N.Z.A.R.E. Ant, Res. Exped. 1929-1931,

Rep, B & (5), 92-98,

Mryrr, A. (1932), Acanthocephala. (in) Bronn’s

“Klass. u, Ordn, d. Tierreichs.” 4 (2), 1-583

(Leipsig),

Perroscumyko, V. L (1956) Acanthocephala of

domestic and wild animals. Akad. Nauk.

S.S.5R., 1, (435 [in Russian.

Scumipt, G, D, (1981) Plagiorhynchus formosis

Van Cleave 1918, u synonym of Plagiorhynchus

eylindraceus (Goeze, 1782) Schmidt & Kuntz,

1966. J. Parasitol. 67 (4), 597-598.

SouTiweir, TT, & Macrin, N. (1925) On a

collection of Acanthocephala in the Liverpool

School of Tropical Medicine. Ann. Trop, Med.

Parasit, 19 (2), 141-148,

Tupanaut, M. A. (1933) Notes on Acanthocephala

in the Philippines. Philipp. J. Sei. 50, 115-128.

. (1935) Additional notes on Philippine Acan-

thocephala. [bid 56 (1), 13-19.

Van Ci.rave, H. J. (1919) Acanthocephala from

the Ilinois River, with descriptions of species

and a synopsis of the family Neoechinorhyn-

chidae, Bull. Ji. Nat. Hist, Surv, 13 (8), 225-

257,

Warp, H. L. (1951) The species of Acanthace-

phala described since 1933. J. Tennessee Acad.

Sel, 26 (4), 282-311,

YAmaouts, S$. (1935) Studies in the helminth

fauna of Japan, 8 Acanthocephala I, Jap, J

Zoal. 6 (2), 247-278,

. (1939) Studies in the helminth fauna of

Japan. 29, Acanthocephala TT, hid. 13 (3).

317-351.

—, (1963) Systema Helminthum. 5. Acantho-

cephala 423 pp. Interscience Publishers (J),

Wiley), New York

VEGETATION APPARENTLY RECORDING FORMER EXTENSIONS OF A

PALEOSOL

BY ROBERT T. LANGE AND KYM P. NICOLSON

Summary

An explanation involving former extensions of a paleosol is proposed for enigmatic vegetation

distribution near Whyalla, South Australia, and attention is drawn to expectations that recent land

clearing in the area will result in the emergence of more evidence.

BRIEF COMMUNICATION

VEGETATION APPARENTLY RECORDING FORMER EXTENSIONS OF A

PALEOSOL

An explanation involving former extensions of

a paleosol is proposed for enigmatic vegetation

distributian near Whyalla, South Australia, and

altention is drawn to expectations thal recent

lund elearing in the area wall result in the emer-

genee of more evidence,

We refer to South Ausiralian Geological Atlas

1 mile series map 773 zone 5 (Cultuna) showing

the Simmens Platewu between Black and Stony

Points near Whyalla,|§ The Mumbalo with patches

of Wonga pedoderm is the main surface of up-

lands, flanks and plains.” This surface carries

muinly treeless saltbush-bluebush shrubland in

the region specified, Superimposed on this land-

scape are more or less parallel clongate tracts

of red Siliceous sand running NNW-SSE across

general contours (Fig. lad. The Cultana map

codes and describes them Qy, fixed desert seif

dunes and associated sandspread with Kunkar

developed as B zones in the soil profile!, We

think they ate equivalent to Holocene aeolian

sands over Pecbinga paleosol discussed by Firman

(p. 95).

Each of these sand patches shows clearly on

airphotogruphs due to matching canopy-cover of

Evcaly pins socialis mallee, of which the associated

shrub flora fe.g. Cratystyliy conocephula, West-

rinvia rividia, Olearia pimelinides) is restricted 10

@s and adjoining coustal fringe Qe. Nowhere in

the region cun seedling or juvenile E, soctalis

presently be found. On the other hand, excepting

the enigmatic instance discussed below, the precise

restriction of FE. secialiy to Os. in the area, implies

that the sands offer the only lecal situation in

which &. secialiy seedlings can establish, when

they do appear:

Interposed in this scene is a Further &. seetatis

bund with the same NNW-SSB trend but on Mum-

balo pedoderm not Os, and thus overtly out of

typica| habitat (Fig. tb). It is exceedingly wind-

pruned and shrubby, lacks ifs usual associates,

and has lignotubers not markedly elevated.

Our interpretation is that this £. seeialiy pateh

reeords the distribution of a former shallow Ow

tract now removed by wind. The basic idea

applying lo the region as a whole is that £,

yocinlis requires unoccupied Qy sand for seed-

lings, but that once established if copes without

further dependence on sand or seedlings, for

the lifespan of its lignotutbers, There are sound

hotanical reasons to believe that Jignotubers.

which carry successive generations of “trees”,

can live for many centuries, if not indefinitely.

Calculalions as to the anmhquity sust of old

BLACK POINT

Fiz, I(a) edaphic layout Os red sand, Mw =

Mumbalo pedoderm with Wonga palches; Qe -

emerged beach deposits; (b) vegetation layout

Es = £, socialis mallee with associates, FE — F

socialiy mallee without associates; Sb — si}tbush-

blucbush low shrubland; Ae = avid eoustal serub.

Scale: chartwidth 5 km, Location: vertical cheek-

nmurks 137°45°E, lower margin 33°S.

stem scurs upon some lignolubers in this area,

based wn fragmentary data about growth and

decay rales, siggest 300 years or more for

the stem scars alone; the subtending lignotubers

thus are much older by at least the age of present

replacement stems. That longevity permits the

species to persist, outlining the former extent of

its sand seedbed, long after the sand and the

Opportunity to establish seedlings may have been

removed.

An opportunity to jeara more about the situa-

tidn now offers. Late in L981, un Access Corridor

180 m wide was constructed through the main

local E. socialis tract, completely devegetating

the Qs sands in its path. This sets up botanically-

important alternative outcomes to be observed as

time passes, One is that £. socialis seedlings might

volunteer on the cleared sand. That would sug-

gest that their absence from existing tracts is due

to full adult occupancy. It would also establish

that climate allowing original takeover to the

Qs by E. socialis, earlier in the Holocene, need

have been no wetter than now. Alternatively, E.

socialis seedlings might not volunteer on the clear-

ing. That would suggest the original takeover

was under climate more pluyial than now, since

seed-sources could not be closer than at present.

‘South Australia. Dept. Mines and Energy (1964).

Geological Atlas 1 Mile Series Map No, 773

Zone 5 Cultana.

‘Local trees produce much seed and tests show it is

highly viable.

The out-of-context E. socialis patch is impor-

lant because it re-emphasizes that historical not

contemporary edaphics explain some current vege-

tation distributions, and because it shows that

adult presence of a species on a particular soil

type may not necessarily mean that its seedlings

can now volunteer on that soil, There are many

enigmatic instances in the Whyalla region of

plants out of typical edaphic context, for instance

E. brachycalyx near Barbours Dam on Middle-

back Station, in western myall-saltbush-bluebush

association. We suspect its explanation is allied

to the present case.

“Jessup, R. W. & Wright, M. J. (1971). Geo-

derma 6, 275-308.

‘Firman, J. B. (1981). S. Aust. Dept. Mines and

Energy Rept Bk No. 81/40.

ROBERT T. LANGE and KYM P. NICOLSON, Department of Botany, University of Adelaide, Box

498, G.P.O., Adelaide, S. Aust. 5001.

THE SPECKLED BROWN SNAKE PSEUDONAJA GUTTATA PARKER: AN

ADDITION TO THE FAUNA OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY BRIAN MILLER

Summary

On 29.v.81, at 1715 hrs, B. Miller and J. Bredl, Jr., captured a curl snake, Suta suta, which was

entering a crack in the ground at Goyder’s Lagoon, South Australia (27°37°S, 139°10°E). It was a

large male specimen (SVL = 565 mm), and it promptly disgorged another snake which it had

swallowed, tail first. The disgorged snake was alive and, subsequently, identified as a speckled

brown snake, Pseudonaja guttata (Fig. 1). This is the first recorded specimen of P. guttata in S.A.

and represents an extension of the known range of the species of approximately 400 km (Fig. 2).

BRIEF COMMUNICATION

719

THE SPECKLED BROWN SNAKE PSEUDONAJA GUTTATA PARKER:

AN ADDITION TO THE FAUNA OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

On 29.v.81, at 1715 hrs, B. Miller and J. Bredl,

Jr., captured a curl snake, Suta suta, which was

entering a crack in the ground at Goyder’s

Lagoon, South Australia (27°37’S, 139°10’E). It

was a large male specimen (SVL = 565 mm), and

it promptly disgorged another snake which it had

swallowed, tail first. The disgorged snake was

alive and, subsequently, identified as a speckled

brown snake, Pseudonaja guttata (Fig. 1). This

is the first recorded specimen of P. guttata in S.A,

and represents an extension of the known range

of the species of approximately 400 km (Fig.

2) 12

The specimen (S. Aust. Mus., R20582) is a

juvenile female with the following characteristics:

SVL = 265 mm; tail length = 45 mm; scales at

midbody = 21; ventrals — 202; subcaudals =

55 + (tip of tail is missing); supralabials =

6 + 6; infralabials = 7 + 7; nasal and preocular

scales in point contact; postoculars = 2 + 2;

canthal ridge weakly evident; iris reddish forming

an incomplete circle; buccal cavity predominantly

black; dorsum uniform pale fawn with minute,

widely scattered black spots; venter cream

coloured, barely flushed with orangish pigment

at the mid-ventral line. This description of colour

corresponds closely with the predominant coloura-

tion of P. guttata from Northern Territory and

Queensland.1. Specimens examined from _ those

Fig. 2. Distribution of Pseudonaja guttata. Shaded

area is range of species at headwaters of

Georgina and Diamantina rivers (from Cogger

1979).

Fig. 1. Pseudonaja guttata (SAM R20582), Goyder’s Lagoon, S.A, (SWL = 265 mm).

slates formed two populations, separated by an

apparent gap of some 300-400 km.2 Northern

Territory populations of P. garata are restricted

to the “black soils” of the Barkly Tableland at

the headwaters of the Georgina River.) Queens-

land populations examined by Gillam ate in

the Cooper Creek and Diamantina River drain-

ages; the latter river flows through Goyder'’s

Lagoon, The snake from Goyder's Lagoon is most

like the Queensland population in number of

midbody scales, subcaudals and infralabials, This

agreement, as well as a@ Common occurrence and

close proximily along, the Diamantina River

drainage, suggests that the population of FP,

gultata al Goyder’s Lagoon is an extension of the

Queensland population.

Goyder's Lagoon is u broad floodplain with

sinuous channels and low levees, partly overlain

with dunes, tt consists of a partially degraded,

mixed cover of natural serubland, Jow fringing

woodland, herbaceous ground cover and hummock

grassland, used extensively for livestock grazing,

Dominant native plants include Eucalyptys niiero-

theca, Muehlenbeckia cunninghami and Bauhinia

1Cogger, H, G, (1979). “Reptiles and Amphibians

of Australia”. (revised ed.) Reed, Sydney.

“Gillam, M. W. (1979), The genus Pseudonaja

(Serpentes: Blapidae) in the Northern Territory,

Res. Bull. (1) Terr. Parks & Wildl. Comm,,

Alice Springs, N.T,

tCSIRO. (1977). Environments of South Austra-

lia, Province 8 Northern Arid, Cooper's Creek

Environmental Association, CSIRO Diyn Land

Use Res. pp. 208-211,

'Coyacevich, J., McDowell, §, B., Tanner, C. &

Mengdon, G, A, (1980). The relationship of the

Taipan, Oxyuranus scutellatus, and the Small-

Scaled Snake, Oxyurdnus microlepidotus (Serpen-

carronti” Tn addition lo Psewlonaja guttata and

Suta sula, the area supports populations of the

inland taipan, Oxyuranus micrelepidotus (SAM

R14649, RIAKSIA & B, RIKO51-52, R20583),

known only from the Diamantina and Cooper

Creek drainages in §,A. but found throughout

southwestern Queensland. Common and western

brown snakes, P. revrilis (RI9854-55, R19943) and

P. nuchalis (R5326), respectively, whipsnake, De-

mansia psaninephis (RL9BSL), woma python,

Aspidites ramsayi (R14720), Children’s python.

Liasis childreni (R15303) and carpet python,

Python spilotes (R19222), also occur in the

area? Undoubtedly, future collecting at Goyder's

Lagoon will locate other species previously

believed to be restricted to adjacent areus of

Queensland and Nofthern Territory,

We are grateful to foe Bredl, Jr. for assistance

in the field, Roman Ruehle prepared Figure L and

Jenny Thurmer Figure 2, Janine Casaretto kindly

lyped the find] manuscript, We also thank Jeanetle

Covacevich, Queensland Museum, und Graeme

Gow, Museums und Art Galleries of the Northern

Territory, for loans of specimens.

tes: Elapidac). In Banks, C. B. & Martin, A. A.,

(eds), Proc Melbourne Herpetological Sympo-

sium, Royal Melbourne Zoological Gardens, Mel-

bourne, pp. 161-168.

"Broad, A. J., Sutherland, S, K., Tanner, C. &

Covaceyich, J. (1979), Electrophoretic, enzyme,

and preliminary toxicity studies of the venom of

the Small-Scaled Snake, Parademansia miicrale-

pidota (Serpentes; Elapidae), with additional data

on its distribution, Mem. Qld Mus. 19; 319-329,

"Schwaner, ‘T, D, & Miller, B, (personal observa-

tions, April 1981),

TMirtschin, P. J. (1980), Report on visit to Goy-

ders Lagoon, April, 1980. Unpublished,

BRIAN MILLER, 7 Frazier Ave. Salisbury East. S. Aust. 5109 and TERRY D. SCHWANER,

South Australian Museum, North Terrace, Adelaide, 5. Aust. 5000,

SUPERGROUP CLASSIFICATION IN THE ADELAIDE GEOSYNCLINE

BY WOLFGANG V. PREISS

Summary

Stratigraphic nomenclature and classification in a basin of such size, duration and observed lateral

facies variations as the Adelaide Geosyncline are complicated. Before the appearance of the

Australian stratigraphic code, it was not customary to distinguish between chronostratigraphic and

lithostratigraphic nomenclature.

BRIBE COMMUNICATION

SUPERGROUP CLASSIFICATION IN THE

ADELAIDE GEOSYNCLINE*

Stratigraphic nomenclature and classification in

a basin of stich size, duration and observed Jateral

facies variations as the Adelaide Geosyneline are

complicated. Before the appearance of the Austri-

lian stratigraphic code’, it was not customary to

distinguish between chronostratigrapbic and lithe-

a{ratigraphic femenclature, David? suggested

“Adeliide Series" for a sequence approximating

the Precambrian portion of the sedimenly of the

Adeluide Geosyncline as now known, Mawson &

Sprige* applied the term “Adelaide System" to this

sequence, and their defininon and subdivision

guined wide secceptance, The Adeliide System* anu

its subdivisions (Table 1, and the additional lower-

most Willouran Seriest) are clearly chronostrati-

grapme Wi form, yet it is debatable to what extent

uo timeconnotution was originally intended for

them, Daily? argued that these terms had been

used in a purely lithostratigraphic sense, and

proposed that the corresponding lithostratigraphic

terms be substituted (able 1). For the Adelaide

Superuroup, he retained the Adetnice region us

type locality, and considered inclusion of the

Willouran Series? as erroneous, The base of the

Adelaide Supergroup and Torrens Group was de-

fived as the base of the Aldwate Sandstone: the

(op of the quarizites and siltstones along the

Willunga Scurp wis specified us lop of the Marino

Gioup and Adelyide Supergroup, Thus, the

Adelaide Supergroup includes neither the Willouran

hor those uppermost formations of the Precant

brian sequence thal are now known to be absent

in the Adelawle region: Bunyeroo Formation

(except perhaps for a thin red shale near

Willunga), Wonoka Formation and Pound Sub-

group!)

Becuuse of problems of (he mappubility of

Daily's? rock units in areus away from their type

loculities, and bevsuse of disagreement with his

exclusion of ihe Willouran from the Adelaide

Supergroup. Thomson ef «al? defined four now

lithostrarigraphic units with different boundaries

thal could be qnore cesily mapped throughout the

Adelaide Geosyneling (Table 1). Por purposes of

general reference und discussion of geological

history, the old system and Series terms were

retained fy a chronostrutigeaphic sense. There is,

however, no pretence {hut the series bounduries

can be located with precision away from their type

areas. The ‘Torrensian-Sturtian and Sturtian-

Marinoan series bounduries fall within continuous

sifuligraphic sequences, and the — lithological

changes that define thenr in the type localities are

likely to be diachronous tn other parts of the busin

Tante (. Evolutian af higher-rank lithastrati-

graphic classification, Adelaide Geosyncline.

Mawson and 3Ip.5 Thomson 7

S880

Thits papet

Lake brome £5

Thome

Wireawe 15

No figher—rank flassficatidn

r Lomarstune

braposer toy Garnier iocks

Furation

Hawker Group

sane ea Wap

ravenna Ferinatinn “s

raupieival “wineratl arm

Warmanville Group

MORALANA SUPERGROWP

Witpons

Group

Wiloena

Grou

Marnilit Marin

Saven

Gent

rev

Umbetaane 4

Tian

Uivletsrana

Gyo

WEYSEN BLIPERGROUP

Shennan Sr

Beira ‘mune

ADPLAIE S43

AUELAIOE SUPZPEROU?

Hurry

Jnl Torani miu

Beties Dip Group

tree

P-%-9

Cahanne 13

Cro

ey Tainan

Pewter

tnnls

WARRINA SUPERGHOUP

far

aavtinnesnnnh

ary ti

reg Nal wilaindltos mith

Nevertheless, rock unils siraligraphically further

from the boundaries can still be confidently

assigned to one or unother seriés, e.g. the Wil-

louran volcanics, ‘Torrensian magnesites, and

Sturtian and Marinoan tilfites, Following Durn ef

al “Adeluideun” if now used in preference to

“Adelaide” for the System and corresponding

Period.

There iy still a need for a higher-rank litho-

stratigraphic terminology for Adelaide Geosyncline

thut is jndependent of the chtunastratigraphic

scheme. Muny major sequences Originally des

cribed as series in other parts of the warld (ew.

the Bell and Windermere Series of North

America) have siftee been changed to supergroups.

However, | da not fayour simple substitution af

Adelaide Supergroup for Adelaide(an) System

because:

(1) Adelaide Supereroup has been used® to refer

to what is now known to be only 4 part of the

Precambriin sequence in the Adelaide Geosyncline.

Chis usage is unacceptable ip the light of more

recen! mapping, yer use of the term in aw different

sense could cause confusion.

12) Tt as valid to retain Adelsidesn in its chrano-

stratigraphic Sense. applicuble to Australia, even

though there is no intention or need fo impose

this lerm world-wide as a late Proterozoic chrono-

stratgraphic unit,

“Published with the permission of the Director-General of Mines & Energy.

(3) Use of the term “Adelaide Supergroup” alone

takes no account of the equal need for highersank

lithostratigraphic classifieation of the Cambrian

unin in the Adeluide Geosyncline,

(4) Assignment of all the Precamblian vock units

of the Adelante Geosyncline ta one supergroup

implies that they form one genetic ently, vet thar

they are genetically distinct from the Cambrian

sediments,

(5) Geological mapping. especially since Thom-

son's er al? subdivision, Was demonstrated that the

most significant break within the Adelaidean

sequence i9 beneath Lhe glaciogemic sediments al

the base of the Umberatina Group (as redefined

by Forbes"). This contact varies from un erosional

disconformity to a high-ingle unconformity, and

marks major tectonic and palaeogevgraphic reud-

qustments in the Adelnide Geosyncline during

Sourtian time. Similat uneonformities are recog-

mised below equivalent late Adeladean ghiciogeni¢

sequences in the N.T\, western N.S,W, and W.A,

Another major break 1 known ucross the continent

between Cambrivn tnd late Precambrian deposits}

in the Adelaide Geosyneline this is marked by ihe

disconformily between the Parachilna Formation

ar the buse of the Cambrian Hawker Group for

Uratanna Formation! where present) and rhe

underlying latest Precambriin Pound Subgroup,

These two major unconformities are considered

to be of equal regional sivnificance and lo he

suitable positions for supergroup boundares, On

the other hand, @ major tectonic event has been

posiuJated!'!12 between the Callanna Group (re-

defined hy Forbes ef af") and the Burra Group

bul Il find the evidence for this meonclusive,

Although the basal Burta Group transgressed

directly on to erystalline hasement in the Adelaide

region, while in certain basin-margin situations

(e.g. Depot Creek, Arkaroala) it rests discon.

formably on Willowran voleanies. yet in ofher

areas tm the basin depocentres Callana-Rurca

sedimentary contacts are rarely preserved and are

most commonly disrupted by Jater tectonic dis-

loeation. Nevertheless thick Willouran sequences

are known above the yvoleanics in these depo«

centres, Such sequences share muny similarities

of facies ond sedimentation style wilh the Burra

Group and in places their distinction from the

Burra is uncertain’,

‘Thus the sedimeots of the Adelaide Geosynctine

full into three major sequences, each wilh Its own

TRageatt, HG. (1950), Aust J, Sei 12) 170-177.

"David, TW. B, (1932), “Explanatory notes to

Accompany a NeW gedlogical map of the Com-

monwealth of Australia", CSIR, Sydney

‘Mawson, D, & Sprigg, R, C. (1950) Aust J.

Sci 13: 69-77.

‘Sprigg, H. Cy. (1952). tne Gluessner, MF. &

Rudd. E, A. (Eds) Sir Dovelas Mawson Anniver-

sary Volume: 1593-159, Univ. Adel,

“Dally, B. (1963), Rec, § Aust Mus. b4: a?¥-

lithologic, teclanie una palueageoeruphic features

und each separated from the preceding sequence

by @ regional unconformity, The first two

sequences are of Adelaidean age; the third is Cam-

brian, I is considered appropriate to apply super-

group nomenclature to these sequences, (Tuble 1),

as formalised belaw:

WARRINA SUPERGROUP {new name!

The Warrina Supergroup, cambining the

Cwlanna and Burra Groups which record the first

stages of deposltlon in the Adelaide Geosyncline,

is mimed aller the disused railway sicing aad the

WARRINA 1:250000 map sheet area, where very

thick development af these groups pré preserved,

Type seetions: The Callania Group has strutotypes

in the “Arkaroola” (Arkaroola Subgroup) and

Willouran Ranges = (Curdimurka Subgroup)

regions; the Burrs Group bas stratotypes In the

Auburn-Clate region’,

HEYSEN SUPERGROUP (new name)

The Meysen Supergroup combines the Umbera-

tana and Wilpena Groups, and is named after the

Heysen Range of the central Flinders Ranges

Where representative sections of the constituent

groups are magnificently exposed, The contact

between these groups is mostly conformable, and

froth prowps record major transgression on fo

crutonic platforms udjacent to the Adelaide Gev-

syiicline, Glaciogeni¢ sedimentation characterises

te base wand top of the Umberatana Group,

whereas the Wilpena Group is cutirely post-wlactal.

Type sections: The Umberatana Group hus a type

section in the porth Flinders Rages’ and the

Wilpenn Group tas type sections in the central

Flinders Ranges?

MORALANA SUPERGROUP (oew name)

The Moralann Supergroup is proposed to include

all Cambrian rocks in the Adelaide Geosynctine,

(Table 1).

Type seetions: Suratotypes of che Flinders Ranges

sequences have been defined and described in the

vicinity of “Wirrealpa’!®, and those of the remain-

der on Fleurieu Peninsula 01915, The Supergroup

is named alter the Moralana area of the central

Flinders Ranges, about 20 kat south of the nearest

complete exposures of the Hawker and Lake

Frame Groups.

The pew names have been approved and

reserved by the Stratigraphic Nomenclature Com-

mittee af the Geological Sociely of Australia’,

\Webh, B. PL & Horwitz, RoC. (1959). Aust. J.

Sei, 2) (88-189, Tr this paper the Murinoun

Scries Was extended upwards lo include these

formations af the Flinders Ranges.

?Thomson, ®. P., Coats, R. P., Mirams, Ro C...

Fortes, B, G,, Daleurna, C, R, & Johnson, J. F.

(1969), Q, eeol Notes, geo), Surv, S, Aust, 9

1-19,

“Doon, PR. Plamb, K. A, & Roberts, IL G,

(1966) 1. peol. Sow. Aust, 13: 593-608_

‘Worbes, B G., (1967.) ©. geal Notes, geol-

Surv, S. Aust, 24: 6-8,

10Daily, B., (1972). In: Jones, J. B. & McGowran,

B. (Eds). “Stratigraphic problems of the later

Precambrian and Early Cambrian. Univ. Adel.

Centre for Precambrian Research Sp. Pap. |}:

13-41.

11Murrell, B. (1977). “Stratigraphy and tectonics

across the Torrens Hinge Zone between Anda-

mooka and Marree, South Australia”. Univ.

Adel. Ph.D. thesis, unpubl.

12Rowlands, N. J., Blight, P. G., Jarvis, D. M. &

von der Borch, C. C. (1980). J. geol. Soc. Aust.,

27: 55-68.

13Forbes, B. G., Murrell, B. & Preiss, W. V.

(1981). Q. geol. Notes, geol. Surv. S. Aust., 79:

7-16.

14Ambrose, G. J., Flint, R. B. & Webb, A. W.

(1981). Bull. geol. Surv. S. Aust. 50, 71 pp.

Daily, B. (1956). In: “El sistema cambrico, su

paleogeografia y el problema de su base”, Rep.

Internat. geol. Congr. 20th, Vol. 2: 91-147.

16Daily, B. & Milnes, A. R. (1972). J. geol Soc.

Aust., 19: 197-202.

17Although not normally recommending the use

of the same geographic term for stratigraphic

units in adjoining States, the Committee did not

consider that confusion would arise between the

Warrina Supergroup and the mid-Proterozoic

Warrina Park Quartzite of Queensland.

WOLFGANG V. PREISS, Dept. Mines & Energy, Box 151, Eastwood, S.A. 5063.

VOL, 106, PARTS 3 & 4

30 NOVEMBER, 1982

Contents

Transactions of the

Royal Society of South

Australia

Incorporated

Southcott, R..V.. Vitamin A content of the liver of the Australian sea lion Neo-

phoca cinerea (Péron) and its-toxicological significance - -

Hutchings, P. A. & Turvey, S. P. The Nereididae of South Australia - - -

De Deckker, P. Australian aquatic habitats and biota: their suitability for

palaeolimnological investigations - - - - - -

King, M. A new species of Gehyra (Reptilia: Gekkonidae) from Central

Australia = - - : = ES . = = = Q

Petney, T. N., Bull, C. M. & Andrews, R. H. A stable boundary between two

species of reptile ticks on Eyre Peninsula, South Australia =

Blackburn, G., Allison, G. B. & Leaney, F. W. J. Further evidence on the age of

tuff at Mt Gambier, South Australia - - -

De Deckker, P., Bauld, J. & Burne, R. VY. Pillie Lake, Eyre Peninsula, South

Australia: Modern environment and biota, dolomite sedimenta-

tion, and Holocene history - - - - - - -

Burton, T. E. Mangrove development north of Adelaide, 1935-1982 - -

Benbow, M.C. Stratigraphy of the Cambrian-?Early Ordovician, Mount Johns

Range, NE Officer Basin, South Australia = - - - -

Brief Communications:

Mirtschin, P. J. & Reid, R. B. Occurrence and distribution of the inland taipan

Oxyuranus microlepidotus (Reptilia: Elapidae) in South Aus-

tralia - - - - - - - - - -

Neverauskas, V. P. & Butler, A. J. Tolerance of blue crab, Portunus pelagicus

(L.), to high temperature = - - - < - - -

yon der Borch, C, C. & Grady, A. E. Wonoka Formation and Bay SEymes Beds:

Reconnaissance interpretation - < F

McDonald, K. R. & Miller, J. D. On the status of Lechriodus fletcheri

(Boulenger) (Anura: Leptodactylidae) in northeast Queensland

145

155

159

163

169

183

191

213

215

217

220

PUBLISHED AND SOLD AT THE SOCIETY’S ROOMS

STATE LIBRARY BUILDING, NORTH TERRACE, ADELAIDE, S.A. 5000

VITAMIN A CONTENT OF THE LIVER OF THE AUSTRALIAN SEA LION

NEOPHOCA CINERA (PERON) AND ITS TOXICOLOGICAL

SIGNIFICANCE

BY R. V. SOUTHCOTT

Summary

Analyses are presented of the vitamin A (retinol) content of the liver of a series of females of the

southern Australian sea lion, Neophoca cinerea (Péron). These show a range of 79-11,964 IU/gm of

wet liver (four specimens). These figures are comparable with the previously recorded levels of

vitamin A in the livers of certain species of seals in which the consumption of liver is known to be

responsible for toxic effects in man. The significance of these figures is discussed, and comparisons

made with data for some other carnivores. Figures are also presented for the serum vitamin A levels

of N. cinerea, of 0.3-2.0 umol/l (five specimens). A significant correlation (P = 0.05) between the

weight of the seal and the log. (serum vitamin A level) is found in the series.

VITAMIN A CONTENT OF THE LIVER OF THE AUSTRALIAN SEA LION

NEOPHOCA CINEREA (PERON) AND ITS TOXICOLOGICAL SIGNIFICANCE

by R, V. SoutrscortT*

Sommary

Soutucorr R. V. (L982) Vitamin A content of the liver of the Australian sea lion Neopheca

cinerea (Péran) and its toxicalogical significance, Vrans, R, Soe, §. Ansl, WG(3), 85-91,

30 November, 1982,

Analyses wre presented of the vilamin A. (retinol) content of the liver of a series

of females of the s0Uthern Australian sea lon, Neophora cinerea (Péron). These shaw a

range of 79-11,964 TU/gm of wet liver (four specimens). These figures are compuruble

with the previously recorded levels of vitumin A in the livers of cerlain species of seals

in which the consumption of liver is known to be responsible for toxic effects in man, The

significance of these figures is discussed, and comparisons made with dala for some other

curnivores, Figures pre also presented for the serum vitamin A levels of N, cinerea, of

0.3-2.0 #mol/! (live specimens), A significant correlabon (P

- DNS} tetrween the weight

of the seal and the log. (serum vitamin A level) is fotind in the series.

Key Worps: Liver vitamin A, toxicity, Australinn sea lion, Neephoca cineree.

Introduction

Vatious species of vertebrates ate known to

accumulate high levels of vitamin A (retinol

in the liver. Thus certain species of sharks ancl

fishes have been exploited commercially as

sources of vitamin A, Various mammals have

also been recorded as having levels of vitamin

A in the liver such that human toxicities have

followed the ingestion of amounts of liver

which tay be customarily consumed at a

meal, Among such mammals are the sperm

whale, Physeter caladon (L.) (Moore 1967),

the polar bear, Vhalaretey maritinus (Phipps)

(Rodahl & Moore 1943; Rodahl |949a,b,c;

Russell 1967), and various species. of Arctic

seals andl other carnivores, such as the Arctic

fox, A/opex lagopus (L.) and the husky, Cartls

familiarly L. (Southeott ef al. 1971).

It is generally considered that such an

accumulation of vitamin A represents the end

of a food chain involving cartonoid accu-

mulation and metabolism. Human intoxica-

tions resulting from such ingestions have been

considered important in the ecology of the

Eskimo, and accidental poisonings from such

sources have affected the history ot polar

exploration in both the Arctic and Antarctic

regions {de Veer 1598, |609: Rodahl 1949¢c;

Halsicad 1965, 1970; Cleland & Southeott

1969h: Shearman 1978).

Among the seals or Pinnipedia, some species

have heen identified as having livers ioxic, or

possibly toxic, On ingestion by man, e.g, the

*2 Taylors Rd, Mitchum, S. Aust. 5062

Arctic hearded seal, Eringnathus barbatris

(Ersteben), ihe Greenland seal, Phoca groen-

landira Prxtleben, while other species, such as

the Atlantic grey seal, Halicheerus gryprs

(Babricius) and the Weddell seal, Leptony-

chores wedilelli (lesson), have been shown ta

have much lower levels of hepatic vitamin A,

such that ingestion i quantities which may

customanly he eaten is unlikely to cause

symptons (Rodahl & Davies 1949; Rodahl &

Moore 1943: Southeott ef al. 1971; Southcott

1975, 1979)

For purposes of discussion, we may eon-

sider thal a “hearty meal” of liver or other

equivalent meat could weigh 500 g.

Southern Australian records of toxicity

associated with human ingestion of seal liver

In southern Australian waters there has

been evidence suggestive of toxicity Fellowing

the eating of seal liver since the carly days

of European settlement, Thus Leigh (1839)

recorded, after a visit lo South Australia im

1937, that in the aborigines ",., fatal conse-

quenecs oftem ensue from their Feasting on

seal, especially the lion white seal, the flesh

of which kills dogs in twenty minutes, and is

uot to be eaten with impunily by any until

it is quite putrid, when, they say, it is harness.

f myself have eatery the black hair seal, when

fresh meal was scalee, but it Was a young one.

which ... made hut a bad meal”.

This repert probably originated from the

Encounter Bay district of South Austrata.

Although Leigh (1839) made na reference to

BG R. V, SOUTHCOTT

the liver as having been the part of the seal

flesh associated with the toxicity, yet it would

seem probable thal such toxicities followed

the ¢ating of fiver (see the discussion in

Clelund & Southeatt 1969a),

In various parts of the world there have

been records of toxicities that have followed

the eating of seal meat, and in many cases

there is reference to the liver as the suspected

ease of the toxictties. Commonly these stories

relate to shipweeeked sailors, or isolated cast-

aways or explorers, so that rarely does the

Opportunity of submilling such data to more

exact analyses oectir,

As un example of this Péron (1816) Te-

carded that, on King Island in’ Bass Strait,

which the Baudin expedition visited in De-

cember, 1802, a group of English sailors had

diseovered, in the case of the then numerous

elephant seals, Mirounga leanina (1.9, “With

regard to the Jiver, which is sought after in

some species of scals, in the sea clephani it

seems Lo have some noxious substance: for the

English sailors having Iried to eat it, ex-

pericneed an overwhelming drowsiness, that

Jasted) several hours, and which re-occurred

felvery time that they partook of — thes

treacherous food" (ianslation of Mieea 1971

yy. 32),

ft was not until 1971 thal analyses of the

vilamin A conten of the liver of this species

were made, indicating a toxic level (1080,

1240 10/2 of wet livers two speeimens)

(Southeott et af, 1971). The mean of these

(wo readings is 1160 Tl/s, Accepting this

fioure, then 500 ¢ of wet liver would contain

580,000 10), which is somewhat lower than the

fieure generally accepted in the past, of

1,000,000 LJ, as representing 9 toxic dose for

an adult; however vitamin A levels in the

liver of most species tested have show u

ecousiderable variation; this is diseussed further

helow.

At the present time the range of the southern

elephant seal, Mf Jeanine. is generally con-

sidered a subantaretie one, and the southern

coastlines of Alstralip are only rarely visited

by stragglers, However, it is apparent thar be-

fore European setilement of Australia, ml wees

present in some numbers in the offshore

islands of mainland southern Ausiralia and

Thsmama,

fy southern Australian waters the Austra-

han fur seal, arelevephalias pusifins derilerns

Jones is at the present time crnfined to the

coasts of the south-eastern part of the cow-

tinent (King, 1969; Stirling & Warneke 1971).

Tins is now considered a subspecies of the

Cape Fur seal, 4. prsillus (Schreber) of South

Africa, Studies of the hepatic vilamin A con=

tem’ of A, pusilliy doriferny have been made

hy Southeott er al. (1974), who recorded a

range of 360-15,000 10/2 of wet liver (mean

- 3711 1/2: 8S. DD — 2835 TU/g; 1 = 30).

More extensive studies on the hepatic vita-

min A content of the Cape fur seal, A, pusillus

pusillus, have been made in the Republic of

South Africa and in South-West Africa, where

the livers of this seal were processed com-

mercially fer their vitamin A yield, over

1941-1949 (gs well as for their skins and

blubber oil) (Shaughnessy 1981) (see further

below. Table 4)-

The much rarer species of southern Aus-

tralian seal, the southern Australian sea lion

Neophaca cinerea |Péron, 1816), survives tm

small populations on offshore islands of South

and Western Australia (Stirling 1972a, 1972b;

Ray & Ling 1981), Only recently have spect

mens of this species become available for a

detuiled study of the hepatic vitamin A con-

tent, The results of this investigation are de»

tailed below.

Technical inethods

The seals were caplured ag part of a scient

fic stuily programme to be recorded in full

elsewhere, incliding studies on morphology,

biochemistry, reproductive physiology, and

other aspects, meluding trace elements and

pollutants analyses,

In each case approximately LOO g of liver

was tuken immediately after death from pen-

fothal anaesthesia. ancl placed at once in a

polythene bug, preserved im solid COu

( 785°C), ancl transferred lo refrigerator

storage (at ~16 to ~ 20°C) emtil the analyses

were mude. Samples of scrum were taken at

the same time, and preserved similarly. for

later analyses,

The vitamin A analyses have been made by

the Carr & Price (1926) method, and the

serum vitamin A levels hy the fluorometric

procedure of Hansen & Warwick (1968).

Results

Five spocimens of N. einerca were taken.

Each was a fenwile, Data on the location and

date of capture, the weight, length and girth

recorded, the hepatic vitamin A content and

VITAMIN A IN THE AUSTRALIAN SEA LION NEOPHOCA CINEREA

Taste |. Data on the vitamin A analyses, location data, and physiological status of five specimens of

the southern Australian sea lion, Neophoca cinerea (Péron).

EE.

Liver

vitamin Serum

Collectors’ Acontent vitamin A Physio-

Serial master Weight Length* Girth (IU/g, level logical

No. No. Locality Date (ke) (cm) (em) wetliver) (“4mol/1) state |

NCI AS23 Dangercus 28.x.80 60.6 155.5 91.5 79 0,3 Not lactuuing

Reef, Embryo

8. Aust.? present

NC2 — Dangerous 28.x.80 76.7 — aa a 0.3 No data

Reef,

5. Aust.

NC3 AS24 Dangerous 29,x.80 65.3 157.0 78 1185 0.3 Pregnant:

Reef, foetus aged

S, Aust. 3) months

present

NC4 AS25 = Seal Bay, ISB) 871 158.5 _— 35818 2 Lactating,

Kangaroo with

Island, §-weeks-old

§. Aust.+ pup

NCS AS26 Seal Bay, {8,81 94.8 163.0 — 11 964 1.6 Lactating,

Kangaroo with

Island, 6-weeks-old

5S. Aust. pup

Means 4761.5 0.9

(n=4) (n=5)

* Curvilinear length measured according to lhe method of the committee on Marine Mammals (1967).

7 Collected by J.C, Fanning, A. Nicholson & J. K. Ling.

TaBil 2. Correlation matrix for weight, curvilinear lengit, log. (liver vitamin A content)

and log, (serum vitamin A level) for four specimens ef Neophoca cinerea,

log. (liver log. (scrum

Variate weight curv.-length vit. A) vit. A)

weight 1,0000

curv.-length O.9111% 1,000

log. (liver vit. A) 0.9189% 0.8566 1.0000

log. (serum vit. A) 0.95454 0.7488 0.8427 1.0000

* Significant at the 10% level of probability,

+ Significant at the 5% level of probability.

the serum vitamin A level, and notes on the

physiological state of the animal, are presented

in Tuble 1.

Submitting the four variates weight, curvi-

linear length, log. (liver vitamin A content)

and log. (serum vitamin A level), for the

four animals NC1, NC3, NC4 and NCS, to a

correlation analysis produces the correlation

matrix in Table 2,

There has thus been found a significant

degree of correlation between: (1) weight of

the animal and its curvilinear fength (P =

10); (2) weight of the animal and the log.

(liver vitamin A content) content (P = .10);

(3) weight of the animal and the log. (serum

vitamin A level) (P -05). (Since the series

includes only four animals, it appears reason-

able to utilize the 10% level of probability as

well as the 5% level in drawing inferences.)

If the variate weight is teplaced by weight

1/3 a similar correlation matrix is generated,

with the same levels of probability in the com-

purisons as shown for the weight,

In a previous study it was found that in a

group of 24 females of the fur seal Areto-

cephalus pusillus doriferus, there was a signi-

ficant degree of correlation between the log.

(hepatic vitamin A level) and the weight of

the animal (Southcott er al. 1974). (The

logarithm of the vitamin A content of the liver

was chosen then because of the highly skew

distribution of the liver vitamin A levels; it is

88 R. V. SOUTHCOTT

therefore thought appropriate to use the

logarithms of the vitamin A variates for study

in the present work.)

Discussion

In the past it has been not uncommon for

it to be stated in textbooks of medicine or

pharmacology that a toxic dose to man is re-

presented by 1,000,000 TU of vitamin A.

Although this is a realistic figure for acute

toxicity in a child, in an adult a more realis-

tic figure for a dose which can cause acute

toxicity is in the range 2,000,000-5,000,000 IU

(Hayes & Hegsted 1973). It has appeared to

me for some time that since most intoxica-

tions following the ingestion of seal and other

carnivore liver are in respect to adults, a

realistic dose representing acute toxicity could

be accepted as 3,000,000 IU.

In Table 3 is shown the amounts of liver

(wet weight) which are equivalent to 1,000,000

and 3,000,000 IU of vitamin A, for the four

specimens of the present study.

TABLE 3, Amounts of liver of Neophoca cinerea,

as wet weight, equivalent to I 000 000 and

3 000 000 IU of vitamin A.

Equivalent to Equivalent to

1 000 000 IU 3 000 000 TU

Seal

specimen g Ib zg Ib

NCI 12658 27.9 37 975 83.7

NC3 843.9 1.86 2 531.6 5.58

NC4 171.9 0.38 515.6 1.14

NCS5 83.6 0.18 250.8 0.55

The upper ranges of the vitamin A con-

tent of the sea lion liver (Table 1) represent

amounts that are toxic on ingestion at a single

meal, i.e. the amount of 250 g or 0.55 Ib of

liver is easily consumable by an adult with a

hearty appetite at a single meal, if we accept

that 3,000,000 IU of vitamin A is a toxic

dose.

The present study has therefore confirmed

a report made as long ago as 1837 that the

flesh of the southern Australian sea lion (in

the form of liver) may be toxic on ingestion.

The point may also be made that since

vitamin A is a cumulative poison, acute doses

lower than those nominated above may result

in symptoms of acute toxicity, if the subject

has had an above-average intake of vitamin A

beforehand. This suggestion was discussed

from the evidence of Antarctic expeditions by

Cleland & Southcott (1969b, p. 1342) in

relation to the illnesses of members of the

Australasian Antarctic Expedition of 1911-

1914, notably in Mertz and Mawson. Similar

considerations apply to other groups of per-

sons living isolated lives and with a high

intake of certain species of fishes or their

predators in their diets. According to Mandel

(1975, p. 1573) “a daily intake exceeding

50,000 yg of retinol [equivalent to about

167,000 IU of vitamin A] frequently results

in toxic effects in adults”. It is therefore not

necessary that there should be an acute intake

of any nominated quantity of vitamin A for

symptoms of acute hypervitaminosis A to be

precipitated in a pre-conditioned subject.

Variation in the vitamin A levels within a

number of species of terrestrial and marine

carnivores

Rodahl & Moore (1943) first established

that the traditionally-known toxicity of polar

bear liver (among the Eskimos) could be a

result of the high vitamin A content of that

organ, A number of subsequent workers have

published data on the vitamin A levels of the

levels of a number of Northern and Southern

Hemisphere carnivores, substantiating the

evidence from other sources of the toxicity of

the liver in certain species, on ingestion by

man. One feature of the published estimates

has been the wide variation in the hepatic

vitamin A level. Several of these results are

shown in Table 4.

The data for the hepatic vitamin A levels

in a range of carnivores indicate a wide

variation, suggesting that there may not be a

“normal” level for this substance, and that

extrinsic and possibly other factors influence

the levels. Inaccuracy of an analytical labora-

tory is one factor that needs to be considered.

However, the tests for vitamin A content are

usually comparatively simple chemical and

colorimetric ones. In the case of the widest

range shown in the figures in Table 4, that

for Neophoca cinerea, repeated study con-

firmed the accuracy of the figures given.

Another possible factor which could be

responsible in some cases is decomposition of

the vitamin A under the influence of in-

adequate temperature control, and rancidity

of the oil containing it. Again, in the case of

the N. cinerea estimates, care was taken to

exclude such a cause of variation by meticu-

lous attention to preservation at a low tem-

VITAMIN A IN THE AUSTRALIAN SFA LION NEGPIIOCA CINEREA oy

Taste 4, Vitamin A levels in the livers af a seleccion ef Northern and Southern Hemisphere carnivores,

i —————————————————————————

Minimum and maximum Ratio of

published figures af maximum,

; vitamin A levels minimum

Carnivore {1U/g of wet byer) Reference source estimates

Thalarctos maritimus 13 000-34 600 Rodahlt & Maore (1943) 2.66

polar bear Rodahl (19490)

Russell (1967)

Evignathus barbatus 12 000-14 O00 Roduht & Moore (1943) 1.17

Afctic bearded seul

Phoca groenlandica 600-12 000 Rodahl & Davies (1949) 20)

Greenland seul

Canis Janiiliaris 2 700-24 400 Southeott eral (1971) 9.04

husky

Mirounee leonina | O80-1 240 Southecott vy af, (1971) 1.148

southern elephant seal

Arctocephalus pusillus doriferus 360-15 000 Southcott er al. (1974) 41.67

Australian furseal

Arctocephalus pusillus pusillus 7K5-19 924 Shaughnessy (1981) 25.48

(South African) Cape tur

seul (batches)

Neouphéea cinerea 79-11 964 this paper 14

Australian sea hon

perature (initially in solid COy, and later by

continuous refrigeration).

Shaughnessy (1981) recorded the vitamin

A levels for the batehes of liver harvested

over 1941-1949 for the Cape fur seal, The

range of estimates made 1s shawn in Table 4.

While admitting that in some cases the methods

of preservation of the harvested seal livers

may not have been ideal, and hence the levels

could have been reduced by some decompoasi-

tion, he wus nevertheless able to draw valuable

conclusions on factors whieh could influence

the hepatic levels of vitamin A in Arete.

céphalus p. pusillus, Io that series. of bull seals

they were: (1) the maturity of the individual:

(2) the vitamin A level of the prey species

of fish (hake, Merluceins spp..); and (3) the

distance from a pre-determined point on the

South African coastline.

In the case of one colony of the Cape fur

seals (al Cape Cross) the age of the animal

was considered the most important factor in-

flucncing the vitamin A level in’ the liver

(Black et al, 1945),

In southern) Australia Southeott er al,

(1974) studicd the relationships belween

length, weight and hepatic vitamin A content

of a series of 30 specimens of the Australian

fur seal, Arerocephalus puvillus dartferts.

These cansisied of 6 males and 24 females.

In the case of the 24 females a significant

trend was found of increasing hepatic vitamin

A storage with increasing age of the animal

(P<,02). When these data were combined

with the data for the 6 males, the presenee of

such a relationship at a customary level af

significance could not be established. There

is thus good evidence that the hepatie vitamin

A levels in seals are subject to various in-

fluences, such as that of age, localion and food

resources.

Acknowledgements

The author is indebted to Dr J.C. Fanning

and Mr A. Nicholson, Department of Patho-

logy, University of Adelaide, and to Dr J, K.

Ling, South Australian Museum, for collecting

the specimens of seal liver and relevant data

during the course of their own studies upon

the seals; their project received funding assis-

tance from an Australian Marine Science and

Technology Advisory Committee (AMSTAC)

grant. Dr G, J, Judson and Dr T, F. Hartley,

Institute of Medical and Veterinary Science,

Adelaide, kindly carried out the vitamin A

estimates, Mr L. G. Veitch, Division of

Mathematical Statistics, CSIRO, provided

advice und assistance in statistical matters.

The author is indebted to the National Health

& Medical Research Council. for support.

wy RL VY. SOUTHCOTT

References

Hiack. M, M,, Rapson. W. S.. Scowartz, HM.

& van Rensauag WS. (1945) South African

fish products. 19 Che South African seal fishery

J. Soe. Chem. tnd, Lond, 64, 326-31,

Oarr, Po H, & Prick, B. A. (1926) Colour reac-

Hows aleributed io Vilamin A. Biochem.

2H 3), 497-501,

C.LLAND. J, Bo & SouTHeorh, R. Vo 11969a) Tl

nesses following che cating Of seal liver in Aus-

tralian waters. ted, J, A4usr. 1, 760-763

me (1969b) Hypervitaminosis A in the

Antaretic in the Australasion Antarctic Expedi-

non of 1911-1914: 4 possible explanation uf the

illnesses of Mert and Mawson. fbicd., 1, 1337-

Az,

CeMMiyEe oN Marine Mamas (1967) Stan-

Jard measurements of scaly. J. Mammialogy

4809), 459-62.

HALSTEAR, BL W, (1965) Poisonous und venomous

marine animals of the world, Volume One—In-

vermbrites. (U.S. Govt, Printing Office:

Washington, D.C.),

~~ (1970) Poisonous and venomous marine ani-

mals af the world. Volume Three— Vertebrates,

continued. (LS. Govi. Printing Offices Washing-

ton, D.C.).

Hassen, L. G. & Warwick, W, J, (19488) A

fluorometric micromethod tor serum vitamin A.

Amer. J. clin, Path. 38(9), 525-9,

Hayes, &, C, & Heasrep, D. M. (1973) Toxicity

ol the vitamins, Jn Toxicgants occurring niturally

in foods, Second Bum, Chapler J, pp. 235-53_

(Commitee on Food Protectian, Food ond

Nutrition Roanl National Research Council,

National Academy of Sciences, Washington

B.c,).

kane. J. B. (1969) The idemity of the fur seals of

Australia. Aust J, Zoal. 1705), 841-53,

Lent, W. H, (1839) Reconnoilerine yoyages and

(travels, with adventures in the new colonies of

South Austraha! a particular description of the

town of Adelpide, aru Kangaroo [Sandy and an

account of the present stare of Sydney and pares

udjacent, including visits to Nicobar and orher

Islands of the tidian scas, Calcutta, the Cupe

of Good Hope. and St Helena, ciring the years

5, 1837, 1838. (Smith, Elder & €o,; Lon-

don}

Manorl, H. G, (£975) Batsoluble vitamins, Vita

ii) AL Chapter 75, pp, 1970-8, tv L, S, Good-

man gnd A, Gilman (Fds.) The pharmuco-

logical basis of therapeuties. Fifth Edm. (Muc-

millan Publ Co.: New York.)

Miceo, Ho M, (1971) King Tsland ard the sealing

trade 1K02. A transition of Chapters XXTE and

XNIIE of the marcative of Francois Péron pub-

lished in the officia! ueeount of ihe Voyage of

Discovery Ww the Southern Lands undertaken in

the Corvertes Le Géacraphe, Le Netyhaliste and

the schooner Cusiarina, during the gears tRuO

to T804, Under the command of Caplain Nicolas

Baidin, (Roebuck Society Publication Number

3, Canberra, )

Moorr, |, (1967) Pharmsucology and toxicolosy

of wramin A. fn Sebrell. W, H,, fr. & Harris,

R. S. (Eds.) The vitamins, chemistry, physia-

logy. pathology, methods, Edlq. 2, Vol, t, pp.

R044, | Acudenmhe Press; New York.)

Prean, F (t807, 1816) Woyage de découvertes

“uy lerres Australes... sur... . le Géovraplie,

le Nuteraliste, et — 2 . le Casuarina. pendant

(800-1804. Historique Vol. i, par M, F, Péron,

1807; Vol. ii, rédigé par F, Péron et continue

pur M. Louis de Freycinet. 1816, (Imprimerie

royule; Paris.)

Ray, C. E. & Lina, J. K. (1981) A well docu-

mented carly record of the Australian sea lion.

Archiv, nat, Hist, W011), tS5-71-

Ropaui., K. (19498) Toxicity oF polar bear liver.

Nature 164(4169), 530-1,

—— (1949h) Hypervitarmposis A and scurvy.

(hid, 164(4169), 531,

—— (1949c) The roxte effect of polar bear liver.

Norsk Polarinstitutt (Oslo), Skrifter (92), pp.

1-90.

—— & Davins, A, W. (1949) Vitannn A in seals.

Biochem, J, AS, 408-12.

~— & Moore, T, (1943) The vitamin A content

qod toxicity ef bear and seal liver, fhid, 37.

166-8.

Russert, Fo FR (1967) Vitamin A centent of

potur bear liver. Texicon Sf1), 61-2

Stauaungssy, P. DB. (1981) Geographical varia-

lion in the vilumin A content of livers of adult

male Cape fur seqls Arctocephalas pusillus,

1941-1949, Fish, Bull, S. Afr 44, 125-9,

Snearman, BD. J. ©. (1978) Vitamin A and Sir

Doughis Mawson. Arie, med. J. 1, 283-5,

Seumiucem, Ry Vo (1975) The neurologic effects

of noxious marine crentures. Chapter ¥, pp. 165-

258. dn R. W. Hornabrook (Ed.) ‘Topics on

tropical neurology (Contemp. Neurol, Ser, (2°

185-258. (PL A. Davis and Co,: Philadelphiiw.)

-- (1979) Marine toxins. Chapter 2, pp. 27-

106. Handbook of vlinical neurology 1P. SF.

Vinken & G, W. Bruyn, Eds,), ltoxications of

tic nervous system, Part TI. (North Holland

Publishing Co.: Amsterdam.)

——. Cuestrerrinep. No I & Luce, B.S. (1971)

Vitamin A content of the livers of huskies and

some seals from Antarctic and subsanlarctic

regions. Med, #, Ausr. 1971, $. 311-13.

» —— & Worwene, RB. M. (1974) The vita

min A content of the liver of the Australian tur

seul, Aretecephelus pusillus doviferas. Ans,

Wikll Res. 102), 145-9.

Srimiinc, € (19729) Observations on the Aus

tralian sea lion, Neophoce cinerea (Peron)

Aust. J. Zool, 20(3), 271-9.

—— [1972h) The economic value and manage

ment of seals in South Australia. (Publication

Noa. 2. 11 pp. Dept. Fisheries, Adelaide.)

o— & Warnree, R, M, (1970) Implications of

a comparison of the airborne vocalizations aml

some aspects of the hehaviaue of the twa Aus-

tralian fe seals. Arefacephulus spp., an the evo-

lution and presefit taxonumy of the genus Aus,

J. Zool. 19(3), 227-41,

Veyr, G. or (1598) ‘The three voyages of William

Barents to (he Arelic regions (1594, 1595, and

1596), (Second edn,, with an introduction by

Lieut, K, Beynen, Royal Netherlands Nuvy.)

(Burt Franklins New York. ta 1963.) (First

Edition, 1853, edited by CC, ‘t. Heke, as

VITAMIN A IN THE AUSTRALIAN SEA LION NEOPHOCA CINEREA 91

“Barents’s three voyages to the Arctic regions’, Zeland. London 1609. (Fascimile reprint by Da

published by the Hakluyt Society, First Series, Capo Press, Theatrum orbis terrarum Ltd., Am-

Vol. LIV, 1876.) sterdam, New York, 1970.) (Volume Number

—— (1609) The true and perfect description of 274, The English Experience, its record in early

three voyages by the ships of Holland and printed books published in facsimile.)

THE NEREIDIDAE OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY P. A. HUTCHINGS & S. P. TURVEY

Summary

Eleven new species of nereid polychaetes from South Australia are described: Ceratonereis

amphidonta n.sp., C. pseudoerythraeensis n.sp., C. transversa n.sp., Namanereis littoralis n.sp.,

Neanthes biseriata n.sp., N. isolata n.sp., N. uniseriata n.sp., Nereis bifida n.sp., N. cirriseta n.sp., N.

spinigera n.sp., and N. triangularis n.sp. Two additional new species, Nereis maxillodentata n.sp.

and N. parabifida n.sp. are described from New South Wales. Nereis heirissonensis and N. jacksoni

are redescribed. Diagnostic descriptions are given of known species of nereids occurring intertidally

in South Australia. A key is provided.

THE NEREIDIDAE OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

by P. A. Hutcminas* & §, P. Turvey*

Summary

Hluyehines, PL AL & TuURVEY, S. P. (1982) The Nereididge of South Australia, Trans. A, Soe.

S Aust, T0684), 93-144, 30 November, (982.

Bleven new species of nereid polychaeles trom South Austraha are described: Cerato-

nereis ainphidenta nap. C. preudoeretirdesisis n,sp.. C. traisversa nsp,, Namanereis littaralis

np, Nearthes hiseriata asp. N. isolata nap. N. uniserttia vsp.. Nerets bifida nap. N.

eirrixeta wap. N. spintgera nespu. and Ny tlanenlaris asp. Two additional new species, Nereis

maxillodentata nap, ant N. parabifida psp. are described from New South Wales. Nereis

hvirissonensis and N. javkson? ave redeseribed. Diagnostic descriptions are given of known

species Of nercids occurring intertidully in South Australia, A key is provided.

Key Woros) Taxoroniy, fereld polychuetes, South Australia,

Introduction

In 1979, one of us (PH) made extensive

collections of South Australian polychaetes.

concentrating on estuarine aud intertidal

habitats. ‘This paper is largely based on that

material and is the first of a series describing

the polychaete fauna of South Australia.

Although the Australian vereid fauna was de-

serihed by Aariman (1954) using largely

Soully Australian material, we [ound 13 pre-

viously undeseribed species,

In addition to describing the new species

and tedescribing two previously confused

species, We have included a short diagnostic

account of each genus (after Fauchald 19770)

and af previously deserihcd species, We stress,

however. that many more nereids may occur

sublidally, Speeics identified from the key

should he checked carefully against the de-

scriptions, in particular the nolopadial homo-

gomph faleigers of Nerely species and the para~

enath patterns of Neanthes species, This is

particularly important for on-Sauth Aus-

tralian material,

Materials and Methods

The locality data for the bulk of the

material examined has been coded and tabu-

lated (Table 1), The codes have been used in

the Material Examined section of each species

description. Registration numbers of Aus-

tralian Museum material have been abbreviated

toy numbers only, Paratvpes have been de-

posited whenever possible at the Allan

Haneoek Foundation, Los Anucles (AHF),

firitish Muscum (Natural History), Landon

(BMNH), and the National Museum of

~ Australian Museum, 6-8 College Street. Sydney,

NS.W, 2000,

Natural History Smithsonian — Institution,

Washington D.C. (USNM). Other abbrevia-

tions tused are as follows; HZM, Zoologiseches

Tnstiltul und Zoologisches Muscum der Uni-

versitit Hamburg; MNHN, Muséum National

WHistoire Naturelle, Paris; SSM, MNatur-

historiska = Rijksmuseet, Stockholm; WAM,

Western Australian Museum, Perth.

The Australian distribution of cach species

hus been summarised by State using Day &

Hutchings (1979) checklist, Additional

Incalily data from Hartmann-Schroder (1979,

1980, 1981). Hutchings & Rainer (1979) and

Sacnger ef al, (L980) are given in parentheses.

In general, we have only cited major Aus-

tralian references. Full Australian synanymies

are given by Day & Hutchings (1979).

Some species of Neartthes closely resemble

Perliereis species which lick solid bars on

Area VI of the pharynx. In our material, apart

from Neanthes cricognatha, N, kerguelertsis,

and N. vaallé we have described three new

species of Neaniles which fall into this group,

Also, the diagnosis of Cerafonerciy specifies

the presence of notapadial homogomph falci-

gers, although these are ahsent in many species

including the three pew species described in

this paper. Further, Nereiy is partly identified

by paragnaths in both oral and maxillary rings,

Nereis mavillodentata nsp. lacks oral para-

gnaths and possesses potopodial falcigers,

Hence it should he placed in Ceratenereis,

although its affinities are clearly with N. bifida

nsp,, and it has been placed in Nereis for that

reason, We suggest, therefore, that the ahove

nmereid genera reaulre careful re-evaluation,

although this is beyond the scape of the

present study.

Yel P. A. MUTCHINGS & S. P. TURVEY

TABLE |. Syndpsis of collection dati.

Locality, collector & date

Lut. /Long.

(deg., min.)

Habitat

Port Augusta, Hutchings 14/3/79

Streaky Bay, near caravan park.

Hutchings 13/3/79

Streaky Bay, little island on

outer margin of inner hay.

Hutchings 13/3/79

Specds Point, Streaky Bry.

Hutchings 14/3/79

Port Kenny, Venus Bay,

Hutchings 12/3/79

Venus Bay, vilhige. Hotehings

12/3/79

Elliston, reef at southern end of

town, Hutchings 12/3/79

Elliston, reef just past post office.

Hutchings 12/3/79

Elliston, jetty, Hutchings 12/3/79

Kellidie Bay. Hutchings 11/3/79

Porter Bay, Port Lincoln, neat

boul ramp. Hutchings 10/3/79

Torrens Island, Adelaide Power

Station. Hutchings 7/3/79

Flinders Cairn. Hutchings

10/3/79

Sleaford Mere, Hutchings

10/3/79

Sleaford Bay. Hutchings 10/3/79

Sellicks Reach, reef to north,

Hutchings 16/3/79

Rapid Bay, jetty between

Normanville and Second Valley.

Hutchings 8/3/79

Victor Harbor, just behind bluff,

Hutchings 16/3/79

Emu Bay, Kangaroo Island,

adjacent to old jetty,

Hutchings 1/3/79

Stokes Bay, Kangaroo Island,

Hutchings and Butler 5/3/79

Stokes Bay, Kangaroo Island,

Handley 4/3/78

Buy of Shoals, Kangaroo Island,

Hutchings and Edmonds 1/3/79

3 km S.W. of Cape Rouge,

Kunguroo Island. Handley 7/3/78

Bay of Shoals, low tide,

Hoese, March, 1978

Snellings Beach, mouth of

Middle River, Kangaroo Tsland.

Hutchings and Butler 5/3/79

Pennheshaw jetty, Kangaroo

Island, Handley 9/3/78

Western River Coye. Kangaroo

Island. Handley 3/3/78

32-30/137~46

32-48/134-13

32-48 /194-13

32-48/194-13

33-10/134—-4)

33-14/134-40

33-39/134-53

34-36/135-29

34-44/ 135-53

34-47/138-32

34-49/ 135-47

34-50/ 135-45

34-54/ 135-47

35-20/138-27

35-32/138-11

35—33/138-38

35—35/137-31

35-37/137-12

38-38/137-37

35—42/137-06

35—43/ 137-56

335-43// 136-56

Sand on mudfiats in front of mangroves,

under bridge

Mussel clumps at mid-tide level on

mud flitts

Mud flats, Poasidania

Mul sievings, Pasidenia

Fosidonia and Zostera seivings

Fauna associated with Zostera

Sand sievings

Sund sievings, Posidonlu

Under boulders

Algal washings

Zastera sievings

Mussel clumps at mid-tide level

Algal mat on reef south of village

Sand sievings

Fauna on jetty piles

Under rocks on low tide reef fat

Algae from low tide reef flat

Algal washings

Amongst Galealaria on jetty piles

Nearby rocks, encrusting algae

Mussel clumps at mid-tide level

Zostera and sand sievings

Zostera sievings

Mud flats in front of thermal effluent

(up to 42°C)

Mud flats in front of mangroves

Mud flats in front of mangroves with

patchy Zasterd

Sand at low tide level

Mussel clumps at mid-tide level

Mud, salinity 0%,

Algae On oveun side of bay

Algal washings

Sievings in Cymuaduce

Fauna attached to jetty piles

Crevice fauna

Coralline algac Washings

Crevice fauna

Algul washings

Under rocks heside jetty

Algal washings

Alvae at low tide level

Zoslera sieVings

Sand flats verging into Pasidenia and

Tlarmtosing

Pasidania, Zostera, mod and sand

Algal holdfasts and crevice fauna

Ih sponges on boom piles at Sy, and

under racks

Sheltered rock pool. under rocks and

algae

Code

OLA

O2A

028

02C

02D

O3A

O3B

O03C

03D

O4A

O4B

OSA

O6A

O4B

06C

O7A

OSA

O9A

10A

10B

12A

12B

12C

13A

144

ISA

1AA

16B

17AN

I8A

IDA

THE NEREIDIDAE OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA 95

Lat/Long.

Locality, collector & date (deg., min. | Habitat Code

Redbanks, Nepean River. 35-44,/137-43 = Sheltered shallow bay at low tide 26A

Kangaroo [sland, Loch and

Yoo 8/3/78

Mauston Point, American River, 35-47/137-46 Clumps of sponge at 5 min fast-flawing 27A

Kangaroo Island, old whart. channel with many Piha

Miujtebings 2/3/79 Sand, sponges, and saridy conglomesate 278

tock at 5 m in fast-flowing charinel

Zaylera sievingss 27

Pasidania sievings 27D

American River, Kangaroo 35-47/137-46 = Surface detritus wand algue 28A

Islind, top of river just below

turn-eff to Penningion Bay

Hutchings 3/3/79

Pelican Lagoon, south side 35-50/137~45 Under rocks und Hormoyira in front of 29A

Kangaroo Taland. Handley 8/3/78 sali marsh, at mid-tide level

Cape du Couedic, Kangaroo 46-03/136-41 Exposed beach ulgal holdfasts 30A

Island. Hutchings and Butler Exposed beach, coralline algae on algal 30B

4/3/79 holdfasts

Exposed beach, coralline algae washings 30

Exposed reef, algal holdfasts 30D

Pxposed reef, coralline algac 308

Hartict River estuary, Vivonne 35-58/137-(08 = Sievings al low tide level 31A

Bay, Kangaroo Tsland.

Yoo und Handley 2/3/78

Hanson Bay, Kangaroo Island 36-02/136-51 9 Algal holdfasts on reef flat 32A

Hutchings and Butler 4/3/79

South West River. Handley 36-00/136-52 Sandy with same algae, scoop net and 32€

und Hoese 6/3/78 sieve

Cape Domby, near obelisk. 37-10/139-44 Algae from pool on exposed rack 33A

Yoo 28/2/78 platform

Cape Northumberland, on west 3R-04/140-41) Shellered pools betrind exposed rock 34A

side. Yoo, Loch and Handley

27/2/78

platform at low tide

The value of paragnath courts based on a

small pumber of specimens is also ques-

tionahle, although differences in paragnath

pulierns and large differences in approximate

wumbers appear to be useful. In this study we

have had the opportunity in most eases af

examining a largé amount of material from a

variety of habitats. IL is clearly apparent that

considerable variation in paragnath counts

Occurs within most species, with smaller in-

dividuals often having fewer paraynaths than

Jarger ones. We have thus altempted to give

approximate ranges of paragoath counts for

all the material examined and deseribed the

pulferns of paragnath distribution as aecu-

rately as possible

Nereis denhanensiy Augener, 1913 and N.

Heirissomensis Augener. 1913 were synonymused

with N_ jackson’ Kinberg, 1866 by Augener

(1924. 319). We have eXamined the iype

matenal of all these species plus material

identified hy Angener (1927), Hartman

(1954) und Kot (1951). We found all three

species to be valid and N. jacksoni appears to

be restricied to the single specimen identified

by Ninberg, from Port Jackson, N.S.W. A

search of the Australian Muscum’s extensive

collections from this area failed to reveal any

additional specimens, Other material identified

as N. denhamensis, N. heirissonensis and N,

jacksoni we found to include four new species,

N, hifida nsp,. N, clrriseta nsp,, N, inaxillo-

dentata wap, and N. parabifida nysp.

Key to South Australian Nereididae

'. Peristomiium without frontal antennae. palps

without palpostyles Micronereis halei

Peristomium with frontal untennuc. palps

with palpostyles 2

Pharynx without chitinous paragnaths 4

Pharynx with chitinous paragnaths (some-

times difficult to see in small individuals) | 5

3. Ventrum of anterior seligers (7-30) with

rows of papillae Australonercis chlersi

Ventrum of anterio’ setigers smooth 4

4. Pharynx with fleshy cirriform papillae; noto-

podial lobes developed , Olsyanereis edmondyi

Pharynx without papillae, notopodial lobes

absent Namanereis litteralis n.sp

’

P. A. HUTCHINGS & S. P. TURVEY

Paragnaths all pectinate rows with matty

minute. fused points

Platynereis damerillé: antipoda

Paragnaifis nol as above 4

Paragnaths in Arenas UH, 10 and TV as indi-

vidual, flattened, pointed cones in mtdre or

less regulur, comb-like rows, notopodia with

homogomph fulcigers. Pseudenereis unernala

Paragnaths in Areas Tl, UT and IV otherwise,

nolopodia with or without homogomph falel-

gers 7

Notopodia. posteriorly with homogomph fal-

vigers _., 8

Notopodia without homagomph falcigers 18

Prostomium deeply divided between untennie

Ceratonerels mirabilis

Prostomium not as above . 9

Pale, slender notopodial homogomph falcigers

present from seliger 3 Nereis cockhurnensts

Notopodial tromogomph falcigers appearing

later 10

Areas VIl and VILE with 100-200 cones in a

hread continues band

.. Nereis triangularis isp,

Areas Vil and VITT otherwise il

Neuropodial heterogomph falcigers normally

in both supra- and subacicular fascicles 12

Neuropodial heterogomph falcigers replaced

entirely by heterogomph spinigers in many

alterior parapodia ,,,,..,, Nerels spinigera n.sp,

Notopodial homogomph falcigers with one

large lateral tooth subequal with terminal

tooih, variable numbers of much smaller

leeth basally 13

Notopodial homogomph falcigers With lateral

teeth much smaller than terminul tooth or if

similar in size, then more than one targe

lateral tooth or terminal tooth obviously

worn , ‘ 15

Area UT af pharyecx with, dranisverso Tow af

cones ld

Area ITT of pimaryns bare, rarely with a single

cone , Nereis bifida n.sp,

Oral ring of pharvnst bare

Nereis masilodentaia w.sp.

Oral ring of pharynx with paragnaths

Nerels parabifidy nap,

Area VI of pharynx With patagnaths 6

Avew VE of pharynx bare

Nereis fieirissonensis

Areas VIE-VIIt of pharynx with narrow hatd

of abour 40-45 paragnaths (many may be

difficult to see) vo Nereis jacksoni

Areas VII-VIN of pharynx with Jess than

about 20 paragnaths 7

Asea I of pharynx bare. Area WU bare or

rarely with a single small paragnath

e Nereis cirriseta tsp.

Area I of pharynx generally with paragnaths,

Ares IC with | to about 24 paragnaths

Nereis denhamensix

IB.

19.

21,

24.

25.

26,

27,

Middle and posterior neuropodia with giant

simple faleigers above aciculum 19

Simple fulcigers absent 21

Area TIL without paragnathe ,

Ceratanereis transversa n. sp.

Area TIL with paragnuths yal)

Anterior neuropodia with digitiform pastsetal

lobe Ceratonereis wraplidenta nsp,

Anterior nevropodla withobt digitiform post-

setal lobe

Cerutonereis pseudverytiraeensis o.sp-

Paragnaths in Area VI elongate transverse

burs or yw lnimsverse series of short bars which

may be pointed, but rectangular base ,.,.,. 27

Puragnaths in VI conical, ic, with circular

base. or absent 22

Notopodin with three infangular: lobes

Neanthes cricognatha

Notopodia ‘with two triangular or conical

lobes. presetal if present only us rounded

ridge on ventral lobe ee £ |

Area | without paragnaths, VW-VIT moaxi-

mum about 4 , . Neanthes kerguelensis

Aren I with paragnaths, Aneas VU—-VITT with

niany 7 z4

Area VI with one or more transverse lines of

conical paragnaths; free purt of ventral

nenpopodial lobe rediiced to a small tubercle

or conical Map by fusion with the acicular

lobe in middle or posterior parapodia 25

Area YI with centrally isoluted group of

paragnatha: Ventral neuropodial lobe remain-

ing free posteriorly, sometimes slightly 1e-

duced relative to other lobes 24

Area VI with single transverse row of large

pulugnaths und occasional additional ones,

VII-VIIL with continuous band of mainly

large cones, usually less than 50, with emaller

comes scattered, rare or absent

. Neanthes uniseriaia asp,

Area VE with row of larger cones in front of

a Vvariuble row of smaller cones, VU-VIU

with cantinuous band of cones, generally

more Uran $0, including numerous small

vores . Neanthes hiseriata n-sp.

Area V with three cones in a triangle, occa-

sionally only two or with a few extra bul not

in a longitudinal ala Area TV more thin

ubour 20 Neanthes vaalit

Area VY with 2 or “more large cones in longi-

tudinal series plus 0-3 smaller cones, FY with

less than about 20 Neanthes tyolata tsp.

Paragnaths in VI numerous short, transverse

bars in Wansverse series ,, FPerinereis muntia

Puragnaths in VI single, long transverse bar

Perinerels anilityndanta

elongate transverse bars

Perinereis variodentata

Paragnaths in Vi 2

in transverse series

Australonereis Hartman

Eversible pharynx with soft papillae on

maxillary ring, oral cing bare. Four pairs of

(HE NEREIDIDAE OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA oT

tentacular cirri; biramous parapodia, Noto-

sclae hamogomph spinigers, neurosetae homo-

and heterogomph falcigers. Fleshy transverse

ridges across anterior yentrum.

Type species: Australonereis ehlersi (Augener)

Australonereis chlersi: (Augener)

Australonereis ehlersi: Augener. 1913: 142-145.

Pl. UL), fig. 33u, dext fiz, 12a-c. Day & Flul-

chings, 1979: 105,

Material Examined: A aclechion of the material

examined. W.A.,—Leschenaoult Est. Bunbury

(4340, 5615), S.A—Onkaporinga Est,, many

(6061) coll, Shepherd. Coorong Lagoon, 4 (8426)

coll, Shepherd, Kangaroo tsland, Mary River

(9374) coll. Hutchings. Vie.—Gippsland Lakes

(5814) coll. Hight, Mallacootu (8439) coll. Hut-

chings, N.S.W.—Careel Bay (5282. 5287) coll,

Hutchings, Wallis Lake (4211, 4213) coll, Paxton.

Old,—Eli Creek, Hervey Bay (3373) coll, Hut-

whings,

Description: Angular flimsy sandy tubes.

Pharynx lacking chitinous paragnaths. Oral

ring smooth, maxillary ring with more than 50

short, cirrus-like papillae in 3<S jrregular rows,

First 6 setigers with slender ventral cirrus on

papillar elevations, Setigers 7-30 with addi-

tional papillae medial to base of ventral cirrus,

reaching maximum of 6-7. Following setigers

without such papillae,

Nolosetac all spinigers, neurosetuc, spinigers

and falcigers, Blades of falcigers with single

longitudinal series of denticles, terminating

in curved process bounded by series of denti-

culations continous from cutting edge.

Camments: This is the first record from South

Australia, although it appears to be common

elsewhere,

Australian Distribution: Western Australia,

Victoria, New South Wales, Queensland.

Aahita> Sandy mud in estuarine or sheltered

hays, often associated with seagrass beds.

Ceratanereis Kinberg

Pharyox eversible with conical paragnaths

on maxillary ming only, Pour pairs of tenta-

cular citri; biramous parapodia. Noatoselac

include homogomph spinigers and falcigers:

neurosctae homa- und heterogomph spinigers

and = heteragomph = faleigers. Dorsal cirri

attached basally to superior notopodial lobe;

interior neurapodial fohe may be present.

Type species: C. mirabilis Kinberg

Ceratonereis amphidonta sp,

FIG, la-c

$.A.—27D (18397) incomplete

{03 seligers 42 mm length, 2.5 mm

HOLOTYPE

posteriorly,

width.

Deyeription: Body robust, flattened, tapering

gradually posteriorly, colour in aleohol, dark

purplish brown. Prostomium slightly longer

than wide, with deep anteromedian groove,

Two pairs of eyes, embedded, reddish purple

in colour, lenses visible. One pair of stout

palps with globular palpostyles. Four pairs

tentacular cirri, longest extending to setiger 9.

Pharynx partially everted, jaws short, stout,

translucent brown with 5 teeth. Paragnaths re-

alricted to maxillary ring, consisting of grey-

brown, transparent,. rounded cones (domes)

and large, sharply pointed, elongate cones,

opaque, orange to scarlet with grey-brown

bases, arranged us Follows: | central patch

of 9 domes and 2 large scariet cones on either

side; If = 8 in irregular oblique rows of brown

domes; WI = 19 in transverse band of 10

domes and 9 large scarlet cones: TV -- [5-17

domes in triangular patch.

Dorsal cirrus in anterior setigers (Fig. la)

extending to tip of dorsal notopodial lobe,

posteriorly to just behind. Dorsal and ventral

notopodial lobes conical, becoming more

pointed posteriorly (Fig. la,b), Presetal noto-

podial lobe slightly produced as low ridge on

base of ventral notopodial lobe in anterior

ne s\

o5 =

= P |

—— |

noe : {

oe) os | |!

ee | i

=. |

I y , \ f

he | |

—> \

ay }

earn

os . a co

—=

Fig. |. Ceratonereiy amplidanta DSP. i. anterias

view of 9th parapadium. b. anterior view of

99h parapodiin. c. simple faleiger, setiger

70, Scales in mm.

OR P, A, HUTCHINGS & §. P, TURVEY

setigers (Fix. la), disappearing in middle

setigers, Dorsal neuropodial lobe anteriorly

shorter than ventral notopadial lobe but in

sctigers l-18 bearing large, digitiform

postsetal lohe extending posterolaterally, fre-

quently ta level of ventral neuropodial lobe,

Dorsal neuropodial lobe clangating to level

of or past ventral notopodial lobe in more

posterior setigers. Ventral neuropadial lobe

shorter, well-developed anteriorly but decreas-

ing rapidly to disappear by middle setigers.

Ventral cirrus reaching halfway to, or just to,

tip of ventral feuropodial lobe anteriarly snd

half to two-thirds of way to point of emergence

of most ventral peurosetae in later setigers,

Acicula brown-black with pale tips. For num-

bers and type of setac sec Table 3, Giant

simple faleigers formed by gradual ankylosis

of dorsal heterogomph falcigers over range of

setigers 25-40, distally dark, strongly hooked

With several small teeth above main fang,

(Fig. le), fine tendon clearly visible only in

lateral view. Compound sctac typical,

Discusslon. Ceraronereis amphidonta wsp. f=

sembles C. erviliraeensis Fauvel, 1918 in the

presence of simple neuropodial falcigers. Hf

differs in the arrangement of paragnaths, in the

disappearance of the ventral neuropodial lobe,

ind in the presence of a neuropodial postsetal

lobe anteriorly, This group of Cerareperels

with simple setae seems to have radiated

within southern Australia {see Discussion for

C psendoervthraeensiv msn.) Ceratonerels

abiphidonra asp, can be distinguished fram

C. Jransversa n.sp, by the presence of para-

uoaths on Area IL of the pharynx and from

C. psendoerythroeensiy map. by the presence

of digitiform pastsetal lobes in anterior neuro-

podia The name refers to the two types of

paragnaths present

Tape 3. Setal county jar Ceratonereis amphidonta

Msp

No. of setar

sefiger setjger

10 tol

Notasetae

homogomph spinigers 3 4

Newvresctae

(1) Dorsal fascicle

above—homogomiph spinigers 7 %

helow—heterogomph spinigers 5 —_—

—ziant simple falcigers = 2

(li) Ventral fasciele

aboVve—heterogomph spinigere 1 i]

below—-helerogomph falcigers ip 3

Australian Distribuiton; South Australis

(Maston Point, Kangaroo Island).

Flabitat: Posidonta seagrass beds,

Ceratemerets mirabilis Kanherg

Ceratonereis mirabilis Kinherg, 1866: 170. Hart-

man, 1954: 9, 13. Perkins, 1980; 4-11, fixs.

|-4. Hartmann-Schroder, 1980; 5%. For syno-

nomies, see Day & Hutchings, 1979, and Per-

kins, 1980,

Marerial Examined: S.4—O3A, 1 spec. (| 8284).

I9B, 1 (18286), 23A, 1 (18385). 24A, 2 (18289).

27B, | (18288). 27C, 1 (18287), Upper Spencer

Gulf (5966, 5968, 18473) coll. Shepherd.

Hescription: Size range, 66 setigers, 16 mm

length, 1.8 mm width, other material pos-

leriorly incomplete, up to 5.7 mm width.

Tentacular cirti long, at least to setiger 13.

Pharyns with conical paragnaths arranged as

follows: 0; IL > 8-15 in ablique oval

patch: HT = 7-16 in roughly circular pateh;

(Vv = 8-18 io circular patch; V—VIL com-

pletely absent, Parapodia strongly compressed,

notopodial and ventral neuropodial lobes

acutely conical, dorsal neuropodial lobe with

digitiform presctal lobe. Dorsal cirri, three ty

four times length of dorsal notopadial lobe in

anterior segments, extending to eight to ten

times in posterior segments. Ventral cirri

shorter, at longest cxtending slightly past

ventral neuropodial lobe. Notosetae anteriorly

homogomph spmigers with projecting flap on

margin of socket, bomogomph faleigers also

present from middle setigers, Dorsal neuro-

setae homogomph spinigers and heterogomph

falcigers. ventral neurosetaec heterogomph

spinigers and falcigers, occasianally hetero-

gomph spinigers in dorsal fascicle,

Comment; The two individuals which have

heterogomph spinigers in the dorsal fascicle

also fave far more elotigate conical paragnaths

than other material. They do not appear to

belong to a separate species, Both specimens

were living in association with sponges whereas

the others were collected among algae, under

rocks, or jn seagrass beds,

Australian Bistribusions Western Australia

(Broome, Port Hedland, Onslow, Exmouth).

South Australia, Victoria, New South Wales

(Caree] Bay) and Queensland,

Hahirat Zostera beds and associated with en-

crusting Tauna.

Ceratonereis pseudoerythracensis n.sp.

FIG, 2a-e

Ceratenerets eryihraeensis Monro, 19382 617-618.

Koti, 1951: 108, Hutchings & Recher, 1974;

THE NEREIDIDAE OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA 99

104, 115, 119, Hutchings & Rainer, 1979: 753.

South Coast Report, 1981: 77, 123. Atkinson

et al,, 1981: 318-321. Non Fauvel.

HOLOTYPE: S,A.—Onkaparinga Est. (18510)

coll. Shepherd, 97 setigers, 53 mm length, 3.6 mm

width. PARATYPES: S.A.—Onkaparinga Est. 2

spec. (AHF POLY 1348), 2 (BMNH ZB 1982:

Fig. 2, Ceratonereis pseudoerythraeensis nsp.

b. anterior view of 6th parapodium

falciger from setiger 23,

c. anterior view of 78th parapodium.

e. fully-developed simple falciger from setiger 80. Scales in mm,

1-2). 2 (USNM 071528), 9 (6060), 31A, 13

(18282), 32A, 24 (18279). 32A, 3 (18280), 32C,

33 (18281). Size range of paratypes 35 setigers,

5.3 mm length. 0.75 mm width to 91 setigers, 59

mm length, 3.9 mm width.

Additional Material: W.A.—Yunourup, South

Bank of Mill Island, 2 (WAM 3-72) coll. Hart.

a. anterior portion, dorsal view (Paratype ex 18282).

d. developing simple

100)

Walpole Jetty, 2 ft, 2 (WAM 4-73) coll. Lenan-

ton, Walpole Inlet, 9 (WAM 173-81) call. Marine

Science Camp 1973. Swan River, Rocky Bay to

Guildford, in sand and mud, 357 (WAM 30-74)

coll, Joll. Point Peron (6815) ld, Kott, Lake Clif-

tog (17241) coll. Terni. N.S.W.—Tuross R.

(14971), Coili Lake (14967, 14974-6), Bucken-

how BR, off Clyde R, (14969), Borang R.

(14977) coll. S. Coast Survey Aust. Mus, 1974,

Main Bar, Povt Hocking, Pasidonin (11207).

Towra Beach, Botany Bay, Pasidenia (10956)

coll. NSW. State Fish. Careel Bay, salt murah

(5280), Avicenaim (5278), mud flat (5279), Zas-

tera (526}) coll, Hutchings. Darkum Lagoon, N

of Woolgoolga (17232) coll. Simpson.

Other Marerial Examined: Ceratonerets erythrae-

easis—Sénafir, island south of Suez Canal, Tad-

jours Biry (Red Sea), Tulear, Madagiscar (WS190)

uid Dairen, Mandehoura, from MNHN, id,

Fauvel, but not part of type series.

Crratonerciy erytliraeensiy Pelican, Swan River.

West Australia (RMNH ZK 1938,1091,11-18). 3

spec. pres. Serventy, id, Monro 1938,

Ceralonereiy vaipekae: Gibbs-Aitutaki, Cook

Istands (BMNH ZB 19.72.1) Holotype

Description, Body Natlened, tapering, robust

anteriorly pale yellow-white in aleohol with

hrown, granilar shading dorso-antetlorly. Pros-

tomium length about equal to width with deep

anteromedian proove (Fig. 2a). Eyes purple-

black, anterior pair larger, Jenses. distinet,

Palps small, stout, ventral length equal to first

® setigers, palpostyles globose, One pair ynten-

noe extending ta level with palps. Pour pairs

of tentacular eirri, longest extending to middle

of setiger 7, shallowly. but distinctly angulated,

Eversible pharynx with stout, curved jaws,

transparent brown with 6 (left)-9 (mght)

teeth. Paragnaths brown cones, arranged as

follows: [ = 4 1n irregalar longitudinal group:

1 — 21 (right)-27 Ueft) iu oblique band: LW

32 in broad transverse band. 1Y = 39 in

transverse Y-shaped band with one atm of ¥

towards jaws; oral }lag bare,

Porsal cirrus about 0.2 times leneth of

dorsal notopodial lobe anteriorly. retaining

similar length relative to other lohes along

length of body. Notopodinl lohes conical be-

coming more poiited posteriorly, dorsal and

ventral similar in size except in far posterior

where dorsal notopodial lobe decreases to be-

come absent in last few setigers. Presetal noto-

podial lobe small, rounded on dorsal base of

Ventral notopodial lobe in anterior setigers

(Fig 2b), deereasing in size posteriorly (Pig.

2c). Neurnpodial labes becoming widely

PA, HUTCHINGS & S FP. TURVEY

separated fram notopodial lobes in late anterior

setigers. Dorsal neuropodial lobe extending

approximately as far as noltopadial lobes an-

teriorly, becoming relatively shorter pas.

leriorly, Ventral neuropodial lobe conical and

well-developed In far anterior setigers, reducing

from about setiger 6 to a small tubercle by

about seliger 25 then remaiting as such, Dorsal

oeuropodial lobe without well-developed pre

or postsetal lobes. Ventral cirrus extending

one-third to halfway to tip of ventral neuro-

podial lohe, Acicular black, brown al extrem

ties. For numbers and types of setae xee Table

4, Heterogomph falcigers pale. shafts slightly

thicker than spinigers, appendages slender.

finely toothed along most of margin, weakly

hooked with indistinet tendon. Giant simple

fulcigers formed by ankylosis and rearrange-

ment of teeth of heterogomph faleigers in

dorsal neuropodial fascicle over about setigers

20-30 (Fig. 2d, c). Dorsal nenrofaleigers ih

this region with intermediate characteristics.

Fully formed giant simple faleigers very thick,

dark brown. distally strongly hooked with

bhintly conical main fang surmounted hy

transverse band of several small teeth, tendon

distinct,

Anal cirt) extend over last 2 setigers.

Comunents: Varistions nat described for holo-

type include peristomium length 1,3-1.5 times

width, Palp length equal to first 1.5—-2 setigers

ventrally. Antennae extending to level with er

well past palps. Both antennac and tentacular

Taste 4, Sele! counts (or holotype ef Ceratonereis

pscudtocrythracensis asp.

No. of setue

Setiver Setiger Sctiges

47 BO

Notosetae +t

hhomogomph spinigers 8 6 +

Neurosetae

(|) Dorsal fasciele

above—homegomph

spiwers Q 4 a

below —heleroeomph

faleigers 3a —

—siant simple

falcivers a ! |

Gi} Ventral fisciecle

above—heterogomply

Spinigers 20 fr $

below --helerozgemph

faleigers — 6 1

Parapodia before about setiger 14 without hetero-

gomph falcigers in Ventral! neuropodial fascicle,

THE NEREIDIDAE OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA Wy

cirri shallowly, distinetly annulated, longest

tentacular cirri extending lo seliger 5-9, Para-

unaths with | — I—4, may not be visible in

very small specimens: 1 10-36 in oblique

band sometimes divided towards jaws; HI

(7-45 in narrow to broad transverse band:

IV 12-§3 in V+ or Y-shaped band. Para-

guaths in land Wf may be harely visible in

smull specimens, Dorsal cirrus extending two-

thirds of the way to ar just reaching tip of

dotsal notopodinl lobe jn anterior setigers,

posteriorly remaining similar or elongating to

two or three fines length of dorsal notapodial

labe before lntier deereases. Relative lengths

of dorsal and Yentral netopodial and dorsal

neuropodial lohes on average similar anteriorly,

dorsal neurapodial lobe frequently shorter

posteriorly. Ventral neuropodial lobe decreas-

ing to small tubercle by middle setigers

Numbers of setae at about setiger 10 and in

middle and posterior setigers respectively as

follows: notosctae 3-18, 1-7, 1-4 homagamph

spinigers; neurosetae dorsally 3-13, |—10,

2-§ homogomph spinigers above and below

|—4 heterogomph tuleizers followed later by

1, | (rarely 2) giant simple falergers: vene

(rally 1-18, 1-6, [-5 heterogomph spinigers

above and 2-6, 1-10, 1-§ heterogomph falci-

gers below, Setae of any type and position

occasionally missing. Occasional specimens

lacking hetevogomph = falcigers in dorsal,

ventral or both neuropodial fascicles of some

anterior parapodia. Falcigers in dorsal ucuro-

podial fascicle all heterazomph ip far anterior

setigers, developing into giant simple lalcigers

hy middle setigers. The numbers of paragnuths

and setae generally increase with size of speci-

men, Larger specimens than in the paratype

series with higher paragnath counts, wy.

specimens From Swin River about 80 mm in

leneth (WAM 70-34) with 9-12 paragnaths

in Area t,

Disenyssion: Ceratonerety ervihracensis Fauve)

hus heen reported widely from around Aus-

tralia. Closer exumunation of this material re-

Vealed certain differences [rom Fauvel's

(1918) description of the species, Fauvel

deseribed this species again as a thew species

In 1919, from the same locality which 7s

rather confusing, The Muséum National

Histoire Naturelle, Paris, is unwilling to

lond type material, although we were able to

horrow material identified by Fauyel as ©

erythrarensiss This maternal aprees with

Panvel's descriptions and figures exeept that

the material has a slightly reduced Ventral

nenropadial Jobe cumpared to that fiyured by

Covel, The material from Boui de Tadjoura

isin an advanced state of epitaky, The material

fron Australia differs in the paragnath pattern,

in the shape and dentition of the simple setae,

and in the sirong reduction of the venteal

heuropodial lohe,

There wre suggestions im the llerature

(Monra, 1938 and us cited in Kote 1951;

Hartman 1959) that C. ervehracensis Fawvel,

1918 ik Synonymons wilh © megieseris

(Augener, 1913) and that Augener over-

looked the presence of the simple setae. The

simple setae are very conspicuous and we do

nat believe ihar Augener could have over-

looked them, Atuigener’s species also lacks

heterogomph lalcigers except in far posterior

selipers, whereas these are present in C. efy-

thraeensis uml ©. psendaerthyracensiv Tsp.

There thus appears to he lwo species of Cera-

tanereiy in Swan River, the type-locylily of

C, dequisets and the site of Monro’s material,

Monro figures a dentate simple seia which

wlosely resembles £ pweudacrythragensix nap.

We examined Monpro's material and it is

identical to © psendoervthraeensis nsp.

Examination of Katt's material (6815) re.

vealed that, contrary to her description, neura-

podial faleigers ure generally presout anteriorly

and the simple sefue are denipic as in C-

préeudoervihvacenais A.8), Kott removed the

pharynges on her three speeimeirs so we can-

ner confirm the paragnath counts Additional

material from southwest W.A,, Including the

Swan River, is also ©. pyendoerythracensis

sp,

We have hail access lo a very tarpe range

of material (not all listed in ‘Materials

Examined” section) tnd have seen ne evi

dence of epitokal modifications similar ta

those in Pauvel’s marerial. J contrast, several

mature worms have been found in fimsy sandy

tubes surraynded by juveniles or caes (eu

(8280), indicating some sort of brood protec-

tion, This further supports the separation of

the species aid uegates the idea that the

smooth simple setae may be warn dentate

solie.

The presenee i one estuary al twe species

which are monphulugically similar is. unusual,

hut this aectirs ip the Swan River, Western

Australia, where both ©. aedqidvetis and €,

psoudoervilvncensiy Thspy epexist, However,

this group of Ceranerets with simple setae

12 Pv. A. HUTCHINGS & 8. Fh TURVEY

(psetdacrythracensis isp. lransverva f.8p.

and daiphidenta sp.) appears to have

radiated within southern Australia. A further

two undeserihed speeics in this complex pro-

hably occur in estuarine areas of N.S.W, (Hut-

chings & Glasby. in press),

Ceratonereis Vaipekae Gibbs, 1972 from the

Cook Islands generally resembles ©, pxcudo-

ervduneensiy omsp. hut differs in that the

notopodial lobes are geytely conical on all

setigers. anil the yventeal neuropodial lobe

although reduced posteriorly. still cemains as

a well developed Jobe, The simple falcigers

ol C. vaipekee have a conical main fang with

rows of small teeth ahove. with weil developed

tendon but only slightly darker and heavier

(hun other setae whereas in © pseudnery-

throeensiy nap. the simple faleigers are much

heavier than the other setae.

The specifle name refers to the similurity

of the ucw species to C. erviliracensiy Fauvel,

with which it has been confused within Aus

tralia over muny years.

Auviralian Destrihutions Western Australia,

South Australia. Victoria, New South Wales

and Queensland,

Hahirar: Estuarine arcas in muddy sand often

associited with seagrass beds.

Ceratonereis transversa n,sp.

FIG, 3a-2

HOLOTYPE: S.A.O3A (18398) anterior Fraz-

Ment OF 123 setigers, RO mm Teneth and 3 mm

wide, PARATYPRS: 224 (AHF POLY 1349)

224 (BMNH ZA 1982:3). 083C (USNM O71529)_

O2H, 3 (R405). N2C, | CRAB). OFA, 2 CPR4ANT).

O38, | (P8406), 12A, 1 CT8405), IBA, 7 ¢18400),

IFA, | (18401), 139A, 1 18399). Size range of

titiect specimens, S¢ setigers. 6.9 mmm length, 0.5

mm width ta 144 setigers, 35 mm leneth, 1.9 mm

Width, anterior fragments up to 2.3 mm width.

ciddilional Murerialy W.A.—Bunbury (18478)

coll, Snell,

Deveription’ Head small, body width jaceeas-

ing gradually from head to robust Aattened

mid section, then tapering yradually poas-

teriorly (Paratype 18401, Fie, 30). Celour in

aleohnl pinkish brown with purplish glandular

pitches at base of dorsal cirrus, becoming

More intense posteriorly. Prostominm length

about equal to width with deep antera.

median groove, 2 pairs of diffuse reddish eyes,

| pair of small evlindrical palps, palposiyle

Gobose, Tentacular cien faintly annnlated.

longest extending to setiger 5. Pversible

pharyns with slender transparent brown jaws,

with 9 teeth Paragnaths pale—dark brown

cones, arrajiged as follows. | = O IL = &

in Iransverse line of large and small cones;

itl = 0: Iv 7 in transverse line of large

and small cones; oral ting bare,

Doral cirrus 0.7-1.0 times length of dorsal

notapodig! lobe in anterior setigers (Fig. 3b).

increasing postenurty to whoul Z times, Dorsal

and ventral notopodial lobes conival, about

equal in length. Presetal notopodial lobe

slightly produced in anterior setigers us low

ridge on hase of ventral notepodial Iohe,

diminishing posteriorly (Pig. 3ea), Dorsal

neuTopodial fabe in setigers !-16 beuring

larze, digitiform postsetal lobe extending pos-

terolaterally, frequently to or past notopodial

Johes, Ventral neuropodial tobe conical. well

developed anteriorly, then diminishing rapidly

to be absent by middle setigers. Ventral

cirrus reaching halfway to tip of ventral neuro-

podial lobe anteriorly und approximately to

point of emergence of most ventral neuro-

sefae in later setigers. Acicular datk hrown-

black with hyaline tips. For numbers and

types of setae see Tuble 5. Giant simple falei-

gers {Fig 3c) formed by gradual ankylosis

ind rearrangement of teeth of dorsal hetero-

gomph faleigers over approximately setigers

20-30, strongly hooked with several small

teeth above main fang, dark distally, withe

out tendon, Heterogomph falcigers with

elongate appendage. weakly hooked. finely

toothed, proportions of appendage and shalt

changing jittle posteriorly. Homogamph spini-

gers shown in Pig. 3f.

Comments: Variations tot described for holo-

type include prostomnim length 1.3-1,5 times

width, eyes strongly pigmented to unpig-

mented, longest tentacular cirri extending ‘to

setiger 6-9, Jaw teeth 7-9. Paragnaths in I

7 and 1V ~ 3-9, dark brown, or transparent

and Visible only as refractile projections in

transmitted light. Dorsal notopadial lobe de-

creasing to become gbsent in tar posterior

setigers on entire specimens. Number of

anterior setivers with digitiform neuropost

selal lobes increasing toughly with size of

specimen, up to the first 16-18 setigers in

medium and large specimens to as few as the

first 6 in very small specimens. Variation in

niimbers and types of setae tor 9 paralypes

shown in Table 5, Numbers of setae reducing

io anly a few in posterier sctigers. A sinele

specimen with intact anal cirri, very long, filn-

mentous, extendiig over last 17 seticers

THE NEREIDIDAE OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA 103

Fig, 3, Ceratonereis transversa n.sp. a. dorsal view of anterior end (Paratype 18401). b. anterior view

of 11th parapodium. c. anterior view of 58th (early middle) parapodium. dd. anterior view of

137th parapodium (USNM 071529). e. simple falciger. f. notopodial homogomph spiniger. g.

natatory seta from subepitoke, from dorsal neuropodial fascicle. Scales in mm.

2:3

104 P. A. HUTCHINGS & S. P, TURVEY

ashe $. Sete! cenase Jor Ceratonerets transversa

W.SD;

No. of setac

Setiger Seliger

in 120

Notosetae : re ;

homoromph spinigers 6(6-12)" 5 (2-10)

Neurosctae

(i) Dorsal Fascicte

above —homogomph

spinigers 14¢3-18) 912-7)

below—heterogomph ;

faleigers g(3-4) —

—riant simple

falcigers - 4 (od)

(ii) Ventral fascicles

above—hererogomph

spinigers 20 (6-11) 71-12)

helaw—heterogomph

falcigers 16 (4-9) § (3-9)

numbers of setae occurring in 9 paratypes,

One paratype (18399) with some epitokal

modification. Eyes large. Anterior parapodia

unmodified, Epitokous parapodia developing

gradually from about setiger 41-43 with ine

crease in length of purapodial lobes relative

i tolal body width but no accessory lobes.

Natatory setae homogomph spinigers with

slightly broader, very finely dentate appen-

dages and shafts extremely long (Fig, 3¢),

3-45 times length of appendage compared with

1-2 times length of appendage in normal

spinigers, plus slightly reduced complement. of

normal setac,

Diseussion: Ceratanerels fransversa tap. be-

longs ta the small group of Ceratenereis

characterised by the presence of simple neuro-

podial falcigers, Tt can be distinguished from

the other species in this complex occurring

in Australian (See key) by the absence of

puragnaths in Area TY of the pharynx. Cera-

tonereiy, transversa nusp, differs from ©,

valpekae Gibbs, 1972 in the arrangement of

puragnaths and the presence of well-developed

postsetal neuropodial lobes in anterior pora-

pods.

The name, frafiyverse tefers to the trans-

verse arfaugement of paragnaths on the

pharynx in Areas IT and 1¥,

Australian Distributions South Australia,

Hehitar: Associated with mud flats amd sea-

erase beds.

Micronercis Claparéde

Pharynx eversible without papillae or para-

gnaths, Two pairs of tentacular cirri present;

Parapodia biramous. No apodous segment

immediately posterior to peristomium, An-

tennae absent, All setae homogomph spinigers.

Type species: Ad. varievata Claparéde.

Micronereiy hale? Hattman

FIG. 4a

Micronereis halei Hartman, 1954:25, Figs. [B—-21-

Paxton (in press),

Material Examined: 8.A.—23A, 12 spec, (18380).

S4A, 1 (18379),

Description: Size range, 19 sctigers, 3.2 mm

Jength, 0,75 mm width, to 25 setigers, 6.3 mm

longth, 1.1 mm width, Prostamium rounded,

with pair of ventral palps and 2 pairs of

lensed eyes. Antennae absent. Four pairs of

weakly biarticulated tentacular cirri, Pharynx

without paragnaths. Parapodia with home-

gomph spinigers, appendages finely serrated.

heeoming shorter and enclosed in transparent

cylindrical sheet ventrally with teeth more

restricted to base.

Males with sperm morulie present in

coclom, with additional accessory cirri (=

digitate lobes, Hartman 1954). Some spinigers

modified (— fulcigers of Paxton, in press),

with appendage more coarsely toothed dis.

tally, extremity enclosed in sub-spherical trans-

parent cap displaced towards edge denticulated

(Fig. 4a). Gravid female, with large yotky

eggs, lacking accessory cirri and modified

spinigers.

Commenis; Our material agrees well with

Hartman's (1954) and Paxton’s (in press)

descriptions and we have heen able to add

comments on gravid females. In some of oir

epitokous males the spinigers appear ta be

more coarsely toothed than figured by Paxton,

and we disagree with her mterpretation that

they are falcigers.

Australian Distribution; South Australia.

Mabitat: Associated with algae and sheltered

rock pools,

Namanereis Chamberlin, emended

Eversible pharynx smooth or with soft

papillae, Three or four pairs of tentacular cirm

present: parapodia sub-biramous with 2

avicula, hut no development of notopodial

lobes, Dorsal cirrus compact, Neurosetac in-

chide homegomph $spinigers and faleigers,

Notosetac all spinigers.

THE NEREIDIDAE OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA 105

“05

Fig. 4. Micronereis halei a. modified notopodial seta from male epitoke. Nereis cockburnensis. b.

anterior view of epitokous parapodium, setiger 41. Scales in mm.

Type species: Lycastis quadraticeps Gay

Discussion: The above generic diagnosis con-

siderably expands Chamberlin’s diagnosis, with

details regarding the setae and the sub-bira-

mous parapodia.

Gay originally placed his species in Lycastis

Savigny which Chamberlin (1919) found was

preoccupied, proposed the name Namanereis

and designated N. quadraticeps as the type-

species.

There is confusion in the literature as to

the terminology of parapodia with two acicula

but lacking the development of notopodial

lobes. Strictly speaking, these are biramous

but perhaps the term sub-biramous is more

appropriate. Hartmann-Schréder (1977) in a

106 P. A. HUTCHINGS & S. P. TURVEY

key to the Nereididae lacking paragnaths indi- biramous. Unfortunately, she provides no

cates that Namanereis lacks capillary noto- explanation of this loss of notosetae in the

setae, although the parapodia are sub- generic diagnosis, and it is not accepted by us.

0-5 —

0-15

-015

Fig. 5. Namanereis littoralis n.sp, a, dorsal view of anterior end. b, anterior view of 16th para-

podia. c. notopodial homogomph spiniger (in part). d. neuropodial heterogomph falciger. Scales

In mm,

(HE NEREIDIDAE OF SQUTH AUSTRALIA

Namanervis litlorafis n.sp.

FIG, Sah

Namanercis quidrariceps,—Benham, 19): 242-

244, Pl, EX, figs, 2-10. Aupener, 1924 39-41),

Non Gay.

HOLOTYPE. SA —Port Adelaide, mangroves,

North Aco (8004) coll, Butler 104.73; 80 seti-

ers, 2 om length, 1,5 mm wide, complete.

PARATYPES: N.S,W.—Towrn Point, Botany

Ray. mudfat (AHF POLY 1350) 66 setigers. 20

mm teneth, 11) mm width, complete. (BMNH “4B

1982: 4) 79 setivers. 23 mm lenglh, 1.5 mm

width, complete, (USNM 071530) 52 setiyers, 22

mm leneth, 1.5 mim Width, complete 2 (12314)

47 setigers, 8 mm length, O.8 width: 47 seligers

1] mm length 0.8 om widths coll. N.S.W Lilt,

Society, 27.64.77. S§,A.—Gorden Esland, Port Ade-

jaide (6774), coll. Zou}, Dept, Umvy of Adelaide

101.(2,77

Additional Material Examined: Lycastis qaudra-

triceps Auckland Port Ross (H2ZM V9373). det,

Augener. Mavalh. Sir, Punta Arenas; beach under

stones (H7M V4780), det, Eblers,

Description Preserved body opaque white,

Prostomitim iruncale, oval shaped, One pair

mntennac, small biarticulute. Globular palps

with small spherical palpastyles, Two pairs af

eyes at base of prostomium, posterior pair

partially hidden by penstamial fold. Four

pairs of short tentacular cirri extending to

postetior margin of seliger |. Peristome

achaetous, narrow. Pharynk lacking paragnaths

or papillae, with pair of chitinised jaws, Jaws

wilh terminal tooth and 3 basnl teeth

Parapodia sub-biramous with 2 thick dark

brown acicula, not protruding. Dorsal elrris

as small feal-shaped palpode arising from

glundular byse, similarly developed through-

cyt length of body (Fig. Sa); in some para-

types slight merease in size posteriorly, Nota-

podial lobes absent. Neurapodia with oval

pre- and postsetal lobes, presetal slightly

longer. Single heterogomph spiniger with finely

feathered blade associated with notapodial

geiculum. MNeurosetae dJong-bladed hetero-

gomph spinigers with blades finely serrated

and heteragomph, short-bladed, coarsely-

toothed fuleigers, gtanular inclusions im shalt

(Fig. 5b). Setal counts constant along body,

neurosetae 1-2 spinigers and 6-7. falcivers

Body constricted posteriorly, pygidiim with

terminal anus and 2 short thick divergent anal

cit,

Discussion: Benham (1809) described nereid

worms from the supralittaral zone of Campbell

Island as Licastis quadrarteeps Gay, 1849. He

107

did not ¢xamine Gay's material and expressed

doubl about his identification, Gay (1849) de-

scribed his material from Calbuco, Chile,

with uniramous parapodia greatly projectmg,

particularly the anterior anes, with few setae

and dersal cirri very small, Gay’s only figure

al the entire werm is not large enough to

differentiate any details. Subsequently, Gay's

species Was reported by Ehlers (1897),

(1900), (1901) and (1913) from the Straits

of Magellan in 2.7 fms: Punta Arenas, inter-

tidally; and St Paul, Ebbestrand, all in South

America, Etlers provides no descriptions,

however. [n eoutrast, Benham clearly figures

the parapodia with 2 acicula although noto-

podisl lobes are absent. Subsequently, Augener

(1923) reported the species from Port Ros.

Aucklind Island (Qyhich is the same bio-

geographic area as Campbell Island) with little

comment and no description,

Later, Fauvel (1941) deserihed the species

from Mission a terre, Cape Horn, with unira-

mous parapodia but with a few fine notoselac

(presumably spinigers) present. Subsequently.

Hartman (1964) reported the species from the

Antarctic and quotes all these authors

nol apparently examining any material. The

figures she provides are copies of Benharn’s

(1909) figures.

We believe that il is nol possible ta sub-

tantiate whether or not Benham’s material

fram Campbell Island was the same as Gay's.

Benham’s material is not in existence and

attempts to locate Gay's material have been

unsuccessful. Benhani himself expressed

doubts. Our material from Australia uppears

to be identical with that of Benham's and we

have decided to describe it as a new species

as we consider Gay's species to be indeter-

mingte, By this, we.are endeavouring to clarify

the situation, The species from South America

will need to be redeseribed based on the loca-

tion of all Ebler’s material or on new collec-

tions. Only then can a decision be made as

ta whether in fact one or two species are

volved. If only one is, then this species is

circumpolar. The identity of N. quadraticeps

is important as i! 1 the type-species of the

azenus, Recently some fresh material from

Chile has been seen by Hutchings, which will

be deserlbed, and may be N. suadratceps.

This material differs lram AN, fittoralis asp.

Finally Hartman (1959) synonomised N.

hartahoensis Treadwell, 19260 with NN. quad-

rafleeps with na comment, Treadwell’s deserip-

108 PF, A. HUTCHINGS & S. PB

Lion does fot agree with our material or Ben-

ham’s. Natosctae are absent in N. kartabaensis

and the development of the dorsal cirrus

resembles those more typically found in the

venus Namelycevits. Treadwell’s material also

needs to be re-examined,

The specific name refers to (he posilin on

the share where the animal lives.

Austealiun Disiribution; South Australia, New

South Wales.

Habitar: Associated with mangroves, often uy

the supraliltaral zone.

Neavithes Kinberg

Pharynx eversible with conical paragnaths

on both oral and maxillary rings. Pour pairs

of tentacular cirri, Parapodia biramous. Noto-

sctae homogumph spimgers; neurosetae homo-

and heterogemph spimgers and heterogamph

falcivers,

Type species: N. vaalii Kinberg,

Neaiuthes bisertats sp.

FIG, Ga-d

HOLOVYVPR: S.A—O6B (18417) 64 setigers. 15

mm lengih, 1.9 mm width. PARATYPES: (468,

13 (AHF POLY 1351), 09B, 6 (BMNH ZB 1982:

4-10). ISA, 9 (USNM 071551). 4A, 4 (184251.

N6B. Ah CibdlR). OFA, EF 118419). TRA, 44

(18420), 19A, 2 (18428) © epituke. 19B. 6

112426) @ epiloke, 19D. 3 (18429), 2A, 1

(18421), 2A, 14 (18422), 26A, | (78425) 32C.

1 (18424), Parutypes range mm size from 44 setr-

gers. 6.7 mm tength. 0.9 min watth to 63 setigers,

18 mm length, 1.9 mm width,

BDeseription; Robust flattened body, dull

pinkish brown in alcohol. Prostumium length

1.25 times width, Two pairs of bluish red

eves. One pair of palps. stout. compressed-

palpostyles smull, globular. Pour pairs of

tentacular cirri, long, distally tapered, longest

extend to setiger &, Antennae and tentacular

cirri With fie irregular annulations., Saws

short, robust, Pharynx with dark brown

conical paragnuths, as follows: 1 — 6 in

diamond: IL = (4 ip triangular patch of 3-4

irregular oblique rows of medium sized cones

plus Tew small cones; TIT >= 36 large cones in

transverse oval patel: PV = Albin rectangular

patch; Vo 7 in triangular patch with large

cones anteriorly, smaller cones behind: VE =

17 forming transverse arc of large cones with

are of small cones behind, including cantinua-

vows of groups fram V and VIII; VII-VIL

about 100, ia broad band 3+ deep ventrally

reduce to 2 Jatetally, anterior rows with

TURVEY

large cones and posterior rows with numerous

small cones.

Dorsal cirrus 2—5 times length of dorsal

nolopodial lobe. Darsal and veniral notopadil

lobes shart, broadly conical anteriorly, (Fig.

64) lobes and notopodium as a whole becom-

ing more elonyate posteriorly (Fig. 6b), Pre-

sctal noropodial lobe uw low ridge on ventral

notopodial lobe, decreasing posteriorly, Dorsal

neuropodial lobe extending past nolopodial

Johbes anteriorly, shorter posteriorly. Ventral

neurapacdial labe bluntly conical in the first

seliger, becoming shorter, rounded, then pro-

gressively fusing with dorsal nevropodial lobe

so that free part reduced to small tubercle by

about seliver 16. Ventral cirrus ulmost or just

reaching tip of ventral neuropodial tobe

anteriorly, extending just beyond posteriorly,

Acicula dark brown, For numbers and types

of setae see Table 6, Shafts of falcigers (Fiz

6d) thicker than for spinigers and becoming

slightly thieker posteriorly. Falciger appen-

dyges moderately hooked, coarsely ivathed

basally and with long, fine, indistinct tendon,

hecaming shorter, broader, more strongly

hooked posteriorly with teeth finer and more

restricted to basil region. Anal cirri extending

over fast § setigers.

Male epitoke (18426), almost fully mature.

Ryes large. blue-black. Paragnaths ay for

atoke. Dorsal cirri on setigers 1-7 and ventral

cirri on seligers 1-5 basally swollen. Epitokous

parapodia from setiger 15. Dorsal cirri) with

large round tubercles ventrally, except for last

20 setigets, Additional digitiform lobes ahove

buses of dorsal and ventral civri. Large fan-

shaped lobe medially on base of ventral cirrus.

Dorsal neuropodial lobe with fan-shaped

postsctal lobe produved dorsolaterally, veniral

neurapoadial lohe digitiform, Dorsal and

ventral potopodial lobes flattened, bladelike,

presetal notopodial lobe produced as flattened

ridge. Additional lobes Ieast develaped m

anierior and posterior parapodia,

Female epitoke (18428) as for male epitoke

(18426) except epitoky is less advanced.

Epitokous development occurs from setiger

}8. Dorsal cirri inflated on setigers I-6 only

and ventral cirri on setigers 1-4, Epttokous

dovsal circ) formal, not tuberculate, and

veniral neuropodial lobe mot reaching dorsal

neuropodial lohe (Fig. 6c).

Cammenis: Additional vanatians not described

for holotype include prostomium length {—

1.25 times width. eyes reddish to bluish black.

THE NEREIDIDAE OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA 109

0:6

Fig. 6. Neanthes biseriata n.sp. a. anterior view of 11th parapodium. b. posterior view of 56th para-

podium. c. anterior view of 34th parapodium with early epitokal modifications. d. ventral neuro-

podial heterogomph falciger, setiger 11. Scales in mm.

longest tentacular cirri extending to setiger 11-24 arranged as for holotype, central arcs

7-12. Paragnaths | — 2-6, often as longi- of large and small cones variably but usually

tudinal series with a few behind: IT = 8-16; only slightly separated from continuations of

IL = 16-41; IV = 16-38; V = 3-7: VI = — groups V and VIII into VI; VII-VIT = 58-

110

PA, HUTCHINGS & & P, TURVEY

Cape b. Set! Coutts for Neunthes biseriata jsp.

No. of setae

Setiger 11 Setiger 31 Setiger 56

Nethesetiie

homogomph spinigers 7 (4-1Ue' 5 (2-5) 241-3)

Neuresetae

(1) Dorsal faseicte

ubove—homogumph spinizers S (2-8) 12-55 4+ (24)

below—hcterogomph falcigers 2 11-3) 2 (1-2) 1 cle

Gi) Veritral faseicle

above—homogomph spinigers 1 clei 1 tdi 1 tle2)

below—heterogomph falcigers 9 (5-9) 4 (3-6) 3 (1-3)

‘Numbers ih byackets refer to the variation in numbers of setae occurring, in 1() paratypes.

91, Large individuals generally with more

abundant paragnaths, In small individuals the

dorsal notopodial Jobe may decrease in size

posteriorly and may disappear. Ventral meuro-

podial lobe reduced to rounded tubercle or

triangular flap posteriorly; in far posterior may

increase slightly in size or disappear,

Variation in numbers and types of setae

shown in Table 6. Large individuals generally

with more abundant setae. Anal cirri extend-

ing oVer last f-IL setigers.

Discussion: Neanthes biseriata nsp. belongs to

the group of Neanthes species which have only

two well developed notopadial lobes, and with

paragnaths of all areas of the pharynx includ-

ing a broad band on Areas VIL-VILL, Within

this group, N. crucifera (Grube, 1878), N.

inacrecephala (Hansen, 1882) differ markedly

in the shape of the parapodia and the number

and arrangement of the patagnaths from Nean-

they hiseriata n.sp. Neanthes larentukana

(Grube, 1881) N. vitabynda (Pflugfelder,

1933), N, willev? (Day, 1934), and N, vaalii

(Kinberg, 1966) differ from Neanthes biseriata

nsp. in the arrangement of the paragnaths.

Neanthes latipatpa (Sehmarda, 1/861) is

poorly described, no paragnath counts are

given, and it appears that the notopodin

although bilobed anteriorly, become simple

posteriorly. Unless the type of this species can

be found, re-examined, and fully described we

consider that this species is indeterminable.

Other species in this group, N. cortez

Rudenov, 1979, N, pyeudenood(i Fauchald,

1977h, and N. noedti Hartmann-Schriéder,

1942 and characterised by the dorsal noto-

podia of posterior segments becoming ex-

tremely clongate, cirrifort, bearing the dorsal

cirrus as a shorl terminal filament, In Neanthes

biveriata usp. the two notopodial lobes do

not become extremely clongate posteriorly and

the dorsal cirrus is well] developed, arisiny

from the base of the dorsal lobe. Neanthes

roavevelti Hartman, 1939 has 2 laree and

about 50 minute paragnaths on Area 1 and 50

minute ones in Area V of the pharynx, which

is very different to the pattern found in

Neanthes biseriata nusp. Finally, the fast

species in this group, N, augenerl (Gravier &

Dantan, 1934) Jacks homogomph spinigerous

neurosetae whereas in Neantheys bisertata n.sp.

these are present amongst the dorsal neuro-

setac. For these reasons we have described

Neanthes biseriatt as a new species.

The name refers to the arrangement of para-

gnaths it Area VIoof the pharynx,

Pistributions South Austratia,

Aabirat; Sand, in amongst aleac, or in crevices

of under vocks,

Neanthes rricoenatha CERlers)

Nereis ertcognatha Ehlers, 1904: 29-30, PL 1¥,

fits 3-7.

Neanthes erleogianha—Knox, 1981: 217-218, Pl,

45, figs 6-8. Mlartman, 1954) (4. Hutchings &

Rainer, 1979; 754.

Nearithes near érieergnatha——Hariman, 1954: 14.

28, Previous synonomics given by Day & Hut-

chings, 1979,

Material Examined® S.A —02B, | spec. (18301),

12B, 1 (18302), 27A, 1 (18300)

Description: Size range. 43 setigers, 11.5 mm

length, 1.6 min width to 53 setigers, 23 min

length, 3.0 mm width. Pharynx with conical

paragnaths (individual counts given for

nraterial in order of stats, 1 2B, 0O2B and 27A);

1 = 13,12. 16 in diamond or triangular patch:

1 26-29, 27-29, 33-34. oblique crescent

oy ellipse of 2 irregular’ rows, largest cones

towards jaws; TH 28, 36, 63 in approxi-

mately circular pateh: IV = 29-30, 43-44,

45-47, in triangular patch! V. VI, VII, VIII

= continuous band, 5 deep ventrally, 2 deep

JHE NEREIDIDAF OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA tt

dorsally with a row of somewhat larger,

slightly curved cones (towards jaws; continuous

broad band of smull canes 5-7 deep; band of

sinall cones narrower in VI afd absent in V

with row of large, crescent-shaped cones

towards jaws.

Notopodia wilh 3 Lnangular lobes, presetal

Inhe compressed, clongate, acutely triangular

decreasie in size posteriorly, Neuropodia with

2 main lobes, Jorsal and Ventral, dorsal with

triangular postsetal Johe decreasing pos-

teriorly, Notosetae homogonmph spinigers only,

Neurosctae with heterogomph faleigers and

homayomph spinigers both dorsally and ven-

(rally,

OCrinments Considerable variation oceurred

heiween specimens in the tength-width ratios

of the appendages af the heterogomph falei-

gers, length ranvine from 8-10 times the

width te 3-3.5 fines.

Our limited material covers the ranges of

paragnalth counts and paiterns given by Hart-

may (1954) for N- ericagnarha and N_ near

cricagmaria, and We suggest that N. near erice-

evathn is jwsh a form of N. cricagratha.

Auyiralian Disteiburians Western Australia,

Seauth Australia, Vietorig, New South Wales

(Careel Bay).

Auhtiare Associated with Pasidonra toud Mats

avd sponges crowing in fast-flowing channels.

Neanthes isolate nsp.

Vics Jo-u

HOLOTYPE: SAMAR (18440). 53 setigers, 15

mm Jeneth, 2.1 mim width PARATYPES: 198.

4 (AHF FOLY 1952). GBA, € (BMNH ZB L982;

1J-18). 32A, 4 CUSNM 071532). U4A, 6 (18442),

N4B, 2 (1X4da)) 6B, 3 (18448), OKA, ZT RadS)

IBA. 3 ()edd7. ISA) (1Bdd4). 19B. 1 (TR4d5),

2A, 2 CIBISY), DIA, 3 (18450). WALT (18452)

320, 2 ()Sd4G). Size ranwe, 42 scligers, 6 mm

length, Vb me width to 47-+ setigers posteriorly

intomplcte 15 mm Jeneth, 2.) mm width.

Deseripnon: Bady anteriorly robust and flat-

lened, tupering posteriorly. colour pimk in

aleohol, pharyns partially everted, Proste-

Wiin, length equal fo width, Two pairs of

deeply embedded, dull reddish eyes. Palps us

lon as wide, Steut, slehtly ¢cornpressed,

styles globular, One pair of anlennac., Pour

pairs of fentaculur cirri, longest extending to

seliger 7-8, irregularly annulated, more dis-

linetly towards lips. Pharvnx with jaws trans-

lneent, dark brow, short, robust. Paragnaths

all comeal, dark pirple-brown arranged as

follows; T= 1; 11 = 9-17 in 2 oblique rows:

HW = 16 in etreular patehy IV = 18-20 in

transverse rectangular patch; V > 2 large

cones in longitudinal series with 2 small cones

behind; VI 8=11 cones, large to small,

continuous with groups in Vo and VITE but

with small, isolated, irregular patch of 3-5 in

centre! VII-VIIT = 5t large and medium

sized cones in continuous band 4 deep ven-

trally, 2 deep laterally, small cones rare.

Dorsal cirrus 2-3 limes length of dorsal

notopodial lobe anteriorly, 3-5 times pos-

jeriorly, Dorsal and ventral notopadial lobes

bluntly conical anteriorly (Fig. 7a) becoming

mare rounded jn setigers 6-12, then more

pointed posteriorly (Fig, 7b), Presetal noto-

podial lobe maximally produced in middle

setivers ag low, thick ridge on base of ventral

Wolopodial Jobe, well-developed — anteriorly

becoming wegligible posteriorly. Notopodium

becoming influted around base of dorsal cirrus

in posterior parapodia but with little elonga-

tion. Dorsul neuropodial Jobe extending to

about level with ventral notopodial lobe,

ventral neuropodial lobe shorter. becoming

more pointed posteriorly and remaining free

with little decrease in relative size, Veniral

cirrus almost or just feaching tip of Ventral

neuropodial Jobe anteriorly, extending just

heyond posteriorly, Avicula brown-black,

hyaline at tips, For numbers and types of

setae sce Table 7. Appendages of heterogomph

latcigers (Fig, Ted) coarsely toothed basally,

tip =fiaderately hooked, blunt to sharply

angular with fine, closely applied tendon, be-

coming relatively shorier and broader pos-

teriorly with finer teeth and more wadely se-

parated tendon. Shafts of falcigers thicker

than for spinigers, hecorming slightly thicker

posteriorly,

Anal cirri extending over lust 5 setigers.

Canmments: Additional variations net de-

scribed for holotype include peristomiam

length 0.75--1.5 times width, eyes teddish ta

hlue-hlyek with lenses clearly visible or indis-

tinct. longest tentacular cirri extending io

seliger 5-8. Paragnaths 1 = 1 of occasionally

2 in longitudinal series, IE — 6-10 in 2-3

oblique rows; Ti 8-12 in circular or oval

pateh; TV = 8-16 a transverse rectangle or

triangle; V ~ 2-3 large cones in longitudinal

series with 1-3} small cones behind; VI - 6=—

11 with 2-5 an isolated central patch. VIT-

VII = 37-55 arranged as for holotype, fre-

quently with small cones scattered, common

Jaterally but rare Ventrally. Dorsal neuropodial

112 P, A. HUTCHINGS & S. P. TURVEY

Fig. 7. Neanthes isolata n.sp. a. anterior view of 11th parapodium. b. anterior view of 46th para-

podium. c. Dorsal neuropodial heterogomph falciger, setiger 11. d. ventral neuropodial hetero-

gomph falciger, setiger 47. Scales in mm.

lobe sometimes level with or shorter than notopodial lobe may diminish in posterior

notopodial lobes. Rounding of notopodial setigers, Variation in numbers and types of

lobes in anterior parapodia generally slight, setae shown in Table 7. Larger individuals

most noticeable in large specimens. Dorsal generally with more abundant setae.

THE NEREIDIDAF OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

Tani: 7. Setal canis for Neanthes isilata rsp.

No. of sctae

Setiger 1) Setiger 29 Setiger 46

Notasetee ;

homogomph spinigers & (3-14)" § (37) 3 11-4)

Neuraselac

fi) Dorsal fascicle 6

above—homogomph spinigers 6 (2-49) 3 (2-6) 1 (0-2

below—heterazomph fuleigers 2 (2-3) 27 (lJ) 2 11-2

(iu) Ventral fascicle

abuye—heterozomph spinigers 1 (1-2) 1 (1-2) 2 (0-2)

below—heterogomph faleigers 7 (5-8) 4 (3-5) 3 (2-4)

= Numbers in brackets refer te the variation in numbers of setae occurring in 9 paratypes.

Anal cirri extending over last 4—8 seligers,

Diveussion: Neanthes isolata nxp, belongs to

the same group of Neanrhey as N. blyseriated

osp. and No wniseriata n.sp. in having only

two well developed notopodial lobes and para-

gmaths in all areas of the pharynx including

au broad band of paragnaths on Areas VIT-

VIIL, Within this group three species, N,

cortez’ Kudenov, 1979, N. noodti Hartmann:

Sehreder, 1962, and N. — pseadonoodti

Fauchald, 1977b have the dorsal notopodial

lobe becoming extremely elongate posteriorly

and beuring the dorsal cirrus at its tip. 'This

docs not occur in Neanthexs iselata o.sp.

Neanthes biseriala nsp. and N. univeriata n.sp.

differ in the arrangement of paragnaths and

in the reduction of the ventral neuropodial

lohe (see Key),

The other species in this group, N. avgeneri

(Gravier & Dantan, L934), N. erveiferd

(Cirube. 1878), N. larentukana (Grube,

L881), No macrocephela (Hansen, 1882), N-

roasevelli (Hartman, 1939), N. witebunilea

(Plluefelder, 1933), and N, willeyi (Day,

1934), can he distinguished from Neanrhes

iselata isp. by the arrangement and number

of paragnaths, Neanihes dvvlata psp. most

closely reserubles N, wall’ (Kinberg, 1866)

but can be dislinguishedl by the arrangement of

the paragnuths, particularly on Areas V and

VI. For these reasons Neanthes itolata is de-

setibed as a new species.

The name refers to the arrangement of the

paragnaths in Area VI of the pharynx.

Pistribution; South Australia,

Habitat; Algal holdfasts, coralline algae. in

sand, erevice aura.

Neanihey kereuelensis (Melntosh)

Nereis kerguelensis Melntosh, 1885; 225-227, Pi,

34, fir, 10-12, PL 16a, fe, 17, 18.

Neaithes kerguelensis—Hartman, 1954: 30.

Muterial Examined: W.A.—Three Mile Reef. City

Beach, Perth (18492) coll. Coleman. S.A.—I7A,

5 spec, (18376), 244A, 17 (18377)

Description: Size range, from 39 setigers, 8.4

mm Jength, J.) mm width to 64 seligers, 30

mm length, 5.8 mm width. Pharynx with flat-

tened conical paragraths varying from dark

brown to almost colourless. arranged as follows:

1~ 0; 11 — 3-10 rarely up to 13, in 2 oblique

rows; HT = 0-10, rarely up to 16 in an oval

patch; IV = 6-11, rarely 3-18 in oval or

triangular pateh; V ~ 0, occasionally lt; VI =

0; VI-VOT = 0-4, large if present, of ven-

tral portion of ring in regularly spaced row,

Neuropodia with digitiform postsetal lobe

present in all but extreme posterior sctigers.

Notopodium becoming. dorsally inflated and

notopodial lobes extending further posteriorly

except in small specimens in which dorsal

notopodial Jobe often reducing posteriorly to

hecome absent,

Notosetae all homogomph spinigers, blade

becoming short and broad posteriorly, neuro-

setae homogomph spinigers and heterogomph

falcigers both dorsally and ventrally; rarely

with a few heterogomph spinigers. ventrally,

Falciger appendages coarsely toothed with ine

distinet tendon.

Cammenrs: In our material some individuals

may luck oral paragnaths or have very pale

paragnaths which are extremely difficult to

see. Such specimens are otherwise identical to

those with oral paragnaths,

Australian Distrikution: South Austeaha, 'Tas-

mania, Victoria and New South Wales.

Habitat: Associated with enerusting fauna.

Neanthes uniseriata n.sp.

VIG. 8a-c

HOLOTYPE: S.A.—30D (18430) 72 setigers, 27

mm length, 2.9 mm width, PARATYPERS: 30D,

114 P, A. HUTCHINGS & S. P. TURVEY

Fig. 8. Neanthes uniseriata n.sp.

podium.

8 spec. (AHF POLY 1353). 30D, 8 (BMNH ZB

1982: 17-24). 30D, 8 (USNM 071533). 06B, 2

(18438). O9B, 4 (18436). I8A, 14 (18435). 23A,

4 (18437). 30A, 50 (18432). 30C, 12 (18433).

30D, 62 (18431). 30E 1 (18434). 34A, 6 (18439),

Entire specimens range from 45 setigers, 5.3 mm

a. anterior view of 10th parapodium.

c. ventral neuropodial heterogomph falciger. Scales in mm.

b. anterior view of 63rd para-

length, 0.7 mm width to 67 setigers, 25 mm

length, 2.8 mm width, anterior fragments up to

3.5 mm width.

Additional Material: Vic.—Flinders,

platform (4403) coll. Smith & Ponder.

Description: Robust, flattened body,

on ocean

dull

THE NEREIDIDAE OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA lis

pinkish brown in alcohol. Prostomium as long

us Wide with 2 pairs of deeply embedded blue-

black eyes, Palps laterally compressed, stout,

palpostvles small, globular, Four pairs ten-

tucular cirri, short, stout, faintly irregularly

annulited, longest extend to setiger 5. Pharynx

with short, robust, translucent dark brown

jaws. Paragnaths all cones, brown. arranged

as follows: I~ 3 in triangle; 1) == 8 in elan-

galed triangle of 2 oblique rows; JIL = 4 in

small parch; IV = 12-15 in 2-3 transverse

Iines; V 4, in inverted Y; VI 9-12

large cones in oblique are continuous with V

and VII, single row except for lateral ex-

tremity, VH-VIN = 38 large and medium

cones in band 2-4 deep ventrally, 2 deep

laterally, small cones rare und scattered

through band,

Dorsal cirri increasing in leneth posteriorly,

anteriorly 3-4 limes length of dorsal noto-

podial lohe, posteriorly 4—5 times. Buse of

cirrus expanded, increasing posteriorly, Dorsal

und ventral notopodial lobes anteriorly bluntly

conical hecoming shorter, rounder almost

elohose in setigers 6-15 (Fig. 8a) then

gradually conical posteriorly (Pig. Sb). Pre-

setal notopodial lobe developed maximally in

middle sctizers as low rounded ridge on ven-

tral notopodial lobe. Notopadium medial to

dorsal cirrus becoming slightly elongated and

(markedly inflated posteriorly, dorsal notepo-

dial lobe strongly redueed in last few seuigers,

Dorsal neuropodial Jobe extending past nota-

podial lobes anteriorly, shorter posteriorly.

Ventral neuropodial lobe bluntly eanical an-

tenorly becoming shorter, rounder, then pro-

vressively fusing with dorsal neurapodial lobe

so that free part reduced to small tubercle in

posterior seligers. Ventral cirrus almost or just

reaching tip of ventral neuropodial lobe

anteriorly. extending just beyond posteriorly

Acicula dark brown-black, yellowish brown ut

tip. For numbers and types of setae sce Table

8. Shalts of falcigers (Fig, Sc) much thicker

than spiniyzers, little change tn thickness along

body, Falciger appendages stout, moderately

hooked. coarsely toothed basally and with

barely discernable tendon near tip, becoming

smaller posteriorly.

Anal cirri extend over last 8 setipers.

Comments, Additional variations pot de-

scribed for holotype include prostomium

length J-1.5 times width, longest tentaeular

irr] extending to setiger 3-6, ovdasianally §,

Paragnaths, | — 2-5 in vertical line or triangle;

Il — 6-16 in 2-3 oblique tows: Wl — 6-20)

it} square to rectangular patch; ['V — 8-28 in

2—3 lines forming a transverse patch; V

|-4 large and small cones arranged longitu-

dinally! Vi = 7-13 in oblique are, variably

discontinuous in some specimens; VII-VII

- 25-49 in band 2-4 deep, small cones rare

and seattered, Dorsal cirri 2-6 times length

of dorsal nolopodial lobe anteriorly, 4-7 times

posteriorly. Dorsal noiopodial lobe reduced

or absent in last few setivers. Dorsal clonga.

and inflation of notopodium marked in all but

very small individuals, Rounding of notopodial

lobes in anterior setigers most pronouticed in

large specimens. not noticeable in small. Waria-

tion in numbers und lypes of setae shawn in

Table 8 Larger individuals generally with more

selac,

Disenssion; Neanthes oniverfata nsp. belongs

to the same group as N. biveriata psp. and

N. tsalata asp. in having ouly two well-

developed notopodial lobes and paragnaths in

ull areas of the pharynx including a broad

band of paragnaths in Areas VII-VIT. Within

this group N. certezi Kudenav, 1979, N.

noedil Hartmann-Schroder, 1962, and N

preudennodti Pauchald. $977h differ fram

Vanti &. Seval vevrrn for Neanthes uniseriata pray

No. of setae

Setiger 10 Setiger 30 Setiger 63

Nealoselae

tioomoagomph spinigers BR ¢3-d)0* 7 (3-7) a (2-6)

Nenrasetae

(i) Dorsal fasciele

ohove—homogomph spinigers § (2-5) 5 (1-5) 3 fi-5)

below—helerogomph falcigers 3 (1-3) i (13) 2 (1-2)

(ii) Ventral fascicle

uhove—heterogomph spinigers 1-2) ae ee) 1 (0-2)

helow—hetvrogomyh faleieers & (5-8) 7 (7) 4 (2-6)

' Numbers in brackets refer ta the variation in numbers of setae occurring in % paratypes.

110 P. A, HUTCHINGS & S. P. TURVEY

N. untseriata nsp. in that tn posterior seligers

the dorsal nolopedial lobe becomes extremely

elongate and bears the dorsal cirrus at its tip.

Neaurhes crucifera (Grube, 1878), N. macra-

cephale (Hansen, 1882), and N. willeyé (Day,

1934) may be distinguished trom N, wriveriata

nop. by the small, oval patch of paragnuths

in Area VI of the pharynx. Neavethes laren-

tukana (Grube, 1881) and WN, vitaubunda

(Pflogfelder, 1933) may be distinguished by

the triangular arrangement of paragnaths in

Area Vo Neanthes roosevelti Hartman, 1939

differs by having about 20 small paragnuaths

hounded by 2 large paragnaths on cach side in

Area T plus differences in most other areas,

Neanthes augenert (Gravier & Dantan, 1934)

differs jn the arrangement of oral paragnaths

and Jacks neuropodial homogomph spinigers.

OF the other Australian species, Neanthey uni-

veriata sp. may be distinguished from N,

ivglala nsp, and Neanthes vaalii Kinhberg,

1866 by the arrangement of oral pauragnaths

aud reduction of ihe ventral neuropodial lobe,

and trom Neanthes biseriata Wep. by the

urrungement of oral paragnaths (see Key).

The specific name refers to the arrangement

of paraenaths in Area VI of the complex.

Pistribution; South Australia,

Hahitat: Iw amongst algal holdfasts, coralline

dleac, crevice fauna, and in sand.

Neanthes vualit Kinbers

Neanthes vaelii Kinbers. tR66: 171, Day & Hut-

chings, 1979: 107 (Australian distribirtion and

svionymics), Hartmiann-Schrader, in press (for

full synonymy). Hutchings & Rainer, 1979:

754,

Material Examined: S.A —l0B. 1 spec. (18308).

2C, 2 (983031, 139A, 1 C8305), 13B, 19

(18304). 144, 2 (18309), 22B, 2 (18308). BIA,

7 (18307), (AHR N 65010, 6504, 763t, Ta13,

3315. S316. 492, 5757, 6483) far Incalities see

Hariman (1954),

Neantlies Vaal) MSW, Port Jackson, NAS, 546,

HOLOTYPE: Jypsum! 455 SSM}.

Peyeription: Size range, AQ setigers, 4.5 mm

lenuth, 0.3 mm width, to 98 setigers, 64 mm

leneth, 4.5 nm width, Pharynx with conical

datk brown paragnaths in maxillary row some-

limes peduved to minute domed flecks

especially m Tf and 1V. Paragnaths arranged

as follaws: [ 14 in Jongitudinal pateh;

1 7-18 arranged in oblique patch of 3-4

horizontal of Vertical rows; Wt = 17-34 in

circular pateh often with | or 2 at sides; IV

— 24-11 arranwed in tronsverse rectangular

patch; V ~- 3.1n a triangle, rarely only | or 2;

VI =- 3-35 cones in isolated group, rarely wilh

an additional cone continuous with V; VII-

VINE © 2 irregular cows of about 50-70 large

and small cones, occasionally 3rd cow present.

extends onto VI.

Notosetae homogomph spinigers. reducing in

number posteriarly, Neurosetae dorsally homo

gomph spinigers am! heterogomph falcigers,

ventrally heterogomph spinigers and faloigers,

Helerogzomph falcigers coarsely toothed with

indistinel tendan. Pygidium conical, with anal

cirri extending over last 5-18 segments.

Comments: Kinberg’s type lacks a head and

the specimen is in two pieces, The parapodia

agree well with the South Australian material

Australian Distribirions Western Australia

(Geraldtown, Drummond Cove), South Aus

traliu, ‘Tasmania, New South Wales (Careel

Bay).

Hahtin Associated with Zostera, sand. mud

and intertidal clumps of mussels.

Nereis Linnacus

Pharynx eversible with conical paragnaths

on both ory] and maxillary rings, Four pairs

of tentacular cirrl present. Parapodia bira-

mous. Notosetae include homagomph spinigers

and faleigers, the latter in median and pos-

terjar setigers; néurosetae include homo and

heterogomph spinigers and heterogomph

faleigers,

Type species: N, pelagica Linnaeus

Nereis bifida no.sp.

Merely jacksoni—Kott, 1951+ 95-98, fig. Ju-r tin

part}. Hartman, 1954; 91, figs. 26-29 Cin part),

Non Kinbers.

Nereis heirissonensis Augener, (9132 159-1A3, PL

3. fig. 52, text fig. 17 (in part),

HOLOTYPE S.A.—UI4A (18533) 79% setigers, 27

mm leneth 2.7 mm width PARATYPES: 04A.

5 spec. (18358), O4A, 3 (AHF POLY 1351). 04a,

3 (BMNH (982) 25-27). O4A, 3 (USNM

071534). U4B, 5S (18359). D6B (18360)_ O7A, 2

(18350), O7B, 16 (18357). F9A, 3 (18562). 2OA,

10 (18369). 272A, & (18370), 22B, 4 (18373),

23A. 1 (18366). 244A, 1 (18372). 5A, 2 (1837)).

2768, 72 (18365), 270, 1 (18364), 30B, 2 (18567).

301. 4. (18368). 32A, 2 (18363), Entire speci

mens range from 350 setigers. 6.6 mnt length, 0.75

mim with to 64 seligers, 28 mm length, 2.2 mm

width.

dditienal Material: Nereis jacksout WA —AId-

nich’s Cove, Nornulup, 72 spec, (G)74 + 185394)

coll, and WW Rott. Point Peran, Rottnest ts. |

(U8535) coll, and id. Kort. S.4—Svllicks Beach.

THE NEREIDIDAE OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA 117

0°6

Fig. 9. Nereis bifida n.sp. a. anterior view of 8th parapodium. b, anterior view of 71st parapodium.

c. notopodial homogomph falciger from setiger 71. Scales in mm.

[hs

an edge of reel, permanently covered, 4 (ANP

N7637). 1 part), coll, Hale, 1936, id. Hartman.

> (AH N7HbL, in parr), coll, Hale, AT8,

Spencer Bay, dredged from 30 tt western shaal, 3

(AWE N7644, in part), coll, Sheard & Hule, Qvt,

1938. 420,

Nereis ledrisvonenyiss WA—Albany, 10. spec.

(HAM V7913 Vypm.). Champion Bay, Geraldton,

1 (H2M VIO08S Typm., in part),

Description; Elongate body, slightly Mattened,

colour brownish pink in alcohol, Prostomiuny

as long as wide. Eyes blie-black, anterior

pair slightly larger, Palps cylindrical, ventral

length equal to first 2 setigers, One pair of

untenmic, 4 pairs tentacular cirri, longest

extending io middle of setiger 3. Both an-

lonnae and tentacular cirri faintly, lreregularly

annulaicd, Phacynx with jaws basally almost

sthaight, curved strongly at tips, yellowish-

brown. with 6 teeth. Paragnaths dark brown,

conical, arranged as follows: J 0; IF = 2

in oblique lines I -- single minule cone; TV

8 in irregular transverseé band or oblique

crescent; Vo ~ 0; Vi 1 on left, 2 on right

very close fogeiher; VU-VILL — 4 widely

spiced im single Leunsverse row ventrally,

Dorsal cirrus 1,5-2 times length of ventral

notapodial lohe anteriorly, elongating pos-

lenorly to 2-2.5 times, Anterior parapodia

(Fig, 9a) with vemral notopodial, dorsal and

ventral neuropodial lobes similar in length or

decreasing ventrally, posteriorly (Fig. 9b)

with Ventral notopodial lobe lonsest, dorsal

and ventral neuropodial lobes similar, Dorsal

Notopodial lobe from seliger 3, small with

maximum development at about setiger 10-

12 then decreasing posteriorly to remain as

small, pointed, conical lobe to end of body.

Ventral cirrus anteriorly extending approxi-

mately to tip of ventral neuropodial lobe,

posteriorly 32 lo ) way to tip, Aeicula dark

POA. HUTCHINGS & S. P, TURVEY

brown With hyaline extremities. For numbers

und fypes of setae see Tahle 9, Shafts

of falcigers thicker than spinigers, becoming

thicker posteriorly, Hleterogomph — faleiger

appendages anteriorly clungate, finely toothed

with indistinet tendon, becoming more robust

posteriorly, Homogomph faleivers (Pig, 9¢)

from setiger 18 with appendages robust, dark

brown, terminal tooth and subterminal tooth

very similar in size making appendage effee-

lively bifid, variable number of much smaller

teeth basally,

Commenisx; Additional variations not de-

scribed for holotype include colour pale-dark

pink or brown. Prostomium length 1-1.25

times width, Eyes blue-black to pale reddish,

lenses distinct of indistinct. Palps equal to

first 1,5-2.5 setigers ventrally, Longest tenta-

cular cirri to seliger 3-4. Jaws with 6-8 tecth.

Paragnaths pale and transparent to opaque

black, generally dark brown, with IL — 0-5,

generally 2-4, always in single oblique line;

Hi - QO, oceasionally | small cone centrally;

lV 5-9, occasionally as few as 2; V1 =

1, rarely 0 or 2-3 in close group; VH-VII —

1-7, generally 3-5, always in single row,

Dorsal cirrus elongating to 2—3 times length of

ventritl notopodial lobe posteriorly. Ventral

neuropodial lobe as long as or slightly shorter

than dorsal neuropodial lobe except in Kott's

material (6174) where both ventral lobe and

cirrus pressed up against dorsal neuropodial

lobe rather than directed ventrolaterally, re-

sulling in ventral lobe extending past dorsal.

Ventral cirrus extending part way or just to

lip of ventral neuropodial lohe in anterior

and posterior setigers. Decrease in dorsal noto-

podial lobe commencing in anterior, middle or

posterior setigers: lobe muy he ubsent along

much of hody but always present albeit re-

VANE 9, Sefel counts Jer Nereis bifida nap.

Seliger &

Noaloselac

homugemph spinigers &

homogomph falcigers

Nevrasetae

(1) Dorsul fascicle

uboye—homogomph spinigers 5

below—heterogomph talegers

(ii) Ventral faseiele

ubove--helvrogomph spinigers 5

belaw—helerngomph faltcigers 3

No. of setae

Setiger Rib) : Setiger 71

(2-5) = —

— 2 (l-2) 2 {1 2)

(4-0) 3 (2-3) 1 (4)

(1-31 1 flea 1 ut)

(2-7) 4 (1-3) QO 1t-2)

(25) 2 (1-31 2 (0-2)

THE NEREIDIDAE OF

duced in anterior setigers, reduction generally

pegurring curler and more completely io

smaller individuals, Variation i numbers and

types ol setae shown in Vable 9 Homogomph

faleigers from setiger 16-19 in larger spect-

mens (9 as curly as setiger 11 in small speei-

mens. uppendage with small basal leeth present

or absent, bifid form and dark coloration con-

stant. Anal cirri? extending over last 7-8 svti-

pers.

Numerous specimens from Narnalup (6174

+> 18534) in early stage of epiloky. Females

with coclom full of large eggs (== 300 4

diameter), cyes on cither side enlarged so as

to be almost (ouching, postsetal neurepodial

labe variably inflated into small thick lamella

In upprositate ralige of setigers 19-33, Males

with eyes as for females. postsetal neuropodral

lobe variably produced as small, thick lamella

in uboul setigers 15-50; some specimens with

pastsetal Jobe becoming more plate-like anc

extensive and sccessary matatory lobes present

as a small rounded papilla at base of ventral

cirrus of most epitokaus aranodia, dorsal

naepadial lobe decreasing rapilly from about

setiger 50 to become absent with parallel

basal inflation of dorsal cirrus, Setae as lor

alokes; natalory setac ubsent

Discussions This species includes part of

Augener’s tyne series lor Nereis heirivsanensis,

Homey he distinguished from N_ lreleissanensiy

Augener, 1913 (redeseribed helow p, 125)

by the dentilion of the notopodial homagernph

falvigers, The presence of paragnaths in Arca

VL and generally greater pumbers of pura-

gnaths in other areas. Differences from similar

Species dre given in Lable 2.

The snecifie name refers. to the bifid shape

of the notopodial homogamph tileigers.

Australian Distrihittians Western Australia.

South Austealia,

Hebnar Associuled with algae and seagrass

beds,

Nereis cirriseta nsp,

Fics, Tae

Nevety denhamensiix—Kou, 1951 99-11,

figs. 3s-y, 4l-q (in part). New Augener.

Nereiy tacksoni—bolt, 951: 95-98, text fig. Sar

(in part), New Kinberg.

HOVOTYPE: WA. Point Peron and Rottnest

Ts. stars 23. 3t, 32, Al, 8, 72, 77 (18528) coll.

ond jd, Kott as No deyhamensis, 79 setigers, 285

mm length, 2-4 mm width. PARATYPE: W.A. --

Point Peron and Rottnest ts., stats 23, 31, 32, At,

72,77 Cin part) 2 18529); state 14, 86 (io part),

text

SOUTH AUSTRALIA 119

{ (BMNH ZB 1982: 28) voll. aml id. Kol as

N. edeutanrensix. Stats 14, 40, 56, 68 Cin part) 3

(78530), | (AHF POLY 1355) coll. and id. Kot

as N. javksori. S.A—Spencer Bay. dredged from

30 ft western shoul, 2 (ABE 7644, in part) coll

Sheard & Hale, 420, Qer. 3, 1998. 1d. Elarimun as

N. jaoksoni, N4A, 6 (18532), 6 CUSNM 071835),

DIA, | (18531), Size range of patatypes 5 seti-

gers, 9.5 mm length, 0.9 mm widih to 8 seligers,

25 mm fength. 1.4 mm with.

Oler Malertal Paamined: Nertiy callena var.

peroniensiy W,A—Point Peron, stats 14, 23, 72,

TA, 3 spec, (3707) coll aod id. Rott, Type series,

Deseriprion: Body elongate, flattened, brow-

nish pink Prostomium as long as wide. Eyes

diffuse red, Tenses distiuet, posterior pair

larger, Palps robust, cylindrical, One pair

aniennac, extending almost to tips of palps.

Four pairs tentacular cirri, longest extending

to middle of setiger 2. Both antennae and

tentacular cirri closely, distinctly unnulated,

Pharynx with jaws basally almost straight,

sharply curved distally, transparent brown 7-8

tecth. Paragnaths conical, pale and transparent

to dark brown, arranged as Follows; J 0;

if 7 in 2 obliqne rows; II i minute

cone centrally, PY — 98-10 irregularly in

oblique crescent; V ~~ 0; VI~- 5 in small oval

pateh, VUI-VELL = 7 i single, evenly spaced

transverse row.

Dorsal cirrus extending as far as or barely

past Veatral netopodial lobe im anterior seti-

vers. elongating to 1.5—2 times length of lobe

posteriorly. Dorsal notopodial lobe fram

setiver 3, similar in size to ventral otopedial

lobe exeept absent in Jast setiger. Anterior

parupodia (Fig, 10a) with ventral notapoadial

lobe extending furthest, neuropodial lobes

similar to cach other, Noatopodium medial ta

dorsal cirrus becoming elongated, elevated and

inflated posteriorly resulting in dorsal and

ventral notopodial lobes extending similarly

past ricuropodial lobes (Fig. [Ob)- Ventral

cirrus in anterior setigers extending 34 ta 4%

ta tip of ventral neurepodial lohe, redueing

to 1, to Yy posteriorly. Aeicula dark reddish-

brown with hyaline tips, For tumbets and

types of setac see Table LO.

Notopodial homogomph falcigers (Fig.

1De-ck) from Setiger 20 (left)—22 (right),

shaft brown, thick appendage pale, slender.

tapering, slightly hooked, smooth exeept for

up to several small bristle-like teeth basally.

distal most bristles occasionally arising from

spices of small serrate teeth, Appendage may

appear smooth unless viewed from side and

120 P. A. HUTCHINGS & S. P. TURVEY

"06

Fig. 10. Nereis cirriseta n.sp. a. anterior view of 11th parapodium.

O06

b. anterior view of 71st para-

podium. c. notopodial homogomph falciger from setiger 37. d. notopodial homogomph falciger

from setiger 74. Scales in mm.

THE NEREIDIDAR OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

‘Tasce 10, Setal counts for Nereis cirriseta nsp.

No. of setae

Setiger 11 Setiger 37 ‘Setiger 71

Notasetac

homogomph spinigers 6 (2-7)% = —

homogomph falcigers — 2 (2-3) } il 4)

Neuroxetae

(i) Dorsal fascicle

above —homoxomph spinigers in (3-11) $) (2-15) 7 (4-16)

below—helerogomph Faleizers 3 (2-4) 2 (1-3) 2 (1-2)

(ii) Ventral fascicte

above—heterazomph spinigers f (2-7) 46 (0-10) 5 (1-8)

bhelow—heterozomph falcigers 4 (2-5) 2 (2-4) 2 (2-3)

“Numbers in brackets refer to the vurialion in numbers of setae occurring in LO paratypes.

often appears short, stout. bluntly rounded

when worn. Shafts of falcigers becoming

thicker posteriorly. Appendages of heterogoamph

falcigers anteriorly elongate, finely toothed,

tin long, slightly curved with indistinct tendon,

becoming mare robust posteriorly,

Anal cirr) extend over last 6 setigers.

Comments; Variation includes prostomium

length J—1.25 times width. eyes diffuse bluish-

dark blue-black with two pairs similar in size

or anterior pair larger, lenses distinct or in-

distinct. Palps robust, eylindrical, globose or

conical, Antennae extending almost to or well

past tips of palps, Longest tentacular cirri

extend to setiger |-3. Taws pale yellow basally.

hrown disially, with 6-8 teeth, Paragnaths

arranged as follows; 1 = 0; IP — 2-5 in 1 or

more typically 2 oblique rows; IIL = 0, rarely

| small cone; TV = 4-7 in an oblique crescent,

rarely ay Tew as 2 in yery small specimens:

V — 0, Vf = 3-6 in oval patch or transverse

row with one or two sbove and/or belaw.

rarely 1-2; VIF-VITL = 4-7 ip evenly spaced

transverse row ventrally. Dorsal cirrus ex-

tending almost to or slightly past ventral noto-

podial lobe, 1.5-2.5 times length of lobe pos-

teriorly. Dorsal notopodial lobe initially small,

attaining maximum size smaller than ventral

notopodial lobe at about setiger LO-14 then

decreasing gradually to disappear in last few

setigers, reduction more naticcable in small

specimens. Notopoditim medial to dorsal cirrus

not enlarged in small specimens. Other lobes

variable in relative Iength except ventral

notopodial Jobe generally extending furthest,

Ventral cirrus extending half to three-quarters

way to tip of ventral neuropodial lobe. Nun

bers and types of setae shown in Table 10.

Notopodial homogomph falcigers beginning

earlier in amall specimens, later in Inrge, from

setiger 15-40. Anal cirti extend over last 2-3

setigers,

Discussion: The notopodial homogomph falci-

gers and parapodial proportions of Nereis

cirriseta m.8p, are very similar to those of

Nereis callaona var. peroniensis Kott (3707).

The pharynges of Kott’s types far N.c.

peroniensis, are missing and the pharynx illu-

strated by Kott (1951, p. 99, text tig, 4a~—b)

differs from N. cirriseta n.sp. by having several

paraynaths in Areas [ and LI, We have thus

been unable to identify N. cirriseta n.sp. with

Kort’s species and consider that Katt’s species

N. callaona var. peroniensiy is indeterminate

based on the published description and the

type material in its present condition. Nereis

cirriseta nap. tay be distinguished from

similar species of Nereis using the characteris-

tics given in Table 2,

The specific name refers to the elongate

appendages of the notopodial falcigers,

Australian Distribution: Western Australia,

South Austraha.

Habitat: Rocky intertidal shores and subtidally

to 10 m,

Nereis cackburnensis Augener

FIG. 4b

Nereis cackburnensts Augener, 1913: 183-156, pl.

3, fig. 47, text figs 15a-c, Hartman, 1954; 33,

figs 30-32, Knox and Cameron, 1971: 24 Day,

1975: 191,

Nerers (Neanthes) thompsoni Wott.

105, text figs Sa-h.

Material Exaniined: SA.—OKA, 1 spec, (18354).

ISA, 1 (18353). LOA, 9 (18355), 17, 1 (18553),

20A, 8 (18344). ZILA, 7 (18343). 235A, 34

(18345), | cf epitoke (18346). 30A 21 (18349),

1 ff epitoke (18392), 30B, | developing & epitoke

(18350). 30D, tl (18347), 1 2 epiloke (18348).

32A, 18 (18351)

195): 103-

P. A. HUTCHINGS & S. P. TURVEY

eee

Yyi9a)1 JO MOI asus

“A[IOWaUe =«sajaInsey =| RIpP

-odoin3su = yjyoq ul—ola}3ay

‘Ajyeseq azis ur Suisvasa

SI9TNaS 1OL191s0d

122

“WSN -O8P Yl89] [EADL] AVTPEWIS =U. Aapuays slow Fulwmmooaq LIA-ILA

“‘AaupAS = $-Z snjd yoo} [euIW = aqoy JesIOp ‘AjJOlajuL azis uO sauod Aunm jo purg Og ‘Biequiy

‘Uosyaef Og = 19} Butadey FuoT—owoy ul ABjrus saqol jeipodojou = Moe SA pue | UO JUuasqn anua mosyoul * Ay

4)29} JO MO1 a[suls

‘A[JOMAUe = Sapaiosey = [RIP

-odoinau = yjoq ul—orojay s1adijas

“yqea} ela} doleysod = 10/pue ajppriu ILLA-ILA

“E[ dayjeus “yjoo, jeu ur ivaddesip 0) Ajpider Sul =o juasqe Jo mor asuis E16] ‘suainy

“VM 38} 88IeE YIM —OWOY —-sBaldap ‘AjIoaque juasaid §=yA puke A “TEP “[ qwasqe aiua SIWUBUOSSIUAL >

AjAOMa}UB sapaiosez [eip

-Odoinen y}oq uUl—ou7ajoy

‘2ZI8

Ul JEWS YjOO} PBUTILIS} payojou Ajdaap (S061 ATLA)

ByueT HS -qns puv [euluiaj—ouroy umMoys 100 IIIA-A pur ] uo quasge Jap1og [B]UO1} v1vayof *N

yj9a1 JO MOI afauls

‘AJOWayUe §«Sapaiosey = [PIP Jeaddesip o} sau

-odoinau Yloq wl—olajay -awos ‘A[ioliajsod (‘saads S3uod |RuONIp

“AVT[EWS YINuL AT[e1auss = = |pBWS) Fusvaisap 10 ‘JuRys -pe May B YM YITATA

yjaa} pesaye] ‘asvey “ismq = -uod ‘("sdads adyey) Ful uo MoI afauls ty uo Jase €16| ‘dauaany

VWS°V AM -O1 Ylaa} [eUIIaI—owoy = --seardur ‘AysoNajue juaseid = Aqares ‘AJuO A uo quasqe aiqua SISUALUDY Uap * NJ

yaa} JO MOI a[surs

“APIOMa\ueR «sapaiase} =| BIp

-odoinau = YyjOg UuI—ola}8y4 deadde

‘Alpeseq Yyj29} [[BWIS [eOAaS = -SIP OL SaumawOs *ApI0113)

‘WS doy jdaaxd yjoouls payooy -sod Furseaisap Jo yueys ILWA-ITA Uo “ol ‘ds u

“WAC'A'S Apqsys ‘iapuays—owoy -vod ‘Apiorajur juasaid = ajsurs $A pue [ uO Juasge ainua DJASMALD S134 Nf

y}aa] JO MOL asus

‘AOMaIUR =«sapaidsey [RIP

-odoinau = yioq ul—ouajay

“ATES

-eq «-Y1ea} Jayyeus §=yonw

jo Jaquinu a[qeiea ‘azis avaddesip 0} ILA-LIA UO AOL asus

UL APPIIS YIOO] JBUIWIa) sautjauros “Ajiorajsod Sur ypy uo aud apauis eB Ajaqes ‘ds-u

WS°VM -gns puke [eUulWie]—owoy -skaIdap ‘AjJolajue juasaid §=10 A pue [fT ‘[ UO yUasqe alu ppifig Slata Ny

uonnguysiq S128 1D[B4 aqoy [eipodojou jesioq syjeusrird WINTWWO}SO.14

ae ese

*JUISgD 40 ‘MOL a/SUjS V \pung masinu v1)

syivudpind yi Xusapyd ays {O TT A-]] A SPaapy pun ssastajo{ jpipadojow paleo, <jasinoa ‘Xjasunds yim sayady siaian fo vosipduiod ‘ZT AWN

AUSTRALIA

THE NEREIDIDAE OF SOUTH

q1321

jO MOI asus ‘eipodeied

Jowajue Aueur jo sajaia

-sb} [elpodoinau yloq ul

siasiuids ydurosor1ajay Aq

Ajainua paseydet — o1ayay

“AIPRS

-Eq Yyea)] Jayyemus = yontu

jeiaaas oF dn snjd azis

Ul ABPIWIS YOO] [BUTWIAI

-qns pue |CUTULIa}—ouwoy

“ASN W'S

quasqe

quasqu Ajaiel IO TITA-ITA

Ul MOI asus i] JUasqe

Ayeiauas ‘A pur [Jy JUasqe

JBUUa}UL UaaM}aq

poaluapur Apysqys

‘ds cu

pad iids *

y}aa} JO MOI apsus

‘ALIOMSUR =«SapDIOsEy [RIP

-odoinau Yyjoq ul—o19]3y4

"ylaa] jeseq Jay]BWIS ¢-]|

snjd azis ul JByluUis Yy100]

]BUIUIa} «=pue [PuTas)

-qns ‘yiep jioys—owoy

ivaddesip 0}

sammneamos ‘Apioitaysod Ful

-sealoop ‘ApIoliajur quasalid

= TWATHA Ut!

MOI g[SuIs [A pue T Iuasqe

ainua

‘ds ‘u

ppyiqvavd "Ny

BULUR

SMOI ASIOASUBRI] [RIOAaS

ur Yjaa} ‘sayparasey = |eIp

-Odomnsu Yyjoq Ul—ola}ey

“Ay[eseg 4,00}

jews | sewmouos ‘azis

UT JEIWWIS YOO} [eUIWII}

-qns pur yeurwse]—owoy

quasqe

ILA-TIA Ul AOL a[suls

‘A puke Jf Wory juasqe

UIBIPLU JOLAUL

pytq ANYss

UA [vuosejued

4LLé6l “preyoney

sisuauupupd *

punpraz Man

yaa] JO MOI aysuls

‘APIOLMDUB = SApatasey = [RIP

-odoineau = yjoq uUl—o1a}ay

“ATTeSeq Y}e0}

Iaj[VWIS YINUI [wAsAes *3zis

UL JV[IWUIS YOO), PUTS)

sieges torajsod puv

ajpprur ur aeypidued Moy o1

B1IXa Z-|

YA AY[RUOTSE3900 TTT A

JIA OF MOL asuIS isayoyR

ul A pue J] “y uo juasqe

OS6T (PEM

‘UOWsUITaA = -qnS «puke jeurua]—owoy paonpes ‘ApJollejue Juasaid = ‘snonsidsuoasut pur ajed aqua SHLD "NY

4139} JO MOI ayTsurs

‘Ajioliajue §=«saparosey = [vIp

-odoinau = YyiOq Ul—orajay

“ATpeseq ylea1

dayjems yon f¢-_¢ ‘azis Ivaddesip 0}

Ur IEPIWUIS YOO} yeulWIa? sawnawos ‘ALolajsod Bul ‘ds -u

PIO“A'S'N 9 -qns pue [eurmisj—owoy = -svaldap *Apioliayun juasaid HTA-A pue ] uo quasqe amua DIDIUIPO]PIXDLL * NY

uonngwisig suasiope4 2qoy [etpodojou [esioq syleuseied WNIWOIsO1g

124

Nervis (Neanthes) thompseni WA, Rottnest ts.

Point Peron, and Aldriteh’s Cave, Nernplup,

HOLOTYPE: (7035): many PARATYPES

(4818), coll. vod td. Kot.

Deseription: Size range 32 setigers, 4.9 mm

length, 1.85 mm width to 69 setigers, 4) mm

length. 4 mm width. Paragnith counts as

follows, with Augener’s (1913) figtires in

brackets: ] = 1, rarely 0 to 2 (O}, If = 8-13

down lo 4 in very small individuals in 2

oblique tows, larger cones medially (8 mm an

oblique double row); Ul = 3-7 dawn to 1

cone In an oval patch or cross (2 In tandem):

IV — 16-32 down to 6 cones mm a Lransverse

crescent of up ta 4 rows (S—11 in a tnangular

patch of 2-3 rows), V = (+19 cones in an

irregular patch, membranous feld of V very

narrow and most cones in patch extending

onto VI {6 in 2 rows than oval patch}: VE =

+ or 5, rarely as Few as 2 or as many as 7,

mainly very large coties With occasional small

ones in a small pateh (5 large cones in a circle

or crass); VIT and VILE forming a continuous

band with 1-2 irregular rows of large and

medium sized cones anteriorly, occasionally

anly represented by a few scattered cones,

5-12 deep ventrally and 2-4 deep laterally,

which decrease in size posteriorly fu broad

bani! of many cones, 5-7 deep and 14 deep

fat sides).

Notopodial homogemph falefgers present

from setiger 3, with clongate appendage

weakly hooked and fifely toothed along (most

of the margin in anterior setigers; posteriorly

darker, more robust, teeth stouter, fewer in

number and progressively confined to the basal

reglon Of the appendage, Notopadial homo-

goniph spinigers also oceur anteriorly. Neuro-

setuc homogomph spinigers and heterogomph

faleigers dorsally and heterogomph spimigers

and falcigers ventrally.

Male epitakes (18346, 18392) with setigers

1-14 womodified except for basally inflated

dorsal and ventral cirri in setigers 1-7 nd 1-5

respectively. Setigers from 15th with flattened,

laneshaped accessory natatory lobes medially

on bases of dorsal and ventral cirri and ou

postsetal margins of dorsal neurapodial lobes

(Fig 4b). Dorsal cirrus with large, rounded

nodules along central two thirds of ventral

surface, Notopodial and presetal neuropodial

lobes Wallened and bladetike, Ventral neuro-

padial lobe chgitiform, constrieted at buse.

Veotral cirrus with digitiform necessary muti.

tory lobe extending dorsolaterally from base.

2, of length of cirrus, All setae movifier! to

PL A, HUTCHINGS & S. P,

PURVEY

paddle-shaped natatory type, Development of

cpitoky occurs gradually as shown by the

developing male epitoke (18350), with partial

development of aceessory lobes and reduced

mimbers of atokous setae in addition to nata-

tory setae,

Conimenty: Hartman (195d, po 33) deseribed

an ovieerous female jn the carly stages of epi-

toky, Additional characteristics are provided by

an ovigerous anterior Fragment of 22 setigers

(18348) with further but. still incomplete

development, Parapedia were as for males

except dorsal cirri of first 5 and ventral cirri

of first 4 setigers basally inflated, epttokous

parapodin with smooth dorsal cirri, from

sctiver 17 as tn Hartinan but with both atokous

and nauitory setae emergent,

Paragnath counts are much more variable

in our material than deseribed by Augener

(1913). Lengths of tentacular cirri alsa vary,

the longest extending 10 setiger 4-8, The

dorsal wotopodial lobe may be reduced both

anteriorly and posteriorly in small specimens,

frequently becoming absent posteriorly, while

in larger specimens such teductions may not

aceur or be confined to the last few setigers.

We have examined Nereiy (Nearthes)

rhompsunt Kott and found it to be indistin-

wiishable from our materinl, We hive thus

synonymised it with N, cockburiensiy Augener,

Anstralian Diytrthutions Western Australia

(Gernldtown), South Australia, Victoria and

New South Wales.

Mahirar: Assaciated with ulgac and encrusting

fauna,

Nereis denliamensis Augener

Pity. lla-k

Nereis dentiamensis Augener, 1913: 156-159, PH,

3 fig. 51. twat fig. Iba b. Fauvel. 1917) 204-206

PL of, fiz, 45-46, text fig, (Sad, Kot, 198t-

99-101, text figs 3s-y, 41-q (in part). Hartman,

1954; 3-3),

Nervis (Nereis) denhamensis, —Eartmatt-

Schroder, JORO! 58-59, figs 47-55,

Nereis jackson’ -Hurimani-Sebrider 1979

115. Non Kinberg.

Nereis heirissonensiy Avgener, (9139! 159-185, Pl

3, fig, 52. text lig 17 (in part).

Material Examined: W.A—Shurk Bay. 36 (H2M

V7911. Typm.) Shurk Bay, South Pissige. 2

(HAM VION, Vypm.). Port BHedhind, 1 (HAM

P16569, in part), Tantabiddy Creek, Famouth, 2

(LIZM PI6S48, Greenouyh River, Geruldton, 2

(H2ZM P1654]. in part), Unknown escent West

Australian. 2? (H7M P-PS061, Point Peron and

Rottnese [s., staty 23. 3). 32. 61. GR. 72. 77 Cin

i 14—

(HE NERFIDIDAE OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA 125

part}, 20 CUSS37)2 sit GR, 1 developine & epitake

( (R538); 2 develuping « epitokes (IBS); stats

@() amd S&. 3 CLRSAD); sluts 14 und 86 (in pare.

1 (18541) coll, and id Kot, S.An-04A, 19

(I8S46), 040, § (18947). OFA, | 18542). O7B,

My CPRSd3 1. ORAL AO CIRSAd) SHA, EC PRS4S),

QIAL ) (1RSS1) J3A, § CIRS50) 227A, 6 (18548),

27K. 1 (18544),

Nereis heirissonensixy Western Austidine-| (HZM

VIDIO? ‘Pypm., in part) Chanipion Bay, Gerald

fon, 4 (ELAM VYIDOBS “Vypm., in part), Shark

Bay, | (H4M V7912 Typm., in part),

Devseviprigus Size range 31 setigers, 4.3 mo

leneth, OAS om width to 63 setigers, 47 mim

lempeth, 3 mim width Prostomium about as

long aay wide, palps stout, tentacular otrri

extending to sctiger 2-4, shallowly but dis-

linetly angulated. daws short, robust, yelluw-

brown ut base, darker distally, 3-8 teeth

Paragnaths conical, pale to dark brown,

arranged as tollows: 1-3 in longituatinal

series, rurcly O; 1] 7-20 to us. few ax §

in very small specimens, i 2-3 oblique rows;

TH ~ 7-24 to as fow as 1, In Iriangular pateh

ol 3-4 transverse rows; IV 10-40 to as few

as 5, if a transverse triangular patch; Vo >

O; VI ~ 5-15 to as few as 3, generally in 4

small) transverse Oval pateh of 2-3 irregular

rows, VIEVIT 6-10 large cones forming

a single, evenly spaced row with an additional

0-7 smaller cones scattered about large cones

verlrally,

Purapodia with fobes bluntly rounded an-

tcriorly (Fig, (la), more noticeably in large

specimens, hecomins conical posteriorly CFs.

1th). Dorsal cirrus 2-3 times length of ventral

nolapadial lobe anteriorly, 2-4 times pos-

lenorly, Large specimens with dorsal tote

podial lobe similar to or slightly smaller than

ventral notepodiyl lobe jnteriorly, similar or

shahily larger posteriorly, Patt of notopodium

medial to dorsal cirrus becoming elongate.

elevated und inflated i posterior setvers. In

emall specimens dorsal notopodiul lobe tree

quently very strongly reduced in both posterior

and far anterior seligers und muy be absent

posteriorly. with lithe or no dorsal enlirge-

ment of notopodium, Neutopodial lobes extend:

inv almost to a as far as potopodial lobes

anteriorly. shorter posteriorly, Ventral cierus

extending twe-thirds way to as far as tip

of ventral acurapodial Jobe. Notopodia wath

homogomph spinigers in anterior parapodia

replaced hy hamavomph fateigers fron setiger

15-27 of as early us setiger |) in very small

specumeéns, complete replacement occuring

aver about | -12) selivers, Appetidages of

homogomph Suleigers pale, stout, wilh ter-

minal tooth Jarge, shabtly hooked, lateral teeth

much smaller. about }— in number, saw-like.

frequently followed by halr-like Leeth basally.

Some speeimens with first lateral tooth rela-

tively Jurge bul not as large ay terminal tooth

untess Taller is obviously worn, bi such eases

hase of terminal tooth is much broader, Oceu-

sional small specimens with 2 lateral teeth

similar in size to terminal toath on appen-

daves of most anteriar homogomph faleigers,

appendages normal posteriorly, Neuropodia

dorsally with homogomph spinigers and

hetcrogomph tuleigers, ventrally with hetere-

somph splnigers and faleigers, Heterogomph

fuleigers hecaming more robust posteriorly,

appendiige becoming shorter, broader, more

stranuly hooked, tendon less distinet, teeth

finer und more confined basally,

Anal cirri extend over last 5-10 setigers.

Diseussion) We touml our rmulterial to be in

distinguishable from that of Augener (T9814)

aid Rott (1951). The above deseription has

ihus heen derived from our material together

with that of Augener and Kott, Augener did

hot mention the presence of heterogomph

falcigers in the dorsal neulopodial faseiele,

und neither Augener nor Kot voted variation

in the development of paragnaths, purapauial

lohes and notopodial homogomph taletwers as

extreme as that indiewted whove. Augeners

(19)3, p, 158) comment that “ya den vor-

deren Rudern mit dorsalen CGriitenborsten ist

dic Splizve der ventralen Sicheln gedeeckt”

probably refers to the tendon at the tip af a

heterogomph Taleiger. nol lo a hon as sug-

ested by Hurimat (1954 p. 31). Hnods were

absent from the faleigers of Atgener’s iype

material.

Nereiy denhamenyis may be distinguished

from other species of Nereis by the cambina-

tion of Notopedial faleiger churacterismes and

paragmath pattern (Table 2).

Auyralian Distibuians Western Australia,

South Australia.

Habirat Among aluse. sengrasses. sponges

and rocks,

Nereis hefeissonenyiy Augener (redeseriqlinn)

FIG. 125-4

Nereis Neirivsoneisis Augener V8b3. 130-183, fhe,

u-e (in part),

LECTOTYPE: W.A eShark Bay (v7el2y 62

setigers, (15 mm lenuth, ba pr ondth, PARA-

126 P. A. HUTCHINGS & S. P. TURVEY

-04

Fig. |1. Nereis denhamensis a, anterior view of 10th parapodium of large individual. b, anterior view

of S8th parapodium of small individual. c. anterior view of tenth parapodium of small individual.

d. anterior view of 32nd parapodium of small individual. e-g. range of typical notopodial homo-

gomph falcigers. h-i. far anterior notopodial falcigers of small individual. j. anterior neuropodial

falciger, k. posterior neuropodial falciger. Scales in mm.

THE NEREIDIDAE OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA 127

pet a 8

7 -O6 a

d P

0-3

-06

f :

| i 0-26

Fig. 12. Nereis heirissonensis a. anterior view of 9th parapodium. b. anterior view of 50th para-

podium. c, notopodial homogomph falciger from setiger 50. d-g. some extreme variations in homo-

gomph falciger dentition among paralectotypes. Scales in mm.

12k

LECTOLYPES: Shark Buy (HZM V79I2) pune

from 16.5 mm to 7.8 mm length, 14 mm to 09

iit width,

Deverintion: Body elongate, flattened, colour

in aleohol whitish becoming brownish an-

teniorly, Prostominm as Jong as wide. Byes

dark purple, anterior pair larger with distinet

lenses. Palps small, stout, ventral length equal

fo first 2 seligers. One pair of antennae, ex-

tending slightly past palps. Four pairs tenta-

cular cirri, Jongest extending to posterior

marvin of setiger 4, Autenqae and tentacular

cirri faintly, irregularly annulated. Pharyinx

With clongate, t/ansparent yellow jaws, darker

al lips, basally almost straight then curved

strougly at tips, with & teeth, Puragnaths

small, conical, transparent, colourless to faint

reddish, arranged as follows: 1 = Of Il = ty

TL = 0; IV — 3 if short, oblique row; Vo

0; VI =~ 0; VII-VILT = | mid ventrally.

Dorsal cirrus extending slightly past ventral!

notapadial lobe unteriorly, elongating to twice

length of lobe in far posterior, Notopodial and

yeriiral neuropedial lohes conical, dorsal

heuropocial tohe flattened, becoming more

pointed posteriorly, Dorsal notopadial lobe

slightly smatler than ventral in setigers 3-11

(Pig, 12a), then decreasing rapidly to dis-

appear by setiger 19 (Pig, 12b), Notopodial

presetal Johe absent, Ventral notopodial lobe

langest. Dorsal jeuropodial lobe equal to or

shorter than Ventral neuropodial lobe. Ventral

cirrus extending about two-thirds of the way

(a Up of ventral neuropodial lohe, Acicula

reddish-blewn, Occasional parapodia with 2

notopodial acieula. Por numbers and types

of setae see Table {1. Shatts of falcigers

thicker than spitigers, becoming thicker

posteriorly, Heterogomph falciger appendages

elongate, finely toothed, tip slightly curved

with indistincl tendon. Homogomph falcigers

P. A. HUTCIUNGS & S. PB. TURVEY

from sttiger 17 with appendages robust, not

coloured with large terminal tooth and

Smaller lateral teeth deereasing in sive basally

(Fig. 12d—),

Anal cirri) extend aver 7 setigers,

Comments; Additional variations not de-

seribed for lectotype include notopodial and

Ventral neuropodial lobes with or without

reddish pigment becoming more intense pos-

teriorly, Prostomium length I-t.25 times

Width. Eyes bluerblack, both pairs of similar

size, lenses indistinct. Antennae extend to

level with palps, Palps equal to first 15-2

setigers ventrally. Longest tentacular cirri ex

tending (0 posterior margin of setiger 2-4,

Juws with 7-9 teeth, Paragnaths in Tl |

or O; TY — 0-5, generully 2-3 in small oblique

group; VII-VILE = 0-3, generally 1-3, widely

spaced if single Jine ventrally, Dorsal cirrus

elongating, in middle or posterior setigers to

2-2.5 times ventral neuropodial lobe. Dorsal

notepodial lobe may be slightly to strongly

reduced in the first few setigers following

seliver 2, maximum size attained may be only

one half that of ventral notopodial Jobe he-

fore decreasing from setiger 10-14 (to dis«

appear by setiger }4—29, Lobe may sometimes

vemain ax small rounded papilla at base of

dorsal cirrus before disappearing entirely in

fur posterior parapodia, Smaller specimens

with tendency towards relatively small dorsal

notopodial lobes undergoing earlier and more

complete reduction, Variation in numbers and

types of setae shown in Table Tt, Homo-

vomph faleigers from setiger 16-19, appen-

dages with variable development of lateral

teeth (examples of Variation shown in Figs,

\2d-g) but only rarely with most distal lateral

tooth approximutely equal with terminal

tooth, In such cases terminal tooth worn and

Tate tl. Seal céuits for Nereis heirissanensis

No, of setae

Scliper 9 Setizer 31 Setiger 50

Notusetac

bhomogonmph spinigers 1124) —

hhomogomph falcivers 2 (1-2) tal)

Nenrosetac

(i) Dorsal fuscicle

HHOVe—hOMogoOMph spinigers (27) 1 (Td) 7 fea)

bclow—hetcrogomph fleigers (|-3) 1th )tue2)

(ii) Ventril fascicle

above -—heterogomph spinigers 3 th 4) 4 (J-2) 1 1-3)

belaw—heterogomph falcigers 4 (2-4) 2 (2) a (1-2)

' Numbers in brackets refer ta the variation in numbers af setae occtrring in 10 paratypes.

THE NBREIDIDAE OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA oe)

generally tore jhan one large faleral tooth

present, Anal cirri extending over last 3-8

seligers,

Diveusston: Augener (1913) described Nere/y

heirissonersey from & series Of specimens which

was found to toclide the above species to-

gether with another species (Nereis bifida n sp.

see p. 116) and several specimens of N,

dentamensiv. Augener stated that the homo-

vomph faleigers of NN, heirissonensis were

similir to those of N. dendianensiy Augener,

1913. This applies to the above material but

not to N. bifida asp. while the rest of

Augener’s description fits either species with

the exeeption of variation in paragnaths. We

have thus designated a lectotype and para-

leclolypes and redescribed N. heirissanensiy

for the part of Augener's material with noto-

podial falcigers similar to N, denhamensis and

erected N. bifida n.sp. for the other material,

Nereis heirissanensiy may be distinguished

from similar species of Nereis using the

characteristics given in ‘Table 2, The re-

establishment of N. /icirivsonensix Augener

as a Valid species contradicts Fauchald

(1977b) who suggests that there is general

agreement thal N. heirisyanensis is synony-

mous with N. jackson’ Kinberg, As we des

monstrate in the Discussion of N. jacksoni

(p. 130) this species has been widely eon-

fused.

Austrian Distrituition: Western Austraha,

fabitar: Dredged from shallow water.

Nereiy juckxoni Kinbere (redescription)

FIG. 13a-c

Nereis jackson Kinherg, (Rens 1469. Augener.

1922: 18-19. Now Augener, 1924: 319, Koit,

1951: 95-98, or Harimin. 1954; 3}, fies 26-29.

HOLOTYPE: NLS.W.—Port Tackson (SSM Typ.

No. 468), id, Kinberg.

Description: Two cyt fragments in separate

vials, One anterior fragment with everted

pharynx, of 9 setigers, total length 5.5 mim,

max, width of 2.1 mm at setiger 6, Other

fragment from mid-section of same worm or

one of similar size, probably continuous with

anterior fragment with omission of | or 2

scigers between, consisting of 43° sctigers,

approx. max. width of 1.9 mim. at 6th setiger

of fragment, length about 18 mm, Far pos-

terior section missing, many setae broken off,

Body elongate, pale yellow-white, Prosto-

mium as long as wide. Eyes blue-black,

uittertor pair sliphtly larger and with distinet

et ow

Fig. 13. Nereiv jacksoni a. anterior view of 9th

purupodium. b. anterior view of 40th para-

podium. c, notopodial homogomph faleiger

from 38th setiger of posterior frowment, Scales

in mm.

lenses, lenses of posterior pair indistinct, Palps

conical, tapering rapidly from base, ventral

length cqual to first 1,5 setigers. One pair

antennae, extending to level with palps. Four

pairs tentacular cirri, longest pair distally im-

complete, extending to anterior margin of

setiger 2, Antennae and palps variably smooth

to faintly, irregularly annulated. Pharynx with

right jaw lost, left transparent brown, basally

almost straight then slightly curved distally

but apex missing, with 9 teeth. Paragnaths

conical, transparent, pale brown to colourless,

arranged as follows; [ ~ 0; Il = 6 (right)-8

(left) in oblique double row, irregular on

right, ff = 5 in single transverse row; TV =

12 (left) in oblique patch tapering towards

jaws. damaged on rizht where jaw removed;

V— VE = 2 (right) 4 (left) in close

group; VIT-VIIL = approx. 40-45 large and

small cones in continuous. narrow, irregular

band 1-2 deep except mid-ventrally where

2-3 deep with single, very large cone, 3-4

times size of any others, at anterior apex of

mid-ventral spread.

Dorsal cirrus in anterior fragment 1,5-2

times length of ventral notopodial lobe, in

i hoa

Faiey VL Medal conan for Nereis jackson

No. of Sctae

Setiger 31 ol

oONterior

Seuger? {ragment

Volosetae

homesomph spinigers 5 —s

homobgomph fatcigers 3

Veurayerae

til Dorsal fascicle

whove—homoevoamph spingers | 3

helow heterogormph faleigers 4 2

(it) Ventral faseicle

ubove—heterogomph spimgers = 4 4

beluw—helejopomph faleipers = S$ 2

posterior tragment 2-3 dimes Jength af lobe

Parapodial lobes conical, Anterior fragment

With potopodial lobes similar in size. longer

than neuropodial Jabes. ventral neuropodial

Jahe Stiphtly longer than or similar to dorsal

nevropedial lobe (Fig. 13a), Posterior trug-

fnent with parapodial lobes similar to anterior

fragment except dotsal notapadial lobe becom-

ing more slender i last few setigers (Fig, 136),

Venttal cirrus extending almost to or just to-tip

of ventral peuropodial lobe in anterior Frag-

tent, barcly longer in posterior fraament, Act

cula reddish-brown, pate at lips. For mumbers

wow types uf setae sce Table 12. Momozomph

faleigers robust, pale, from (Oth setiger of

posterior fragment, appendages — elongate,

wurved, with long, tapering terminal tooth,

most distal lateral tooth thuch smaller fol-

lowed hy 2-4 smaller teeth dcoreasing in size

hasully, Heteragomph faleiters with shafts

heeoming much thicker posteriorly appendages

interiorly elongate, finely toothed along most

of border, lip stihtly hooked with indistinet

fendon, becoming relatively shorter, broader,

slightly More strongly hooked posteriorly,

tendon (nore distinct, teeth slightly more con-

line! basally (Pig, 13¢). Spinigers typical.

Cuvanents. Kinherg's description is extremely

hriel Tt does not include details of setae ar

parapocia while the description of paragnaths

iso ubaleqiuale iqilieatiog winty Chat paragtaths

ure absent in Areas Paund Vo und continuous

through VELVET. When Augener (1922

examined Kinberg’s material of N. jaeksoni

he found two tubes, one containing a single

specimen posteriorly incomplete but otherwise

in good eondition. the other containing two

specimens i Verv poor condition, His de-

seriprion wis based on the single specimen,

OW the base of lenpth, mimber of setizers

HUTCHINGS & S. Po TURVEY

und most other characters this is almost cer-

tainly the specimen we have examined

Augener’s description differs (rom ours in that

he did fot observe the paragnaths in Area

Wl or give Full details of paragnaths in Vil

VIEL He did not find homogomph spinigers in

the dorsal neuropodial fascicle of posterior

parapodia. in our examination these were

intact in Only a few of the posterior setigers.

the remainder of the posterior neurosetac

heing damaged beyond identification, The

notopadial homogomph faleigers have a

terminal tooth which is more clonvate and

curved and may have more lateral teeth than

indicated by Atgwener (1922).

Onveuwhine We examined material identified

as Nerely iackyoni by Augener (1924), Kott

(1951) and Hartman (1954) and as none of

thix muarerial resembles N- jackson? Kinberg

we have referred |t to a variety of species (see

Austration species in Table 2), We also suggest

thal the numerous references to N, jacksoni

from Australia and New Zealand quoted by

Day & Hutchings (1979) and by Hartmann-

Sehréder (1980) may not be conspecitic. All

such material should be rechecked. Examina-

lion of a wide range of nereidt material in the

Australian Museum eollection [rom ™.S.W.

including Port Jackson, has failed to find sdelj-

hional specimens of N. jackvani.

duviraian Distributions New South Wales

(Port Jackson),

Habitat Rocky intertidal shores.

Nereis manxillodentata nsp.

FIG, |4a-c

Augener, 1927; 130 (33. Hirt

text figs 26-29 tin parth. New

Nereiy jackson,

moan, (984: 3],

Kinhera,

Nerely deahunensis—Hariman, 1954: 30-3) Cin

part), New Augener,

HOLOTYPE: N.S.W. -Li Perouse, among weeds

and iWuséels, sub-tidal (18527) pres. Bennett,

24.10.1962, 77 setizers, 34 mm length, 2.4 mm

width, PARATYPES: N.S.W,—tLa_ Perouse,

wmone weede and mussels, sub-lidal, | spec.

(4790) pres, Bennett. 24.10.1962. Hungry Bay, 2

(A800), Porl Jackson, 2 (4802), 3 (4803), Mala

her. Sydney, 28 mo CAS Shipek (Groh), 1 (6282);

long Reef. Collnroy, 125 fi. 2 (A283)5 North

Head, Sydney, 65 fl, 2 (6285), 2 (6287), 1

(200), 2 (6288), | (6286), 1 (BRMNH ZB 1982:

29), 1 (USNM 07156) coll Shelf Benthic Survey

1972.73. Cranulli, 4 (AHF N6293) coll, Dew,

Mingry Pointy Cronulla. under racks. 2 CALIF

IHE NEREIDIDAF OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

N6472) coll, Dew, Nov. 1950, id, Hartman as

Nereis jaeksoni, Westernport Bay, Victoria, 2

(HZM V9S35), id. Auvener us Nere/s Jackson,

Description: Body elongate, slightly flattened

colour brownish pink in alcohol, Prostomiunm

as long as wide, Eyes red with distinct lenses,

Anterior pair slightly larger, Palps conical,

lapering rapidly from broad base, ventral

length equal to first 2 seligers. One pair

antennae reaching almost to tips of palps,

Four pairs tentacular cirri, longest extending

to middle of setiger 3, Both antennae and

tentacular cirrt closely, distinctly annulated,

Pharynx with transparent brawn jaws, basally

almost straight then curved strongly at tips

with 7 teeth. Paragnaths dark brown, conical,

arranged as follows: | — 0; If = 5 (left)-

6 (right in double oblique row with larger

cones medially, TH 4 in single transverse

row: IV 8 (eft)-10 (right) irregularly

arranged in elongate, oblique triangular patch;

oral ring bare.

Dorsal cirrus |.5—2 times length of ventral

votopodial lobe in anterior setigers, increas-

ing to 2.5-3 times length of lobe posteriorly.

Parapodial lobes conical (Fig, 14a), more

pointed posteriorly (Fig, 14h), Dorsal noto-

podial lobe from setiger 3, slightly smaller than

ventral notopodial lobe in anterior setigers

then decreasing from about seliger 15° to

remain as small conical lobe except absent

from last 2 setigers, Anterior parapodia with

ventral notopodial lobe longest, dorsal and

ventral neuropodial lobes shorter, about equal

lo each other, Posterior parapodia with noto-

podiuin becoming basally more clongate.

ventral notopodial lobe extending well past

neuropodial lobes, ventral neuropodial lobe

longer than dorsal. Ventral cirrus extending

two-thirds way to tip of ventral neuropodial

lobe anteriorly, three-quarters way to or reach-

131

4 co

4 | ¢

_ i i

i wt { f \

06 | Sh

Fig. 14. Nerelys maxitlodentaia wsp, ae anterior

view of 10th parapodium, 6, anterior view of

Hoh parapadium, ec. Aotopodial homogomph

falciger from setiger 66, Scales in mm.

ing tp of lobe posteriorly. Acicula dark

brown, pale at tips, For numbers and types

of setae see Table 13, Heterogomph falcigers

becoming much thicker and darker posteriorly

anteriorly with appendages clongate, finely

toothed over most of length, tip weakly

hooked with distinct tendon, posteriorly be-

coming more robust, teeth more confined

basally, tendon indistinct. Homogomph falci-

gers from setiger 18, appendages initially pale

then rapidly becoming dark brown with large

Tatip 13. Setal conuts for Nereis muxillodentata ‘sp.

Setiger 10

No. of setae

Seliger 37 Setiger 66

Natlosetue

homoyzomph spinigers

homogomph faleigers

Nevrosetae

(i) Dorsal fascicle

above—homogomph spinizers

helow—hetcrogomph talcigers

(ii) Ventral faseicle

above —heterogomph spinigers

below—helcrogomph falcigers

—'

(3-8)° — —

_— 2 (2-3) 2 (1-3)

3-4) 6 (2-4) (1-7)

(!-3) 1 (1-2 T (1-2)

(2-9) 4 (2-8) 2 (1-5)

(2-7) 2 (2-3) 1} (1-3)

“Numbers in brackets refer to the yuriation in numbers of setae occurring in 10 paratypes.

)32 PA, HUTCHINGS & & Pb. LURVEY

subterminal tooth similar in size lo ieeminal

tooth making appendyye elfecrvely biftd, up

1 34 much smaller teeth frequently present

hasally (Fig. [4e).

Anal cirri extend over Jast 6 setizers.

Comments: Additional variatlony not described

for holotype include colour white to greenish

brawn. Prostamium length 1-125 times

width, Eyes red to blue black, lenses distinct

or indistinet, Palps equal to first 15-2.5

stlivers ventrally. Longest tentacular cirri

extend to setiger 2-4. Jaws with 6-8 teeth.

Paragnaths pale and transparent ta dark, T =

Ot 3-7 as for holotype or, when few,

in sinwle oblique line or inverted Ly Il =

2—), in small specimens rarely | or oeca-

sionally not visible; TV — 4-11 in oblique

vanahle patch, frequently triangular, Large

specimens with parapodial lobes bluntly

rounded anteriorly, conical posteriorly, dorsal

notoapadial lobe anteriorly varying from slightly

smaller to slightly larger than ventral, de-

creasing from setiger 15-18 to remain as small

conical lobe or disappearing im far pasterjor,

notNpodium medial to dorsal cirrus somelimes

becoming dorsally inflated and slightly elon-

gated in posterior seligers. Dorsal neurepedial

lobe very short and blunt in some speeimens,

fi) small specimens dorsal notopadial lobe

small in about setigers 5-12 and strongly

reduced to gbsent elsewhere. Numbers and

lypes of setae shown in Table 13, Homogamph

falcigers from setiger 18 in large specimens

to as carly as 16 in smaller specimens. Anal

itr] extend aver fast 6-1] setigers.

Diveussion: This species bas been canfused by

Atiwener (1924) and Hartman (1954) with

Nereis jackson? Kinberg. Nereis masilleden-

mart nap. can be distinguished by the charac-

teristics in Table 2. This species which does

net Oeeur in’S.A. has been deseribed te clarify

the species Nere/s facksont.

The specific name refers to the presence of

paragnaths only on the maxillary ring of the

phoryny.

Australian Distribiition! Mew South Wales

(Sydney environs), Queensland (Port Malle),

Hahirar Subtidalty in amongst algee, rimassels,

racks and sediment,

Nereis parabifida n.4p

FIG. |Sa-c

Nereis jackson’?—Hartman, 1954: 31, fies 26-19

in part), New Kinberg.

HOLOTYPE: N.S.W,—Sydney, 36 Fl (IBS11)

coll, Shelf Henthic Survey, 26.11.1973, Posteriorly

incomplete, 53 sebgers, 19 mm length, 18 mot

width, PARATYPES: 5.A—3UB, | (18512),

NS.W,—Sydney, 36 ft, 2 16284) coll. Shelf Ren-

thic Survey, 26,1.19735. Camp Cove, Por Jucksun,

dredged in 3-4 fms, erilly botlom, 5 (AHP

N645D), coll, Dew, td, Hartman a8 Nereiy jack-

sank, Middleton Reef, 30-40 fms, dredged, 1

(4804) voll. Macintyre, C.S.1.R.O. Fisheries, Size

range of entire paratypes 58 setigers, Jt mn

Tengih, 1.4 mm wiih to 67 setigers, 16 mm

length, 1.4 mm width. Posteriorly incompleta spe-

cimens dowr to 1.0 mm width,

Description: Body slender, slightly Hutlened,

yellow-white in alcohol, brown pigment m

noatopodial gnd ventral neuropodial lobes be-

coming more infease posteriorly, Prostomiun

length 1.25 times width. Eyes dark purple,

anterior pair larger, lenses distinct, Palps short.

stout, styles elobose, length equal to first 1.5

setigers ventrally. Que pair antennae extend-

ing to level with palps. Pour pairs tentacular

cirri, longest extending io middle of setiger 2,

Both antennac and temtacular circt faintly

irregularly agnulated, Pharvyay with shor,

stout. transparent brown jaws curving slightly

more sharply towards tips, with & teeth. Para-

enaths pale brown cones, arranged as follows:

| (hl 4 in irregular, oblique single

raws HT = 4 in single transverse row; TV =

7 in transverse oval patch; V = 0; VI= 1}

VN-VIIW = 3 in single row mid-ventrally-

Dorsal cirrus extends to level with ar shighily

past ventral notapodial lobe in first few seti-

gers, clongating to 15-2 times length of lobe

in rest of body, Anterior setigers with noto-

podial and ventral newropocial lobes bluntly

conical (Pig. (5a), dorsal neuropodial lobe

short, thick, blunt, lobes becoming more

pomled posteriorly, Dorsal notopodial lobe

from setiger 3, attaining maximum develop

ment by setiger 8-10 then decreasing rapicly

to remain as ao small clongate Iohe to last

cetiger present i holotype (Piz 10h), OF

ather lohes. ventral notopodial lohe longest.

ventral neurapodial lohe generally longer than

dorsal. Ventral cirrus extending twe-thirds te

three-quarters way to tip of ventral neure

podial lobe, Acicula dark brown-Hlack. hyaline

al tins: Por numbers and types of setae see

Table ld. Heterogamph faleigers with shutts

Slightly thicker than spinigers anteriorly, be-

coming wuch thicker posteriorly; appendages

anteriorly slender, toothed aleng most of

margin, tip moderately hooked with Indistinet

fendon, posteriorly heeoming much broader

THE NEREIDIDAF OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

a ey Ls

/r ™~,

‘}

—_

Oo’ — | \

a Rie

————

— =

ia et |

\ ~~, |

oS |

———-f

Fig, 15. Nereis parahifida, isp. a. anterior view

of 10th parapodium. b. anterior view of 44th

parapodiim. ¢. notopodial homogomph falciges

from setiger 44, Scales in mm.

and more strongly hooked with teeth more

basally confined. Homogomph falcigers from

sctiver 16 with thick shafts. appendages short,

robust, dark, subterminal tooth as large as

or slightly larger than terminal tooth, 1-3

much smaller teeth frequently present basally

(Fig. 15c).

Comments, Variations not described for holo-

type include colour pale yellow-pink, prosto-

mium length 1-1,25 times width. Antennae

extending slightly past palps. Longest tenta-

cular cirri extending to setiger 2-6, Jaws with

133

6-8 teeth, Paragnaths in I] — 2-9 in single,

irregular oblique row of frequently 2 parallel

oblique rows; II] = 3-5 in single transverse

row, IV = 7-10 in transverse or oblique oval

patch or crescent; VI = generally 2—4 in close

group, rarely 1; VU-VIIT — 3-5 in single

row mid-ventrally. Dorsal cirrus elongating to

2-3 times length of ventral notopodial lobe

in far posterior setigers of intact specimens.

Dorsal notopodial lobe may be strongly re-

duced anteriorly, may not appear until as late

as seliger 6, and may disappear in middle or

posterior setigers. Ventral cirrus extending

three-quarters of the way or just to tip of

ventral neuropodial lobe in far posterior seti-

gers, Numbers and types of sctae shown in

Table 14. Anal cirri extend over last 5-7

setigers.

Discussion: Nereis parabifida n.sp. can be dis-

tinguished from similar species of Nereis using

the characteristics shown in Table 2.

The specific name refers to the similarity

of this species to N. hifida nusp.

Australian Distribution: South Australia (Kan-

garoo Island), New South Wales (Sydney,

Lord Howe Island).

Hebitat: Sub-tidal sediment (New South

Wales), single specimen from intertidal algae

(Kangaroo Island).

Nereis spinigera n.sp.

FIG, 16a-2

HOLOTYPE: S.A.—27C (18408) 68 setigers,

16.5 mm length, t,1 mm width, PARATYPES:

OFA, | (AHF POLY 1356), 11A, 1 (BMNH ZB

1982: 30), 19B, 1 (USNM 073014). O2A, 3

(18416). O4A, 7 (18411), LIA, 5 (18412). 13A,

3 (18361), 198A, 15 (18414). 19B, 1 (18413),

22A, 2 (18415). 22B, | (18410). 27C, 2 (18409).

Taser 14. Seval counts for Nereis parabifida n.yp,

No. of setae

Setiger 10 Setiger 23 Setiger 44

Natosetae

homogomiph spinigers 5 (2-5)* -

fiomogomph falcigers 2 (f-2) t (1-2)

Neurosetae

(1) Dorsal fascicle

above—homogonmiph spinigers f (3-5) 2 (2-4) 2 (3-4)

below—heterozgomph falcigers 2 (2-3) 2 (1-2) 14)

Gi) Ventral fascicle

uboye—heterogomph spinigers 3 (2-3) 4 (1-3) 4 (0-2)

below—heterogomph falcigers 6 (2-4) 2° (t-2) } (1-2)

‘Numbers in brackets refer to the variation in Numbers of setae occurring in 5 paratypes,

134 P. A. HUTCHINGS & S. P. TURVEY

-27

Fig. 16. Nereis spinigera n.sp. a, anterior view of 9th parapodium. b. anterior view of 59th para-

podium. c. notopodial homogomph falciger, setiger 17. d. notopodial homogomph falciger, setiger

19 (paratype). e. neuropodial heterogomph falciger, setiger 59. Scales in mm.

PHP NEREIDIDAG OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA 135

Size ranve, 36 setivers, 5,3 mm length, 0.6 mm

willl) to 8] setigers, 23 nim length, |.) mn width.

Deyeripiion, Body slender, slightly flattened,

durk pink in alcohol with brown pigment in

Ventral notopodial and neurepodial lobes,

especially posteriorly. Posterior segments with

conspicuous transverse rows of vranulatians

(exudate from glandular pores). Prostomium

length 1.25 times width, anterior margin

slightly indented between untennac, Two pairs

Of eyes, embedded. intense red-brown. Palps

(upering rapidly from base, strongly Manened

dorsaventrally with palpostyle digitiform, buses

uf palps adjacent or only narrowly separated.

One pair adteniae, Four pairs tentacular cirri,

distally with faint annulations, longest! exlernd-

ing fo setiger 4, Pharyox with slender, trans-

lucent greenish-brown jaws, basally almost

Straight, distally sharply curved. with 6 teeth,

Paraynaths dark brawn cones arranged as

follows; 1 0: 0 1-3 large and small

cones in oblique line; WE - O; IV ~~ 7 large

und Small canes in oblique arc: V O; VI -

| small eone: VH-VUI fh large cones tn

single tow evenly spaced, lurgest mid-ventrally.

Dorsal cirrus extending slightly past ventral

notopodial lohe anteriorly (Fig. 16a}. increas:

ing jo 446 times length of lobe posteriorly

(Fic 1Ab). Dorsal notapodial lahe absent.

Ventral notopodiwl) and neurapodial lubes

hluntly canieal anteriorly. beeaming more

pointed posteriorly, Presetal potapadial lobe

harely produced as a low ridge on hase of

veutral notopodial lobe. Dorsal neuropodial

Jobe with posterior face inflated in anterior

Setivers, shorler than other lohes anteriorly

but elongating in later setigers so that lobes

approximately equal or with slight decrease in

leneth ventrally, Ventral cirrus extending two-

thirds to three-quarters the way to tip af

ventral peuropodial lobe anteriorly and to

anervoximately level with tip posteriorty,

Acicula brown-black with pale tips. Notosetae

with homogomph spinigers in setigers 1-18.

4+oaf setiger 8 a siugle homoxzomph faleiger

from setiver 17 (Fig. \@e,d). Forly anterior

sctigers with Weurosetac, dorsally. homogomph

spinivers above and heterazomph falcigers he-

low ventrally, heterogamph spintgers above

and heterogomph faleigers below. Tn setigers

9-34 all neuropodial heterogomph faleivers

replaced by heterozomph spinigers. e.g. seliger

17 dorsally with 5 hormegemph and 2 hetero-

coniph spinigers, ventrally with 4 heterogamph

spinivers. Neuropadial hercrngamph faleigers

present again from setiger 25 and far anterior

paltern permanently re-established al setiper

40 with dorsally 2 homogomph spinigers and

| heterogomph falciger (Fig. 1oe), ventrally.

3 heterozomph spinigers vod | heterogomph

Falciver Numbers of nevrosetae decreasing

subsequently. Appendage of homogomph fal-

cigers with a curved terminal tooth and a

single, Japge subterminal tooth, similar in

size to terminal Looth or only slightly smaller

giving bifid appearance; up to several much

smaller tecth sometimes present — basally,

appendage and end of shaft dark brown, shaft

thick Heterogomph faleizers anteriorly with

uppendave slender, slightly hooked, finely

toothed along most of Jength, fine tendon

below tip, shafts slightly more robust than for

spinigers: Appendages becoming slizhtly more

squat and curved along body, little change in

shaft thickness. Anal cirri extend over Jast

6 seligers.

Commenn; Variation includes prostomiunr

length | 25-1.5 times width, eyes red-brown

jo purple-black, palpastyles globose to digiti-

form, Longest tentacular cirri extending to

setiger 3-5, Jaws with 6-7 teeth. Paragnaths

J 0, rarely I. TE > 0-3, frequently with

one very large cone and other smaller ones:

I 0; IV = 4-8, oceasionally as few as 1

or 0; Vo> th VE~ 0 or 1: VEEVEE =

S—7, as few os 2 in very small individuals,

occasionally absent. Paragnaths frequently nat

visible in small specimens at 100 % maguifien-

tion, or only a few large paragnarhs clearly

Visible in cither or both of TY and VIEL. Homo-

gomph falcigers first appearing in netosetac at

setuiger 14-18, transition spinigers to faleimers

occurring over 110 a few seligers. Notopodial

homogomph spinigers at ahout setiger 10

number from | ta 7, homagomph faleiery at

wbout seliger 40 generally number only 1.

occasionally 2. Replacement of neuropodial

heterogomph faleigers by heteragompt spini-

gers at setiver 6-2 oeeurring over |S

scligers, Complete return af heteragamph fal-

cigers at setiger 73-46, oecurring over 1-10

setivers, Dorsal peurosetae at about seliger

20 with 0-4 homegomph spinigers above and

12 heterogemph spinigers below: ventrally

with 3S heterogomph spinigers. At about

server 40, dorsal neufosetae with 0-3 home

somph spinigers above und | heteragampty

fulciger below, veotrally with 2-4 hetera-

gemph ubove and 1 heteragamph faleiger

below,

136

One paratype (18410) ovigerous with few

lurge yolky eggs in coelom. Ne sign of epitolal

modifications.

Discusston: Nereis spinigera asp. imay be dis-

hinyvuished from similar species of Nerety using

the characteristics given in Table 2,

The nome refers to the replacement of

heterogomph falcigers in beth neuropodisl

fascicles of anterior segments by heterogamph

spinivers.

Disiributlon: South Australia,

Nabitat: Associated with Zostera, algae, coral-

line alvac, us crevice faunu and in amongst

clumps of mussels,

Nereis triangularis sp.

FIG, 17-f

HOLOTYPE: S.A. —-O1LA (18536). 70 setigens, 24

im leneth, 2.7 wm width. PARATYPES: GLA.

| spec. (AHP POLY 1357). O1A, | (HMNE ZB

R2- J). OLA | (USNM 71537), OIA, 1

(18378). Size runges fyarn posteriorly incomplete

specimen of width 1.5 mm to entire specimen of

72 sctigers, leneth 22 mm_ width 2.4 mm.

Other Marerlal Examined: Nerets zenan,—45,

Spetsberein Safeh (avn) 30 1, 1864 (SSM 6033)

420, Speisbeygin Shoal point, 14.3,1861 (SSM

6037). 418, Spetsbergia Safehh favo}, 30 f, 1R64

(SSM 6034). 421. Spetsbergiu, Storfy forden)

Ginevra Bay (SSM 6035), 423, Spolsbergia

Waigatsti 30-70 f T5.8.1861 (SSM 6036) id

Malmgren, part of type series,

Nerely tenatd var, persiva! Misiin’ Bouwii—Peree,

1901. Céles d'Arabie. St. X4VIL atokes et |?

epitoke. Collection Prancais, Nue Caledonie Mis-

ou Gravier—Diibout, 1904, Isles Miaha, inac,

24 7 (MNHN) id. Fauvel, not part of type series.

Deveriptiony Body robust, flattened, colour

light brownish-pink in alcohol, brows pigment

laterally on prostamium aud in netopodial and

Ventral nevropadial lobes of posterior setigers-

Prastomium elongate, almost triangular, lenwth

1.3 times width. Eyes small, round, dark

purple-red, lenses not Visible. Palps large,

stout, ventral leneth equal to first 3 seligers,

Qne pair antennae, extending slightly past

palps, Four pairs tentacular cirri, longest ex-

tending te setiver 9 (lett, lip lost)§7 (tight).

Both antennae and tentacular cirri faintly

annulated Phorvex with slender. transparent

yellow brawn jaws curving more rapidly to-

wards tips, with 9 teeth reduced ta low undu-

lations distally, Paraynaths conical, dark

hrown, arranged as follows: | = I: fl = 11

(rivht}—J3 (lef) im triangular pateh of 3

oblique ares; 1 = 15 in 2 transverse rows;

Vv 20 in hrowd oblique crescent: Vo~ 0;

POA HUTCHINGS & §. f% TURVEY

Vi— 8 (lefti-10 (right) in stall oval patch;

VUeVEIEL = about 140 in broad band 6-7

deep tapering laterally, some of the larger

cones forming a partly separate single row

anieriorty.

Dorsal cirrus 1,3-1,5 times length of dorsal

ontopodial lobe in anterior setigers (Pig. 17a)

elongating to aboul 3 times length of lobe

posteriorly (Big. 17b). Notapadial and ventral

neuropodial lobes elongate and acutely conical

in all setigers, dorsal neuropodial lobe blunt,

Dorsal and ventral netapodial lobes similar in

length. Dorsal and ventral neurapodial lobes

slightly shorter afd on average similar to

each other in length Notopadium heearming

slightly elevated posterarly. Ventral cirrus

reaching one-half to two-thirds way to tip of

ventral nevropodial lobe in anterior setigers,

about two-thirds way im posterior Acizula

dark brown, hyaline at tips. Por numbers and

types of setae see Table 15. Heterogamph

faleigers (Fig. 17e) anteriorly with shafts

slightly thicker than spinigers, becoming much

thicker posteriorly: appendages anteriorly

slender, coarsely toothed with tip long.

rounded, slightly curved and tendon distinct,

beeoming broader basally in posterior setigers

with teeth confined to basal one-third to one-

half, tendon varying. fron distinct-indistinct.

Hamogomph faleigers appearing from approxi-

mately setiger 16-20 (setae damaged in this

region), appendages with long, slender ter-

minal tooth curving more sharply towards tip

and 1-3 much smaller blunt, stout Tateral

leeth (Fig. 17 aT)

Anal cirri extend over last 10 setigers.

Comments Additional vanatrons mot described

for holotype include prostamium Jength [a-

1.5 times width. Eyes pale ced. Palp length

equal to first 2.5-3 setigers ventrally, Longest

tentncular cirri extending to setiger 5-7, Jaws

with 8-13 teeth, Paragnaths with T = Q-1,

rarely 2. EL = 6-15 in 2-3 short oblique lines

or disuraaniscd oblique patch; Wl — 10-30

in 7-3 transverse rows; [TY = 15-20 in oblique

crescentic pateh; Vo> 0; VE © 6-10 ta small

oval patel: VI-Vul about 140-200 in

broad, disorganised band of cones of variable

size, Sometimes with larger cones espcen-

trated anteriorly and then occasionally as a

partly separate row, Dorsal cirrus 13-24)

times loneth of dorsal notopadial lobe an-

t¢riorly, 24 times length of lobe posteriorly.

Dorsal Wotepodial lobe sometimes slightly

THE NEREIDIDAE OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA 137

Fig. 17. Nereis triangularis n.sp. a. anterior view of 10th parapodium. b. anterior view of 66th

parapodium. c. anterior heterogomph neurosubacicular falciger. d-f. notopodial homogomph fal-

ciger from setiger 24, 35 and 67 respectively. Scales in mm.

14x P, A, HUTCHINGS & 8. P. TURVEY

Tantr 1S. Setal counts for Nereis triangularis nsp.

No. of setae

Setiger 10 Setiger 35 Sctiger 66

Notosetae

homogomph spinigers & (6-9)* 1 (G5) —

homoagomph faleigers — 3 (1-3) 1 ¢l-3)

Neurosetae

(1) Dorsal fascicle - 7

above—heterogomph spinigers 6 (4-8) 4 (2-5) 1 (0-3)

below—heterogomph falcigers 4 (1-5) 3. (2-3) (0-2)

Gi) Ventral fascicle

above—heterogomph spinigers 4 (1-5) 2 (0-3) (0.

below—heterogamph faleigers 10 (6814) 4 (3-6) 2 (1-3)

= Numbers in brackets refer to the variation in numbers of scliae occurring th 9 paratypes.

shorter than ventral in anterior setigers,

Ventral cirrus extending up to one-third of

length past tip of ventral neuropodial lobe.

Variation in numbers and types of setae shown

in Table 15, Homogomph faleigers from

setigers 17-26 with the earlier appearances in

the smaller specimens. Major teeth of first

few homogomph falecigers stout but sharp,

frequently with several small, hair-hke teeth

basally, then teeth becoming blunt in later

seligers, often reduced to low rounded bosses

in far posterior, Aual cirri extended over last

4-10 setigers.

Discussion: Nereis (riangulariy tsp. is similar

tu Nereiy zenata var. persica Pauvel, 1911}

and N, waikwadi Day, 1973 in that the noto-

podial homogomph falcigers have a slender,

curved terminal tooth and few smaller, stout

lateral teeth while Areas VII-VIM of the

pharynx fave a continuous, broad band of

paragnaths. Nereis gaikwadi has a single para-

enath in Area V and only one lateral tooth

on cach homogomph faleiger appendage.

Material of N. senate var. persica identified

hy Fauvel has hamogomph faleigers and para-

podia similar to those of N. triangatlaris o.sp.

However, the paragnaths in Areas WII-VIIT

consist of a single, evenly spaced row of large

paragnaths widely separated from a broad

band of much smaller paragnaths posteriorly

(as in the original deseription by Fauvel).

The types for the stem species N, sonata

Malmeren 1867 differ from N. trianeularis

nap. in that the notopodial homogomph Falci-

gers have numerous fine, sharp tceth spaced

evenly along the basal half to two-thirds of

the appendage, the terminal tooth of the

appendage is broad and barely hooked and

Aren VEP-VITL of the pharynx has a narrow

hand of small cones with an uneven pow of

very large cones along ity anterior murgin,

We have thus erected N, friaeularis n.sp.

There. are considerable differences between

Fauvel’s N. zoheafa var, persica and Malm-

gren’s N. zenata as listed above, We consider

these to be separate species and agree with

Day (1967) and Read (1980) who gave N.

peryiva as a full species without comment,

The name friangularly describes the acutely

conical parapodial lobes which appear trian-

gular when viewed from most angles.

Australian Distributions South Australia (Port

Augusta),

flabitan: Muddy

many mussels,

Oleanereiy Hartmann-Sehrader

Prostomium with paired frontal antennae on

biarticulate palps and (wo pairs of eyes, Peris-

tome vchaectous. Four pairs of tentacular cirri,

Parapodia of first 2 setigers unirumous, stib-

sequently biramous.. Notosctae hoamogomph

spinigers, neurosetae homo- and heterogomph

spinigers and heterogomph falcigers. Pharynx

with paired jaws and soft papillae on maxillary

and oral rings.

Type species: O. édinonds/ (Hartinan).

Olganereiy edmondsi (Hartman)

Ceratoeephala edmondyi Harimari, 1954:

figs 12--17.

Oleanercis cdmondsi-—Harimann-Sehroder, 1977;

147-149, Pl. 21-e, Sa-c,

Material Examined: S.Ac-O1A, 5 spec. (18299).

OSA, 14 (18298). O6B, 1 (18297). IZA. 13

(18295), 139A, 11 (18296). 22A, | (18292), 226,

M) (1R291), Z7C, 3B (18293), QOA, 2 (18290).

Vie—Anderson Thlet, Venus Bay ne Inverloch,

intertidal salinity range 3-34"; (18597),

Dexcription; Size range, from 123 setigers,

60 nim length, 1.7 mm width ta 168 setigers,

135 mm length, 2.5 mm width: gnteror frag-

intertidal sand flats with

23.24.

THE NEREIDIDAE OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA 139

ments 1.4-3.4 mm in width. Pharynx lacking

paragnaths, cirriform papillae present on

maxillary and oral rings. First 2 parapodia

uniramous, subsequently biramous. Notosetae

homogomph spinigers, neurosetae spinigers

and falcigers. Additional information: eyes

variable in colour and intensity of pigmen-

tation, with distinct lenses. Dorsal notopodial

lobe reduced posteriorly, absent in far posterior

setigers. Number of noto- and neurosetae re-

duced considerably posteriorly. Paired anal

cirri filiform, equal in length to last 18 or 19

setigers or to as few as last 4 when regenerat-

ing.

Comments: In some individuals the single

papilla on Area I of the pharynx is not visible

and the number of papillae on VII-VIIT may

vary in the range of 8-10, with occasional

papillae being bifid. In the original descrip-

tion this number was reported constant at 9

and no mention was made of bifid papillae.

Our material also differs from the paratype

redescribed by Hartmann-Schréder (1977) by

lacking conical postsetal neuropodial lobes.

Instead, the lobes are variably produced as low

rounded ridges postsetally.

This species was known previously only

from the type locality.

Australian Distribution; South Australia, Vic-

toria.

Habitat: Associated with sand and mud fiats,

mussel clumps, Zostera and encrusting fauna.

Perinereis Kinberg

Eversible pharynx with conical and trans-

verse paragnaths on both rings, four pairs of

tentacular cirri, parapodia biramous. Noto-

setae homogomph spinigers, neurosetae homo-

and heterogomph spinigers and heterogomph

falcigers.

Type species: P. novae-hollandiae Kinberg

Perinereis amblyodonta (Schmarda)

Nereilepas amblyodonta Schmarda, 1861: 106, PI.

XXXT, fig. 245, text figs A-B, a—b, K.

Perinereis amblyodonta. — Hartman, 1954; 33.

Day & Hutchings, 1979: 108 (for full syno-

nomy).

Perinercis novae-hollandiae Kinberg, 1866: 175.

Knox, 1951: 221-222, Pl. XLVIII, figs 25-31.

Material Examined: 8.A.—O6C, 5 spec. (18384).

O9A, 8 (18382). O9B, 29 (18389). 10A, 4 (18383).

I8A, 2 (18391), 29A, 6 (18385). 30A, 2 (18387).

30B, 2 (18386). 30E, 1 (18388). 34A, 1 (18390).

Description: Size range, 33 setigers, 5.5 mm

length, 0.95 mm width, to 88 setigers, 58 mm

length, 4.3 mm width. Pharynx with conical

paragnaths except for a transverse bar on VI,

arranged as follows: I = 1-3; U, Ul, IV =

variable groups; V = 1 anterior to transverse

line of 4; VI = single, transverse, curved bar;

VII-VUI = continuous band of 2-3 rows.

Anterior parapodia with dorsal neuropodial

lobe generally longest, posteriorly with noto-

podium dorsally elongate and cylindrical

except in small specimens. Notosetae homo-

gomph spinigers only, neurosetae dorsally

homogomph spinigers and heterogomph falci-

gers, ventrally heterogomph falcigers only.

Comments: Our material agrees well with

previous descriptions with the addition that

the dorsal elongation of posterior notopodia

is less pronounced in smaller individuals.

Australian Distribution: Western Australia,

Victoria, New South Wales and Queensland.

Habitat: Associated with encrusting algal com-

munities and mussel clumps.

Perinereis nuntia (Savigny)

Lycoris nuntia Savigny, 1822: 33,

Perinereis nuntia—Fauvel, 1932: 108-111.

Perinereis yallata—Hartman, 1954: 35.

Grube.

Material Examined: S.A—O5A, 4 spec. (18331).

O6A, 7 (18332). 10A, 12 (18330). 12C, 1

(18329). 28A, 3 (18328). 29A, 1 (18327). Gar-

den Island, Port Adelaide, mangroves, 2 (18469-

70) coll. Butler.

Perinereis nuntia var. brevicirrus. — Krusadai

Island, Gulf of Manaar, 9.9.1925 (MNHN);

Tché-Fou China 1931, (MNHN); Ouen Island,

New Caledonia, 1928 (MNHN), id. Fauvel.

Perinereis nuntia var. vallata——Chaupathi, Mala-

bar, Bombay (MNHN) 15.2.1925, id. Fauvel.

Perinereis nuntia vallata.—Port Willunga, S.A., 1

spec. (AHF N5754) coll. S. J. Edmonds, id, Hart-

man,

Description: Size range 51 setigers, 12 mm

length, 0.8 mm width to 106 setigers, 68 mm

length, 3.8 mm in width. Colour in alcohol

dark pink, brown pigment granules on antero-

lateral margins of prostomium, dorsal and

lateral margins of palps and in transverse lines

parallel to the anterior margin of each setiger.

Notopodial and ventral neuropodial lobes

dark brown. Intensity of pigmentation

variable. Prostomium about as long as wide

with 2 pairs of deeply embedded eyes, palps

robust. Four pairs of tentacular cirri, longest

extending to setiger 4-9, other pairs decreas-

ing successively by one-half to two-thirds, with

the 2 shortest pairs equal in length.

Pharynx with paragnaths arranged as fol-

lows: I = 0-2 cones; II = 6-12, occasionally

Non

lan

as few as 2 cones m tritngular patch; IL =

7-31) cones areanged in transverse oval or

rectangular patch, often with 1-3 separated

on cither side of mam patch; 1¥ = 20-34

canes in crescent; V = 1—2 cones arranged

longitudinally at the same level or slightly

posterior to rows of bars in VE; VI = 7-15,

rarely as Few as S short, low to pointed bars

arrariged in a transverse are; VII-VIIL = 2

irregular rows of large mod shghtly smaller

concs tapering to | row at sides.

Notopodial and ventral neuropodial lobes

bluntly conical anteriorly, posteriorly become

more acutely conical but still blunt. Anteriorly

Hotopodial and dorsal neuropodial lobes

approximately equal, ventral neuropodial lobe

shorter, Posteriarly dorsal notopodial lobe

longer than ventral, both longer than neuro.

podial lobes. Notopodium dorsally inflated and

somewhat elevated posteriorly..

Dorsal cirrus variable in length, from two-

thirds to one and a half times the length of

dorsal notopodia) lohe anteriorly, tnereasing

in fae pasteriok to 2-3 times length of the lobe.

Ventral cirrus anteriorly extending one-third

to half the way to the tip of ventral neuro-

podlal lobe, posteriorly becoming. slightly

shorter, extending to base of the lohe,

Comments: Savigny (1822) described Peri-

nereis nuniia and subsequently Grube (1857)

established FP. nuntia Var, brevicirris and var,

valle, based on variations in the paragnath

count, [nh a major review of this species com-

plex Fauvel (1932) described two more

varieties of this species and a third tn 1932,

Fauvel distinguished the five varieties from the

stem species on the presence or absence of

paragnaths on V, their avrangernent if present,

the type of paragnaths on VI and the relative

lengths of the tentacular cirri We have

examined Fauvel’s material of Arevicivvis and

vallara ancl confirm the distinguishing charac-

teristics. However Fauvel (1932. p. 109) states

“many specimens are intermediate, and so

cradual are the transitions that they cannot be

assigned definitely to any variety”. In contrast

Knox (1951), working On New Zealand ma-

terial, found eonsistent differences belween P

nuntia var. drevieirris und var. vellatea, Prri-

nereis y. villatu had @ single cone (he does not

indicate position) on group V of the pharynx

whereas brevicirruy had 3 cones forming a

trinngle, There were also differences in the

relative lengths of the dorsal and ventral cirri,

Hartman (1954) working on Anstralian

P, A. HUTCHINGS & S. P, TURVEY

nereids raised these two varicties to full

speciés With ho comment. Our material is

indistinguisbable from Hartman's (1954)

specimen but cannot be clearly identified with

the two varieties or species as described by

Hariman, The muterial does wot agree with

the other varieties described by Favel so we

have given a full species description and re-

ferred all niaterial buck to the stem species PL

nuatia. We believe that a far more detailed

investigation of this species is necessary to

asdertain Whether we are dealing with a highly

Variable species or a complex with consistent

sub-units possibly warranting specific status.

Paik (1975) working on material from Korea

folind po consistency in the number and

arrangement of poragnaths and was able to

separute the material into 19 arbitrary groups,

Other morphological features did not vary

and Paik suggested that the two varieties of

P) puntia vallata and hrevicirris, are nol valid

and syfonymised them with PL raitia,

Some of our material (18331) was sexually

mature although no epitokous modifications

were apparent.

Auvralian Distelburons Western Australia.

South Australia, Vietoria, New South Wales.

Queensland.

Habit) Associated with mussel clumps. algac

and Zovrera.

Perinereiy variodentata Augener

Perinerely Varladentata: Augener, 1903+ 174-182,

PI, 3, fia, 50, text figs 19a-c, Kott, 19451) 112

113, texe figs 6a-d, Hartman. 195d: 35,

Material Examined: S.A—O8A, 1 spec, (18332),

(OH, 164 (983394), DIA, 20 (18342), 220, 7

(198341), 2A, 4 (18335), JOA, Al (18396) 40R,

4 (18336), 300, $1 (78336). 30D, 87 (18337).

32A, I (bR940).

Peseviption; Size range 35 setigers, 4,9 in

length, 0.65 mm width, to 69 setigers, 48 mm

length, 4.3 mm width. Pharynx with conical

puragnaths on all Areas except VI wirh trans-

verse bars, arranged as follows; I 7-25,

occasionally as few as TeS in small specimens.

in triangular or diamond patehz 1 7-1)

(as few ps 3) in 2 oblique parallel rows, Wl

{-6 in small patch; TV ~ 8-21 (Hs few as

6) in oblique band of 2-3 irregular rows; V

generally 4-6 (extremes 2-15) irregular

match sometimes extending onto Vip VT

2 curved bars ty transverse line, VII-VIN

aenerally 66-68 (extremes 34-178) large and

smal! cones in 2-3 irregular rows laterally,

5— ventrally,

THE NEREIDIDAR OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

Parapodial lobes equal in length or de-

ercasing Ventrally, Notopodiwn becoming dor-

sally inflated and elongate in posterior para-

podia of large individuals.

Comments: Our material exhibits slightly mare

varialion in paragnath counts than Hartman

(1954) indicated, although even in her de-

scriptlon she recorded considerable Variation,

‘This inereased variation may be attributable to

a wider distribution of material available ‘tea

us in Comparison to Hartman's single leality,

Australian Diyirthurian. Western Australia,

South Australia and ‘Tasmania,

Mlabitat: Associated with encrusting algae and

seaurasses.

Platynerels Kinbery

Pharynx eversible with paragnaths an both

oral and muxillary rings, inclading cones and

pectinule hats. Four pairs of tentacular cirri,

parapodia biramous. Notosetae homogomph

spinigers and faleigers, the Jatter sometimes

fused to form simple falcigers; neurosetae

include hant- and helerogomph spinigers and

heterogomph faleigers,

Type species: # magulhaensis Kinberg

Plaieercis denerilii antipoda Hattman

Platynereis adumeriliti antipoda Hartman, 1954:

44-36, fies 33-37, Hutchings & Raloer, 1979!

757-758, Hartmun-Schréder, 1980: 6),

Material Exaniined: SA—O03C, 9 spec. (18321)

NRA, 1 618318). ISA, 7 (18922). 16B, 1 (18319)-

L7A, 1 (18320). 21A, 3 C1R228), 22B, 4 (18314).

23A, 17 (18325), 30D. 1 early Y epitake (18381)

T4A, 4 (18315), 30D, 1 (18323) 3ZA, & (1R324)-

34A, 7 (18316). 34A, 3 (18317). Tas.—Pancy

Point, Hrany Island, in algae at 3.6 m, coll, Edgar

9.6.78,

Description; Size ratige 33 setigers, 5,1 mm

length, 0.75 mm width to 76 seliger, 25 mm

length, 2.4 mm width. Eversible pharynx with

paragnaths as pectinate bars arranged ag fol-

lows; T — 0; TF = O: TIT = small scattered

groups in about 2-3 approximately parallel

transverse rows; [V = 3-4 rows forming a

triangular patch; V = 0; VI = small group of

up to 3 short, concentric, ereseentic rows;

VII-VOT = up to 5 evenly spaced patches

similar to those in VL

Notopodial and ventral neuropodial lobes

comical except at about gsetiger 4-10 Where

glohose. Dorsal neuropodial lobe with digiti-

form postsetal lobe in first 3-4 setipers,

variably reduced more posteriorly to small

conical process. Notopodium becoming more

dorsally elongated and inflated postenorty,

141

Heavily gravid female (18381) subepi-

tokous. Setigers 1-4 with bases of dorsal and

ventral cirri expanded, Partly emergent pata-

tory selae from seliver T8 an additven ta

normal complement of atokaus setae. Nete-

podium with additional digitiform Jobe

medial la dorsal cirrus trom seliger 20}, dorsal

nolopadial lobe compressed, Ventral and pre-

seta] notopadial lobes flattened, blade-like

from setiger 19 Neuropodium with postsctal

lobe Soliaceous, cigitiform lobes dorsal and

ventral ty the base of ventral cireus trom

setiger 19. Intermediate stages in both noto-

4nd neurapodium in the 2-3 setigers preced-

ing setiger 19,

Commeniy. Our material exhibited con-

siderable variability i the paragnaths on TV.

Hartman (1954) desetihes several tows of

pectinue on TV whereas we have found trian-

gular patches consisting of 3 or 4 rows {occa-

sionally 2) of pectinae wilh small irregular

pectinae at the apices of the iriangle. These

rows of pectinac nay be continuous or broken,

occasionally reduced to a few short scattered

fragments in small indivicvals, Pectinae may

also be fewer on TH (2-3) than Hartman

reported and cach group on VE-VIIL may be

condensed inte a single broad raw-

Variation alsa aceurs in the tips of the

appendages of the netopodial faleigers which

range from faintly to boldly nolehed.

Australian Distribution: Wester Australia

(Port Hedland, Port Samson, Exmouth,

Tintabiddy Creek, Kurbarri, Geraldlon, Cer-

vantes). South Australis, Tasmania, New

South Wales (Careel Bay) and Queensland.

Mahirar Seagrass beds, associated with algac

and enctusting fatinas,

Pyetedodonereis Kinhere

Pharynx eversible with puragnaths on both

tings, including cones, transverse atmonth bars

and pectinate bars, Four pairs of tentacular

cirri; parapodia birameus, Notosetac include

homogomph spinigers aud faleigers; neuro-

setae homo- and heterogomph spinigers and

heterogomph falcigers,

Type species: FP. callapagensis Kinberg.

Psendonerecis anomala Gravier

Psevdanercis anernala Grayier, 190)> 191-197,

text figs 194-200; 1900: Pl. 42, figs 50-52.

Fauvel. 1927: 494_

Nereis nichollsi Koll, 1951; 93-95, text fizs 2a-k-

Material Exanilned) 8.A.—27A, 1 Spoc. (18313)-

JOA, 48 C1B3L1). JOC, 6 (18312) WD, 110

142 P. A, HUTCHINGS &S P, TURVEY

(IBSIO0). Upper Spencer Gulf (5967) call, Shep-

herd North Arm, Port Adeluide, mangroves

(6004) coll, Butler,

Nereis nichallyi—-W.A.—Rottnest Island, Point

Peron, Abrolhus, HOLOTYPE, (7036). mary

PARATYPES (7037),

Descripliony Size range 35 seligers, 6,1 mm

length, 0.95 mm width to 66 setigers. 42 mm

leneth, +8 mm width. Palps large, stout,

basal part strongly laterally compressed. equal

in lenwth to first 33.5 setivers. Pharynx with

paragnaths in WW, Ul and IV flattened and

sharply triangular, generally forming regular

comb-like rows bul sometimes irregular, Para-

gnaths typically arranged as follows: J = 17

large cone, EL = 17-32 in oblique rectangular

group of 4—6 short transverse rows; HE

37-82 in 3—f transverse ates; TV = 32-68 in

reclangular group of 4—5 rows, often addi-

tions! irregular groups of normal cones miwards

jaws, V = OF Vt = 5 cones in single trans-

verse arc, sometimes with an additional iso-

lated cone; VIL-VILE = 14-22 in 2 alternating

rows. anterior with very large cones, posterior

with stall cones.

Anteriorly notosetie homoagomph spinigers,

dorsal netirosetae homagomph spinigers and

heteragamph faleigers, ventral neurosetac

heterugamph faleigers. Posteriorly notosetac

homogomph spinigers and faleigers, dorsal

neurosetac homogomph spinigers and hetero-

gomph falciers, ventral neurosetae hetero-

goinph spinigers and faleigers. Posterior foto-

podia undergoing considerable dorsolateral)

elongation in liurger specimens. Dorsal nato-

podjal lobe frequently reducing 10 become

ahsent posteriorly in small specimens.

Canmieniw: Our maternal is indistinguishable

(rom Kott’s, although Kott'’s deseription omits

the homogoniph spinigers in the dorsal ncuro-

setae of middle and postenor setigers. The

material agrees closely with Gravers (1901)

descriplion with the exception that Gravier

docs nol describe the neurosetae of amiddle

and posterior setigers, Poragnath numbers are

mote vanable in our material (han previoushy

described and may he greatly reduced in very

small specimens to us few ay FC = O: Th —

out 1; 1V 16; V1 4. VEEVIN

Ld,

This species has pot been recorded pre-

viously from South Anstralia

Auytiratian Biveibarians Westerw Australia,

South Australia and New South Wales.

Hohiter; Assoviated with encrusting fauna,

eoralline aleae and algal holdfasts,

Acknowledgements

One of us (PH) thanks Drs Stan Edmonds

and Alan Butler for considerable help in the

collecting of this material and for their

hospitality, We thank Mike Moran for assis-

tance in the initial sorting of the material,

and the following for loaning rhaterials De

David George (BMNH), Dr Harinann-

Schroder (AZM), Loiwette Marsh (WAM),

Mmme Renaud-Mornant (MNHN), Dr Roy

Olerad (SSM), Sue Williams (AHB) and

Alex Muir (BMNH) for assistance with litera-

ture, Martin Rebinson prepared some of the

figures und Karen Handley assisted in litera-

ture searching, Funds were provided by the

Australian Biological Resources Committee

which paid the salary of one of us (SPT),

Keferences

Avkissos. €.. WurcHmas, P. Jouwsson, M,

Jounsow, W. Do& Meivittrn, M.D. (1981) An

ecological investigutian of the Myall Lukes

region. Anst Boul. @(3), 299-329,

Avounnr, MH. (1913) Balychuetu Brrontia, Fauna

Siidwest Australiens 4, 65-304,

(1922) Revision der Auastalischen Paly-

chacten-fypen van Kinberg. rk, Zool, 14(3-4),

(1923) Papers from Dr Th. Martensen’s

Pacific Expedition 1914-16. XIV. Polychyeta 1.

Polvehueten von den Auckland und Campbell-

Trseln. Vidensk. Meddr. dansk muturl. Foren,

75, 1-115,

—— (1924) Papers from Dr Th Mortensin's

Pacific Expedition 1914-16, XVIUL, Polychaeta

If, Polychaeta von Weuseeland. 1, Errantia,

(hid 75, 241-441,

—— (1927) Papers from Dr Th. Mortensert's

Pacific Rxpedition 1914-16, No. 38, Polychaeten

yor Slidost und Stid-Auasiralien, Jhid. #3, 71-

275.

AUSTRALIAN Musitim ed. 7. Mutepoe (1980) &

survey of the estuarine tain of Eurobodalla

Shire, Australian Miseum, Sydney

Benitam, W, & (1909) Report on the Polychaely

of che Subaninretic Islands of New Zeulund, pp.

236-250, In The Subontiarctic Tslands of New

Zealand, vol. |, ed. © Chiltan.

CuAmMBEenin. Ro Vo (1919) The Annelida Paty-

chacin. Mem Mus. comp. Zoal. Marv. a8.

1-514,

Day J. H, (1934) On a collection of Sonih

African Polycheeta with a calologue of the

species recorded trom South Africa, Angola,

Mosambique and Matheascar, J. Linn. Soc.

(Zveal_) 39, 15-82.

—— (1967) “A Monograph an the Polychaeta of

Southern Afnca” Part t CRetsh Museum

Natural History; London.)

~ — (1973) Polvelwelu collected by V, D. Craik-

wad at Ratnagiri, soulh of Bombay, J. Linn

Yoo. (#eol,) 52, 337-36),

— (1979) On a collection uf Polyehueta from

intertidal and shullaw reefs near Perth Western

Alistralip, Ree, West. ait, Mus, 3, 167-208,

THE NEREIDIDAR OF SOUTH AUSTRALTA 143

—— & Hurciunas, P, A. (1979) An annotated

cheehlist OF Australian and New Zealand Poly-

chacm, Archiannelida and Myzostomida, Ree.

Anse. Maus. 32. 80-181,

Biicers, Ef Lk87) “Palychueten.” (Hamburger

Migilluentschen Summelreise, Hamburg, Pred-

tichsen & Co )

— (1900) Magellunische Anneliden gesammelt

Walrend der schwedischen Expedition nach den

Magellan-shindem. Abh, KR. Gey, Wiss, Gottin-

ven (Math. Pliysik, RL) W800, 1-232.

—— (1901) Ble Polychaeten der muzellanischen

und chilentschen Strandes, Ean faunistiieher

Versveh. Pestsehrifi zur Beier 150-luhrigen

Hestehens der Koniglchen Gessellschatt der

Wisserschallen zu Gottingen. Alli, Math

Physik. Berlin, Wiedmanusche Buchhundling,

t9OF, 1-232,

—— (1904) Neuseelandisehe Anneliden, abl. K.

Gos, Wiss, Greittineen (Math -PliVsik KI) Nf

3(1), 1-80,

— - (1919) Die Polychacten-Sammlung der

deutschen Siidpoltir-Expedition, = 1901-1903.

Deytsehe SidpolarEs ped, 13, VIT-FVR_

Pacer, Ky 119770) “The Polychaeie Worms.

Defimtions and keys to the orders, funtilies, and

genera.” (Natural Uisigry Museum of Los

Afigeles County, Science Series.)

(1977b) Polychaetes from intertidal areas ia

Panama, with a ceview of previous shallow

water records, Smithson. Cote. Zool. 221. 1-81,

PAvver, PL C1911) Annelies Polychetes du Ciolte

Persique recueillies par M. M, Bogoyawlewsky,

deel. Zonal. bap. Gen. §, 353-439.

—— 11917) Annélides polychtes de VUAustralie

merhlionale. Shirl. S6, 159-278.

(1918) Annélide polycheles nouvelle de

Afvique orientale, Mus. Hist, nat. Paris, Bull.

24, 503-9.

—~ (1919) Annelides Polycheles de Muadugascar.

3 de Djibouti. Arch. cool. exp. gen. 58, 315-

473.

—— (1922) Annélides polychétes de larchipel

Houtman Abrolhos (Australie accidentile) re-

cuvillies par M. le Professeur W. G. Dakin,

FLLLS. I. Lirtn. Sue. 34, 487-500.

—— (1932) Annelits Polychaeta of the Indian

Muscum, Culeulla. Ment Jian Mis, V2,

1-262.

- (1941) Annélides polvehétes de Ja Mission

du Cup Elorn (1882-1883). Bull May. Paris ser

(2) 13, 272-98.

Gay, PC. 11849) Annelides. Historia de Chile.

Zoologia, Paris, 32 pp.

Gipes, P. BR (1972) Polychacte annelids from the

Cook Ishunds. 4. Zeeal., Lond. 168. 199-220.

Gravicr, CL (1900) Contribution & Metide des

\innélides polychétes de Ja Mer Rouge. Now.

Aroliys. Mus, Gist. nat, Party, ver, 2, 18-282.

~e— (1901) Contribution & Vélude des anndlides

Pal yenehen de la Mer Rouge. fhid. (4) 3, 147-

& Danron. J. Lb. (1934) Annélides paty-

chdtes recueilles wn cours de péche nocturnes &

la lumiere sie lee odtes PB Annan. Aants, Tse.

Veeannur, Manaca ws, 14(3), 37-134,

Grupe, A. BE. (1857) Annulate Oerstedigma. Enn-

meralio Annulatorum quae in itinere per tndiam

oecidentaluni ef American centralemn annis

(845-1848 suscepio legit. Purs 2. Vidensk.

Meddr, dansk. natneh. Faren, UST. 158-64,

Ci878) Annulaté Semperiana, Berwove zur

Kenninis der Annelidenfuuna der Plolippiven

nach den von Herr Prof. Semper mitlgebrach-

ten Sammlugen. Acad. Sci. St. Petersburg. Mem-

25, 1-300,

(1881) Beschreibungen Yon fenen Anne-

hidden des z7oalogischen Museums zu Berlin,

GCevells naturel, Prennde Berlin Sitzber. 1881.

109-17,

Hansen, G, A, (1882) Recherches sur les Atad-

lides recueles par M. le Professeur Eduard yan

Beneden pendant son voyage uu Bresil er & lao

Plata. Mém, Cour Acad. r, Sel, Bele, 44, 1-29.

Hartman, ©, (1939) The polychaetous unnelids

collected by the Presidential Cruise of 1938.

Smithson. mise, Collny 8, [-22.

(1954) Australian Nereidae inchiding de-

scriplions of three new specivs und one genus

loveter with summaries of previous records and

keys ta Species. Trane. R. Soe. 8. Aust. 77, 4h.

—— (1954) Cutalogue of the polychactous an-

nelids of the work! Purt bl. Qe. Pup. Alton

Hancock Miln, 23, 1-353.

—— (1964) Polychueta Errantia of Antarctica.

ar. Res. Ser. 3, 1-134,

HariMann-Scuropirk, G. (1962) AZweiler Beilrag

zur Polychactenfaina van Peru, Kieler Meeres-

lorsh. 18. 109 |47-

(1977) The genera Ceratecrphule Malm-

tren, Olvauereiy n. gen, and Profandilycastiv n.

fen. (Nereidye, Polychneto) wilh a key to the

Herenl genera without chitinous puragnachs. pp.

(41-155, fo K. Fauchald and D. Reish, “Essuvs

on Polychaetous Anoelids in Memory of Olsa

Hartman,” Allan Hancock Foundation, Los

Angeles.

—— (1980) Jn Hartmann-Schroder & Hartmunn

Zor Kenninis des Eulitorals der wustralischen

Kiisten jinter besonderer Beriicksichliguny der

Polychacten ind Ostracoden (teil 4 und tei) 3)-

Mitt, luonh. zoel. Mus. Inst, TT, Al. 00.

—— (1981) Die Polyehaeten der tropischsub-

tropischen Westkiisle Australiens (zwischen Ex-

mouth im Norden und Cervantes i Siiden).

Thiel. TB. 19-96,

Hurcnines, P, A, & Grasny, C. I. fin press) Two

new species af Ceratenereix (PF. Nereididac)

from estinunne areas of New South Wales. Prne.

Biel, Shue, Wah.

& Ramen, &. FP. (1979) The Polvchaete

Tauns of Careel Bay, Pittwater, New South

Wales. Australia. J. Nar Hist, 13, 745-96,

——- & Recuer, H F. (1974) The fauna of

Carce! Huy with comments on the ecology of

mangrove and seagrass cOmmunities. dur.

Zonl. WB, 99-128,

Kincrrs, JG. AH. 01866) Annulata nova, Ofvers.

RK. Vetensk Akad. Firh, 18654), 239-88.

Kwox, G, A, (1951) The polyehuetous unnelids of

Hank's Peninsula, Part 1. Nereidae. Rec. Car-

ferburv Mus, 3, 213-29

& Camnrom, D. B (1971) Port Phillip Bay

Survey 1957-1963, Victorian, Australin, Part 2,

Res Polychaeta. Men. nam, Mus, Meth., 32.

144 P. A, HUTCHINGS. & S. P. TURVEY

Korr, P, (1951) Nereidae and Eunicidae of South

Western Australia, also notes on the ecology of

Western Australian limestone reefs, J, Proc. R.

Soc. West. Aust, 35, 85-130,

KupeNoy, J. D. (1979) New species and records

of Polychaetous annelids from the Tetraclita

(Cirripedia: Crustacea) zone of the northern

Gulf of California, Mexico. Bull. Sth. Calif.

Acad. Sci. 78, 116-21.

LANGERHANS, P. (1880) Die Wurmfauna von

Madeira. Zool, Leipzig 32, 513-92.

Macmcren, A, J. (1867) Annulata polychaeta

Spetsbergiae, Gronlandiae, Islandiae et Scun-

dinaviae hactenus cognita, Ofvers. K. Vetensk.

Akad. Foérh, 24, 127-235.

MclInrosn, W. C. (1885) Report on the Annelidae

Polychaeta collected by H.M.S. “Challenger"

during the years 1873-76. Challenger Reports

12, 1-554.

Monro. C, C. A, (1938) On a small collection of

Polychaeta from Swan River, Western Austra-

lia. Ann. Mag. nat. Hist, (11) 2, 614-24.

Park, E. 1. (1975) Taxonomical evaluation of two

varieties of Perinereis nuntia: P. nitntia var.

vallata (Grube, 1857), P. nuntia var. brevicirris

(Grube, 1857). Bull, Korean Fish. Sac. 8, 242-

44,

Paxton, H. (in press)

Micronercis (Polychaeta:

phycinae). Rec. Aust. Mus.

Perkins, T. H, (1980) Review of species pre-

viously referred to Ceratonereis mirabilis, and

descriptions of new species of Ceratonereis,

Nephitys, and Goniada (Polychaeta). Proc. Biol,

Soc. Wash. 93, 1-49

Revision of the genus

Nereididae: Noto-

PFLUGFELDER, O, (1933) Landpolychaeten aus

Niederlandisch-Indien. Ergebniss des Sunda-Ex-

pedition der Notgemeinschaft der deutschen

Wissenschaft 1929-30. Zool. Anz. Leipziz 105,

65-76.

Reap, G. B. (1980) A new species of Nereis

(Polychaeta: Nereididae) from Wellington,

New Zealand, rock shores. J. R. Soc. N.Z. 10,

185-93,

Saviony, J. C. (1822) Systemes des Annélides

principalement de celles des cétes de Egypt et

de la Syrie offrant les caracters taut distinctifs

que naturelles des ordres families et genres,

avec la description des espéces. Description de

lEgypt. Histoire Naturelle, Paris, Panckouche,

vol. 1.

ScHMARDA, L. K, (1861) Neue wirbellose Thiere

beobachtet und gesammeli auf ciner Reise um

dic Erde 1853 bis 1857. Vol. 1. Rotatorien und

Anneliden. Leipzig. 164 pp.

SAENGER, P., STEPHENSON, W. & Mover ey, J.

(1980) The estuarine macrobenthos of the Cal-

liope River and Auckland Creek, Queensland.

Mem. Od Mus, 20, 143-61.

TREADWELL, A. L. (1926) A new_polychaetous

annelid from Kartabo, British Guiana, genus

Namaoanerets. Zoologica 7, 101-4.

Witiey, A, (1905) Report on the Polychaeta col-

lected by Professor Herdman, at Ceylon in

1902, Ceylon Pearl Oyster Fisheries, suppl. rep.

4, 243-324.

AUSTRALIAN AQUATIC HABITATS AND BIOTA: THEIR SUITABILITY

FOR PALAEOLIMNOLOGICAL INVESTIGATIONS

BY P. DE DECKKER

Summary

Australian aquatic habitats are classified briefly. The most suitable sites for palaeolimnological

work are crater lakes, which usually provide sequences covering short periods (<<100 000 years),

playas in large endorheic basins, and some mound springs with sequences covering long periods (>

100 000 years). Deep crater lakes, in which water remains even during the driest periods, should

provide the best palaeolimnological reconstructions since they have well defined enclosed drainage

areas, and appropriate hydrological budgets can be calculated. The playa lakes provide information

only for major climatic and hydrological changes.

AUSTRALIAN AQUATIC HABITATS AND BIOTA: THEIR SUITABILITY

FOR PALAEOLIMNOLOGICAL INVESTIGATIONS

hy P, Dr DeckkER*

Summary

De Decker, B. (1982) Australian aquatic nabitais and bioly: Uheir suitability for polreo-

limnological investigations, Trans. R. Sac. 8, Aust 106(3), (45-153, 30 November, 1982.

Australian aqualic habilaty are classified briefly, The most suitable sites for palacolimao-

logical work are crater lakes, which usually provule sequences covering shart periods

(<<100 000 years), playas in large encorheic basins, and some mound springs with sequences

covering long periods (>100000 years). Deep crater Inkes, in which Wuler remains even

during the driest periods, should provide the best palacolimnologieal records and be the most

Favourable sites tor palacoclimatological reconstructions since they have well defined enclosed

drainage aceas, and appropriate hydrological budgets can be calculated. The playa lukes pro-

vide information wily for major climatic and hydrological changes.

Elements of the aquatic biota which can be fossilised are reviewed. Ostracods and pollen,

fruits and spores of aquatic plants currently sre the most suitable ‘tools’ for palaeolimnological

studies in Australia. Increased value of insect remains and molluscs (mulnly gastropods)

requires improved documentation of their ecology, The Unsuitability of cladoceran. remains

and diatoms. is discussed briefly.

Kev Wonps: Palacolimnology, Australia, aquatic biota, lake typology.

Introduction

A classification of Australian aquatic habitats

is attempted in order to seck features which

characterize such habitats which favour the

formation of a waterbody or leaye it wh-

changed, and which alter its condition. The

classificution facilitates the location of sites

best suited to palaeolimnological investiga-

tion, Emphasis will be placed on waterbudics

unaffected by flowing waters since ifterest

centres on deposits formed under lacustrine

aqueous conditions, Which suffer little crosion

compared to fluviatile deposits. The latter are

not ignvred, because there are circumstances

Which permit the preservation of fuviatile

sediments,

The aquatic biota and their fossils which

can provide information on palaeacnviron-

menis are assessed for their utility in palaeo-

limnological work in Australia.

Aquatic habitats

All waterhodies exunmined are athalassic

sens Bayly (1967). Saline water referres! to

here has a salinity above 3% following Wil-

liams (1964) so contrasting with fresh water

(<3",), Permanent water is the term used to

define a waterbody which has not dried in

buman memory.

* Department of Biogeography & Geomurphology,

Australian National University. P,Q. Box 4,

Canberra, ACT 2600.

Hutchinson (1957) élassified all major types

of waterbodies ou the basis of their origin. The

information given On Water chemistry and

quality, and the fauna of the Various water-

bodies, is too diffuse to assist the present study,

Bayly & Williams (1973) — summarized

Hutchinson's (1957) classification and dis-

cussed the various processes causing the forma-

tion of lakes. Hardie ef al. (1978) discussed

the sediments of saline lakes and distinguished

(cf) major subenvironments. Their classifiea-

tion is broadened here to include fresh waters

and to discuss non-lncustrine waterbodies,

giving whenever possible additional informa-

tion on hydrological, chemical and biological

data.

The following classification relies on several

features of aquatic habitats (e.g. size, mode of

orvin, location, stability). It is arbilrary and

designed for palacolimnological studies.

Lentic environments

Large cloyed basins often with extensive

internal drainage area

There arc many large endorheic basins in

Australia, some extending to several hundred

km*. The deepest part of the basin is often

referred to as a playa (Reeves 1968, and

papers assembled in Neal 1975), Lake Eyre

is the best local example. Such playas occur

in tectonically controlled basins, whereas

others often lie in ancient drainage systems as

do many elongated lakes in Western Australia

146

(e.g. Like Moore—for further details. see van

de Graaf 27 wl. 1978).

Under the present climatic conditions. such

hosins do not retain permanent water although

there is evidence that permanent water

uveurrod in Lakes Byre and Prome?, Fither

the tate of precrpitulian and/or evaporation

have to be modified, or the supply of water

from tivers fuwing inta the basin his ta he

mouified, or the groundwater table has to rise

substantially above the lake floor to allow

retention of water far a long period,

During curly stages of lake filling, processes

of Mivial sedimentation aod partial erosion

openie. These are superseded by 9 lacustrine

phase. Finally, during an arid phase, formation

of asall erust, followed by efflorescence of salts

oecasronally rising to the surface, and deflation

processes can occur, Pedogenesis and penetra-

lion of sediments by roots of phreatophyies

can also occur, All these phenomena, associated

with an arid phase, can destroy the sedimen-

tological and fossil reeards (e.g. hy erosion.

dissolution, diagenesis), The palacolimpological

record of such basins is therefore likely to be

incomplete. Only major lacustrine phases with

permanent water conditions, resulting from

major climatic eVents and which extent over

a long period of time, are likely to he pre-

served, Ephemeral phases could also be pre-

served a! rapidly superseded by formation of a

solt crust. but then muny fossils are IWhkely to

suffer dissolution or diagenesis. Pollen studies

can be useful, as Singh (1981) hus shown for

a Holocene sequence obtained helaw a salt

erust at Lake Frome, Note that pollen studies

are rarely Informative on the history of a lake

unless pollen of aquatic plants are examined.

The greatest advantage of sequences Irom

large enclosed busing is that they cover lone

time spans since some basins are very old

(ae, fake George with a continuons record

estending tu the Miocene (Singh er al, 1981)

and Lake Eyre vielding lavustrine sediments

at least as old as Lower Miocene (Johns &

Lidbrook 1963).

Sediments will reflect (he elimatic-hydro-

logical conditions affecting such lakes ox

iustraied hy Wardie & Enoster (1970),

! Dedueed by the presence of the fossil tomiuninifer

Amniunia heeearit (indicative of permanent

waiter) in sediment of both lakes: L. Eyre (see

Cann & Dy Deckker (980) ond LL. Frome fromm

matenal received from A, Ro Tensen tsee Draped

& Senson (976).

P, DE DECKKER

Hardie ef a/, (1978). Bagster & Hardie (1978)

and Eugster (1980), Similarly, since the walter

chemistry controls the presenee of aquatic

orgainsis there, the fossils will be informative

on past hydrological reginies. This is further

discussed at the end of this paper.

Small cloved basins with minor internal

drainage arc

These small basing can be formed under a

vanely of circumstances, Some are defined as

inturdine corriders, or sabkhos. Others are

evaporation-deflation pans, some oeculring in

ancient drainage systems. Finally. some result

frem detlation From older luke lMoors, and

there are wssociated Iuneties Whose sediment

composition is dircetly controlled by hydro-

logical and climutie regimes: well sorted

quartz sand {is found in high rainfall areas and

a progression occurs from clay to gypsum as

uridity increases (Bowler 1976).

Sedimentological and palacontological re-

conls for environments such as lonette lakes

do not commonly extend over long periods

heeause they sre affected by phases of erosion

during parts of on glacial-interglacial cycle.

Duwing the sume eyele records af sabkhas are

usually destroyed when dunes migrate.

The small enelosed basins are likely to fill

up with water more frequently than the large

ones us their catchment areas are smaller. Por

both types of lakes, geographical location is

importants under today's climate, only the

lakes close to the coast are likely to fill lip

every vear_att least for a short period of time.

as Ihe periodicity of rainfall is Fairly constant

there (Gaffiey®), These likes yield a particular

faiina and flora which either require per-

muihent waler (e.g. same ostracods with murine

ancestry, fish, bivalve molluses) or which

cannot withstand long periods of desiccation

(e.2. amphipods, isopods, cyclapoids which

seek refive during drought). The lakes further

inland will yicld aw tess diverse fauna and

flora, und erosion of the fossil and sedimento-

fngieal records caused mainly by deflation pro-

cesses and efflorescence of salts and Clays,

will he extensive,

Geomorphological features associated with

these small lakes, such as lonertes, and their

“CGalfney, Do 0. (1978) Raintoll deficiency nnd

évaporation in relation fo drought in Avestralia.

Paper prepared for 46th Anzans Congress. Can-

berrit, L975 favwilable on request from Bureau of

Meleomlogy, Melbourne),

AUSTRALIAN AQUATIC HABITATS AND BIOTA 147

geographical position and sediment composi-

tion, will be of pulacoclimatological and hydro-

logical Significance (ee, for lunettes see

Bowler 1976). Fossils. however; will only be

useful Lo recognize permanent (often fresh)

Waler phases, as for other phases they are

likely to be destroyed or reworked at some

stuge.

Minor local climatic and hydrological

changes should he recorded in the small closed

basins in addition to the recional charges.

Coastal lakes

This type of waterbody igs mast often

formed by a barrier dune during changes of

sea levels, cither by closing an embayment

(e.g. Sleaford Mere on the Eyre Peninsula)

or by forming a barrier parallel to the coast

(e.g. Newlind Lake on the Eyre Peninsula).

These lakes are associated with features such

as barricr dunes which are important markers

of past sea level ehanves, In addition, changes

in sediment composition and waler chemustry

(dedueed from the fossil hieta) can provide

information an seq level fluctuation, since

Walter chemistry is alfected by the marine

freshwater groundwater interface, which in

turn is influenced by the position of sea level

i relation to the lake (see De Deckker er al.

L982 for more detail).

Sedimentation in the enclosed bays is un-

likely to coVer lofi time Spang ay barrier

dunes cao be destroyed casily during subse-

quent sea level changes. However, bsrricr

dunes which record sea level changes by

acereling to one another parallel to the coast

will helm preserve a mixture of marine and

lacustrine sediments covering long periods

(ey. the upper Cainozoic sequence near Robe

in southeast South Australia (Cook er al.

1977) with some part of it now submerged

(Sprizae 1979)).

In both types of coastal lakes the fossil biota

should be diverse (since water should always

be present) and will contain some murine

species which are either reworked, or which

survived after their introduction by birds of

other processes.

Selntion lakes

Such waterbodies, whether small or large

are found most commonly in caleareous

terrains. IF they ure deep, valuable palaeo-

limnological information may he tecarded ut

such sites, but tnfortunately this is not the

case in Australia, The disadvaiitage with solu-

tion Jakes is that as dissolution of the local

terrain usually occurs, disturbance of sedi-

ments by syndepositional folding and/or frull-

ing is common, On the other hand, as the

eXtent of lacustrine deposition and local terrain

dissolution in such environments is climatically

controlled, the sedimente and fossils are infor-

mulive On palaeoclimates.

Springs

OF interest are the springs which are

associated with mounds. The best known

examples in Austraha are the mound springs

alone the murgin of the Great Artesian Basin.

The springs there are related fo structural

features and are fed by artesian water (for

more detail sce Habermeh| 1980).

A number of springs are sites of travertine

deposition, bence the formation of mounds

(for deseription see Cobh 1975). In other

instances, water flow from the springs will he

sufficient, at times, ta inundate adjacent areas

and a swamp or shallow lake will form around

them (e.g. Pulbeena and Mowhray Swamps in

Tasmania discussed in De Deckker (1982a)),

Both types of springs can be successfully used

to reconstruct past hydrologigal regimes (seen

by changes of water flows and chemistries)-

As the mounds are often indurated, extrac-

tion of most fossils (except pollen) will be a

difficult task, On the other hand, if water

flow remained continuous through time,

mound springs should be ideal sites for palaco-

magnetic and isotope studies.

Crater lakes

Lakes ogeupying the inside of volcanic

craters, or craters formed by impact of exira-

terrestrial objects. are ocessionally very deep

in comparison with other lakes jp Australia.

These basins, which are rarely more than a

few kilonietres in diameter, haye a well defined

and small internal drainage, The mast

favourable lakes for palacalimnological work

are those in which the water retained has re-

sulted from the combination of precipitation

and evaporation over the crater, The deepest

Inkes often have steep flanks and should

retain Water throughout most climatic periods,

since the lake surface subject to evaporation

is greatly reduced compared to other lakes.

This remark applies to deep solution lakes as

well.

148

Among crater lakes, the most promising

location in Australia to carry out palacolim-

nological ‘work is Darwin Crater in W,

Tusmania formed by an impact of extra.

terrestrial material approximately 730,000

yeurs ago (for more detail sce Fudali & Ford

1979)_ Since its formation, it appears to hive

been the site of 4 continous sedimentation

(Colhoun & van de Geer, pers. comm.).

Glacial lakes

A variety of waterbodies is formed by glacial

action; Jakes in large glacial valleys, proglacial

lakes, inter-moraine lakes, cirque lakes and

thase formed by the melting of ice trapped in

sediment such ws kettle lakes. These features

are rare on the Australian mainland except

for sipall inter-moraine and cirque Jakes in

restricted areas of the Great Dividing Range.

The other types of lakes aré found in Tas-

mana, The palaeolimnological record of most

of these lakes will only cover short, inter-

glacial periods (except for the proglacial Jake)

and it ts most hkely that the lacustrine deposits

will have been croded away by ice scouring

the landscape during the following period of

glaciation, Addilionally, if preserved, the

stratigraphical record in these lakes is likely

to he incomplete and difficult to correlate.

Large Jakes formed in glacial valleys should

be most favourable sites for palaeolimnolagical

studies, since they are not always affected by

ice during subsequent glaciations. Additionally,

work carried Out on erustacean remains in

alpime lakex outside Australia (L6ffler 1975)

has already demonstrated the possibility of

detecting hroawd changes in lake stratification

caused by either climatological or anthro-

pogenic effects. Elsewhere, Lifer (1978)

demonstrated the potential palacohmnological

use of studying crustacean chitinous remains

collected in an inter-nmuraine lake in Ethiopia,

Paoly

Since pools are sntall and ephemeral, and

can be destroyed easily, they are of Tittle

direct palacolimnological use. Water chemistry

of such pools will be controlled by rain. local

soils composilion and local yeology. It is

important, however, to identify floristie and

fumistic elements characterisie of such en-

vironments in order to detect whether tem-

pariry pools were present in larger basins

during fairly dry periods, For example in the

Pulheena and Mowbray Swamp deposits in

P. DE DECKKER

Tasmania, no ostracods typical of temporary

pools, such as Bennelongia australis, have been

recovered which further confirms the concept

that water was nearly always permanent at

both sites (De Deckker 1982a)

Lotic environments

A number of waterbodies associated with

lotic environments cun be of some use in

palaeolimnological studies: these occur in

alluvial fans, stream flood plains, dry tiver

beds anid billabongs,

In general, lotic environments are less infor

mative than lentic ones to the palaeolimno-

logist since the sedimentary sequences in

which fossils could be preserved are few:

drastic changes of sedimentation often cause

extensive crosion, Gauthier (1928 1951)

pointed out that the erustacean fauna, for

example, is usually less diverse in pools

associated with lotic environments because

the occasional waters filling them are sediment-

rich Which rapidly bury crustaceans and theit

eggs. The palacontological recard is therefore

usually poor, Sedimentological and peomar

phological investigatrons for these enyiron-

ments, rather thaw palacontological ones. will

be more valuable to the palacoclimatologist.

Aahitaty in allevial fans and stream

floned plains

In alluvial fans and stream floodplaims,

sedimentary deposits can be extensive, Such

environments cover very large parts of Aus.

tralla (eg. the river channel country it

Queensland and a vumber of ulluvial fans in

the Flinders Ranges), and their past ‘active’

phases are significant In detecting past climatic

history. Unfortunately, there is litile fossil

material in these deposits for palacolimnno-

logical work.

Billabones

Billabongs, or ox-how lakes, can yield some

valuable sedimettological and biological in-

formation of refevance to past hydrological

phases of large rivers, but usually they do not

cover extended periods of time since they

are transitory due to the river's continuous

meandering. In addition, the sedimentological

and biological records can be eroded away or

reworked,

Biota

It is pertinent to determine which are the

fossils likely to occur in deposits and those

ATISTRALIAN AQUATIC

which provide best iformation on water types

and water regimes. A detailed assessment of

the use of remaing of animals found in

Quaternary lake and bog sediments was carries

out by Frey (1964) and this was summarized

und updated by Crsman (1978) who ermpha-

sized the information obtainable from clado-

cera and dipteran larval remains- This informa-

tion 1s briefly re-examined here in the Ausira-

lium content because there are nrany halobiort

aquatic orgabisms in Australia of value to

palacolimnoalogical work, but not dealt with hy

either Frey (1964) or Crisman (1978),

Rhizapoda

Tesis of rhizapods can be recovered from

sediments, Apurt trom the study of Cann &

De Deckker (1981) which relates to the use

of pon-marine Foraminifera for determining

Whether water in saline lakes was cither

permanent or ephemeral. there is no informa-

hon available on the ecological requirements

of freshwater rhizopods. Their use in palaco-

limnalagical studies in Ausiralin 1 therefore

unknown,

Roitilera

Information on the ecology and distribu-

tion af rotifers in Australian fentic waters is

sull required before a study of egg cases

which can fossilize can be undertaken, Tt also

remains to he demonstrated that rovfer eges

can fossilize adequately in all types of environ-

ments in Australia and elsewhere,

Porifera

Ketiuins of sponges can easily be recovered

from sediments and it is likely that these will

he of palacocologicval significance for [resh

waters, Although the taxonomy of sponges

is well known (Racek 1969), ecological siudies

are sult required hefore carrying oul palaeo-

limnological studies,

Crustacea

There are many studies on cladoceran te-

mains from many parts of the world hut none

deal with Australian deposits. Te is certain

that similar studies will prove to be of palaca-

limnological use in Australia for freshwater

deposits but ecological wark is still lacking.

Additionally, as there are only two clidoceran

species Daphniopsis pusilla and Moina man-

voliee Which inhabit saline Waters in Australia,

remains will nol he very informative in studies

of saline water deposits, Instead. other proups

PABITATS AND BIOTA 144

of organisms which are more diversitied in

saline Walters have to be considered since many

waterbodiex in Australia are, or were, saline

at some stige during their history. Ostracods.

for example, ave represented by a large pum-

ber of species in saline and fresh waters in

Australia (De Deckker 1981). Some species

have restricted ranges of salinity tolerance and

therefore are valuable in palaeosalinity recon-

structions, Since ostracads have a calene shell

they readily preserve as fossil. They occur in

most types of waters except in lotic habitats

where they are usually rare and their fauna

is much less diverse (except billabungs—see

Shicl 1976). Palacoenvironmental reconstruc-

tions using ostracods have already heen curried

out for a oumbher of waterbodies, ea. for i

large enclosed basin (De Deckker L982b),

mound springs (De Deekker !9820), maar

lakes (De Deckker’, in prep.) and disselution

lakes (De Deekker ec ef. 1982),

More details on the use of ostracods in

reconstructing past environments are provided

in De Deekker! and De BDeckker (in prep.),

Remains of conchostracans should be indi-

eative of temporary pool conditions as they

are typical inhabitants of such environments,

Only in one case have they been found in a

permanent lake (Lake Barrine, Queensland:

Timms 1979), However, as explamed. tem-

porary pools and their sedimentury reeords are

likely to be destroyed and therefore little

emphasis ought to be placed an them.

Fossils remains of aquatic decapods and

isopods have rarely heen recovered fram Jacus-

trine deposits, Thrs conld resull from the lack

of systematic search for them, #s remains af

the halobiant isopod Aaloniseur searlel have

been found on a number of occasions (De

Deckker', De Deckker er al. 1982)_ Since the

ecology of many species of these large erusta-

ceans is adequately known, their remains, if

able to be fossilized, could be valuable to the

pilacolimnologist especially for the study of

lotic habitats.

Mallusca

Gastropods can fossiiize and should he useful

in palacolimnological studies. but in Australia

the ecology of this graup is poorly known, As

gastropods are common inhabitants of a great

2 De Deckker, P. (1981) Taxonomy. ecology and

palucoecology of ostracads from Australian in-

lund waters. Ph.D. Thesis, University of Ade-

laide (unpublished),

150

variety of lotic environments and, as their

shells can often withstand the mechanical

abrasion so typical of lotic habitats, they

should be one of the most suitable fossil

groups for examining and interpreting the past

history of Such environments. Also, extensive

taxonomic and ecological work on the halobiont

gastropods (c.g. Coxiella) ts necessary before

fossils from saline environments can he

examined,

The bivalve molluscs, and their elochidia,

preserve under most conditions and should

be of use but, once again, ecological data are

lacking, As for the gastropods, hivalves

would be useful in studies of lotic environ-

ments because of their strong and solid shells,

Glochidia, however, are fragile and likely to

he ensily damaged,

Jaxeecta

Remams of many aquatic inscets can be

found in a variety of fossil deposits but more

data on taxonomy and ecology tor many

groups ure required to suit the palacalim-

nologist. Outside Australia, studies of the re-

mains of dipteran larvae (e.g. chironomids)

are common and have proved to We significant

in interpreting past lake histories, Ta Australia,

only the work of Paterson & Walker (1974)

on the distribution of two chironemid species

from a short core is avilable This sort of

investigation should prove to he rewarding

since there are a number of aquutic insects

which also inhabit spline waters (see Williams

1978. Table 3),

Vertebrata

As fishes are present in most permanent

agiwtc habitats, ther bones, if identified al the

specific Tevel, could he of palaenecalogical sig-

nificunee since fishes are one of the hest

studied Organisms in Australian waters, Tt is

not yet possible to determine species from

fossil jaws and otoliths alone. A number of

fishes are also Known to accur in saline waters

and their range of salinity tolerance js well

known (Chessman & Williams 1974), but

more anatomical dala is mecessary before they

hecome wv useful “toal in palacolinmolouy.

Orhers

The study of pollen need nol be discussed

singe tis wlility ts well documented and widely

used in palacoecology. Examination of aquatic

P, DE DECKKER

pollen and spores has. been carried out as part

of Studies of changes of terresiria! vegetation

wheie samples were tuken ju jacusirine sedi-

ments (cu. Yerdani 1969', Dodson 1974a,

74h. 1975. review of Kershaw's work in

Kershaw 1978, Singh ef af 1981 and Calhoun

eral in press), Since taxonomic and ceo.

logical knowledge of aqualic vegetation is

alreaily satisfactory fea, Aston (1973) for

SE Australia), the examination of pollen and

secds of aquatic plants and spores of aquatic

ferns, all being readily recovered from tacu-

sire sediments, can help tn the reeonstruction

of ihe history of waterhodics. This application

is often ignored by palynolagists who con-

centrate.on the history of terresirial vegetation

The detection of changes occurring in a lnke

through time would assist the interpretation of

the non-aquatic pollen sequenee reeording

changes of vegetution surrounding the lake.

Additionally, the palacoecological interpretation

from hoth aquatic ond non-aquatie pollen

Ought to be conmiplementary in palicoelimatic/

palacoenvironmental reconstructions. The

Nucluation of water level for the last 3 million

years at Lake George, illustrated by Singh er

al. (J981) using aquatic pollen and spores

and algal remains, produeed valuable data.

Study of the ceology of living charophytes

and of the morphology of their caleareous

oogonia is required before they can became

useful in palacolimnologicul studies. One

charophyte species, Lamprothaniniium pape

Jasuer is also Known to occur in saline waters

(Burne et al, 1980) and a review of the mor-

phological varieties of the oogonia occurring

under differing salinities might prove ta he of

significance in tracing palacosalinities,

Dintoms, on the other hand, which have

proved to be one of the best “tools! in palaeo-

limnology elsewhere feg, for African lakes

see Richardson 1968. Richardson er al. 1973.

Hecky & Kilham 1973, Gasse 1974a, 1974b)

are thought to he Jess imporfant since i

appears that diatom frustules do not preserve

well in sediments of a large nunber of aquatic

envirenments ip Australia (7. 1, Richardson,

pers, comin), The reason for dissolution of

the diatoms is at present being investigated

hy Richardson. Mowever diatom studies for

Yerdani, G. H, (1969) A study of the Quater-

nory vegetation of western Victoria. Ph.D,

Thesis, Monash Universiy Oinpublished),

AUSTRALIAN AQUATLO HABLIATS AND BIOTA 41

crater lakes in Vieloria! and by Tudor® have

shown that such palaeoenyironmental regon-

siruchons can be carried out successfully.

Discussion

Lanehein (1961) formulated a relationship

between annual precipitation, nrean anual

lemperature and annual runoff for closed

lakes. His work was developed further by 9

wumber of authors and is summarized by

Reeves (1968) to demonstrate the use of

hydro-climnatie study necessary to determine

palueoclimates. Recently Bowler (1981)

attempted ty classify present and past hydra-

logical regimes of major Australian lakes. He

showed the importance of the variaus hydra-

logical factors which control the extension of

lakes and the amount of water they yield, and

he defined » hydrological balance between

catchment and Jake area. Me also examined

climatic parameters such as evaporation atid

precipitation, and determined a hydrological

threshold whieh separates permanent ond

ephemeral lakes, Depending on climatic condi-

tions, the hydrological regime of w Take will

ecriainty fluctuate and, in some cases, cross

the hydrological threshold, To be able to dis-

linguish Changes of the relative position of a

lake iy relation to the hydrological threshold

is of great importance ih palacoclimalplogical

stiles: such changes can he identified by the

presence of organisms indicative of permanent

or ephemeral water conditions. Perhaps

Bowler's (1981) model should ulso recognize

the imporianee of the seasonality of rainfall

and, more appropriately, the periodicity of

rainfall on a long term basis as these have

some udditional effeets on the water budget of

lukes jn relation to evaporation, Tt is necessary

to recognize rainfall periodicity as this would

also surely have a controlling effect on the

refention of water in large basins such as Lake

Fyre, This is in direct relation to the position

of climatic belts, and these could he plotted

for the past iF the hydrological history of

lukes can be reconstructed.

The most favoaurshle location for trapping

sediments and fossils is the crater lake, For

the palacolimnologist, tf is an ideal site since

ity eutchment urea is well defined and the

* Tudor. E. B. (1973) Hydrologicul interpretations

of diatom assemblages in nwo Vietoriin Western

Nistrict crater lakes M Se. thesys, Liniversity of

Melbourne (Canpublished ).

precipilatwim-evupuration rao tan be esti-

maled adequately, Also tf the lake is deep

enough to remain moist even during the driest

periods, a Jong continuous. record can he

recovered

Large closed basins which are teetonically

controlled, and offen old geographical features.

generally have a less complete stratigraphic

record bit cin sometimes pravide very old

sequences, The determination of permanence

or ephemerality of the water they yield, and

the extent of their margins in relation to the

area of catchment, is very significant im palueo-

climatology. The smaller closed basins ate

usually not long lived compared to a glacial-

interglacial phase, but will be indicative of

partivular climatic events (eg. un arid climate

will cause the formation of gypsum lunettes),

Ollen they wndergo erosion and sometimes

even are completely destroyed during the [ol-

lowing glactal-interglacial cyele.

At present, ostracods are the organisms

hest suited for palacolimnological studies in

Australia since miny other potentially useful

groups need to he better documented,

especially for their taxanamy ond ecology.

With considerable information already avail-

able on aquatic vegetation, palaeohotanists

ought to be able to reconstruct lake histones

from remains of aqme Vegetation (Viz,

pollen, spores and seeds).

Gastropods and ipseet remains are likely to

he very useful environmental recorders as de-

monstrated in studies outside Australia, but

further local taxonomic and ecalogival work

iy flecessary. The study of Cladocera remains

in Australia is not as useful a tool compared

ta elsewhere since many Australian water-

bodies are, or have been, saline and therefore

unsuiable for tmost cladoceran taxa, Diatom

studies will not be as rewarding as elsewhere

since if appeurs that diatom frustules do not

preserve in most aquatic environments in

Australia,

Acknowledgments

The first draft of this paper was written

duirite the tequre of « Commonwealth Post-

eraduale Research Award under (he super-

vision of Professor W, BD. Williams in the

Department of Zoology, University of

Adelaide. His cansiructive criticism is appre-

ciated. G. van de Geer is thanked for pro-

viding a Valuable reference,

152

P. DE DECKKER

References

Asron, Hf (1973) “Aquatic plants of Austra-

a” (Melbourne University Press; Carlton.)

Bayiy, 1, A, EF, (1967) The general biological

classification of aquatic environments with spe-

cial reference to those of Australia, Ja A. H.

Weatherley (ed), “Australian Inland Waters

wnd Their Fauna: Eleven Studies." (AIN-U,

Press; Canberra.)

—— W& Wirvams, W. D. (1973) “Tolattid Waters

and Thelr Ecology”! (Longman; Melbourne. |

Row cre, J, M, (1976) Aridity in Australia: Age.

origins wad expression in aeolian landforms and

sediments. Barii-Set. Rev. 12, 279-310.

(1981) Anstralian salt lakes: a palacohydro-

logic approach. Hydrobivlovia 82, 431-44.

Burne, R. V., Baud, J, & De Deekkera, P.O) 980)

Saline Juke churophytes and their geological sig-

nificance, J, Sed. Prt, $0, 281-93.

Caxn, J, C, & De Deckker, P (1981) Fossil

Ouatersary and living foruminifera fram itha-

laxsic (non-marine) saline fakes, southert) Aus

irwia, J. Pal, $5, 660-70,

CHessMan, B.C, & Wrictiams, W, DB. (1974) Dis

tribution of fish in inland saline waters in Vic

farin, Austrlia. Anse 2. Mar. Freshwat. Res

28, 167-72. ;

Coss, M, A. (1975) Sampling and measurement

of mound springs, Grewt Artesian Basin, South

Australiu. Progress Report 2—Marree. Curdi-

mirko ond Billa Kalina Sheets. Dept. Mines

S.A. Rep. Book 75/90 Cunpubl.),

Cormoun, FE, A. VAN pe Gree. G, & Moor, W.G,

lin press) Pulbeena Swamp, North Western

Tusmania: stritigraphy, pollen analysis and

palacoclimatic interpretation, Guar, Res.

Cnok. P, J, Corwerit, J. A, Firman, J, B.. Tinie

say. JM, Sorweven, D, A. & von pF Borer,

C_c. (1977) The Late Cainozoic sequence of

south east South Australia and Pleistocene sea

ie changes. BWR J. Aus. Geol. Geophys. 2,

Crisman. T. L. (1878) Reconstrvciion of past

lacustrine envirorimenis hased on the remains of

aquatic Invertebrates, i Walker, D. & Guppy,

J, C. (eds.), “Biology and Quaternary Envyiron-

ments”, (Anstraliun Academy of Science: Can-

berra.)

Dr Deekxen, PL 11981) Ostracods of ythalasse

salt lakes: a review. Nydrobiolagia $1, 131-44

(1982a} Non-marine ostracods from two

Qoalernary profiles at Pulbeena and Mowbray

Swamps, Tasmania. Aleheringa 6, 249-74.

—— (1982b) Late Quaternary ostracods irom

Lake George, New South Wales. fhid, #. 305-18

(in prep,) The vse af non-marine osirncods

in reconstructing Quaternary environments.

. Bavib, J. & Burne, R. V. (1982) Pillie

Lake, Fyre Peninsula, South Australia: modern

environment and biota, dolomite sedimentation,

ae Holocene histary. Trans, RL Soc, 8S. Aus.

Dovson, J. R. (19740) Vegetation and climutic

history near Lake Keilambete. western Victoria.

Aust, J, Bor, 22, 709-17

—— (19746) Vegetation history and water fue

jualions al Lotke Leake, south-euslern South

Australin §. 10 000 BP to present, fbid. 22, 719+

——- (1975) Vegetation history and water Shuctua-

tions at Lake Leake. south-eastern Sonth Aus

tralia 11, 50.000 to 10000 BP. fbil. 23, (88-231,

Drarer, | 1, & Jensen, A. R, (1970) The geo

chemistry of Lake Protme, a playa lake mm South

aiusttali. BME I Aust, Geal. Geophys. 1, 93-

Euestrr, He PR. (1980) Geochemistry of eva

peritic lacustrine depasits. dn, Rev. Earvi

Planer Sel. &, 35-63,

Frey, D. G. (1964) Remains of anumals in Qua-

tennary lake and boy sediments and their inter-

Bepmiane, Arch. Hydrobial. Efpeline Linnell. 2.

(dla.

Fuoats, &. F, & Foro, R. J, (1979) Darwin glass

vod Darwin Crofer; # proeress report. Merrari

ties LA, 183-96.

Gasser F, (19745) Les distomées des sedimenrs

holocénes dui bassin du Lac Afrera (Gurlett)

(Afar Scptentrianal, Ethiapie), Essai de recon

struelinn we Vévolution de inifiew. far Rev

ges, Hydrobiol, 59, 95-122,

(19746) Les diatamées Nalocénes du bassin

inféricur de Aguache (Depression de Danakil,

Kthiopic), Leur signification paléoéeologique.

thid, 89, (23-46.

Gauriter, H, (1928) “Recherche sur la faune des

enus continentnles de VAlgerie et de la Tun

sie”. (Minerva: Alger.)

(1951) "Contribution &@ 1 erude do Ja faune

des eaux douces al) Sénégal (Entomostracés),

(Minerva; Alger.)

Hsnenment, M. A, (1980) The Great Arlesian

Basin, Australia, BIR J Ant. Geol. Geophwy.

5, 9-38.

Harom, T. A. & Bocsren, H, P, (1970) The evo-

lution of closed basin brines. Spee. Pap. Miner

Soc, Am. 3, 779-90.

~e—, Smoor, J. PB, & Eticster, HF (1978)

Saline lnkes and their deposits: a sevimente-

logical approach, f/f, 3, 7-41,

Hucky. R- FL & Kittam, P. (1973) Diatoms in

alkaline. saline lakes; ecolagy and geochemical

implication. Limnal. Orcaan, VW. 53-71,

Hurcumson, G BF. (1957) “A Treatise on Tim-

nology”, Vol. I. (John Wiley & Sons: New

York.)

founs, R. K. & Tuneroox, N. A. (1963) Inves:

tigation of Lake Fyre, Rep, fivese, Geol, Siv

S. Aust. 24, (+104.

Kresiaw, A. P. (1978) Record of last inlerglacial-

placial cycle from north-eastern Queensland.

Nature (London) 2TZ 159-61.

Lancuwbin, Wo BD. (1861) Sulinity and hydrology

of gloved Jakes. U8 Geal. Surv, Pref. Pap, 412,

b20.

Loretee, H, (1975) The onset. of meramictic con

ditions jn alpine lakes, R. Soc, N.Z. Bull, 13,

21-14,

—— (1978) Limnoluvical and paloolimnological

data on the Role Mountiin lakes (Fihiopia)-

Verlr, Internat, Verein, Lininol, 20, 1131-8,

Neat, 3, T, (ed,) (1975) “Playas and drial lakes

—wvoeccurrence and development’. (Dowden,

Hutehinson and Ross, Inc.; Stroudsberg.)

AUSTRALIAN AQUATIC HABITATS AND BIOTA 153

Paterson, C. G. & WALKER, K, F. (1974) Recent

history of Tanytarsus barbitarsis Freeman (Dip-

tera: Chironomidae) in the sediments of a shal-

low, saline lake. Aust, J. Mar. Freshwat. Res.

25, 314-25.

RaceK, A. A, (1969) The freshwater sponges of

ro ea (Porifera: Spongillidae). Ibid. 20,

7-310.

Reeves, C. C. (1968) “Introduction to palaeolim-

nology”. Developments in Sedimentology 11.

(Elsevier: Amsterdam.)

Ricuarpson, J, L. (1968) Diatoms and Jake typo-

logy in East and Central Africa. Jnt. Revue ges.

Hydrobiol, 53, 299-338,

——, Harvey, T. J. & Horpsur, S. A. (1978)

Diatom in the history of shallow East African

lakes. Pol. Arch. Hydrobiol. 25, 341-53.

SHIEL, R. J. (1976) Associations of Entomostraca

with weedbed habitats in a billabong of the

Goulbourn River. Aust. J. Mar. Freshwat. Res.

27, 533-49.

Sincu, G. (1981) Late Quaternary pollen records

and seasonal palaeoclimates of Lake Frome,

South Australia. Hydrobiologia 82, 419-30.

, OppyKE, N. D. & Bow er, J. M. (1981)

Late Cainozoic stratigraphy, palaeomagnetic

chronology and vegetational history from Lake

George, Australia. J. Geol. Soc. Aust. 28, 435-

§2

Spricc, R. (1979) Stranded and submerged sea-

beach systems of southeast South Australia and

the aeolian desert cycle. Sedim. Geol, 22, 53-96.

Timms, B. V. (1979) The benthos of some lakes

in north eastern Queensland. Proc. R. Soc. Qld.

90, 57-64.

VAN DE GRAAF, W. J. E., Crowe, R, W, A.,

Buntine, J, A. & Jackson, M. J. (1978) Relict

Early Cainozoic drainages in arid Western Aus-

tralia. Z. Geomorph. NF 21, 379-400.

WiiiiaMs, W. D. (1964) A contribution to the

lake typology in Victoria, Australia. Verh. Inter-

nat. Verein. Limnol, 15, 158-68,

(1978) Limnology of Victorian salt lakes,

Australia. Jbid. 20, 1165-74.

A NEW SPECIES OF GEHYRA (REPTILIA: GEKKONIDAE) FROM

CENTRAL AUSTRALIA

BY MAX KING

Summary

A species of Gehyra found on isolated rock outcrops in the central Northern Territory is here

described as Gehyra minuta sp. nov. Details are provided on the species chromosome morphology.

A NEW SPECIES OF GEHYRA (REPTILIA; GEKKONIDAE) FROM

CENTRAL AUSTRALIA

by MAX King*

Summary

Kine, M.. (1982) A new species of Geliyra (Reptilia; Gekkonidae) from Central Australia,

Tring, R. Soe, S, Aust. W6(4), 155-158, 30 November, 1982.

A species of Gelyra found on isolated rock ouicrops in the central Northern Territory ts

here described as Gehyra minuta sp. nov, Details are provided on the species chromosome

morphology.

Kry Wonns:. Reptilia, Gekkonidae, Gelyra 0 sp, chromosome morphology,

Introduction

The gckkonid genus Gehyra is one of the

more taxonomically confusing entities of the

Australian herpetofauna, Several new species

have been deseribed recently and others rede-

fined or synonymised. Thus, the current. list in-

cludes Gehyra australis Gray 1845, G, varte-

eata (Duméril & Bibron 1836), G, baliola

(Duméril 1851), G. punetate Fry 1914, G.

pilbara Mitchell 1965, G. nana Store 1978,

G. xenepus Storr 1978, G, catenata Low 1978,

G. pamela King 1982, G, montium Storr 1982

and G, purpurascens Storr 1982. Storr ( (982)

also synonymised G. fenestra Mitchel] 1965,

with G, puncraty, redefining the latter species

and restricting its distribution to the central

west of Western Australia,

Kuryotypic studies on Geliyra and a number

of other species (King 1979, 1982, in press)

have shown that some species eg, G. nana, G,

pamela, G. purpurascens, G. catenata and G.

pilhara are chromosomally monomorphic in

that each consists of a single chromosome race,

Other forms, such as G. variegaia, G. punctata

(sensu Mitchell 1965) and G. australis, are

each made up of a number of chromosome

races. Closer morphological examination by

this author reveals that these species are in

fact species complexes and these are now

under taxonomic revision

Gehyra montium Store (1982) is distri-

buted in central and Western Australia. How-

ever, on the basis of distribution and mor-

phology this morphologically variable species

appears likely to include specimens having

3H 38, 2n = 44 and certain animals from

the Warburton Ranges, W.A. with 2n 42

chromosomes (King 1979, unpubl), It is

Department of Popniation Bioloxy, Research

School of Biological Sciences. Australian

National University, P.O. Box 475, Canberra

City, A.C.T, 2601.

probable that G. montium also is a coniposite

species.

The present paper describes 9 tiny Gehkyra

species Found in a small area on the south:

westera periphery of the Barkly tablelands in

central Northern ‘Territory.

Materials and Methods

Fifteen adult specimens were colleefed; of

these |] were analysed chromosomally using

techniques deseribed by King & Rofe (19746)

and King (1979), Additional immature speci-

mens were also karyotyped, but these were not

examined morphologically. Measurements

were made nosing micrometer adjusted callipers

and a steel rule, Specimens are lodged im the

Australian Museum (AM) and the Northern

Territory Museum (NTM),

Gehyra minuta sp, nov

FIGS J, 2

Holawpe; NT R9OSTA: Ao adull mule col-

fected 17,Vi.1973 by M. King, 78.5 km S. of

Renner Springs. Northern Territory.

Paratypes; NTM R9879-82, Three adult males

and one female collected with the holotype.

NTM R9883—-86: Two adult mules and two

adult females collected 17.vi.1973 by M. King

17.9 km N of Renner Springs. AM R16304—

7; Three adult females and one adult male

collected 17.v.1980 by D. Metealfe and R

Brown 5 km E of Barry Caves, AM16313-14:

Same localily and collected on 18.v.1980.

Diaenasis; A amall dorso-ventrally compressed

tock dwelling gecko with a distinetive short

snout and large eye (Fig. 1). This species is

distinguished from other Gelivra by tis small

size (sexually mature adulis were no larger

than 45.5 mm SVL). G, nmi/neta differs from

G. nana and G. maniium by the rostral shape,

which is oblong and flat or slightly sloped in

156 M. KING

| Se |

Fig. 1. Two specimens of G. minuta collected near Barry Caves, N.T., showing the variation in back

pattern. Bar scale = 10 mm.

these species, but deep and sharply gabled in

G. minuta, It is also distinguished from G.

montium by the postmental scales making

contact with the second infralabials in many

specimens. The background colouration in the

back pattern of G. minuta is orange-brown,

whereas, it is grey-brown in G. variegata and

pinkish-grey in G. nana.

Description of Holotype: Head 8.3 mm wide,

5.2 mm deep and 9.0 mm from tip to snout

to anterior margin of ear opening. Snout 3.7

mm long from tip to rostral scale to anterior

margin of orbit. Eye large (2.3 mm diameter),

snout short and steeply angled (Fig. 2A, B).

Nostrils separated by two large internasals and

surrounded by rostral, internasal, two posterior

nasals and first supralabial. Rostral scale deep

and top acutely gabled. Median groove ex-

tends for 1/3 of scale depth from apex of

gable (Fig. 2e). Seven supralabials and seven

infralabials on each side of mouth. The two

anterior infralabials larger than following five

infralabials; second infralabial always notched

on posterior ventral edge, a row of small

sublabial scales starting at this point (Fig.

2d). 26 interorbital scales. Mental scale longer

than wide coming to a point, extends between

postmentals which are rounded and in contact

with second infralabials (Fig. 2b).

Snout-vent length (SVL) 38.5 mm, tail

length 32 mm, tail broken and regenerated.

One hundred and sixteen rows of scales around

body, Dorsal scales round and granular while

ventral scales flatter and larger. Limbs rela-

tively short. Toes five, strongly dilated; six

subdigital lamellae on dilated section of fourth

toe. Subdigital lamellae subdivided by median

groove. Twelve preanal pores in chevron for-

mation with anterior apex. Six postanal

tubercles,

Background colouration of dorsal pattern

light orange brown. Head has two dark brown

eyestripes. Face and dorsal surface of body,

tail and legs covered by small dark brown

spots, some joined to form bands. Cream

spots interspersed between darker spots on

head and body. Undersurface of head and

body cream.

NEW SPECIES OF GEHYRA

157

Fig. 2. Morphological characteristics of G. minuta. A. Side view of the head showing large eye and

very short, oblique snout.

males.

B. Ventral view of the chin shield showing the long pointed mental scale.

The rounded post mental scales are in contact with second infralabial scale.

D. Diagrammatic representation of infralabial scales. Second infralabial is notched. EK. Dia-

C. Preanal pores in

grammatic representation of nasal area showing large rounded internasals and relatively deep rostral

scale with sharply gabled dorsal surface.

TaBLe 1. Summary of the morphometric and

meristic characters of Gehyra minuta.

Character xX

5 36.4-45.5 15

Snout-vent length (mm)

Tail length (mm) — 0-50.0 15

Head depth (mm) 4.9 4.35.7 15

Head length (mm) 9.2 8.7-10.6 15

Head width (mm) 78 7.0-9.0 15

Snout length (mm) 3.9 3,4-4.5 15

Preanal pores 10.9 9-13 9

Postanal tubercles 2.3 1-3 9

Subdigital lamellae 7 6-8 15

Midbody scales 108.5 96-126 15

Interorbital scales 28.1 23-31 15

Supralabial scales 7.9 7-9 15

Infralabial scales 7.3 6-8 15

Variation: Variation in characters measured

or counted in the 15 specimens is summarized

in Table 1. Considerable variation in the back

pattern occurs, ranging from a simple orange

brown dorsal coloration to a strongly marked

pattern with bands of dark brown to black

spots coalescing to form dorsal bars. Bands

of light cream spots occur between the darker

bars and are separated from them by the

orange background. The specimens shown in

Fig. 1 were captured at the same locality, and

show the extremes of pattern variation, de-

monstrating that this is not a good diagnostic

feature.

In seven of the specimens the postmental

scales are in direct contact with the second

infralabial scale, whereas the others do not

show such contact (Fig. 2b). Two specimens

also had a very small third internasal scale

between the two very large internasals. The

subdigital lamellae were divided in all cases,

and six to eight of these lamellae were present

in the dilated portion of the fourth hind toe.

Distribution and Habitat: All animals were

collected under rock exfoliations, or blocks, in

minor rock outcrops confined to a narrow band

of red soil country on the southwestern peri-

phery of the Barkly Tablelands, Northern

Territory, Rock outcrops further north were

inhabited by G. nana, whereas, those to the

south were inhabited by a series of genetically

distinct forms of the G. variegata-punctata

complex (i.e. 2n = 38, 2n = 40A and 2n

= 44 chromosome races; King 1979). G.

montium Storr is also recorded from this area.

Chromosomes; All specimens of G. minuta

karyotyped had 2n = 42 chromosomes. This

158 M. KING

complement is most similar to that of G. punc-

tata (sensu Storr 1982) and the karyotype is

shown in King (1979). Indeed, in this publi-

cation photographs of G. punctata and G,

minuta (at that time still included with G.

punctata sensu Mitchell, 1965) were included

to show the degree of morphological diver-

gence possible within one chromosome race.

It was argued that these morphologically

unique forms had speciated allopatrically since

the initial divergence of the 2n = 42 chromo-

some race, thus still retaining their ancestral

karyomorph. The two forms obviously had

diverged to a species level with G. punctata

reaching a SVL of 65 mm whereas G. minuta

is no longer than 45,5 mm.

Etymology: The name minuta is derived from

the Latin minutus = small.

Acknowledgements

The author is most grateful to Pamela King

for her help and encouragement.

References

Kina, M. (1979) Karyotypic evolution in Gehyra

(Gekkonidae: Reptilia). I. The Gehyra_varie-

gata-punctata complex. Aust. J. Zool. 27, 373-

43.

—— (1982) Karyotypic evolution in Gehyra

Gekkonidae: Reptilia). TI. A new species from

the Alligator Rivers Region in Northern Aus-

tralia. Ibid. 30, 93-101.

(in press) Karyotypic evolution in Gehyra

(Gekkonidae: Reptilia). Il. The Gehyra aus-

tralis complex. Ibid.

& Rofe, R. (1976) Karyotypic variation in

the Australian Gekko Phyllodactylus marmora-

tus (Gray) (Gekkonidae: Reptilia). Chromo-

soma (Berl.) 54, 75-87.

MircHetL, F. J, (1965) Australian Geckos as-

signed to the genus Gehyra Gray (Reptilia:

Gekkonidae). Senck. Biol. 46, 287-319.

Srorr, G. M. (1982) Two new Gehyra (Lacer-

tilia: Gekkonidae) from Australia. Rec. W.

Aust. Mus.

A STABLE BOUNDARY BETWEEN TWO SPECIES OF REPTILE TICKS

ON EYRE PENINSULA, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY T. N. PETNEY, C. M. BULL & R. H. ANDREWS

Summary

The distribution of the reptile ticks, Aponomma hydrosauri and Amblyomma albolimbatum were

mapped where their distributions contact near Cleve on Eyre Peninsula, South Australia. There is an

area, 60 x 35 km, where the distribution of Ap. Hydrosauri is surrounded by Amb. Albolimbatum.

At the edge of this area there is abrupt transition from hosts carrying only one species, to hosts

carrying only the other species. The boundary does not coincide with any obvious ecotone.

A STABLE BOUNDARY BETWEEN TWO SPECIES OF REPTILE TICKS

ON EYRE PENINSULA, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

by T, N. PetNeyy*, C. M, Butny & R, H. ANoRewst

Summary

Prinrny, T. N,, Butt, C. Mo & Anorews, R, H, (1982) A stable boundary between twa

species of reptile ticks on Eyre Peninsula, South Australia. Trans. R. Soc. S Aus Weld),

159-161,.30 November, | 982,

The distribution of the reptile ticks Aponomma hydrosauri aad Amblyorma_alhatim-

hatum were mapped where their distributions contact near Cleve on Fyre Peninsula. South

Australia. There is an area, 60 % 33 km, where the distribution of Ap. Aydroxauri is

sureounded by Amb, albolimbatum, At the edge of this area there is abrupt Iransition from

hosts carrying only one species, to hosts carrying only (he other specics The boundury does

not coincide with any obvious ecatone.

Distribution records from before 1970 are remarkably similar, indicating the current

stability of the boundary.

Key Worps; reptile ticks, parapatry, stable boundary. Eyre Peninsula,

Introduction

At parapatrie boundaries, the distributions of

iwo ullopatric species abut with little or no

overlap, [Tt is not always clear what prevents

more extensive range overlap (Bull, Sharrad

& Petney 1981, Bull & King 1981), but some

interaction between the species is often in-

voked,

The nature of a parapatiic interaction can

be inferred from temporal changes of the

houndary. A boundary where the overlap

width increases over fime suggests a recent

contact of ranges where overlap will become

extensive as dispersal progresses. A houndary

where position chanves with time suggests the

competitive displacement of one species by

the other. Where neither position nor width of

a boundary change with time there must be a

stable reversal of the relative fitness of the two

species at the boundary.

One of the parapatric betndarics in reptile

ticks, Which were first reported by Smyth

(1973), is between the southwestern species

Amblyomma albolimbatum and the south-

custerm species Aponomma hydrosauri where

their runges contact on Eyre Peninsula. Smyth

used data from 46 reptile bosts caught before

1970 (Sharrad, pers, comm.) in the Cleve-

Cowell area. We present data from surveys in

the same region in 1979 and 198) which indi-

cate that the boundary there has remained

stable over more than 11 years.

pam anic dire in eee oe dee ee eee ee

+§chool of Biological Sciences, Flinders Uni-

versity of South Australia, Bedford Park, 5S.

Aust, 5042. f

* Present address: Department of Biology, Yar-

mouk University, Irbid, Jordan.

Materials and Methods

The two fick species, Amt, albolinrbatum

and Ap. hydrosauri infest latge reptiles, and

most commonly the lizard Traehydovanris

rugosux (Smyth 1973, Bull et al, 1981). In the

areca shown in Figure 1. 40 T. rugosus were

collected in October 1979, and L74 T. rugosus

and sis Tiliqua occiplralis in October 1981. All

but 19 7. rugovus and one T. acelpitalis were

infested with either 4imb. albolimbarum or Ap.

hydrosauri. Adult ticks were identified in the

field using the characters described by Roberts

(1970), Larvae and nymphs were detached for

identification in the laboratory.

Results

The distributions in the study arca of the

tick species Adib. dlholimhatum and Ap.

hydroasauri are shown im Figure 1. There is an

isolated urea of Ap. hvdrosauri of approxi-

mately 60 km % 35 km which is centred

around the Cleve highlands and which is al-

mast surrounded by Amb, albelimbaram.

There is little or no overlap between the jwo

species to the west, northwest and northeast.

Qn road transeets across these edges of the

distribution of Ap. hvdrosauri. there is a com-

plete change from hosts with only one species,

to hosts with only the other species, within 2-7

km. Immediately to the north there have heen

no host records in this survey or Smyth's sur-

vey, bul Anh. albolimbatum is found atone

further north (Smyth 1973).

To the south of the Cleve highlands a nar-

Tow tongue (20-25 km wide) of the distribu-

fion of Amb. albolimbatum isolates 4p. hydro-

160

T. N. PETNEY, C. M. BULL & R. H. ANDREWS

Amb alpolimbotum

Ap. hydrosquri

Neither spernies

Both species

Fig. 1. Distribution of Aponomma hydrosauri and Amblyomma albolimbatum in the study area. Each

host record is indicated by a symbol, but in some cases two hosts found together with the same

tick species attached have only one symbol,

sauri populations near Cleve from those in its

main distribution, which includes all of the

southern part of Eyre Peninsula (Smyth

1973). The interspecific overlap is greatest at

the edges of this tongue. For instance on the

road trom Pt Neill to Rudell, hosts with both

species attached were found over 10 km.

Ap. hydresauri in the Cleve highlands occu-

pies woodland and open scrub characterized

by Enealypts socialis and E. gracilis, while

Amb, albolimbatum in the surrounding low-

lands lives in coastal dune vegetation or open

scrub characterized by E. incrassata and Mela-

leuca uncinata (Specht 1972). However, the

sharp boundaries between distributions of the

ticks are not associated with distinct vegeta-

tional ecotones or consistent altitudinal

changes (Figure 1).

Discussion

There is a remarkable consistency between

the results of this survey and that of Smyth

over Il years before. In both there wus a

sharp transition from Ap. hydrosauri to Amb.

albolimbatum between 7,5 and 10 km west of

Cleve. In Smyth’s survey there was an overlap

region 20—24 km north of Cleve, while in this

survey it was 23-28 km north, In both surveys

there was a tongue of Amd, albolimbatum

south of Cleve, with some overlap between the

species at 10 km north and at 10-15 km west

of Arno Bay.

Smyth showed two host records with only

Ap. hydrosauri, in a coastal site 17 km south-

west of Cowell, but in the present survey Amb.

albolimbatum was found continuously along

the coast from Arno Bay to Cowell, This may

STABLE BOUNDARY BETWEEN REPTILE TICKS 161

represent a range extension of inh. alholini

batum, but because Smyth had no other

records in this area a precise comparison can-

not be made. Otherwise the position and widih

af the Amb, albolimbatum distribution tongue,

and the extent of interspecific overlap, is com-

mon m the two surveys.

Wherever there is contact between the dis-

tributions of any pair of the three species of

ticks, Ap. hydresauri, Amb, albolimbatum and

Amh. limbaiunt they form parapatrie boun-

daries (Smyth 1973, Sharrad & King |981,

Bull & King 1981), At two houndaries (Mt

Mary, Bull et al. (1981) and Cleve-Cowell,

this paper) we now have evidence that the

structure of the boundary has been stahle over

at least 11 years.

Ap. hydrosaury has at. least one generation

per year (Bull & Sharrad 1980), and Armbh,

albolintbatum probably is similar’. Bull (1978)

estimated that these licks disperse 100-800 m

per generation, mainly by movement of their

hosts, In 11 years an advancing front of ticks

could move nearly 9 km, In the study arca

there is little evidence for any move at all,

Slight differences between surveys in the ésti-

mated location and width of a boundary would

result from the capture of hosts in different

locations, ever When the boundary itsell does

not change. Despite this potential sampling

error there is a great simularity between the

results of the two surveys.

In each survey there was an abrupt transi-

tion between the species at the western and

northwestern edges of the Cleve highlands,

and a wider overlap to the south of Cleve, but

there is no clear environmental change asso-

ciated with the boundary. In this respect this

tick boundary differs from that near Mt Mary

where there is a sharp ecotonal change asso-

ciated with the boundary (Bull et al. 1981),

However, the stability of the boundary on

Fyre Peninsula suggests that there if some

interaction between the species where each is

filler On its own side, We have ifivestigated a

number of mechanisms to explain how the tick

boundaries are maintained (Bull ct al. 1981,

Andrews & Petney 1981, Andrews, Petney &

Bull 1981), but na convincing explanation is

yet available.

Acknowledgments

We thank R, D. Sharrad lor uselul advice.

Field trip funding came from the Flinders

University Research Budget. K. White typed

the manuscript,

References

Anbrews, R. H. & Perwey, T. N. (1981) Com-

petihon tor sites of ulfachment to hosts in three

Parapalric species of reptile ticks, Oecologia 51,

227-32.

—~, = & Butt, C. M, (1982) Reproductive

interference between three parupalic species of

reptile tick. 7hid, 52, 281-86,

Teptile tick Aponomma hydrosauri by host

movement. dust, J. Zool, 26, 689-97,

& King, DR, (1981) A parapatric boundary

between two species of reptile ticks in the

Albany area, Western Australia. Trans, R, Soc

S§. Aust. 105, 205-08.

—— & SwHarrsn, BR, BD, (1980) Seasonal activity

of the reptile tick, Apanomniua livedrasauri

(Denny) (Acari: Txedidue) in experimental

enclosures, J atusr. Bar, Soe, 19, 47-82.

—, & Parsey, T. N. C1981) Paraparric

boundaries between Australian reptile ticks,

Prov. Ecal, Soc, Angst. 1, 95-L07.

Rogperts. F. H. §, (1970) Australian Ticks.

(C.S,1,R.0., Melbourne, }

Starsab, KR, D, & Kina, D. R. (1981) The geo-

graphical distribution of reptile ticks in Western

Australia. Aust. J. Zool. 29, 861-73.

Smyti, M, (1973) The distribution of three spe-

ces of reptile licks, Apenemma hydrosanri

(Denny), Amblyomma albolimbatum Neumann.

und Amb. fimbetum Neumann. (. Distribution

and hosts. Jhid, 28, 91-10).

Sreovr, R. L. (1972) "The Vevetution of South

Australia’, (2nd Edn.) (Government Printer:

Adelaide.)

'Sharrad, R, D, (1980). Studies of the factors

Which determine the distributions of three species

of South Australian Ucks, Ph.D. {hesis, Uni-

versity of Adelaide (unpublished).

FURTHER EVIDENCE ON THE AGE OF THE TUFF AT MT GAMBIER,

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY G. BLACKBURN, G. B. ALLISON & F. W. J. LEANEY

Summary

Radiocarbon ages for 11 samples of charcoal collected either below tuff or below ash-affected soils

in the vicinity of Mt Gambier are reported. These range in age from modern to 8000 years B.P. The

ages are interpreted to infer that significant volcanism occurred 4000-4300 years B.P.

FURTHER EVIDENCE ON THE AGE OF TUFF AT MT GAMBIER,

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

by G, Brackpurn*, G. B. ALLIsON* & F. W. J. LEANEY*

Summary

Brackraurn, G., Ainison, G, B. & Leangy, F. W. J.

S. Aust, 106(4),

tuiT at Mt Gambier. Trans, R. Soe,

(1982) Further evidence on the uge of

(63-167, 30 November, 1982,

Radiocarbon ages for 1! samples of charcoal collected either below tuff or below ash.

affected soils in the vicinity of Mt Gambier are reported. These range in age from modern to

8000 years B.P, The ages are interpreted to infer that ceniticaps volcanism occurred 4000-

4300 years B.P.

Key Worps. radiocarbon age, charcoal, pialeosal, volcanic ash,

Introduction

The Mt Gumbier complex presents possibly

the most recent evidence of yolcanism in

southern Australia, Interest in the age of its

volvanic deposits has been sustained by occa-

sional input concerning the local geology, soils,

and even aboriginal legends. The uncertainty

about the time elapsed since the last voleanic

activity has raised conjecture as to its possible

renewal,

Sheard’s (1978) stratigraphic observations

indicate two main periods of voleanic activity,

the latter one being the more violent, He

considered that these events could be identi-

fied with the two aves then established radio-

metrically for charcoal buried beneath the tuff.

For one sample (Gill 1955), an age of 4800

years B.P. was determined by Fergusson &

Rafter (1957): the other (Blackburn 1966)

was given as 1400 years B.P. by Kigoshi &

Kobayashi (1966),

The ioterval between the eruptive periods

was judged by Barbetti & Sheard (1981) as

relatively brief—possibly less than a century

—but no less than two years. On the other

hand, they were unable to place the time of

the events precisely but concluded that it was

no earlier (han very late Pleistocene. Barton

& McEthinny (1980) found that no voleanic

episodes had occured at Mt Gambier in the

past 5000 ta 6000 years.

The purpose of this note is to report and

interpret radiometric uges for a further 11

aamples of charcoal collected from 1945 to

1969 jn the sandy paleosols covered by vol-

catie ush near Mt Gambier,

* CSIRO Division of Soils, Private Bag No. 2,

Glen Osmond, &, Aust, 5064,

The relationship between samples and

volcanic ash deposits

‘Lo determine the limit of the area around

Mt Gambier covered with observable tuff, the

criterion used by Sheard (1978) was ‘the

extent of volcanic material that can be dif-

ferentiated from soil and Pleistocene sands

with the naked eye’, This area extends no

further than 5 km from the Blue Lake, Beyond

this zone, delineated by Sheard and designated

A in Figure 1, is another area (B) Where

deposits of volcanic ash are sufficient to modify

the soil (Hutton ef al. 1959), though there

Seale

—

Milorruednts

Fig, 1. Locations for |} charcoal samples in rela-

tion to zone A, with observable tuff, and zone

B, the outer zone of volcanic influence. at Mt

Gambier

164

is generally no demonstrable layer of stratified

ash. ‘This area—the outer zone of voleante in-

fluence—has a fairly distinet boundury at the

north, cast, and west, but the southern edge

is indistinct, probably because of overlap wilh

ash distributed from Mt Schank, 14 km to the

south.

Beneath the tuff and ash-affeeted soils in the

two designated areas, there are soils of typos

similar to those at greater distance from Mt

Gambier, Buried charcoal is particularly can-

spicuous in freshly exposed light grey or yellow

sands of the buried podzol A horizons, These

buried soils are as yet known only from ex-

posures more than 1.5 km from Blue Lake,

due to the greater overburden of tuff in its

immediate vicity,

The 11 samples of charcoal used for carbon-

14 analysis were all found, principally in road

cuttings. below volcanic material which varied

in thickness and induration, Four of the

samples were taken in areca A below stratified

tuff; seven came from the outer area (B)

where whal appear to be dressings of voleanic

ash are generally indistinguishable from soil

but differ in texture and colour from. the pod-

zols of the district, Details of the samples

are given in Table 1.

Analysis

Soil material, mainty sand, was removed by

sieving, The remaining portion was then

crushed and any obvious invading roots were

removed before washing first with 3M hydro-

chloric acid fo remove any carbonate and then

with distilled water before oven-drying. This

procedure is referred io as the acid pretreat-

ment.

G. BLACKBURN, G. B. ALLISON & F. W. 1. LEANBY

Some charcoal samples were treated with

solutions 0.1 M in both sodium pyraphos-

phate and sodium hydroxide until no further

¢olour was extracted (Goh & Molloy 1972),

This treatment was followed by washing with

hydrochloric acid and water as specified above

This alternative procedure has heen used else

Where in attempts ta remove contamination

hy invading organic matter, Tt is referred to

here as the alkali pretreatment.

Five of or samples Were measured using

both pretreatmenots, but for ofhers the amounts

of charcoal were sulficient for only one

analysis. The charcoal ysed for previous derer-

minatious of radiometric age Was subjected to

the acid pretreatment only (Rafter 1953, Per

gusson & Rafer 1957, Kigoshi, pers, comm.

1965)-

The charcoul samples were converied to

benzene using the method described by Poluch

& Stipp (1967). ANU sucrose (Polach &

Krueger 1972) was used as u stundard with an

assumed activity of 155.6 percent modern

carbon. For the 5 ml samples of benzene

used, in partially blanked low background

glass vials, the sucrose standard counted at

S&3epm (isd > 1,4) above background. Vials

were selected to huve identical backgrounds,

Within counting error. and this was 3. 54epm

(lsd = 0.15), Typically samples were counted

until 1000-3000 counts above background were

recorded, A Kontron liquid — seintillation

counter was used for (hese assays,

The gC values of subsamples of CO,

collected following combustion of the charcoals

runged between ~ 27,0 and —28.2%- (rel. to

PDB) with a mean value of —27 5%. This

value was used to correct for fractianation of

Tasie 1. Derails af charceal samples and radiocarbon age measurements,

Depth

Depth of sample WC Age

of sample Thickness below vole. Acid Alkali

’ Distance below of (utf affected pre pre-

Sample Volcanic = from Blne surface layer(s) material Ireatment treatment

No, Ash Zone Luke (km) (m) (m) (m) (+ Isd)

| Outer (B) SE 0.6 — = 400 210 na.

2 Inner (A) 4SSE 0.4 O04 0.3 TIAGO te 250 72n0 + 250

3 Ouler SNNE O45 _ O44 7590 = 240 75H) + 150

4 Outer 8NNE 0.20 — — 740 +310 nal.

5 Outer 4N 0.6 —_ = 3470 = 221 nd.

6 Outer 4N 0.5 — 0.02 nd. 350 4 200

7 Outer S5SW a5 — (1.04 5590 + 230 S500 244

& Inner 2.5N V1 0.48 10 ned. 497) + 240

uf] inner 25N 11 4.3 0.15 4030 285 nd,

1() Inner 2SE 1b ne 6.10 4350 + 230 3310 200

I Outer 4NNE OM 0.04 0,23 8050) = 260 6500 240

AGE OF MT GAMBIER TUFF 165

the "IC (Stuver & Polach 1977). The non-

frachionated value for the §M@C value was

assumed to he ~ 25% This correction only

amounted ts OA of the WC wetiviiy of the

sample, “CC analyses of CO. produced by

combustiun al the sucrose showed no frac-

tianalion

in reporting aves We have used a 'C half

life of S568 years.

Resulis and Discussion

The radiometric ages for the analysed

chareoal samples are given in Table 1. Three

determinations indicate modern charcoal (Nos

1, 4 und 6). OF the remginder. the maximum

radiometric age is 8000 years BP. (No. 11),

For (hree samples (Nos 2, 3 and 7) the dif-

ferent methods of pretreatmett gave no signi-

cant difference in age determination, but with

iwo samples (Nos 10 und 117) the alkali

pretrcuiment gave youuger ages. The latter

result is contrary to expectation (Olsen &

Broecker 1958), but it is sintlar to the ex-

perience of Bailey & Lee (1972) Because of

hoth Bailey & Lee's experience, as well as our

own, where we reporl two determmations for

one sample we follow Grant-Tavlor (1971),

as cited by Bailey & Lee (1972), and dis-

regard the younger age associated with the

alkall pretreatment.

Analyses of individual samples sre con-

sidered below,

Sample 1. The charcoal apparently represents

modern roots whith penctrated the thin luyer

of volcanic ash soil,

Sample 2. The charcoal was found below ash-

alféetéd soil and ull, which together were

0.2 m thick, ant a layer of paleosal sand,

also 0.9 m thick. There is no indication from

this exposure that the chareoal represents. in

Irusion of roots after the tuff was deposited,

although this may have oecurred. The sample

was taken 20 m laterally from GAK-609 dated

by Kigoshi & Kobayashi (1966) at 1400 years

BP. This younger mratensl was taken fron

the boundary of the tuff and paleasol, and as

indicated previously hy Blackburn (1966).

intrusion rather than contaminatian may

account for its relative youth, Sample 2, by

contrast, may be older than the tuff.

Sample 3, A cadiometne age of approximately

7600 years wis given by both pretreatments.

The sample was collected 0.15 m below the

voleunic ash soil snd, as there was no dis-

cernible tuff at the site, it js possible that the

charcoal originated from roots which pene-

trated the ash soil, However, this charcoal

was taken from a distinet trough of prey sand,

with light grey sund ut caeh side wad volcanic

ash soil ahove, This arrangement suggests some

disturbance (faunal?) of the paleosol before

deposition of volcanic ash, and it is not con-

sistent with intrusion, This sample indicates

that the ash cannot be older than 7600 years,

Suniple 4. The modem age of this charcoal

is Consistent with intrusion of tree roots

through the thin layer af voleanic ash soil.

Samples 5 & 6. Sample S was taken imme-

diately below the base of the ash-alfected soil,

whieh lacks any hiyer of tuff and may have

heen iivaded by jntrisive roots which were

later converted to charceal, Sample @ was

taken a few metres away and its modern age,

albeit following alkali pretreatment, indicates

that intrusion is involved, Neither sample

satisfactorily indicates the age of the. tuff.

Sample 7, This was collected not far below

the base of ash-affected soil which lacked a

definite layer of ruff. In these circuntstaneces. it

is possible that intrusion occurred, implying

volcanic activily earlier than about 5500 years

B.P. Alternatively, if oo intrusion had

occurred, the volcanic ash was deposited sub-

sequent to the burning (death) of the tree,

about 5500 years ago.

Samples 8 & 9, Only the wkali pretreatment

was used for Sample 8: it as possible that a

greater radiometric age would have been

obtained following acid pretreatment. Two

observations suggest that this sample was nol

contaminated by intrusion. Firstly. the tuff is a

dense, stratified and continuous layer, approxi-

mately 0.3 m thick, which is unhkely to allow

root penetration. Secondly, the separation of

the chareoal from the tuff by a thickness of

01 m of paleosol suggests that the original

plant prew in the paleosol and was burnt there

before the taif was deposited.

Sample 9 was collected 13 m laterally from

Sample 8, beneath the same laver of tuff and

Ata sivoilar depth, The apparent difference in

wees for these samples conld be accounted for

hy fires ar different times. Both samples come

from the same site as NZ-33, for which an

age of 4830 years BLP. was determined hy

Fereusson & Rafter (1957) for charcoal

beneath 0.43 m of dense stratified tuff. All

these sumples were collected within the boun-

dary of a housing allotment, approximately

O.! ha, from which ail the tuff and most of

166

the paleosol were removed gradually before

1970.

Sample 10. The conditions of bunal applying

to this sample resemble thase for Samples 8

and 9. and indicate that the charcoal is not

younger vhan the tuff. Taking the value

associated with atid pretreatment as the

appropriate one, the tuff should be no older

than 4300 years B-P..

Sample 11. This sample is probably the oldest

of those so far reported from heneath the

voleanic ash at Mt Gambier. This is approxi-

mately at the boundary of zone A, and two

separate layers, each 20 mm thick, were found

near the base of the ash-aflected material 0.7

m thick. Small funips of chareoal scattered

through wn approximately cubic space, AO

80 * 80 mm, were collected 0.25 m below

the ash-alfected material. This chareoal is

likely to have been produced hefore the de-

positron of voleanic ash. Tt suggests » maximum

possthle age for volcanism affecting this site,

Conclusions

The outer zone (B) provided the oldest and

ihe Youngest dates for charcoal, There is no

complication about accepting the modern

dates for the charcoal found relatively close

to the surface below material which offers no

serious hindrance to root penetration. The

range of dates from 3500 to S(O years

(Samples 3, $, 7 and 11) for charcoal in this

G BLACKBURN, G. 8. ALLISON &@ F. W. J. LEANEY

vone indicates either a protracted deposition of

tull, which was not inferred by Barbetlt &

Sheard (1981), or « combination of intrusion

for the younger dates and pre-voleanic firce

to account For the older material

The ages of material collected jn the inner

zone (A) beneath a relatively thick and dense

layer of tuff are regarded as excluding the

effects of Toot intrusion, but not those of pre-

valeanic formation, These dates: 4000

(Sample 9), 4300 (Sample 10), and 5000

(Saniple 8), taken together with 4830 for

NZ-33 (Fergusson & Rafter, 1957) indicate

that the tuff may be no older than 4000 to

4300 vears BLP,

Sample 2, with an age of 7200 years. appears

to represent charcoal much older than the

tuflland is untrkely to be intrusive. It was taken

20 m west of GAK-609 (Kigoshi & Kobayashi.

1966), which should now be regurded as intru-

sive in ariein,

The samples analysed here suggest that the

two main periods of voleanism distinguished

by Sheard (1978) occurred between 4000 and

4300 years BP. The discrepancy between these

dates and the value of S000 to 6000 years

sugucsted by Barton & McFklhinny (1980)

may arise from differences concerning the

source of CO, involved, The organic materials

dated by Barton & McElhinny probably incor-

porate CO. which was dissolved in the lake

und hud a lower "'C concentration than the

contemporary values for the atmosphere.

References

Bucev. }. M. & Lee, R, (1972) The effect of

alkuline pretreatment on the radiocarbon dates

of several New Zealand eblarcoals, Proc, Sih

Int. Conf. Radiacarh, Daring, Wellington, 2.

5R2-9]

Bareerti, M. & SHeAkD, M- J. (1981) Paleomag-

nelic results from) Mounts Gambier and Schank,

South Australia, J. Geol, Suc, Aust, 28, 385-94,

Harrow, C.K & MeFunisny, M, W, (1980)

Ages and ushes in Jake floor sediment cores

from Valley Lake, Mt Gambier, Saurh Sst

lia. Trans. Ro Soe §, Aus, U4. TiS.

BiackBuRN, G, (1966) Radiocarbon dates relating

to soil development, cowst-line changes, and

volcanic ash deposition in south-east South Aus-

tralia. Aust, J, Sel 29, 50-2,

Fercusson, GO. J. & Rarrnr, 1. A, (1957) New

Yealand “C uge measurements—3, NZ, 4, Sei,

Tech, B38, 732-49.

Gru, EB D. (1958) Radiocarbon dates for Aus

tralian archacalogical and geological samples.

Aast. J. Sei 18, 49-52,

Gow. KM, & Movtoy, BP, 61972) Rehability

of rudiocurbon dates fram buried charcoals.

Prac, 8th Int, Conf. Radiecarh, Daring, Welling

tan, 2, S6S-R1.,

Grant-Tavior, Po &, (1971) Contamination of

radiocarbon samples. Radiecarhon Users Cony,

Wellington, 60-64.

Hurros, 0. TL, Bracksuen, G. & Crarkr A, RP.

(1959) Identification of volennic ash in soils

near Mount Gambier, South Australia. Trans,

R, Soe. 8, Aust, 82, 93-8.

Kransnr K. & Konavasen, EE (1960) Gakushuin

natural radiocarhon measurements—Y, Radio-

carbon 8, $4-73-

OLsen, B, AL. & RBaoeewra, W. S. (1958) Sample

conlamination and reliability of radiocarbon

dates. N\¥. Acad, Sev, Trans. Seer, 1f, 20, 593-

Porach, H. A. & Kaurork, H, W. (1972) Tsatapic

Fractianauen af WKS Oxalic acid ond ANU

Sucrose radiocarbon dating standards Proc. &rl

for, Conf. Radiocarbon Dating, Wellington 2,

TLR-24,

AGE OF MT GAMBIER TUFF 167

SHEARD, M. J. (1978) Geological history of the

& Stipp, J. J. (1967) Improved synthesis

techniques in methane and benzene radiocarbon Mount Gambier volcanic complex, southeast

dating. Int. J. applied Rad. and Isotopes 18, South Australia. Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 102,

359-64. 125-39.

Srulver, M. & PoLacu, H. A. (1977) Discussion:

RArrer, T. A. (1953) The preparation of carbon

for Cl4 age measurements. N.Z. J. Sci. Tech. Reporting of 14C data. Radiocarbon 19, 355-63.

B35, 64-89.

PILLIE LAKE, EYRE PENINSULA, SOUTH AUSTRALIA: MODERN

ENVIRONMENT AND BIOTA, DOLOMITE SEDIMENTATION, AND

HOLOCENE HISTORY

BY P. DE DECKKER, J. BAAULD & R. V. BURNE

Summary

The small, ephemeral, carbonate-depositing Pillie Lake is located in calcarenite dunes at the

southern end of Eyre Peninsula. Characteristics of surface sediments, microbial mats, aquatic biota

and water chemistry are reported together with a reconstruction of the lake’s history. The floor of

Pillie Lake consists of a central zone with polygonal fissures, surrounded by a broad band of

surficial microbial mats which is, in turn, bordered by a marginal lithified platform. The surface

sediments consist of aragonite with minor calcite and halite. A core (62 cm long) from the centre of

the lake floor was examined for variation in mineralogy and fossil remains. Changes in the

composition of the associated invertebrate fauna, particularly ostracods, indicate that dolomite once

formed in the lake under permanent water cover and at salinities below that of sea water. However,

dolomite was also formed, at a later stage, during a period of both gradual freshening of the lake

water and increasing frequency of dessication. These phenomena appear to be associated with a

progressive fall of sea level in the area over approximately the last 5000-6000 years.

PILLIE. LAKE, EYRE PENINSULA, SOUTH AUSTRALIA:

MODERN ENVIRONMENT AND BIOTA, DOLOMITE SEDIMENTATION,

AND HOLOCENE HISTORY

by P, De Deckker*, J, BAuLoy & R. V, Burnet

Summary

Dr Deckker, P, BauLp, J. & Burne. R, V. (1982) Pillic Lake, Evre Peninsula, South Aus-

tralias Modern environment and biota, dolomite sedimentation, and Holocene history.

Trans. Ro Soc. S. Aust, W6(4), 169-181, 30 November, 1982.

The small, ephemeral, carbonate-deposiling Pillie Lake is Jocaled in coastal culcarenite

dunes al the southern end of Eyre Peninsula, Characteristics of surface sediments, microbial

mats, agnatic biota and water chemistry are reported together with u reconstruction of the

lake's history. ‘Che Noor of Pillie Lake consists of a central zone with polygonal fissures,

surrounded by a broad band of surficial microbial mats which is, in turn, bordered by a

marginal lithified platform, The surface sediments consist of aragonite with Minor calcite and

halite. A core (62 cm long) from the centre of the lake floor was examined for variation in

mineralogy and fossil remains. Changes in the composition of the assuciated invertebrate

fauna, particularly ostracods, indicate thal dolomite once tormed in the lake under permanent

waler cover and at salinities below that of seu water. However, dolomite was also formed, at

a later Stage, during a period of both gradual freshening of the lake water and increasing

frequency of desiccation. These phenomena appear io be associated with a progressive fall of

sea level in the area over approximately the last 5000-6000 years.

Kry Worps: Palaeolimnology, dolomite, charophyte, microbial mats, Ostracoda, Holo-

cene, sca level.

Introduction

Pillie Lake is a small, ephemeral, carbonate

lake situated about 10 km south of Port Lin-

colu at the southern end of Eyre Peninsula

(Fig. 1). The lake, which is about J km tong

by 0.5 km wide, occupies an isolated de- Line Somat

pression within Quaternary calearenite dunes

about | km from the embayment of Port

Lineol) Proper. It lies below the 10 m contour

relative to sea level,

Pillie Lake was visited if November 1979,

during a reconnaissanee survey of salt lakes of

Eyre Peninsula (Bauld, Burne, De Deckker, &

Ferguson in prep.), The objective of our inves-

tigations was to provide information aboul

the extant biota of the lake, the mineralogy

of its sediments and the fossils present in them.

Our findings for Lake Pillie are presented here,

together with an interpretation of the Holo-

cene history of the lake and a comparison with

other, better known, coastal lakes of the

Coorong region.

* Department of Biogeography & Geomorphology,

Australian National University. P.O. Box 4,

Canberra, A.C.T, 2600.

+ Buas Becking Geobiological Lahoratory and

CSIRO Division of Mineralogy, Canberra. ——— =

tRaas Becking Geobiological Laboratory and Fig. 1, Map showing location of Pillie Lake, Eyre

Bureaus of Mineral Resources, Canberra, Peninsula,

170 P. DE DECKKER, J. BAULD & R. V. BURNE

Methods

A PVC (=polyvinyl chloride) pipe of the

type described by Tratt & Burne (1980) was

used to obtain a 62 cm long core from near

the centre of Pillie Lake. Sixteen samples

(referred to as LP1 to LP16) were taken at

predetermined intervals in the core (their

position is indicated in Fig. 8). A portion of

each sample was crushed to a powder and

analysed by X-ray diffraction. The remainder

of each sample was treated with dilute

hydrogen peroxide, and then sieved and dried

for the recovery of ostracods and other fossils.

The presence and relative abundance of fossil

species in each sample examined was recorded.

Three horizons in the core (0-5 cm, 45-

50 cm and 55-60 cm) were sampled for #C

dating of bulk carbonate sediment. Samples

were crushed to powder and analysed by Dr

G. Stipp, without additional treatment, in the

laboratories of Beta Analytical, Florida. §'%C

values were determined by mass spectrometry

(Craig 1957) and were used to correct the #C

data for isotopic fractionation. No environ-

mental correction factors were applied to the

dates obtained,

Samples for microbiological examination

(designated PIL-1 onwards) were preserved

with 4% formaldehyde (final concentration)

in lake water, In addition, samples of dried

mat were collected for later recovery of living

cyanobacteria. Wet mounts of samples were

examined using bright-field or phase-contrast

microscopy. Photosynthetic pigments were

extracted overnight (at 4°C) into 90%

acetone. After centrifugation to remove debris,

spectral scans were made using a Varian

Techtron 635 spectrophotometer.

Fauna were collected from the lake water

with a fine (150 ~m) plankton net and later

preserved in alcohol (70% v/v). Macrophytes

found on the lake floor, mostly in the fissures,

were preserved in 10% formaldehyde.

Samples for water chemistry were taken in

the fissures (see Fig. 2b) and stored in poly-

ethylene bottles until analyses were performed

by AMDEL in Adelaide.

Results and Discussion

1. The modern lake and its extant biota.

la. Setting.

Pillie Lake lies in a depression surrounded

by vegetated calcarenite dunes (Fig. 2a) and

has a small catchment area relative to the

area of the lake floor. The lake is fed mainly

by rainfall and by groundwater discharge.

PILLIE LAKE. SOUTH AUSTRALLA V7

On the first visit to the luke (10.4L1979) 9

thin (<1 em) sheet of water covered several

hundred m® of Jake floor, Three days later

the water level had fujlen shebtly and the

surface Water had retreated to 4 small pateh

in the southeastern urea of the lake oor, The

water table appeared then to be just benewth

the lake surface as evidenced by the water

levels present in polygonal fissures (Fig. 2b,c)

of the south-central, lower area of the lake

floor. Such fissures are considered by yon der

Borch & Lovk (1979) to be the Jocation of

major discharges of groundwater into lakes

during the wetter, winter months when the

waler table rises. Additional groundwater dis-

charge may also oceur in the zone of lithified

polygons along the castern margin of the lake,

Ib, Surface sediments

The lake floor is hordered by a lithilied

platform, A wide belt of surficial microbial

mals grades into this lithified platform through

an intermediate zone showing varying degrees

of induration, The miner edge of mat develop-

Ment merges into a Weller zone which supports

occasional stranded macrophyte growth. The

lowest, south-central area of the lake Toor

is characterized by polygonal fissures Up to

20 em wide and 50 em deep (Figs 2h.c).

Away from the central zone, these fissures

have been filled by sediment. but the polyeonal

network is still visible, and is often marked

hy the growth pattern of charophytes and

microbial mats (Fig. 3).

The lake floor consists of white carbonate

mud. Particle size analysis shows that 99%

of this sediment hus a grain size less than 45

pm. The coarsest (> 180 ,m) fraction, which

consists of skeletal remains, comprises only

0.2% of the sediment. X-ray diffraction

analyses reveal that the clay-sized fraction

consists mainly of aragonite with minor halite

and low magnesian calcite,

The slightly higher marginal platform of the

Jake exhibits increasing tidurytion and the

fication of the sediment with increasing dis-

Pig. 2. Pillie Lake. (a) setting in Quaternary cal-

carenite with Port Lincoln Proper background

left. View to east. (b) characteristic fissures ig

lake floor (south central) containing waler.

Note erowth of charophytes within fissure and

pol¥gonal growth pattern of same on surface

sediments (see also Fig. 3). (c) vertical view

of fissure and floating ‘skeins” of carhonate

particles. Diameter of coin in (b) and (e) 23

mm,

ance oulwards, X-tay difraclion ooolyses of

lithified samples demonstrate the presence of

delomite ond aragonite, The degree of order-

ing oF this dolonvite hus not been determined,

On the eastern side of the lake the hithified

platform is broken up into a 5 mi scale network

of polygonal plates. Tepee structures oecur

along some polygon mrrgins. Carhonate

mounds (up to 40-60 em high and 1 m across)

are associated with this zone. The surfaces of

these mounds ate grey and compact but their

interiors are white pnd consist of porous tuta,

The mounds are composed of aragonite. dolp-

mite and calcite. Similar mounds of porous

tufa are found associated with arcas of

groundwaler discharge around the shores of

the permanently filled neurhy lagoon, Sleaford

Mere (Pig, §). Human, bird and other animal

footprints are preserved on the surface of the

lithified terrace.

le. Aquatic biota.

Charaphytes and other aquatic maernphyics

were present, The best development of charo-

phytes was observed in the lower, south-central

area of the lake, Healthy charophytes occurred

hoth within polygonal fissures and alone the

tops of old polygenal cracks now filled with

carhonite scdiment (Figs 2b,c). Charophvte

growth formed a distinctive patterns acing the

margins of former small-scale pelygoual plates

(Figs 2b, 3), In shallower preis, where water

remained only in the fissures, charophyles and

oiher aquativ macrophytes grow mostly in che

polygonal fissures.

The charplryte was identified as Larmpro-

thamnium papalosim, a common inhabitant

of ephemeral saline lakes in South Australia

(Burne e/ wl. 1980). At the time of onr visit

the plants hore oogonia, antheridia, and starch

storage organs. The plants were geierally

short (1-2 cm) (Figs 26, 3), even when fully

Mature, presumably hecause of the Very

shillow water cover, Gas evolution by the

churuphyies indicated oxygen production duc

tO photosynthetic activity, Photesvnthetic

activily and growth of this chatophyte al sea-

water salinities (Pillic Lake TDS — 36.24%)

would be consistent with earlier field olserva-

tions and experimental work (Burne et al

TORO),

Healthy aquatic macrophytes, some wilh

flowering organs, identified as Kupyra sp.

Were also present in the fissures,

172 P. DE DECKKER, J. BAULD & R. V. BURNE

The ostracods Mytilocypris praenuncia and

Diacypris spinosa were most commonly found

swimming among the charophytes and the

Ruppia plants, in the fissures filled with water.

The cladoceran Daphniopsis pusilla, which 1s

also a halobiont organism, was as common as

the ostracod. On the other hand few specimens

of the amphipod Austrochiltonia australis and

the copepod Mesochra baylyi were collected.

The diversity of the fauna is low compared

with that for other salt lakes (e.g. lakes of the

Coorong region; De Deckker & Geddes 1980)

and is also lower than would be expected from

the measured salinity. This low species

diversity probably results from a rapid in-

crease in Salinity during the later stages of

desiccation, which could prevent hatching

and/or maturation. Depletion of the fauna

would be assured if this were a recurring

phenomenon as very few organisms would be

able to complete their breeding cycle.

1d. Microbial mats and microbiology.

Microbial mats occupied a broad zone sur-

rounding an area of extensive charophyte de-

velopment and bounded by the belt of shore-

line lithification. At the time of sampling the

lake water had retreated from the zone of mat

colonization. The shoreward margin of the

mats was dry and formed a hard crust.

The distribution of mat types appears to be

controlled by the pattern of polygonal desic-

cation cracks beneath them (see Figs 3a, 3b).

Generally the polygon tops were covered by

flat mat (Fig. 3b; Table 1, PIL—7) while the

original crack areas were colonized by a mat

of raised and crenulate appearance (Fig. 3b;

Table 1, PIL-9).

The marginal development of mats in Pillie

Lake is consistent with microbial mat coloniza-

tion of other ephemeral saline lakes (Bauld

1981a). The lack of mat accretion, or of pre-

servation detectable as buried laminated

organic matter indicated that colonization

during wetting periods is followed by desicca-

tion and subsequent aeolian erosion, which

Fig. 3. Polygonal cracks control growth pattern

of charophytes and microbial mats. (a) poly-

gonal cracks in carbonate floor of lake. (b) an

area of colonization by microbial mats. Coin

rests on flat mat; crenulate mat (see Table 1)

grows along and over the now filled-in cracks.

nize filled-in polygonal cracks. Coin used for

scale 23 mm diameter.

PILLIE LAKE, SOUILH AUSTRALIA 173

Tasce |. Description of microbial muts, Pillie Lake,

Sumple Location and description Microorgiinisms Photosynthetic

pigment

PIL-1 Carbonate crust, shoreline. Lithified Occasional narrow (<5 pm) fila-

surface. soft and crumbly under-

neath, Thin blue-green layer (ca.

0.2 mm) 0.5-1.0 mm beneath sur-

face (endolithic?), Diffuse, salmon-

pink layer above this.

ments, often encased in carbonate.

More frequent short narrow. tri-

chomes. Identification not possible.

Below detection

Limits.

PIL-7 Desiccated flat mat, top-centre of Blue-green Jayer: Carbonate grains Chlorophylla

polygon (early stages of indura- host single-trichome filaments with (see Fig, 7),

tion?). Very thin carbonate coating thin, byaline, closely appressed

covers pale salmon-pink layer. A ce sheaths. Some trichomes encased in

2 mm thick, bright blue-green layer carbonate. Cells ca. 11-12 ym Jong

occurs ca. 1 mm below surface, xX 2 wm wide. (Figs, 4 and 5) Phar-

Small, black irregular colonies occur =omifid/um henderyonii (sensu Golubie

on surface, & Focke 1978), Black colonies:

Most organic material without dis-

cernible structure. Calotliriy-like

filaments and colonial, coccoid cells

with dark brown stained sheaths

(Chroaceccus).

PIL-8 = Marginal tufa head. White. lithified Bright blue-green; appears to he Chlorophyll a

surface; when broken reveals variety = chusmolithic, mat-like growth, Fila-

of endolithic colonies. irregularly mentous cyanobacterium (Phorm:

distributed within ca. 5 mm of sur- 9 din?) entangled with cocei (Chire-

face. ocaccus?) (see Fig. 6),

Colonies have bright blue-green Possible Nosfac, Black “colomes” Chlorophyll «

(possibly chasmolithic). pale brown contain unidentified filamentous cy-

to tan, and diffuse salmon pigmenta- — anobacteriu.

tion. 10-20% of lithified surface

covered with black “colonies”,

which appear green to yellow-brown

when crushed.

PIL-9 = Raised crenulate-like mat from Black “colonies” contain Chreocec- Chlorophyll a

polygon margin, contiguous with flat cay turgidus (colonial, coccoid),

mat, Black “colonies’/concretions Filaments of Calothrix sp. present.

<1 mm across and partly sub-

merged in flat mat (PIL-7). Black

crust continuous on crenulate ridges,

would remove these surficial mats (Bauld

1981a, 1981b),

The microorganisms constructing and

present in the mats are given in Table 1. The

desiccated condition of the mats and the poor

state of microorganisms, combined with their

low populations relative to detritus and car-

bonate sediment/cement (Figs 4, 5), made

Prolonged wetting of

dried mat samples under laboratory conditions

enabled some microorganisms to grow. This

identification difficult.

Fig. 4. Photomicrograph (phase-contrast) of fila-

mentous cyanobacterium, identified as Phormi-

dium hendersonit, from the blue-green Javer of

flat mat (PIL-7), cells of the trichome protrude

beyond the end of the sheath. which appears to

be coated with carbonate or some other

organic material, Scale bar 50 um.

in-

174

demonstrated their presence in the field mats

but not necessarily their relative dominance

in the constructing population.

Endolithic microorganisms (Fig. 6) were

detectable in the lithified carbonate mounds

(PIL-8, Table 1) which occur along the lake

margin. Blooms of purple bacteria (photo-

synthetic sulfur bacteria) were observed in

the bottom waters of some of the polygonal

fissures. Their occurrence indicates anoxic

conditions, most likely resulting from decom-

position of organic matter. The occurence of

photosynthetic microorganisms in mats, lithi-

Fig. 5. (phase-contrast) of P.

Photomicrograph

hendersonii from PIL-7 showing binding effect

of the ensheathed trichomes on carbonate grains

in the mat. Cell can be seen protruding beyond

end of sheath at right. Scale bar 50 ym.

P. DE DECKKER, J. BAULD & R. V. BURNE

Fig. 6. Photomicrograph (phase-contrast) show-

ing filamentous cyanobacterium (Phormidium?)

and coccoid organism (Chroococcus?) from

mat-like chasmolithic growth (PIL-8). Scale bar

50 um.

fied carbonate and other environments was

confirmed by extraction of the photosynthetic

pigments chlorophyll a and_bacteriochloro-

phylls a and c. (Table 1 and Fig, 7).

le, Water chemistry.

The field pH of Lake Pillie water was 8.55,

a value close to that (8.6) determined later

by AMDEL. The water had a conductivity of

46 388 .S cm and contained 36 235 mg 17.

Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) comprising the

following (in mg 1-1); Ca?+, 93; Meg?+,

1236; Nat 11 980; K+, 275; COZ, 39; HCOs,

339; SO}, 3819; Br, 49; Ck, 18550; F-,

6; NOs, <5; SiO.. 7.6; B, 882. Total alka-

linity as CaCO, was 343 mg 1-1.

2. Holocene record

2a. Sediment type

Three zones are recognized in the core

(Fig. 8). The upper zone (0-43 cm) consists

of uniform white mud with scattered skeletal

grains. The intermediate zone (43-50 cm)

comprises olive grey mud with layers of coarse

carbonate sand and one horizon of root fibres.

The lower zone (50-62 cm) contains purple

brown mud with white clay lenses and streaks,

and scattered fine carbonate sand grains. There

PILLLE LAKE, SOUTH AUSTRALIA 175

PIL-7

chla

600 750 700 650 600

RELATIVE ABSORBANCE

800 750 700 650 600

WAVELENGTH (nm)

OAS act /

Fig. 7. Absorption spectra of photosynthetic pig-

ments (acetone ecxiract) from (a) fal mat

(PIL-7) constructed by Phormidinm hendersonit

(see Figs. 4 and 5), and (b) bloom of photo-

synthetic bacteria (PIL-2) in bottom of water-

filled fissure, Mwux, chla = 664 nm; behla = 770

nm; behle = 670 nm. The behle peak indicates

the presence of green sulfur bacteria with the

hloom of purple sullur bacteria (behla).

are no siyns of diagenetic cementation of

nodule formation,

2b. Mineralogy

X-ray diffraction analysis of bulk samples

for carbonate minerals revealed only the pre-

sence of aragonite, low magnesian calcite and

dolomite (sample LP7 was not analysed). The

relative abundance of each mineral, deter-

mined according to the methods of Chave

(1952) is presented for each sample in Figure

$. Hulite was also recorded from quite a

number of samples (sce Fig, 8) but no gypsum

was found. Ostracod shells were nol. separated

from the samples prior to X-ray diffraction

analyses and are thought to be the major

source of the calcite present throughout the

core.

X-ray diffraction analysis shows that LPI5

contains dolomite which is stoichiometric

(strong peak at 289A) and well-ordered

(strong peaks of 248A (221) and 2.07A

(111)). Sample LPIS vonsists of 32% dolo-

mite, 62% aragonite and 6% low-Mg calcite,

and a similar composition iy assumed for the

dolomite throughout the lower portion of the

vore (50-62 cm).

2c. Fossils

Ostracods, isopod fragments, foraminifers,

vastropods snd charophyte oogonia were

recovered fron’ some of the core samples

(Fig, 9). They are discussed separately.

Ze(1). Ostracoda.

The ostracods found in the core are all

halobiont species (sensu De Deckker, 1981a),

They are listed below together with the most

recent references on relevant taxonomic and

ecological information,

1, Cydrideiy australiensis Hartmann, 1978 =

C, westraliensis McKenzie, 1978 (Hart-

mann 1978; De Deckker 198lc), Fig, 9:

21, 23-24, 28, 31-33,

Diacypris compacta Herbst, 1958 (De

Deckker 1981c), Pig. 9: 37-29.

3, Diaecypris spinosa De Deckker, 1981 (De

Deckker 1981b), Fig. 9; 9-1], 20.

4, Leprocythere lacustris De Deckker, 1981

(De Deckker 1981d), Fig, 9: 7-8.

§. Limnoeythere mowhrayensis Chapman,

1914 (De Deckker 1981b, 1982a), Fig. 9:

1-3,

6. Mytilocypris niytiloides Brady, 1886 (De

Deckker 1978, 1981c), Fig, 9: 12-13,

7. Mytilocypris praenuncia Chapman, 1936

(De Deckker 1978, 1981c), Fig. 9: 17-18,

25.

8. Platycypris baueri Herbst, 1957 (De

Deckker & Geddes 1980; De Deckker

1982b), Fig, 9: 26-27.

2e(li) [sopeda,

Only very brittle exoskeletal fragments of

the isopod Haloniscus searlei Chilton, 1920

were recovered. They consist mainly of elon-

gated cones which are slightly arched and

hollow (Fig. 9: 5-6). The ecology of this

isopod is discussed by De Deckker & Geddes

(1980) and De Deckker (1981e),

2c) Feraminifera.

Tests of Elphidium sp. (Fig. 9: 4) Cann &

De Deckker 1981, which can live in non-

marine waters, were rarely encountered, The

176 P. DE DECKKER, J. BAULD & R. V. BURNE

14. C dates ( YBP} UTHOLOGY GEOCHEMISTRY BIOTA INTERPRETATION OF DATA

5 w E< 2 =

ra! % 6 2 S]

8 Be g = v ee fa

wes 22 F She :

" See2at 5 So fF 2202 a

2 ssotsessy 2 E 5 & 8288 FA

E BeESB>as8 §& 34 a oP@ESa 2

a Sow SPe uae ales GE 5S TH ReExs 3

E ow ew ASPTTCSHyn@= aa ig F€ HD 2ESTY =

8 a Ze w #¥8eSSeugrer7ss ao #2 £SESL a

2 ~ >> ad — —

= S Geet SSSSSSSSSFSSS fF $F$ SSSSS — saunYcuE Z

= = =O SLRELSSSSSE SVE Ss € ett ssc (%ie) =

o A t243 ARELERSRSRZEE Rh SEESR

wo coc SSSt22upsa < > sete st = <L

Qsuprace [P) LOTG GASSSGqacESGS H GS S3530 & 8 So G

0 +] oe *#oo ea 1 ; «J

2470+ 110ff

ig ;

ty . x ni .

dy :

| &l>

-) VIE -

o 2 cc:

20 . m ES as -

| 2lin =

Zz] Zz 2!

wh =z) Pape

30 ‘ Pa i i .

i e

40 “5 . i 5

oar se « i 5 f]

Pow» zs «@ 2: 6 x

5080+ 140 ANAT ole so . i 8 .

60401 * S .

nea 10 s « fee 10

Lr s 8 zim > ia ‘

seeeeeeee NY 28 Slr lé w :

4200+ \60ff Se STH oan 2{s z 2 ;

60-e 5 e @ i > wit

oon oe som * a n z

—

lel Clay = Fine laminations WW Dominani = Present

Ae Fite Common ® Rare

aie Fine sand Fisras |

wh White | Rare

of Olive green * Trace

4 Coxiella sp pu Purple brown [6/1o8 et /3

Fig. 8. Lithology, geochemistry, fossil ostracods and other fossil remains recorded from Pillie Lake

core, together with past salinities of the Jake inferred from fossil ostracod data.

Fig. 9 1l3: Limnocythere mowbrayensis —1, &, LV external, LP2; —2, 9, RV external, LP2; —3,

a, C, dorsal, LPS. 4: Elphidium sp. side view, LP16. 5-6: Haloniseus searlei, —5, fragment of

distal segment of posterior appendage, LP2; —6, fragment of spine attached to telson, LP2. 7-8:

Leptocythere lacustris, —7, LV external, LP11; —8, LV internal, LP11. 9-11, 20, 22 Diacypriy

spines, —9, juvenile, RV external, LP10; —10,. juvenile, RV external, LP10; —11, LV internal,

LPLO; —20, LV external, LP10; —22, RV internal, LP10, 12-13: Mytilocypris mytiloides, —12.

LV external, LP2; —13, RV internal, anterodorsal area broken off, LP2, 14-16, 19: Coxiella sp.,

—1l4, juvenile, dorsal view, LP1; —15, juvenile, apertural view, LP1; —16, juvenile, ventral view,

LPI; —19, apertural view, part of aperture broken off, LPI. 17-18, 25: Mytilocypris praenuncia,

—17, juvenile, LV internal, LP10; —18, RV internal, LP10; —25, LV external, LP5. 21, 23-24,

28, 31-33: Cyprideis australiensis, —21, juvenile, RV external, LP15; —23, juvenile, LV external.

LP15; —24, d. RV internal, LP15; —28, d, LV external, LP 15; —31, 9, C, dorsal, LP!5; —32,

d, C, dorsal, LP15; 33, 9, LV external, LP12. 26-27: Platycypris baueri, —26, RV external, dor-

sum distorted and partly broken off, LP4; —27, LY internal, dorsum broken off, LP4. 29-30:

Reticypris sp,, —29, RV external, LP2,; —30, RY internal, LP2. 34-36: Lamprothamnium;n papu-

losum, oogonia, all side views and all LP10. 37-39: Diacypriy compacta, —37, LY dorsal, LP14;

—38, LV external, LP14; —38, LV external, LPI4; —39. RV internal, LP14. C—carapace: LV,

RV = left and right valves. Scales: 1: 200 pm for 1-4, 7-8 2: 500 wm for 5-6. 12-16, 19. 3: 500

am for 9-11, 20, 22, 34-36. 4: 250 ym for 26-27; 500 wm for 17-18, 25. 5: 500 wm for 21, 23-24,

28, 31-33. 6: 200 xm for 29-30, 37-39.

PILLIE LAKE, SOUTH AUSTRALIA 177

178 P. DE DECKKER, J. BAULD & R. V. BURNE

Taste 2. Carbon-l4 dating of Pillie Lake sediments.

Core interval BMR LAB XRD Duc alc

(em) code code mineralogy* (in) (Hn) Age )BP

0-5 323 8184) A.H.c,d 24.72 91 ar h.6 2470 2: 100

45-50 323A 81844 AH <.d —468.7 = 9.2 +16 S508) ts 140

55-60 323B 81843 A.C,D.H —407.2 +117 +0,5 4200 + 160

* Upper case—abundant

Lower case—trace

A—aragonite

C—calcite

D—iolomite

H—halite

taxonomy and ecology of this foraminifer have

been described by Cann & De Deckker

(1981),

Zc(iv) Gastropode.

Shells of the halobiont gastropod Coxiella

sp. (Fig. 9; 14-16, 19) were found in the

upper levels of the core.

Specimens were not identified at the species

Jevel because the taxonomy of Coxrella is in

a confused state (Mellor 19791, De Deckker

& Geddes 1980), However the morphology of

the specimens from the core fit the variation

of the species labelled C, striata by De Deckker

& Geddes (1980) collected from fakes adja-

cent to the Coorong Lagoon, The salinity range

for those specimens Was 6-] 24%. Coxiella

spp. can withstand periods of desiccation

although they do not oceur in Jakes which

remain dry for a number of years (ee. as in

Central Australia).

2e(v) Characeae,

The oogonia recovered from the Pillic Lake

core are thought to belong to Lamipratham-

nium panmdosum. Although their shape may

vary extensively (Fig. 9), f. papuloseent

oogonia are very clongated and narrow (Fig.

9: 34-36) compared to other charophyte

oogonia found in the southeast of Australia,

Until the report of Burne ef al. (1980) the

presence of fossil charophyte oogonia in sedi-

ments was considered to indicate the presence

of fresh water. However, these authors de-

monstraled that Laniprothanmium papulosum

grows in saline waters and that photosynthetic

CO..-tixation in this species occurs at salinities

up to two times that of sea water. Thus the

'Mettor, M. (1979) A study of the salt lake

snail Coxiella (Smith, 1894) sensu late. B.Sc.

(Hons) thesis, University of Adelaide (unpubl.).

presence of oogonia in the core docs not pre-

clude seasonally salin¢ or hypersaline con-

ditions, (Burne ef al. 1980),

2d. Dating

Since there was insufficient material to

enable samples of skeletal carbonate (0 he

conventrated for C analysis, bulk carbonate

samples were analysed. The results (Table 2)

indicale an age of 2470 + 100yBP for the

uppermost sediments. Since no detrital car-

bonate from the surrounding calearenites was

found within the core sediments, it is thought

thai all the carbonate minerals have formed

within the lake basin.

The apparent age reversal for the 45-50

and 55-60 cm layers suggests either that the

carbonates of the lower sample could have

undergone diagenetic alteration, possibly as a

result of “ageing” of the dolomite (McKenzic

1980), or that the overlying sample contains a

proportion of old carbon not present in the

lower samiple.

We consider the date of 5080 + L40yBP

to indicate a maximum possible age for the

45-50 cm sample. and we recognise the pos-

sibility that the 55-60 cm sample may be

slightly older than this date,

3. Holocene History of Pillie Lake

3a. Deduction of palacosalinity and water

level,

De Deckker (198la) has demonstrated that

some ostracods can be used as sensitive indi-

cators of water salinity and. furthermore.

sometimes provide information about water

level variation in saline lakes, The presence

of fossil representatives of these species in the

Pile Lake core may therefore be used to

indicate the palacosalinitics and determine

Whether or not the lake was permanently filled,

The presence of Cypridels dustraliersis

valves in samples T.P1Q to T.P16 (and also

their rare oceurrence in LP9) indicates that

PILLIE LAKE, SOUTH AUSTRALIA 174

Water Was permanent in the Jake at the lime

of deposition of levels LP16 10 10 and perhaps

LP9,

At some stage during the periods when

Limnoeythere mowbrayensis was present

(levels LP2-4, 6, 8 and 11-12), salinity of the

lake water must have been below 6% and

Wailer was probably permanent at some stage

for these levels, Both phenomena are less cer-

tain for other samples where the species is

mire Le, LPI, 5, 7, 10 and in LP13 where

only juveniles have been recovered

The clongated specimens of Myiilocypris

mutiloides in samples. 1.P2—3 indicate salinities

below 3%. The shorter specimens. belonging to

the sume specics in sample LP3 indicate that

salinity could have reached 25%. The record

af Diaeypriy spineya in samples LPi—10 indi-

cates that during winter months salinity was

likely to be below 20.

The presetiee of Haloniseus searle’, and

other fossils, in the upper part of the core

shows that the lake was subject to desiceation,

However, while. searie? can withstand desic-

eation, it is known to require frequent re-

wetting, usually at yearly intervals, for it to

survive and reproduce. (De Deckker &

Geddes 1980; W. BD. Williams, in prep.).

On the basis of these data the Holocene

history of Pillie Lake is interpreted as follows

(See Pig. 8):

ater was permanent between LPI6 and

10, The average winter salinity= was of the

order 20%0 until LP13 when salinity dropped

to =<A%. where it remained until LPI. Tt is

likely that salimty was higher st other times

because Af, praenineia is vulva present in these

samples (the lowest salinity tolerated by this

species 18 12%0)-

For LP9, and younger Layers, water was

proahably not permanent and salinity fluctuated

although at remained generally low (<< 10%)

in winter, Ht was definitely <6%, at some stave

for LPS and LP4—2 as shown by the presence

of DL. mowbrayensis, For the other samples

it was below 20% in winter because D_ spinosa

found in them reqitires such salinities in

Winter, An exception probably occurs for

samples LP? and 5 where D_ spinosa is rare

Timing of these events cannot be defined

accurately because of the sanom@lous 14C dates

(Table 2),

3b. Dolomite formation.

Since Pillie Lake possesses a relatively

amall vatchment orea, it ts likely to he filled

not by surface run-off, but by rainwater Fall-

ing directly on the lake floor ond by ground-

water discharge imto the Jake. It can be

deduced from the fossil ostracod record of the

lake sediments that the evolution of Pillie

Lake from a permanent to an ephemeral

status Was associated with a progressive de-

crease in salinity. These changes possibly

indicate a progressive decrease in marine

groundwater influence, and are accampanied

hy changes in sediment type. They are there.

fore consistent with a fall in sea level affecting

the groundwater regime. “C daiing indicates

an approximate ace of SOU0YBP for sediments

in Ube lower portion of the core. This is con-

cordant with the last high sea level stand in

the adjacent areas of north eastern. Spencer

Gulf and the Coorong area (ca. 6000y BP;

Burne 1982; von der Borch er af. 1975; van

der Borch 1976) and it supports qur explana-

tion for decreasing salinity concomitant with

the transition from permanent to ephemeral

water.

A comparison of ostracod distribution with

the occurrence of carbonate minerals in the

Pillic Lake core led us to conclude that dolo-

mite is found in sediments that formed under

both permanent and ephemeral conditions

(Fig. 8). Precipitation of dalamite under the

latter coziditions is similar to dolomite forma-

tion in the Coorong area (von der Borch 1976)

where it occurs in ephemeral Jakes fed solely

by evaporilically modified continental ground-

water without the influence of marine brines,

This. process. of dolomite Formation has also

been invoked (von der Borch 1981) for a salt

lake near Naracoorte which is considerably

further inland (85 km) than Jukes near the

Coorong Lagoon and thus removed from pos-

sible influence by sea water,

On the other hand, the accurence in the

lower layers of the Pillig Lake core of abun-

2 All the salinity values discussed here refer to

winter viloes. The work of De Deckker &

Geddes (1980) suggests that the presence ot

astracods is controlled by the effect of salinity

an hatching during the winter monmhs Purther-

more, as the catchment area of Pillis Luke is

small und the lake lies in a small depression, the

lake cauld never be very deep, Ht is therefore

easier to predict winter salinities rather than the

summer ones. since the lutrer are likely to Mic-

(uate extensively from year to year, Additionally.

n sudden retreat ot the water table in stummer

could cause the jake to dry up withour salmity

reaching high levels

180

dunt well-ordered dolomite, associated with

organisms which live under permanent water

cover if an environment of fluctuating salinity,

suggests that wy different mechanism of dolo-

mite formation occurred. Folk & Land (1975)

proposed that an important method of pre-

cipifating dolomite was ta dilute either

evaporitically concentrated hrines or sea water

with fresh water, The sites suggested for the

formation of dolomite by these means are

shallow lagoons expenencing rapid fuctuations

between hypersaline and nearly fresh water

conditions, or a phrealic groundwater zone

where sea water is diluted by mixing with 4

lens of meteoric water. Either of these could

acount for the dolomite in the lower levels of

the Pillie Lake core but, because the dolomite

appears to be a primary lake sediment and

dolomitic nodules or other obvious divgenetic

textures are absent, we favour the former

model,

Conclusions

L. Palacoenvironmental conditions during the

Holocene were deduced by the presence of

various fossil ostracods, which are used as

both indicators of salinity and indicators of

whether the Jake retained permanent or

ephemeral water.

P, DE DECKKER,

J, BAULD & RK, Vo BURNE

2, A general decrease in Water salinity was

recorded and is thouvht to be related to 9 fall

of sca level during the past 5,000-6,000 years.

3, Our investigation provides evidence for the

formation of dolomite under permanent water

cover ca S000y BP and, later, under ephemeral

water conditions.

4, The torration of dolomite under permanent

wuler conditions contrasts with the well docu-

menied oecurrence of dolomite precipitation

under evaportic conditions m lakes near the

Coorong Lagoon.

Acknowledginents

We are grateful to J. Caldwell and J. Fitz-

simmons for some of the X-ray diffraction

analyses, and P, J) Davies and H. Polach for

important discussions,

|. B. and R. V. 8, are members of the Baas

Becking Geobiological Laboratory which is

supported by the Bureau of Mineral Re-

sources, CSIRO and the Australian Mineral

Tndustries Research Association, RAV UB. pub-

lishes with the permission of the Director of

the Bureau of Mineral Resources.

References

Baulp, I, (19814) Occurrence of benthic muicro-

cat muats in saline lakes. J/ydrehiolagia $1, &7-

~e (1981lb) Caobiological role of cyanobuac-

terial mats in acdimentary environments: pro-

duction wnd preservation of organic matter,

BMRK J. Aust. Geal, Geophys, 6, 307-17.

Burwe, R. V, ({982) Relative fall of Holocene

seit-lovel and coastal progradation, worthcastern

Spencer Gulf, South Australia. Jhbid. 7. 35-45,

—— Bavin, J, & On Decewker, P. C1980) Saline

lake charaphytes and their geological signifi-

cance. J. Sued. Pet, 50, 281-93.

CANN, J.C, & Dn Drewkor, Pe (1981) Fossil

Quaternary and living foraminifera fram atha-

lassic (non-marinc) saline lakes, southern Aus-

trulia. f. Pal. $5. 660-70.

Cave. K. E (1952) A. solid-solution hetween

calcite and dolomite £, Geol 60, 190-2.

Crite, He (1957) Isotopic standards for curhon

ame oxyzen correction factors for massspeciro-

metric analysis in carbon dioxide, Geechim.

Cosmochim. Acta 12. 133-49.

Dr Decker. P. (1978) Comparative morphology

and review of mytilocypridinid ostracods (family

Cypndidae), du, J, Zool, Suppl. Ser. 58, 162.

—— (19810) Ostracods of le ere saline lakes

A review. Aydrohtologia 81, 131-4

—— (1981h) Taxanomic notes on some Austra

lian ostracods with description of few species.

Zool. Ser, W, 37-55.

—— (198ic) Taxonomy, ecology and palacoeco-

lovy of ostracods from Australion inland waters.

Ph.D. thesis, University of Adelaide (unpub-

lished),

Cl98Id) ‘Taxonomy and ecological notes of

some ostracods from Australian inland walters,

Trans. R. Soe, 8, dust, WOS, 91-148

(19824) Nonr-maring ostracods from two

Quaternary profiles ot Pulbcena and Mowbray

Swamps. Tasmania, Aleheringd @, 249-74.

(1982b) Late Quaternary ostracods from

Luke George. New South Wiles. Zhied. fi, 305-18,

—— & Grinoes, M,C. (1980) Seasonal Patina of

ephemeral saline lakes neur the Coorong

Lagoon, South Australia, adust, J. Mar, Fresh-

wat Res, Sl, 677-99.

Foik, R. L. & Land, L. 8. (1975) Ma/Cu patio

and salinity: two controls over crystillization

of dolomite. AAPG Bull, 59, 60-8,

Gorusic, §. & Focke, J 8. (1978) Phormidium

hendersonii Howe: identity und significance of

4 modern stromatolite building microorganism,

J. Sed. Pet. AB, 751-64.

PILLIE LAKE, SOUTH AUSTRALIA 181

Hartmann, G. (1978) Die Ostracoden der Ord-

nung Podocopida G. W. Miiller, 1894 der tro-

pisch-subtropischen Westkiiste Australiens (zwi-

schen Derby im Norden und Perth im Siiden.).

Mitt. Hamb, Zool. Mus. Inst. 75, 64-219.

Trattr, M. H. & BuRNE, R. V. (1980) An inexpen-

sive and efficient double-tube, hand-coring

device. BMR J. Aust. Geol. Geophys. 5, 156-8.

VON DER Borcn, C,. C. (1976) Stratigraphy and

formation of Holocene dolomitic carbonate de-

posits of the Coorong area, South Australia. J.

Sed. Pet. 46, 952-66.

(1981) Recent non-marine dolomite from

the coastal plain, southeastern South Australia.

Trans. R, Soc. S. Aust. 105, 209-10.

& Lock, D. (1979) Geological significance

of Coorong dolomites. Sedimentology 26, 813-

24.

& SCHWEBEL, D. (1975) Groundwater

formation of dolomite in the Coorong region

of South Australia. Geology 15, 283-5.

MANGROVE DEVELOPMENT NORTH OF ADELAIDE, 1935-1982

BY T. E. BURTON

Summary

The mangrove coastline of the eastern shore of Gulf St Vincent exhibits three different patterns of

mangrove development. In the northernmost area (which is free from human interference), the

mangroves have been spreading seawards at approximately 18 m/year since 1949. In the area

bounded by Port Gawler and St Kilda there has been little or no increase in mangrove development,

while in the Swan Alley Creek area the mangrove stand has advanced inland at approximately 17

m/year since 1935. The unusual landward development of the mangrove stand in the latter area may

be the result of a rise in sea level, a drop in land level or a combination of both.

MANGROVE DEVELOPMENT NORTH OF ADELAIDE, 1935-1982

by T. EB. Burton*

Summary

Buwrow, T, E. (1982) Mangrove Developmen! North of Adelaide, 1935-1982. Trans, R. Soc.

S. Auer. 10604), 183-189, 30 November, 1982.

The mangrove coastline of che eastern snore of Gulf St Vincenc exhibits three different

patterns of margrove development, In the northernmost area (which is free from human

iterference), the mangroves have heen spreading seawards al approximately 18 m/year

since 1949. In the area hounded by Port Gawler and St Kilda there hus been Jitdle or no

increase in mangrove development. while in the Swan Alley Creek areu the mangrove stand

hae advanced infand at approximately 17 m/year since 1935. The nnusual landward develop-

ment of the mangfove stand in the latter area may be (he resull of w rise in seu level, a drop

in tind level Or a combination af both,

Key Warns: Ayicennia marina, mangrove, mudflat, pragradation, sedimentation, salt

inarsh, samphire.

Introduction

The pari ot the castern shoreline of Gulf

St Vingent bounded by Swan Alley Creek an

the south and Port Prime in the north, exhibits

characteristics of a low wave energy environ-

ment, Extensive mudflats with mangrove

vegelation occupy the intertidal zone of the

shore and are in turn backed by salt marshes.

For over 70% of the area, the landward

houndary of the salt marshes, and in some

ureas oF the mangroves, is determined by the

placement of evaporation ponds by I,C.1, The

effect of these ponds on the development of

the mangrove areas is as yet uncertain,

The role attributed to mangroves is that of

silt trappers, and in this respect, the grey man-

wove Avicennia marina (Farst) Vierh. var,

resinifera (Forst) Bakh,, is more efficent at

retaining sedimen! than (the prop-roots of)

other mangrove species. McNae (1966)

suggested that mangroves may play only a

secondary role in causing acerelion; man-

groves consolidste silting rather than cause it

This view was reinforced by Bird (1972

14) who stated that mangroves, after estah-

lishing themselves “shelter and stabilize the

mud surface, reducing wave scour and retain-

ing sediment that would be moved around on

unvegetated mudflats’.

MeNae (1966) gave a bricf description of

some of the mangrove localities in Gulf St

Vincent, and noted the relatively small height

of the mature trees (3.3-5 m). Wester! save

*C/- Conslal Munagement Branch, Dept of

Environment and Phinning, GPO Box 667, Ade-

laide, & Aust S001

an accurate description of the distribution of

the mangrove in South Australia, while Krato-

chvil er al. (1972) drew a brief comparison

of mangrove and salt marsh communities be-

tween several areas of southern Australia.

Kucan? discussed man-made changes in the

coastal zone north of Adelaide using historic

aerial photographs; a comprehensive review of

Australiat) mangroves and sallmarsh plants 1s

offered by King (1981), while the most de-

tailed work on South Australian mangroves is

that of Butler ef al. and Butler (1977).

The study area is located northwest of

metropolitan Adelaide at 34°45’ south,

138°30' east. The mangroves extend along the

coastline tor approximately 38 km and inland

to a width of 2 km. The shoreline deposits

consist of stranded beach ndges of sandy shell

and swampy deposits which may extend up

to 2 km inland, and which, in turn, are over-

Jain in places by modern intertidal deposits,

Easiwards are the alluvial Pooraka Clays

farmed prior to the heginning of the last

major transgression (Firman 1967).

The bathymmetry of Gulf St Vincent is that

of a shallow marine basin. the deepest areas

being ahont 35 m. Mud banks extend up to

'Wester, L. L. (1967) The Distribution of the

mangrove in South Australia B.A, Thesis, Uni-

versity of Adelaide. Unpubl,

“Kucan, OU, M. (1979) Man-made changes in the

coastil zone between Port Adelaide und St

Kilda. BA, Thesis, Univ, Adelaide. Unpubl.

"Butler, A. 7. Deepers, A. M., McKillup, 8. C.

& Thomas, D. P. (1975) The Conservation of

Mangrove Swamps in South Austraha, Report

to the Nature Conservation Society uf S, Aust.

Unpibl.

184 T. E. BURTON

SOUTH

AUSTRALIA

STUDY AREA

PRE 1949 POST 1949

COLONISING MANGROVES [777] MATURE MANGROVES

SJ MATURE MANGROVES

5 Km

Fig. 1. Locality map showing mangrove development.

MANGROVE DEVELOPMENT NORTH OF ADELAIDE RF

1 km offshore from the study area and are

exposed at low tide. These mud banks

generally are covered by marine meadows of

the seagrass Zostera muelleri (Specht 1972)

and to a lesser extent by Heferozostera sp-

The average air temperature tor the area is

16°C with a summer average maximum of

27°C and o winter average maximum of 13°C,

The average annwal cainfall is 400 mm, The

dominating wave action is the result of a

southwesterly sea breeze.

The tides in the Gulf St Vincent region

generally are semi-diurnal, An unusual situa-

lion exisls in that the main semi-diurnal com-

ponents (My and S)) are almost identical,

which means that the semi-diurnal tide is

virtually absent at nea tides—the «diurnal

fide being dominant. Near the equinoxes

(about every 15 days) the diurnal companents

also vanish, resulting in an almost constant

lida] level which remains for nearly a whole

day. Such a condition is known as a dodge

tide (Bye 1976).

Methods

Aen! photographs from 1949 to 19K)

were obtained from the South Australian De-

partment of Lands, whilst aerial photographs

laken in 1935 were obtained from the RAAF

in’ Melbourne. To compensate for different

scales, equiscslar stereo observations were

made using a sterea-zoom transfer scope.

Mangrove areas were measured with a com-

pensating planimeter.

Mangrove stands were deemed mature only

if. when using aerial photographs, the canopy

obscured the Jand features underneath

Ground inspection revealed these trees to be

more than 2 m high.

Mangrove Developnient from Light River

to Swan Alley Creek

The extent of mangrove development over

the last 30 years is ilustraied in Fig. 1. The

area between Light River and Middle Bench

has remained relatively andisturbed by human

and imdustrial development. It is possible to

trace the sewward advance of the mangrove

Stand across the pre-existing mud-fat of the

Light River and adjacent areas using historic

aerial phatographs. Over qa coastline of 11 kn,

168 hectares of mature mangroye vegetation

has increased to 356 hectares of mature and

13¢ hectares of immature mangrove. This

siizgests an increase of 10,7 heetares/annum

At the shack settlement at Middle Beach

are two areas of 26.2 and 1] 1 bectures. ex-

cavated for fertilizer extraction, These areas

were cleared by front-end loaders.

Aclivities ceased prior to 1979 and, aucord-

ing to local reports, the cxcavated areas were

completely cleared of mangtoves. Present

observations indicate an increase in mangrove

numbers becuuse seedlings are rooting on the

exposed mudflats and sedimentation ts also

taking place,

South of the Middle Beach area in the Jate

1970. LC. built evaporation ponds whose

senward embankments protrude into the salt

marsh areas and oceasionally into the man-

grove belt. This situation continues south-

eastwards as tar as Swan Alley Creek and

North Arm Creck. The ensuing effect on

mangrove developnient is noticeably different

from that in the River Light area. The sea-

ward advance of the mangrove fringe has

been negligible: approximately 0-3 hectares

along a coastline of 34 km, The lack of seaward

development of the mangroves may be due to

a lack of sedimentation there, Study of the

1949 aerial photographs indicates sedimen-

tabon occurring at the creek mouths, Small

Wlistributary mouth shoals indicative — of

ordinary terrigenous sediment [ransport are

present at each estuary, As the distributary

mouth shoals are absent In the 1981 photo-

graphs, T assume that the placement of the

evaporating ponds has halted or retarded

lerrigenous sediment supply fo the coast,

The northern litteral movement of sand

from the southern metropolitan coast could

also have acted as a source of sediment supply,

Culver? has suggested littoral sand movement

rates in the order of 11,500-19,000 m*/ year.

It is possible that some of the finer fraction

may have been transported in suspension jcross

Barker Inlet and deposited along the coastline

between St Kilda and Pl Gawler — the

coastline south of this area woald receive

littl: of no sediment as it 1 shrelded by

Torrens Island. Construetiow of the Outer

Harbour breakwater and reclamation along

the weslern shoreline of LeFevre Peninsula

may have reduced the amount of suspended

sediment reaching the mangrove areas,

Culver! also states that sutvey figures for the

Outer Harbour areq suggest an aceunilation

+Culver, Ro (1970) Final Summary Repart on

Reach Frosion studies. Dept of Civil Engincer

ing, University of Adelaide. Unpwhl,

186

fale of sand and Weed in the order of 26,800

m'/year, This area may now be acting as a

sink for sediment being transported north-

wards along the metropolitan coast, This

would account for the still-stand condition

of the mangrove front, assuming the view held

by Bird (1972) that mangroves need a mud

hank in order to establish themselves.

An inland advance of mangroves appears

to have taken place between the Gawler River

and Fresh Water Creek. Closer examination

however reveals that the 1949 mangrove stand

consisted mainly of immature trees, while in

198] these trees have matured and so there is

a larger area covered by canopy. This is not

the case in the area of coast between St Kilda

and Swan Alley Creek. Mangrove vegetation

has increased inland at an approximate rate

of 17 m/year, and all of the increase has been

inside the embankment, which was construted

in 1895. Litthke or no seaward advance has

been detected over the past 45 years. This may

be due to a retardation in terrigenous sedi-

ment input, assuming that mangrove stands

will advance over a suitable seaward mud

bank as appears to have been the case at

Light River (see below).

Progradation in the Light River area

Comparison of Figs 2 and 3 reveals two

changes: the seaward spread of mature man-

groves has increased at an aVerage of approxi-

mately 18.2 m/year and the braided drainage

pattern of a tide-dominated system across the

mud pan has altered to the present system of

fewer, larger channels. This has been con-

firmed by ground inspection. The landward

spread of mangroves is less dramatic than the

seaward spread and initially proceeds along

(he banks of tidal creeks and channels. This

is because mangroves need to be flushed twice

daily by the tide (Specht 1972), The presence

of the pre-existing mud flat upon which the

mangroves advanced therefore supports the

opinions of Thom (1967) and Bird (1972).

who considered that mangroves do not

directly cause progradation: rather they con-

solidate it,

The Swan Alley Creck aren

Actial photographs taken by the RAAP in

1935 show this area to he relatively free from

man-made interference—the only exception

being an embankment (which was completed

40 years previously), Wester’ stated that

(. E. BURTON

(A SHEL Ban PT] varlnin MA GHOVES:

2 saver ES S] Matune MANGROVES

Fig. 2, Light River area (1949).

Te suet sec | | EG enon fiioernven *

L saMnnte (SE Meru mancsoves ‘ Som

(1982).

Fig. 3, Light River area

MANGROVE

the embankment, built with the intention of

reclaiming land behind it, had three outlet

valves placed to allow outflow of accumulated

water after flood tides. Examination of the

1894 plans from the Surveyor-General's office

shows na such valves in the area. However,

gaps iu the embankment allowed the creeks

to flow and allowed natural drainage ta occur

unimpeded, Mangroves within this area are

uble to survive as they are within the inter-

tidal regime and continuous tidal flushing

Helps keep soil salinity down to a tolerable

level,

From 1935 (to 1981 the mangroves ad-

vanced inland at a rate of approximately

\7m/year. Table | gives an indication of the

landward Inerease in area of the mangrove

stand. A study of various acrial photographs

between 1935 and 1981 indicates that man-

groves advance inland by firstly colonizing the

banks and adjacent flood areas of the nume-

rous. tidal crecks,

Colonization continues until the imtercreek

areas are crowded with mature trees, and any

continuing colonization occurs at a slower

rate across the salt pan, There ts little or na

noticeable seaward spread of mangroves in

ihis area (Figs 4 & 5).

Discussion

The coastline between Light River and

Swan Alley Creek can be considered to have

three distinet areas of mangrove development:

(i) the Light River area in which mangrove

development is seaward across a pre-existing

mud bank; (ii) the Pt Gawler-St Kilda area

where the mangroves are stationary; and (in)

the Swan Alley Creek area where there is a

rapid inland advance of mangroves.

The origin of the mud bank in the Light

River arca poses an interesting problem be-

cause mangrove progradation occurred only

after 1949 (Fig. 2.), The mangrove stand at

the time Was mature and no progradation had

us yel taken place, A possible explanation may

Tarte to lnerease in nunerave stands fram 1949

to 1982,

Area of mature mangrove stands

Swan Alley

(Landward increase)

River Light

(Seuward increase)

1935 _ 299 hectares

1949 168 heelares 456 hectares

1982 356 hectares 865 hectares

DEVELOPMENT NORTH OF ADELAIDE 187

iin.

TE] ein Manipacues

ze [oS same

[E53 marie panysnuyes

Fig. 4: Swan Alley Creek area (1936).

Be — ei harvey

Fig. 5. Swan Alley Creek area (1942)

CS seer 19 waTuITe MANCHOVES

188 T. E, BURTON

be due to a sudden change in sedimentation

rate at the mouth of the Light River. This

change in sedimentaion may owe its origin

to the settlement and clearing of the North

Adelaide plains. Smith® describes the settle-

ment of the plains initially by pastoralists

from around 1838 and thereafter by farmers

on 80 acre blocks. He blamed the farmers for

the destruction of the then existing natural

ecosystem of scrub and extensive woodland.

As a consequence, the surface water runoff

was unchecked and unbound soil could be

washed away during winter rainfall. Thus

river sediment load would have increased and

may have contributed to the mudbank at the

Light River area. A contribution to the mud-

bank sediments could also have come from

the extensive seagrass banks that lie seawards

of the area. Davies (1970) indicated the sig-

nificant role played by sea grasses in contri-

buting calcareous material to shorelines. Ana-

lysis of the composition of sediments of the

mud bank could confirm or negate the above

hypothesis.

South of the Light River area (with the

exception of parts of Gawler Beach), there is

little or no mangrove progradation. Lack of

terriginous sedimentation is probably due to

the emplacement of evaporating ponds by

L.C.I. along the shoreline, as well as man-

made interference with the littoral drift north-

wards from the metropolitan beaches. This

has resulted in the termination of water flow

from numerous small rivers and creeks, The

input of calcareous material from adjacent

sea grasses should be similar to that in the

+ Smith, D. L. (1979) Land use and Groundwater

History of the Northern Adelaide Plains. Report

for the Engineering and Water Supply Depart-

ment, Adelaide. Unpubl.

Light River area, as there are extensive sea

grass banks offshore; this, however, does not

appear to be the case. The calcareous sedi-

ments from the seagrasses do not appear to be

accumulating on the adjacent shore. This can

be determined because (i) there is apparently

no build up of an offshore mud bank and,

(ii) the average pneumatophore length of the

mangroves is similar to those of the Light

River area. This implies that there is no ex-

cessive sedimentation in that area, as pneu-

matophore length (measured from the root)

usually increases in the event of faster sedi-

mentation (Chapman 1976).

In the Swan Alley Creek area the mangrove

stand is advancing inland so that the area

between the embankment and the evaporation

ponds must now lie within the eulittoral zone

(Macnae 1966). Examination of the con-

struction drawings for the embankment re-

veals that the landward fringe of the man-

grove stand in 1894 was located along the

embankment site. With the landward advance

of the mangrove stand, the implications are

that there has been a rise in sea level, a drop

in land level or a combination of both.

Culvert believes the effective value of M.S.L.

rise/century to be .274 m/c. This figure is a

combination of a calculated land sinkage in

the Semaphore-Pt Adelaide area of .183 m/c

and an eustatic rise in M.S.L. of .091 m/c.

A continuous rise in M.S.L. indicates that the

advance of the mangroves will continue to-

wards the evaporation pond boundaries.

Acknowledgements

I am grateful to Mr R. I. Thomas (Kinhill

Pty Ltd) for advice and criticism. I also thank

Dr V. A. Gostin for reading the manuscript.

This work was carried out under a research

grant from the Coast Protection Board.

References

Biro. E. C. F. (1972) Mangroves and Coastal

Morphology in Cairns Bay, North Queensland.

J. Trop. Geog. 35, 11-16.

Butter. A. J. (1977) Distribution and Sediments

of Mangrove Forests in South Australia. Trans.

R. Soc. S. Aust., 101(1), 35-44.

Bye, J. A. T. (1976) Physical Oceanography of

Gulf St Vincent and Investigator Strait. Jn

C.R, Twidale, M. J, Tyler & B. P. Webb (Eds).

“Natural History of the Adelaide Region”.

orien Society of South Australia Inc.: Ade-

aide).

CHAPMAN, VY. J. (1976)

(Cramer: Los Angeles).

Mangrove vegetation.

Davies, G. R. (1970) Carbonate Bank Sedimen-

tation, Eastern Shark Bay, Western Australia.

In Carbonate Sedimentation and Environment,

Shark Bay, Western Australia. Amer. Assoc.

Petrol. Geologists. Mem (13).

FirMAN, J. B. (1967) Stratigraphy of Late Caino-

zoic deposits in South Australia. Trans. R.

Soc. S. Aust. 91, 165-78.

KING, R. J. (1981) Mangroves and saltmarsh

plants. /n Clayton, M. N. & King, R. J. (Eds)

Marine Botany: an Australasian Perspective.

(Longman Cheshire: Melbourne) pp. 308-28.

MANGROVE DEVELOPMENT NORTH OF ADELAIDE 189

KraATOCHVIL, M., HANNON, N. G., CLarKE, L. D. Specut, R. L. (1972) The Vegetation of South

(1972) Mangrove Swamp and Salt Marsh Com- Australia, (2nd Edtn) (Govt Printer: Ade-

munities in Southern Australia. Proc. Linn. Soc. laide).

N.S.W. 97(4) 262-74. THom, B. G. (1967) Mangrove Ecology and

MCNag, W. (1966) Mangroves in Eastern and Deltaic Geomorphology: Tabasco, Mexico. J.

Southern Australia. Aust. J. Bot. 14, 67-104. Ecol. 55, 301-43.

STRATIGRAPHY OF THE CAMBRIAN-? EARLY ORDOVICAN, MOUNT

JOHNS RANGE, NE OFFICER BASIN, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY M. C. BENBOW

Summary

A revision of the Cambrian to?Early Ordovician stratigraphy of the northeastern Officer Basin,

South Australia, has been based on mapping of the Mount Johns Range.

STRATIGRAPHY OF THE CAMBRIAN-7EARLY ORDOVICIAN,

MOUNT JOHNS RANGE, NE OFFICER BASIN, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

by M. C, BENRow*

Summary

Binaow, M, C. (1982) Stratigraphy of the Cambrian-’Rarly Ordovician, Mount tohns

Range, NE Officer Basin, South Australia, Trans, R. See. §. Aust WO(d), L9I-2tl, 30

November, 1982,

A revision of thé Cambrian to Early Ordoyician stratigraphy of the northeastes i OMicer

Basin. South Australia. hus been based on mapping of the Mount Johns Range,

The Marla Group is defined and includes (in wseending order) the Wallatinna Forma-

lion (new name), Observatory Hill Beds aod Oolarinna Member (new name), the Arcoeil-

linna Sandstone (new name), Mount Johns Conglomerate and Apamurra Member (redefined

and pew name respectively), and the Trainor: Hill Sandstone (redefined ).

Recurrent tectonic rejuvenation of highlands in the north during the Canbrian-Ordovician,

led to deposition of Muvial conglomerutes and sandstones which fine southwards to intertongue

with shallow murine or lacustrine sediments, Sedimentation in the south had a daminanfly

soulhwesl provenance,

The Marla Group was partly eroded prior to deposition of the overlying Munda Sequence,

Deposition commenced in the Early Ordovician with the Kyilkaoora Formation (new pame),

a fluvial sequenee which passes up into the deltaic io shallow marine Mount Chandler

Sandstone,

Conditions were tectonically more stable during sedimentation of the Munda Sequence

compared to the Marla Group,

Key Worps: Cumbrian, stratigraphy, Officer

ulkalt playa,

Introduction

The Mount Johns Range located an the

northeast margin of the Officer Basin (Fig. 1)

offers the best exposures of Palaeozoic sedi-

ments of the Officer Basin in S.A. Krieg

(1972a, 1973) first described these rocks and

divided them into two main sequences, the

Marla Sequence then thought to be Mid-Late

Cambrian, and the unconformubly overlying

?Ordovician-Devonian Munda Sequence.

This paper presents the mapping results of

principally the lower sequence. The work was

carried out in conjunction with the drilling

of SADME, Byilkavora-1 and Marla-1A and

-/B in the investigation of the oi) source tock

potential of the Early Cambrian Observatory

Hill Beds (Pitt et al. 1980, Benbow & Pitt

19791, Benbow 19807),

Geological Setting

The Mount Johns Range is a Very gentle

west-pluuging synecline wilh a prominent cast

und north margin of same 20 km length (Fig,

2), Dips of bedding are generally between

5°-10", The highest point of the range 4s

Mount Johns, over 100 m above plain level,

=S.A. Dept of Mines & Energy, P.O, Box (51.

Fustwood. S. Atist, 3063.

Basin, Marke Group, Observatory Hill Beds,

The regional setting is summarised using the

nomenclature of Krieg (1973) as set out in

Figure 3. The Proterozoic crystalline basement

to the basin crops out to the northwest (40

km) as the Musgrave Block and to the south

(35 km) as the Ammaroodinna Inlier (Krieg

1972b), Racks exposed in the inher jnehide

schists, gneisses and pegmatoids for which

Webb (1973)4 obtained a Rb/Sr sage of 1 000-

1050 Ma.

The Adelaidean Rodda Beds crop aut imme-

diately to the north and east. These sediments

include; “Grey-green and khaki siltstones,

caleareous or dolomitic, laminated in’ part,

Limestone and dolomite beds, grey, fine-

grained, occasionally sandy or silly, in part

laminated. FPeldspathic and calcareous sand-

stones, medium to coarse grained pebble and

1Benbow, M. C. & Pitt, G. M, (1979) Byil-

kagora-| Well Completion Report, S. Aust. Dept

Mines & Energy report 79/115 (Conpublished)

“Benbow. M. C. (1980) Marla-lA, -IB Well

Completion Report. S, Aust. Dept Mines &

Energy report 80/22 (unpublished).

* Webb, A, W. (1972) Geochronology of the

younger granites of the Musgrave Block, Am@del

project 1/1/123. Progress report 8 9 und 1,

S. Aust, Dept Mines (nnpublished)

192 M. C. BENBOW

132 133"

+ mounTsoHns +

RANGE

0 BLOCK +sruby AREA a

Slee ae “ieee tts

] . ‘.

aers

ret , eon $4 BYILKAOORA-

Om Vw +} MARLA41A-18

Pu 27°

0 < OFFICER-+1

Pal wt

JORKSGATES™

AUSTRALIA

— »$ — + ——

AUSTRALIA

CP OFFICER

: “> WANNA-T

[oa

nm:

EUCLA

Orw

WESTERN SOUTH

AUSTRALIA | AUSTRALIA

anne

Mesozoic. (Eromanga Basin)

Permian Permian (Arckaringa Basin)

Devonian (undifferentiated)

Munda Sequence

Pow Wanna Beds

Pal Lens Sandstone

VVEnV [ve Table Hill and

Kulyong Volcanics

| tlw Wirrildar Beds

Co Pk 9) Punkerri Beds

Adelaidean—

Cambrian units,

PALAEOZOIC

Arcoeillinna Sandstone

Observatory Hill Beds

Wallatinna Formation

undifferentiated

[— OFFICER BASIN

PROTEROZOIC

eb Pindyin, Wright Hill Beds

Trainor Hill Sandstone

Mount Johns Conglomerate | Undifferentiated

Rodda Beds and undifferentiated Adelaidean units

Se a ee a

Fig. 1.

ad > igi fee

Fig. 2. View southwards of eastern margin of

Mount Johns Range. (i) Flat low lying terrain

with minor outcrop of Observatory Hill Beds:

(ii) Low lying ridge of Arcoeillinna Sandstone;

(iii) The area immediately flanking the range is

underlain by Mount Johns Conglomerate; (iv)

Prominent ridge of Trainor Hill Sandstone.

cobble conglomerate bands” (Krieg 1973,

p. 12), These were correlated approximately

with the Marinoan Amberoona Formation

and Balcanoona Formation of the Adelaide

Geosyncline.

The apparently conformable overlying

sequence (Fig. 3) of conglomerate and arkose

aaa EL aE

“> MUNYARAI-1 t “4MT WILLOUGHBY-1 >

“Po =} KARKARO-1

KILOMETRES

|| Birksgate—1

Krurnaroo—™

Carbonates in Sub—

Arckaringa Basin

troughs

GAWLER

BLOCK KILOMETRES

oO 250

va2° —

Crystalline basement

i DinC RS BIIP SA.Departmentol Minestand Energy >

KRIEG (1973) THIS PAPER

MUNDA

SEQUENCE Mount Chandler Sandstone | SEQUENCE

Ordovician

Mount Chandler

Sandstone

Byi|kaoora Formation Ordovician

Trainor Hill Sandstone

Mount

— ~ Johns

Conglom

Trainor Hill Sandstone

Apamurra_# Mount Johns

Mbre- Conglamerate

To Py aa

Arcoeillinna Sandstone

Oolarinna Member

erate

Observatory ~

Hill Beds >

Rodda Beds

MARLA SEQUENCE

Middle—Late Cambrian

MARLA GROUP

Early ~-Late Cambrian

Observatory Hill

Beds

Wallatinna Formation

Adelaidean Rodda Beds Adelaidean

NSA Ricuumetel Musdorot t

Fig. 3. Revised and previous stratigraphic nomen-

clature.

(Mount Johns Conglomerate) on the northern

margin of the Mount Johns Range (Fig. 4),

intertongues with carbonate, claystone and

siltstone with associated chert that were cor-

related with the Cambrian Observatory Hill

Beds (Wopfner 1969) 250 km southwest of

Mount Johns (Fig. 1). The Observatory Hill

Beds are overlain by the Trainor Hill Sand-

CAMBRIAN STRATIGRAPHY NE OFFICER BASIN

KILOMETRES

2 3

Wallatinna Formation Type Section

Wallatinna Formation

Observatory Hill Beds and

Wallatinna Formation

Oolarinna Member of Observatory Hill Beds

Observatory Hill Beds

Arcoeillinna Sandstone

11,12,13

14,15

16a,b

16c

420

ie}

EOBK i

14 77 Mie

Yili

ank and Bore

Apamurra Member —

Mount Johns Conglomerate

Apamurra Member —

Mount Johns Conglomerate

Trainor Hill Sandstone Type Section

Byilkaoora Formation

Trainor Hill Sandstone

Byilkaoora Formation

Eastern Officer Basin drillhole 12

82—

oes

x ae

193

STRATIGRAPHY OF

MOUNT JOHNS RANGE

Blue Hills

Sandstone

Indulkana Shale

\ VG

Mount Chandler eteece|

Sandstone

, ne

Byilkaoora Formation ——

Trainor Hill Sandstone

Dolomitic sandstones

Apamurra Member—

Trilobite trace fossil *

Mount Jahns Conglomerate

Arcoeillinna Sandstone

Observatory Hill Beds

(Oolarinna Member)

chert nodule horizon—ch

ferruginous chert—fs

Observatory Hill Beds

Wallatinna Formation

Conglomerate F

Rodda Beds

Munda Sequence

ORDOVICIAN

DEVONIAN

Maria Group

CAMBRIAN

ADELAIDEAN

Umberatana

Group

Section

Faull wraann

S.A. Deparlmentot Mines and Energy

Fig. 4. Geological map of the Mount Johns Range, showing location of measured sections.

194 Mot

stone (which ulso intertongues with the Mount

Johns Conglomerate), a sequende of feleds-

pathic and lithic sandslones. These three for-

mations (Krice 1972a, 1979) were grouped

together and narnted the Marla Sequence,

The Marla Sequence is disconformahly

overlain by the ?Barly Ordovieian-Devonian

Munda Sequence, consisting of the Mount

Chandler Sandstone, Indulkana Shale, Blue

Hills Sandstone and Cartu Beds (in ascending

order).

Murla Group

This paper mtroduces two few formations

und Iwo new members into the sequence (Fis

3), namely the Wallatinna Formation and

Arcoeillinna Sundstone, and the Oolarinna

Member of the Observatory Hill Beds ane

Apamurra Member of the Mount Johns Con-

glomerate respectively, The Marla Sequence

of Krieg (1973) ts caised in status lo Marla

Group (Fig. 3),

Wallatinna Formation (new name)

Krieg (1973) used the nume Mount Johns

Conglomerate to eticompass all conglomerates

un the margin of the Mount Johns Range,

Detailed mapping has shown there are several

important lithological breaks within the con-

glomerates and the interbedded sandstones thet

Kriex named the Trainor Hill Sandstone (Fig.

3)_ Arkose and cenglomenile in the lower part

of the Marla Group that interiongue with

carbonate, claystone and siltstone of the

Observatory Hill Beds. are tithologically dis-

tinct from sandstones. and conglomerates

higher in the sequence, Pitt ef a@l. (1980) ip-

formally named these lower coarse clastics

the “Davies Bore Conglomerate’. blowever-

becuuse of prior usage of that fame, they are

called herem the Wallatinna Formation, The

name is derived from Wallatinna Water Hole

10 km south of the Mount Johns Range on

the EVERARD 1|;250000 map sheet,

The formation is made up of thin to very

thin wou flat-bedded, course- to granule-xrained

arkose and interbedded red-brown to green

siltstone, claystone, calcareous arkose and

conglomerate. Extensive outcrops occur on

the northern margin of the range where the

formation is over 260 m thick, but it crops out

poorly in the cast and south, Conglomerates

were mlersected in Byilkaoora-l (Benbow &

Pid 19791) on the southeast margin of the

range and erop out poorly io the vicinity of

Wallatinna Water Hole.

BENHOAY

Litholasy

The type section is located on (he northern

margin of the runge (Figs 4—6; sections 1, 2).

Here Ihe arkoses are nolubly very coarse with

litle intergranular matrix. They are moderately

well-sorted (but range from poorly- jw well.

sorted) with generally angular to sub-angular

(the larger rains can be subrounded to round)

quartz, potash feldspar and plagioclase with

trace amounts of biotite, muscovite and lithic

trains. Plagioclase often shows alteration ta

sericile in contrast with the more dominant

fresh potush feldspar (Steveson 1979+). Re-

worked clasts of Rodda Beds, namely green

and red sillstone and claystone, occur in Minor

amounts.

Interbedded fed, brown and green siltstone

and claystone have the same mineralogy as

the “rkose and muy have courser sund grains

dispersed throughout (Steveson 1979"), Near

the top of the sequence sandy sillstane and

vlaystone are poorly-sorted, with the coarser

erains being randemly distributed, Also inter-

bedded are dark, fine, calearcous arkoses in

whieh authigenie calcite may form up to 25%

of the rock, There is evidence for replacement

of some of the detrital minerals by calcite

which occupies most of the intergranular

space, hut it is uncertain whether ir has re-

pluced an original mineral matrix or original

pore space (Steveson 19791),

The grain size of the arkose does nol show

un overall upwards fining in the sequenee.

However beds of very coarse arkose often fine

upwards into siltstone and claystone or fine-

grained calcareous prkose, thus defining a

eyelicity of sedimentation, The sequence is

generally thin to very thin and flat bedded, and

in the lower part some beds may he traced

For wt least 350 nm, Cross-hedding and ripples

are Hot common, but those observed suggest

a northwest provenance.

West of the type section the sequence is

guite different (Pigs 4, 7; section 3), Here

about 59 m of cobble conglomerate (Fig. 9a)

overlies 60 m of thick-bedded very coarse

arkose. The base is not exposed. The conglo-

merate thiekens toward the west and the clast

size ulso Increases Up to 30 cm diameter in this

direction, The cobbles and boulders are

venerally very well rounded and show a wide

4Sleveson, A, G. (1979) Pelrographi¢ description

of 10 rocks. AMDBEL report GS 1693/80 (iun-

Tublished ),

CAMBRIAN STRATIGRAPHY NE OFFICER BASIN 195

SECTION 1a—1b

SECTION 1c

1007-44 210 m

SECTION 1b

METRES

SECTION 2b

ARCOEILLINNA

SANDSTONE

SECTION 2b

Observatory Hill Beds

and Wallatinna

Formation Intertongue

METRES

SECTION 2a

404

METRES

SEDIMENTARY FEATURES ROCK COLOUR

White_

Recumbent folded cross—bedding — — >) Red

Cross—bedding

Ripples Brown __

Green

Pink —

Purple —

Clay gall_ _ Orange

Micaceous Yellow

Black_ __

Clast impressions

Worm burrows Grey —_

Algal lamination

Chert nodules

Layered massive, breccia chert _ chy Mm

Ferruginous horizons.

Drn GM

Fig. 6. Reference for measured sections.

range of lithologies. White granitoid clasts

predominate and other clasts include rare

black chert and weathered grey limestone. No

imbrication is apparent. The matrix is dark,

fine grained, may be calcareous and is very

immature.

Overlying these conglomerates are kaolinitic

arkose and claystone. Outcrop is poor and the

rocks are very weathered. The sequence here

SA. Department ol Mines and Energy

Sedimentary

Features

{Sandstone (very fine—coarse)

‘}dolomitic

Petrographic thin section — RS 102

82-312 S.A.Departmeniol Mines and Energy

is sharply overlain by the Mount Johns Con-

glomerate which contains clasts of coarse

arkose of the underlying Wallatinna Forma-

tion,

Conglomerate beneath the Observatory Hill

Beds was intersected in Byilkaoora-1 on the

south-eastern margin of the Mount Johns

Range (Benbow & Pitt 1979!). The sequence,

106 m thick, is remarkably uniform with well-

196 Mt

Muttoy L9eayIOH

PAYA BARE

Pha elite

ule ind Merniwy —

THIMAL A) RALILAYA ARE

ANT eee

Aisa) (dre cane

CANONS UM he

oBseqvATORT

HELBEDS

Conclave yiuetietorre Orel

eos vnien (YR MeVIRTER ete

FUSE PLAIN

Ahir tid sr rieet Lined

sent tH00 Foe me

AVKO# FUE

OLATHE the

Lo ehentint inte ott nnte

Pit a

ROOUA HEDS\

ra ea Ae Sanaetrra nied News yi

WALLATINNAT

FORMATION

Fie, 7. Facies variation of the Wallatinna Por

mation and the Observatory Hill Beds.

rounded clasts of pink gramtoids, small, elon-

gate pebbles of grey-green and pink-brown

dolomitic siltstone, The clasts average 0,1—-4.0

om diameter and range up to 10 cm diameter.

Imbrication is evident in places and the

matrix is silty, sandy and calcitic, ‘with

secondary dolomite. “Shadow” effects are

observed in the form of a thicker, framework-

free, carbonate-matrix zone beneath many

clasts that show a ferruginows skin on top

(Benbow & Pitt 1979'). In the uppermost

10 m there is a red iron oxide staining in the

matrix (not apparent in the overlying car-

honate) and the care is also brecciated with

black carbonaceous matter infillimge the frac-

Hines

Laviranment af deposition

On the northwestern margin of the Mount

johns Range, the formation is composed of

Muvial arkoses and fan-conglomerates. These

pass laterally eastwards into cyclically de-

posited sediments marginal to the playa-lake

environment of the Observatory Hill Beds.

The increase in clast size toward the northwest

aud several cross-beddiny observations indicate

ab source in that direction. The distinetly dif-

BENBOW

ferent fan-glomerates in Byilkaoora-1| and in

the Wallatinna Waterhole area were possibly

derived from the south and east.

The freshness and ungularily of most of

the feldspar and the Wedge shape of the coarse

clastics (Fig. 7) suggest deposition close lo a

lectonieally active zone (Polk 1968).

Horizons with fresh rounded grailis suggest

aridity.

Age, stratigraphic relationships and correlation

No fossils have been recovered from the

formation and ho Rb-Sr dating caried out,

The overlying and intertonguing Early Cam-

brian Observatory Hill Beds indicate the

Wallatinna Formation is probably Early

Cambrian in part,

Although the base of the Wallatinna For-

mation is locally apparently conformable with

the wneerlying Rodda Beds, there are four

reasons for suggesting an unconformity.

i, the lithological contact is sharp (although

obscured by Holocene sand cover),

i, the steep dips and moderately tight folding

sven in the Rodda Beds do not oceur in the

overlying sediments.

ii, the sequence underlying the Woallatinns

Formation on the northern part of the

range is somewhat different from that

occurring beneath the arkoses on the

eustern margin, Dark indurated dolomite

beds that ovcur helow seetion 1 are

apparently thissing below section 4 (Fig.

7).

iv. if the similar urkoses and conglomerates

that outcrop east of Mount Johns Bore

were used to define the base of the Walla-

tinny Formation-Observatory Fill Beds se-

quence, this section would be [85 m thicker

than any of the other mieasured sections,

The Wallatinna Formation may be corre-

lated with the Jower part of the Wirrildar

Beds of the Birksgate area (Fig, 1) on the

northern margin of the Officer Basin (Major

1971, 1973). Correlation is also made with

the fine-grained, more mature sandstones be-

heath the Observatory Hill Beds intersected

in Murnaroa-1 and Wilkinson-1 (Gatehouse

197945 |979H") in the southeast part of the

OMficer Basin.

report Murnaroo-1. S. Aust. Dept Mines &

Energy report 78/152.

"Gatehouse, C G, (1979h)

report Wilkinsen-1 S. Aust.

Enerey report 78/88,

Well

Dept

completion

Mines &

CAMBRIAN STRATIGRAPHY NE OFFICER BASIN 7

Observatory Hill Beds

Krieg (1973) correlated the carbonate, silt-

stone und claystones bearing chert horizons

that overlie and jitertongue with the Walla-

tinna Formation, and which outcrop around

the castern and northern margin of the Mount

Johns Range, with the Observatory Hill Beds

250 km southwest near Observatory Hill

(Wopfner 1969). These sediments crop out

poorly through Quaternary talus and fload-

plain sediments and best exposures are in

crecks and on the flanks of silcrete-capped

mesas,

SADME, Byilkaoora-| intersected a com-

plete sequence of Observatory Hill Beds

(224 m between 379-156 m depth), and the

first oil shows for the Officer Basin make this

an important reference section (Fig. 4, 7).

The section has been described by Benbow &

Pitt (1979), Pitt et al, (1980) and While &

Youngs (1980),

The sequence in Byilkaoora-l can be divided

into five units (Benbow & Pitt, 1979!) briefly

deseribed as follows, Silty dolomite and intra-

formational breccia occur al the base (Unit 1:

376.0-379.4 m). This is overlain by silty to

sandy dolomite. greyish. red to brown in

colour, which has a poorly defined wispy

lamination (Unit 2; 322,5-376,0 m).

Sedimentary cycles (2 m—50 mm_ thick)

oecur throughout Unit 3 (259.0-322,5 m) in

well-laminated organie-rich grey dolomite,

limestone and claystone. Nodules. interlayers

and intraformational breccia of chert are

common. Calcite Which occurs asx “feathery”

rosettes and cuneiform, crystals has been

identified pseudomorphing trona and shortite

respectively (Pitt e/ a/. 1980), Unit 4 (200,5—

255,8 m) is composed of interbedded and

interlaminatecd| carbonate, claystone and silt-

stone. Colour is yatiable. Sedimentary cycles

oecur throughout, and calcite pseudomorphs

after cvaporite minerals occur below 248 m

Chert nodules sre eonspicuaus jn the top,

Above 200.5 m the sequence eradually changes

10 4 predominantly non-calcareous red-brown

claystone (Unit 5: 155.8 m-200.5 m).

Comparison of the Byilkaoera-! section with

ouferep,

There is very little exposure of the lower

part of the Observatory Hill Beds. About &

km north of Byilkaoora-1, very weathered and

bleached white siltstone and claystohe are

exposed on the flanks of a silerete-capped

SECTION 6 ARCOEILLINNA

[R-B | Wf JSANDSTONE

Lud

rs}

OOLARINNA MEMBER

As —— —— -__- =

WALLATINNA

FORMATION

82?—305 SADME

Fig. 8. Oolarinna Member of the Observatory Hill

Beds.

CAMBRIAN STRATIGRAPHY NE OFFICER BASIN 199

mesa. Interbedded are light-blue chert breccia,

chert-banded rocks and chert nodules. Rare

ripples once formed in carbonate or clay-

stone are replaced by chert (Fig. 9b).

Section 7 (Figs 4, 7) records at least 3 m

(the base is not exposed) of pebble conglo-

merate of the Wallatinna Formation above

which are cyclically deposited (now

weathered), thin-bedded to laminated silt-

stone, claystone and carbonate, with algal

plate breccia, stromatolites and chert horizons

(Fig. 9b,c). This interval of section 7 is

comparable to units 3 and 4 of Byilkaoora-1.

The cycles are variable in thickness, and

evaporite mineral moulds of shortite are pro-

minent, with fenestrated fabrics sometimes

well developed. Clasts of another evaporite

mineral (Fig. 9d) replaced by gypsum and

also by calcite, exhibiting a radiating needle

habit, are less commonly seen. These may be

pseudomorphs after trona.,

A series of shallow stratigraphic holes

(EOB 14, 15, 16 and 17) were drilled west

of Mount Johns Bore near a creek which also

offers some exposure (Fig. 4). In this section

the weathered siltstone, claystone and car-

bonate contain silt to very fine sand grains of

quartz, feldspar and mica. Evaporite mineral

textures were not observed in outcrop nor in

the drill core. These sediments overlie coarse

to granule arkose and minor indurated, dark-

coloured and fine-grained calcareous arkose

of the Wallatinna Formation,

In the creek south of section 4 (Figs 4, 9e)

there is a massive ferruginuous chert body,

0.5 m thick, that is part of an important

discontinuous marker horizon which can be

traced from near Byilkaoora-1 to the northwest

of Mount Johns. There are chert layers

(massive in part) chert breccia and discoidal

chert nodules which are up to 15 cm long in

section 5 (Figs 4, 7, 9c). The chert is

associated with thin to very thin bedded lime-

stone, siltstone and claystone. Evaporite

mineral moulds occur on some ofthe chert

laminae and nodule surfaces and also in the

core of some chert nodules. These are un-

identified, but they may have been shortite.

Polygon and tepee structures defined by fer-

ruginous autobrecciated cherts have been

recognised in section 5 (Figs 4, 7). Similar

massive chert-bearing carbonates crop out

near Wallatinna Water Hole, 35 km south of

Mount Johns.

Oolarinna Member (new name)

Overlying the chert bearing beds are red-

brown claystones and siltstones which crop

out moderately well and can be correlated

with unit 5 in Byilkaoora-1. Because of their

distinctive colour and their confinement be-

tween the chert-bearing beds and the overlying

ted brown sandstones (of the Arcoeillinna

Sandstone) they are named the Oolarinna

Member of the Observatory Hill Beds. The

name is derived from Oolarinna Hill, 50 km

southwest of the Mount Johns Range on

EVERARD 1:250000 map sheet.

Lithology

The sequence at the type section on the

northern margin of the Mount Johns Range

(Figs 4, 8, section 6) is 35 m thick and com-

mences with dirty, red-brown, thin to very

thin bedded, calcareous claystone and siltstone

with inter-bedded pebble conglomerate and

sandstone. Clasts include weathered, rounded,

green micaceous siltstone, orange-brown very

coarse arkose, and subrounded to angular

fragments of quartz and feldspar. Overlying

these lower beds and comprising most of the

sequence are red-brown, thin to very thin and

flat-bedded siltstone and claystone. These are

variably micaceous, and coarsen to very fine

sandstone halfway up the sequence.

The Oolarinna Member varies in thickness

from 45 m in Byilkaoora-1, 35 m at the type

section, to 22 m immediately adjacent in sec-

tion 5 (Fig. 7). This may reflect a general

thinning of the unit to the north, A similar

variation in thickness of the Oolarinna Member

in the north also suggests its erosion prior

to and during deposition of the overlying

Fig. 9a. Rounded cobble conglomerate of the Wallatinna Formation; b. Chert algal plate breccia and

ripples, Observatory Hill Beds, c,

marker of the Observatory Hill Beds;

Beds;

Cross-bedding in Arcoeillinna Sandstone;

Chert nodules and interlayered horizons from the chert

d. Gypsum pseudomorphs after ?trona, Observatory Hill

e. Massive ferruginous chert horizon from chert marker of Observatory Hill Beds; f.

g. Very thinly bedded claystone and siltstone of Apa-

murra Member of Mount Johns Conglomerate:

of Mount Johns Conglomerate overlain by (ii) Trainor Hill Sandstone: i.

h. (ia) Basal conglomerate and (ib) sandstone

(i) Interbedded sand-

stone and conglomerate of Mount Johns Conglomerate. (ii) Trainor Hill Sandstone. (iii) Byilkaoora

Formation. (iv) Mount Chandler Sandstone capping Mount Johns Range at Mt Johns.

Arcoeillinna Sandstone, Here the contact with

the Arcoelllinna Sandstone is sharp and ero-

sional, but further south it ts apparently a

gradational one with imterbedded sandstones

in the Wpper part of the Oolarinna Member,

Environment ef Deposition of the

Obvervatory Hill Bedy

White & Youngs (1980) and Pitt er al,

(1980) propose a non-marine alkaline playa

lake environment for Units 3-4 of the Obser-

valory Aill Beds in Byilkaoora-1, They suggest

close similarities between the earbonate- and

claystone-bearing cherts and evaporite mineral

pseudomorphs with the Laney Member

(Surdam & Stanley 1979) and the Wilkins

Peak Member (Eugster & Hardic 1978) of the

Bocene Green River Formation in (he U.S.A,

and with deposits at modern-day Lake Magadi

in Africa (Eugster 1969), Their reasons

include:

i the wecuirrence of sedimentary cycles.

i the occurrence of pseudomorphs after trana

and shortite,

iii the presence of cherts of similar sspect to

those described in the Jiterature.

These sediments in seetion 7 (Pies 4+ 7)

pass qorthwards into clavetone and siltstone

which are dolomitic and caleareous in part,

and which tack evaporite mineral pseude-

morphs, The Observatory Hill Beds as a whole

also thin northwards and intertongue with the

cyclically deposited arkoses of the Wallatinn

Formation. tn the nerthwesterii parts of the

Mount Johns Range the Observatory Hill

Beds may he absent, with the Wallatinna

Formation making up the bulk of, or the

entire section.

Toward the end of the Observatory Hill

Beds deposition, a major influx of fresh water

with subsequent lowering of pH resulted in the

formation of chert, which was ferruginous

and massive in part and included nodules up

ta 15 em long This marked the end of the

nlkali plava-lake environment and was most

likely a regional event possibly recorded as

far as 250 km southwest in the type section

of the Observatory Hill Beds {Wopfner

1969),

Sedimentation then proceeded with shallow-

water Ted-brown siltstone and claystane of the

Oolurinna Member under oxidizing canditions

Although herringbone cross-bedding byplieal of

tidal flat environments (Reineck and Singh

M. ¢, BENBOW

1973) has heen noted ar a number of localities,

no Irace fossils were recorded,

The Observatory Hill Beds intersected in

Marla-l, -1A and -18, 30 km southeast of

the Mount Johns Range (Fig. 1), are thicker

and guile different in character, There the

carbonates are light grey to dark (at depth).

\hin- to very thin-bedded, laminated to non

laminated and fine-prained. Limestone (with

traces of fluorspar) predominates jn the upper

80 m and dolomite in the lower 200 m. The

five-fold division of the Byilkagera-1 inter-

section does not apply and the oil shows and

calcite pseudomorphs after evaporite minerals

that include shortite and trona are absent. A

further difference is indicated by the chemical

composition of the organic matter, {Meck irdy

In Benbow | 980%),

Trilobites found in the upper carbonates in

Marla-| (Jago & Youngs 1981) indicate a

Marihe environment of deposition. The sundy

interbeds and intraglastic carbonates jndicate

shallow water, and the presence of silt- to

granule-size {poorly-sorted) detritus (the

coarser fraction is well-rounded) Suweests a

nearby source urea and periodic inflay of

sediment. The grain lithologies indicate a

metamorphic source which js possibly the

Ammaroodinna Inlier. Sedimentation was

rapid enouph to give rise to a reducing en-

vironment suggested by traces of pyrite and

the preservation of organic matter, A low-

Iving lund barrier that \was possibly an exten-

sion of the Ammaroodinna Inlier is suggested

he~ween Byilkebora-| and the Marta wells.

Ave and correlation of the Observatory

Hill Beely

Trilobites related to FEoredlichia are re

corded in the upper part of the Observatory

Hill Beds intersecied in Marla-1, and indicate

a probable Early Cambrian age for at feast

purt of the Observatory Hill Beds (Javo &

Youngs 1980), A ?Biconifites found pt the

Observatory Hill Beds type section led Gate-

house (1976) to suggest a late Barly Cambrian

t early Middle Cambrian age for the upper

part of the sequence,

Radiometric dating of the Observatory Hill

Beds is still at a very preliminary stage. A

SSr/"iSp 1.7146 + 0.0184) and a minimuny

0.0097) were obtained from six samples for

the Oolarinna Member in Byilkaoora-] (Webb

CAMBRLAN STRATIGRAPHY NE OFFICER TASES 201

197947), A model 2 isochron of 715 = 210

Ma (initial rare 'Se/*68r 07150 + 0.0248)

wis Obbuned from 10 samples for the Obser-

vatory Hill Beds in Murngroo-! (between

766.17 m and 28139 m) (Webb 1979h5).

‘This age compares with a Madel | isachran

al 7A) % $4 (initial ratio Sr /Sr 0.7121 +

6.0028) for the Adelaidean Rodda Beds in

SADME drill hole ROB [2 (Fig 4) a Madel

4 isuehron of 651 + 87 Mai (initial ristte:

—Sr/Se 0.7105 = O03) for Adetlaidean

Shales to the north of the Mount Johns Range

near Chambers Bluff (Webh 19789).

These Rb/Sr dates sugecst the age obtained

for the Observatory Hill Beds ts close ta the

hase of the Cambrun and indeed may in part

he Precambrian, Tn addition, they suggest these

tacks were nat affected by the Delamenan

Orogeny,

The red-brown claystone and siltstone of

the Oolarinna Merber of the Observatory Hill

Beds may he correlated with the Type Obser-

vatory Hill Beds peat Observatory Hill

PWopfner 1969), Unit 21 of the Type section

of the Observatory Hill Beds may mark the

base of the Arcociilinna Sandstone, and the

chert horizon in Unit 2 may he broadly com-

parable ja the chert marker horizon around

the Mount Johns Range,

RBevond the Officer Basin, the Observatory

Hill Beds ave correlated with part of the

Hawker Group of the Adelaide Geosyrcline

(Dalearno 1964) based on the Early Cam-

hrian age given the carbonates in Marla-}

(Jago & Youngs 1980),

Arcoeillinna Sandstone (new name)

Krice (7973) named the red and brown

feluspathic sandstones overlying the Obser-

vatory Hill Beefs, the Trainor Hill Sandstone

(Pig. 3), This formation can he further

subdivided info » lower red-brown feldspathic

and lithic sandstone, and an upper brown to

7 Webb. A. W. (19798) Geochrorolozy of the

Officer Basin. AMDEL project 1/1/7220. Pra-

press report No, 4, S. Aust. Dept Mines &

Fiierey. open file Eny. 3325, unpublished),

“Webb. A. W, (1979h) Genoenronology of the

OMeer Busin, AMDEL project 1/1/220. Pro-

gress report No. 5, S. Ausi. Dept Mines &

Prergy, open file Env. 2325 funpublished),

"Webb A, W. (1978) Geochronoloey of the

Officer Basin. AMDFI project 1/1/2320, Pro-

gress Report No. 3, S. Aust. Dept Mines &

Frergy, open file Env. 3325 funpublished),

light-coloured kaolinitic sandstone. These two

formations ure separated by conglomerate

with interbedded sandstone. The lower forma-

fion is herein named the Arcoeillinna Sand-

stone whilst the name Trainer Hill Sandstone

is retained for the upper sandstone. The name

Mount Johns Conglomerate is retained for the

intervening conglornerate and interbedded

sandstone.

The name Arcoeillinna is derived from

Arcocillinna Soak on the northwest margin

of the Mount Jobns Range. The formation

erops ot moderately well, forming in part a

distinct low-lying Hill parallel to and out from

the eastern margin of the range (Fig, 2). The

type area is located in the vicinily of section

8 (Fig. 4) on the eastern flank of the Mount

Johns Runge.

Lithalogy

The prominent red-brown sandstone in the

type area is very fine- to medium-pgrained,

moderately well-sorted, but very immature. Tt

varies from Frahle and porous to siliceous and

indurated, ‘The sandstone is interbedded with

claystone and siltstone similar to that occur-

ning in the Oolarinna Member of the Obser-

vatory Hill Beds. In addition, there are very

minor interbeds of wealhered pebhly horizons,

in which the clasts are composed of rounded,

Glongate, green, red-brown and white clay-

stone.

The composition of the sandstone ts usually

quartz (50%), potash feldspar (35%), minor

plagioclase, lithic grains (10%), and mus-

eovite and biotite (5% 1, according to White-

head (1979a"), The Tithie grains are corn-

posed of fine-grained muscovite (or sericite).

duarz and feldspar. and were probably de-

rived from a sediment or metasediment.

Mineral grains ate generally subangular to

angular, whilst the lithic grains tend to be

rounded. There is modification of grain boun-

daries by overgrowth of quartz and sometimes

of feldspar, Many of the zfains have a thin

film of red iron oxide which was present be-

fore compaction and accumulation of the

sediment. The interbedded siltstone and clay-

stone ix composed of quartz and feldspar

(35%), detrital muscovite and biotite (35% ).

1 Whitehead, S. G. (19794) Petrographic deserip-

tion of Byilkaoora-l, AMDPL report GS716/

202

together with sericite stained by iron oxide,

chlorite (3096).

The sandstone is generally croas-heduled

(Fig. 9f) but may be thin- to very thin-bedded

with flat laminations. Foresets are tangential

to tabular, and beds may be 1.0-2.5 m thick.

A sel of cross-bedded sandstone may be

capped by flat-bedded sandstone to claystone

that is usually thin-bedded to laminated and

rarely rippled. The base of both sandstone

and claystone-siltstone beds is ofien sharp.

Slump features are rarely observed,

On the northern margin of the range (Fig.

+: seetion 9) the sequence differs Trom the

type urea in that there jis liltle or no inter.

bedded siltstone and claystone. Kaolinitic,

white to red-brown, small and rounded pebbles

to granules of elaystone occur at the base, In

Byilkaoora-| (Benbow & Pitt 19791) the for-

mation consists of six upward fining cycles,

avid soft-sediment slump structures are not

incommon in the coarser sediments.

Environment af deposition

The thickness of the formation varies from

FO (Pig. 4: action 9) in the north to 98 rm

(Fig. 4: section 8) on the eastern flank of the

range. and 37 m in Byilkawora-1 in the south.

east Current directions indicate a major west

to southwest provenance, whilst the occur-

renee of coarser clastics in the north supgests

a northerly or northwestern source.

A fluvio-lacustrine environment of deposi-

tion is tentatively suggested for the Arco-

cilinna Sandstone. An aeolian influence js

intlicnted hy iron-oxide coatings on detrital

gratis und a fluvial enviroumernt by the pre-

sence of granule to very small pebble horizons

wl the base of cross-beds and scour-and-fill

structures,

Stratigraphio relationships and correlation

The lower boundary with the Qolarinna

Member of the Observatory Hill Beds is a

(ransitional one iit the type area and is placed

at the base of the first major sandstone which

overlies red-brown elaystone and siltstone of

the Oolarinna Member. In the north (Fig. 4;

section 9) the lower boundary is sharp and

clearly an erosional one, The upper heundary

with the Mount Johns Conglomerate his

always been observed to be sharp. suggesting

a hiatus,

The Arcoeillinna Sandstone is correlated

oy Uthological grounds with the Lennis Sand-

M. C, BENBOW

stone (Jackson Van de Graaff 1981) of the

Wester) Officer Basin, and with the Mood-

latana Formation of the Adelaide Geosyncline

{Daily 1956).

Mount Johns Conglomerate (redefined)

Sharply overlying the Arcoeillinna Sand:

stone is a sequence of light red-brown feld-

spathic sundstene, conglomeratic in part, with

pebble to boulder conglomerate at the base.

In the south, these sediments intertongue with

red-brown, variably dolomitic, silfstone and

claystone named herein the Apamyrra Metm-

ber (Fig, 92), The conglonierates crop out

poorly and are exposed mostly in creeks (Fig.

9h), the sandstones erop out as locally per-

sistent beds alang the east and north range

margins (Pig. 91), The regional extent of these

sediments is unknown.

The name, first used by Krieg (1973), is

derived from Mount Tohns on north-eastern

EVERARD 1:250000 map sheet. No type

section fas been measured, but the fortherh

margin of the Mount Johns Range. west of

EQOB13 (Pig. 4), is designated the type area

Lithvlogy

The formation is characterised by a poorly-

soried, dirty, reddish-coloured, basal pebbly to

bouldery conglomerate (Fig. %) and overlying

red-brown sandstone with conglomeratic

interbeds,

Clasis of the conglomerate are generally

well-rounded and represent diverse lithologies.

tneluding coarse (cldspathic sandstune or

arkose, quartzite, pegmatite, and quartz as

well as red. brown, yellow and white silt-

stone and claystone. Less resistant ¢lasts are

generally weathered, whilst the more resistant

clasts may reach LO-20 en in size. The matrix

is sandy to clayey, porous and puorly con.

solidated, and no imbricalion is apparent,

The overlying sandstone ts churacteristically

red-brown in colour, ind has a auarteitic

appearance. It is siightly feldspathic and

individual grains may he coaled by iron oxide

or clay. Sorting varies tram poar lo good.

hut is generally moderatc. Often preserved on

the tops of beds are rounded pebble impres-

sions and at the base. pebble horizons, The

dominant pebble lijhalogies are silistone ans

cluystane. Bedding is horigantal and thin to

moderaiely chick, and tabular cross-heddiny

is commen.

CAMBRIAN STRATIGRAPHY NE OFFICER BASIN 205

SECTION 10

APAMURRA MEMBER

82—304 SADME

Fig. 10. Apamurra Member of Mount Johns Con-

glomerate

Apamurra Member (new pame)

This name is given to the sequence of red-

brown, fine to very fine sandstone, siltstone

und claystone, which is dolomilic in part (Fig.

9g) and intertongues in the north with the

coarser clastics of the Mount Johns Conglo-

merate. The name is derived from Apamurra

Bore west of the Mount Johns Range, 5 km

NW of the Mintabie opal fields. The type sec-

tion is located on the southeast margin of

the Mount Johns Range (Figs. 4 and 10;

section 10).

These fine sediments crop out poorly, with

best exposures generally occurring in crezks.

They crop out only along the eastern part of

the range and are not known to occur e¢lse-

where.

lithology

At the base of the type section there is

about 7 m of conglomerate and sandstone

of the Mount Johns Conglomerate, They are

culeareous in part and pass up into calcareous

and dolomitic, red-brown, fine to very fine

sandstone and siltstone. The finer sediments

of the Apamurra Member have a bimodal

grain-size distnbuuion with fine to coarse,

ungular to subangular sand grains scattered

throughout, There is minor very thin-bedded,

light-green limestone near the base and light-

green interbeds of siltstone to fine sandstone

higher up. The sequence is flat-bedded and

very thinly-bedded, with minor tangential and

herringbone cross-bedding in coarser, well-

sorted sandy interbeds.

Thin sections (Whitehead 1979b!1) indicate

a composition as follows: quartz 5—-15%, feld-

spar 5—-15%, lithic grains 5-15% (minimum),

silt matrix heavily stained by iron oxide up to

at least 50-60%, and dolomite up to 85%.

South of section 10 (Fig. 4), bedding traces

which may have been made by trilobites (J.

Jago, pers. comm. 1979) are common in

places (Fig. 11 a, b). The most northerly

known occurrence of these trace fossils is at

the very top of section 12 (Fig, 4) in a red-

hrown, shaley claystone.

Environment of depasition of the Mount

Johns Conglomerate and Apamurra Member

The conglomerate-sandstone facies of the

Mount Johns Conglomerate thins towards the

|| Whitehead, 8. G, (1979b) Petrographic descrip-

tion. AMDEL report No. GS1128/80.

CAMBRIAN STRATIGRAPHY NE OFFICER BASIN

south from 78 m in section 13 to only 1.5m

in Byilkaoora-} (Fig, 12). Similarly the basal

conglomerate generally thins southward from

17,5 m in section 13 to 1.5 min Byilkaoora-1.

Section 1) (Fig. 12) shows a local thickening

of the conglomerate (to 26 m) which here

makes up the entire section. Clast size also

diminishes southward, These sediments are

considered to be piedmont fan deposits with

intertonguing fluvial and flood plain sediments.

A few cross-bedding measurements in the

north suggest. for there at least, a north-

westerly provenance,

The intertonguing dolomitic siltstone and

claystone were probably deposited in a

SECTION LOGATION

Mo lahne

, Titonie wee

ae HSily

Byilkaanea r,

* BYILKAOORA~1

Goin

Marie ielinniiin Brayaiiine Siltsione

fave Anmruity Mare lar —— =

Hirer Gatien re Tiber reer titd

Hua loon te teatey —

Piivial van mant tee

Dreyer Herts

Fig. 12, Facies variation, Mount Johns

merine,

Conglo-

205

shallow marine to tidal environment indicated

by lithology, herringbone cross bedding and

probable trilobite trace fossils, The marine in-

Nuence reached as far north as northeast

Mount Johns, indicated by the presence of

probable trilobite trace fossils in the upper-

most part immediately underlying the base

of the Trainor Hill Sandstone, The Apamutrta

Member thickens toward the south (based on

two sections only) suggesting a southerly

deepening of the marine basin.

Trainor Hill Sandstone (redefined)

Krieg (1973) first used the name derived

from Trainor Hill located on the southwestern

end of the Mount Johns Range. ‘The base of

the formation was placed immediately above

the Observatory Hill Beds whilst the upper

boundary was placed within the lawer part of

the Mount Chandler Sandstone (Krieg

1972a),

fhe Trainor Hill Sandstone is a sequence

of cross-bedded, Well-sorted, medium to very

fine sandstone with minor interbedded red-

brown siltstone and cluystane, and with minor

pebbly horizons near the base. The sandstone

becomes light red-brown. feldspathie and cal-

careous near the top, with minor sandy

dolomite.

The sandstone crops out prominently. form-

ing the picturesyue eastern scarp of the

Mount Johns Range (Fig. 2). The base of the

sequence visible below the scarp along the

castern margin is not exposed along the topo-

graphically more subdued southern margin,

Lithology

in the type section (Figs, 4, 14a, b): see-

tion Jéa, b) on the southeast parl of the

Mount Johns Range, the sequence is 370 m

thick aid commences with white, kaolinitic,

fine to very fine sandstone which sharply and

erosionally overlies the Apamurra Member of

the Mount Johns Conglomerate. The kaoliu

content may be as high as 40%—50% in the

lowermost 5 m-10 m, but decreases tu less

Fig. Lia. ’Rusophyeay in reddish very fine sandstone and siltswane of Apaniurra Member, south of

section 10, (1.5x natural seale). Photo by J. B. Jago.

b. Trilobite trace fossils in red-brown

sillstone (o very fine sandstone of Apamurra Member, south of section 10, (4% natural scale).

Photo by J, B. Jago. ¢. Recumbently overturned cross-bedding in basal part of Tramor Hill

Sandstone, d, Worm marks 68 m above base of type seerion, Tramor Hill Sandstane. —e. Dark

caleareous doloritic cross-bedded fine sandsione 320 m_ubove base of lype section of ‘Trainor Hill

Sandstone. f, Vertically upturned Mount Chandler Sandstone on faulied northwestern margin

of Mount Johns Range. g. Rounded while quartz yranules in clean, well-sorfed, line sandstone

of Mount Chandler Sandstore. . Skolithus in top of Mount Chandler Sandstone northwestern

Mount Johns Range,

206

than 15% for most of the formation. The

sandstone weathers light-brown, and is white

or light-grey or brown when fresh. Sorting ts

moderate to good. Cross-bedding is trough-

like near the base, and passes up from tan-

gential to tabular cross-bedding with flat tops

und bottoms. Five metres above the base,

crossbeds have been recumbently folded or

overturned (Fig, lic).

At about 60 m above the base, red mica-

veous siltstone-claystone, with very fine sand-

stone interbeds displaying herringbone cross

bedding and ripples, crops out, Thin- to very

thin-hedded, kaolinitic, very fine sandstone

with clay gall marks, desiccation cracks and

“worm” burrows (Fig, 11d) is also present.

From about 80 m—90 m, the sequence passes

up into = poorly-sorted = thin-bedded, white

vlaystone to fine sandstone with small pebble

to granule size, sub-angular, white quartz aod

rounded claystone,

From 90 m to about 300 m the sandstone

1s Very fine to fine, moderately- to well-sorted,

and kaoliniti¢c or slightly kaolinitic to feld-

spathic (35% potash feldspar), The sandstone

varies from being indurated to friable. There

are occasional clay gall or rounded clast im-

pressions, and associated medium to very

coarse quartz sand grains which are sub-

rounded to rounded, There are also interbeds

of red, micaceous, very thin-bedded claystone

and ailtstane with occasional trace fossils.

Between about 300 m and 370 m, the sand-

stone becomes calcareous and in part dolo-

mite with minor sandy dolomite interbeds,

The sandstone is often light-red (due to a red

iron oxide film along quartz and feldspar

grain boundaries), At 320 m, there is a pro-

minent dark weathering sandy dolomite (light-

red when fresh) which crops out around the

margin of Mount Byilkaoora (Fig, {1e)-

Ripples are common higher up,

Environment of depoyition

The formation thins toward the north A

section near Trainor Hill where the base is

nol exposed (Packham & Webby 19697") ex-

hihits at least 420 m of the formation, About

') Packham, G- H. & Webby, B. D. (1969) The

ecology of the Officer Basin in the EVERARD

1;250000 map area, for Marumba O11 N,L,

§. Aust. Dept Mines open file Envy, 1147 (un-

published),

M. ©, BENBOW

12 km north of the type section the sequence

is 120 m thick, Mere it is thickhedded and

has more coarse pebbly horizons.

Current directions are generally north-

easterly indicating the main provenance to the

southwest, However, easterly current directions

in the north and the presence there of conglo-

merate which fines and thins southwards,

indicate a second source area to the north and

west. A fluvial environment of deposition may

have been more dominant in the north with a

fluvial-deltaic or shallow marine environment

in the south where the detrital quartz came

From a more distant source.

The tack of biotite compared with the

Arcoeillinna Sandstone, and the abundance of

kaolin and weathered feldspar, suggests thet

tectonic imstahility and erosion rates had de-

creased to a degree whereby the source area

was composed of a weathered mantle with an

abundant supply of quartz, feldspar and kaolin.

SECTION 16a

: 120

SECTION 16a

[od

fad

i bo

APAMURRA

MEMBER

MT JOHNS

CONGLOMERATE

f7—332 S.A Deportimentol Mines aad Eneray

CAMBRIAN STRATIGRAPHY NE OFFICER BASIN 207

The presence of recumbently folded cross-

beds (Fig. llc) suggests a fluvial, or possibly

delta-front, environment of deposition.

Reineck & Singh (1973) state they are

commonly observed in fluvial sediments and

cite their occurrence in river point bars, flood-

plain and delta-front environments.

Stratiyraphie relationships and correlations

The lower boundary with the Apamurra

Member of the Mount Johns Conglomerate

is sharp and clearly erosional. In the north

however, Where the formation overlies coarser

clastics of the Mount Johns Conglomerate.

the lower boundary, which occurs at the foot

of the prominent buttress, may be a transitional

one. Here the sandstones of both formations

are lithologically similar and red-brown in

colour,

The upper boundary with the overlying

conglomerate and kaolinitic sandstone of the

Byilkaoora Formation is sharp and erosional.

That the Trainor Hill Sandstone thins toward

the north (from over 400 m in the south to

0 m in the northwest) indicates a period of

erosion prior to the deposition of the Munda

SECTION 16b

a0 =p

SECTION 16b

240 =— ~

Fig. 13a,b.

SECTION 16b

Trainor Hill Sandstone, type section.

Sequence, and is evidence for an unconformity

between the two sequences.

The Trainor Hill Sandstone is the major

outcropping unit of the southern portion of

the Officer Basin in South Australia, and is

correlated on lithological grounds with the

Wanna Beds ii the Western Australian portion

of ithe basin (Jackson & Van de Graaff 1981).

Outside the Officer Basin, the formation is

correlated with the Pantapinna Sandstone of

the Adelaide Geosyncline (Dalgarno er al.

1964).

Munda Sequence

The Munda Sequence was defined by Krieg

(1973) as comprising, in ascending order, the

Mount Chandler Sandstone, Indulkana Shale,

Blue Hills Sandstone and Cartu Beds. In this

paper the basal part of the Mount Chandler

Sandstone is redefined and is named the Byil-

kaoora Formation.

Byilkacora Formation (new name)

At the base of the Mount Chandler Sand-

stone, as defined by Kreig (1973), pebble to

boulder conglomerate and white cross-bedded

SECTION 16b

TRAINOR HILL SANDSTONE

SECTION 16b

BYILKAQORA

FORMATION

METRES

CH AITRHE Adine were RIM Fifiy

208 M, Lt.

SECTION 19 MOUNT

CHANDLER

SANDSTONE

Ww)

BYILKAQORA FORMATION

TRAINOR

HILL

SANDSTONE

§27—305 SADME

Fig. 14, Byilkaoora Formation, type section

kaolinitic sandstone occur, These sediments

are poorly-sorted and friable in contrast to the

very mature and prominently outcropping

resistant sandstones above. Three sections

(Fig. 4; sections I6e, 18 and 19) indicate

these sediments are a distinct and mappable

unit and are named herein the Byilkaoora

Formation, The name js derived from Mount

Byilkaoora in the southeast of the Mount

Johns Range, The type section and reference

section (Figs 4 and 14; sections 19 and I6c)

are located north of Mount Johns and oti the

eastern margin of Mount Byilkaoora respec-

lively,

hithology

The conglomerate of the type section is

poorly-sorted with a sandy to silly mtatrix.

RENBOW

Clasts include well-rounded, grey feldspathic

sandstone together with light-blue, fine quart-

Zilic sandstone, and claystone-siltstone, quartz,

veined quartzite and red sandstone, The clast

assemblage is recognizably different from that

of conglomerates within the Mount Johns Con-

glomerate and Wallatinna Formation,

The conglomerates pass up into white. ta

dirty-coloured kaolinitic sandstone with minor

siltstone und claystone. They are moderately

to very thinly-bedded, with minor cross-

hedding evident. The sequence fines and be-

comes cleaner higher up, and the top of the

formation is placed at the hase of clean very

well-sorted sandstones.

At the reference section, the sequence con-

sists of white. cross-bedded, kaolinitic, very

fine sandstone, Interbedded in the upper part

is Minor light-green claystone. The sandstone

is friable, well-sorted and may be slightly

sericitic, Cross-bedding is tangential and

foresets. may be very thin.

The nature of the lower boundary is sharp

und erosional, as discussed for the Trainor

Hill Sandstone, Whilst the upper boundary is

a sharp one for the type section, it is Tess

clearly defined and more interpretive further

south at Mount Byilkaoora,

Environment of deposition

A predominantly fluvial environment is

interpreted, The conglomerates seen ify the

base of the sequence thin and fine toward the

south, suggesting in part a north to northwest

provenance,

Mount Chandler Sandstone (redefined)

The Mount Chandler Sandstone is redefined

to exclude the white kaolinitic sandstone ane

conglomerate which occurs at the base, No

sechons were measured for this unit and only

a brief examination was made of the lower

and uppermost parts.

The formation crops out prominently as a

massive resistant quartzite to friable sandstone

Which forms the top of the Mount Johns

Range (Figs If, 91), The formation in

the lower part ix a clean, well to Very well-

sorted, fine to very fine, white sandstone with

subrounded to well-rounded grains, Bedding

is moderate to very thick with tabular cross-

bedding, and recumbent folded cross-beds

have been observed near the base in the north

In the lower part of the formation, north

of Mount Johns, a very conspicuous horizon

CAMBKIAN STRATICORAPELY NE OFFICER BASIN

of small pebbles of white, rounded ta sub

angular. polished quartz occurs (Fig. |g}

Similar pebble horizons occur in the Grnd-

stone Range Sandstone in the Flinders Ranges

(Dalvarno pers. comm, 1980).

The upper beds are slightly Celdspathic.

thickly-bedded and tend ie he orange-hrown

to shightly reddish (Krieg 1973), Prominent ace

abunwant Skelitliiny and U-shaped burraws of

Diplucraterion (Fig. t)h) which formed the

basis of correlation with the Ordovician

Pacoota, Sandstone of the Amadeus Basin

(Krier 1973. Wells er al. 1970). Packham &

Wehby (1969!) consider the U-shaped trace:

fossil Diplocraterion to be far more abundant

in the vicinity of Mount Johns where it

reaches sizes Of lp to 0,3 m across. They note

that he large form of Diplocraterion recorded

in the Amadeus Basin is mot comparable to

that found in the Mount Chandler Sandstone

for it lacks a septum and should be identified

as Corophivides.

Packham & Webby (1969'2) consider a

lidal-deltaic environment of deposition existed

for much of the formation. and a tidal-flat

environment for the burraw-bearing beds. The

presence of recumbent-folded cross-beds in

the lower part may sugyest a fluvial influence.

The formation thing toward the north from

609 mat Cartu Hill and 243 m east of Mount

Johns, 16 122 m al Indulkana (Packham &

Webby [969%), North to northeasterly cut

rent directions on the north margin of the

Mount Johns Range agree with the more

regional northerly current directions observed

hy Packhan & Webhy,

Conclusions

Deposition of the basal arkese and conglo-

mere of the Marla Group (the Wallalinna

Formation) represents a response to isostatic

uplitt after the Pelermann Ranges Orogeny

deformed and folded the Adetaidean of the

Olliger Basin. These coarse elastics thin rapidly

southwards ancl itertongue with the car-

hanate, claystore and siltstone of the Obser-

vatory Hill Becls (Figs. 4, 7),

White & Youngs (1980) supgest an alkali

playa lake enviranment for the Observatory

Hall Beds m Byllkaoora-!, noting the close

similarity with parts oF the Eocene Green

River Formation in Wyoming USA. (Eugster

W Mardic 1978). An arid climate is indicated

by the freshpess of feldspar jn the arkose of

Ihe Wallalinna Formation, and by the calcite

pseudamorphs after the evaporite minerals

shortite and trona jn the carhanutes of the

Observatory Hill Beds,

Both the Wallutinnu Farmation and ‘the

Observatory Fill Beds are characterised in

part by vyclic sedimentation which may be

seen as a response to periodic influx of water.

Tectonic instability was suggested hy Wopfner

(1969) for the shale-carbonate eycles Te-

corded in the lype section of the Observatory

Hill Beds 250 km to the southwest The pre-

sence of conglomerate, the pervasive freshness

of feldspar, and the wedge shape of the coarse

clastics suggests mild fectonism on the

northern and Western margin of the Mount

Johns Range,

Alkaline playa-like sedimentation ceased

with the formation of massive, interlayered

and nodular chert. The overlying red beds of

ihe Oolarinna Member were also deposited m

a playa lake environment, though the climate

may have been welter.

Thirty kilametres southeast of the Mount

Johas Range, the Observatory Hill Beds sre

guite different in character and the presence

there of trilohitesy in the upper part indicates

a marine environment for at least part of the

sequenee. They also give these sediments an

Early Cambrian age, the first reliable macro-

Fossil dating for any sediments of the Officer

Basin in South Australia (Jago & Youngs

1980), A low-lying land barrier, possibly a

northeasterly eXtension of the Amimarocadinna

Infivr, passihly separated these marine car-

bonates from the, playa-lake carbonates to the

northwest.

The Arcoeillinna Sandstone is transgressive

over the Observatory Hill Beds, and indicates

a change ta a possible fuVio-lacusttine en-

vironment with the major provenance lying to

the south and west, Supply continued from

the Musgrave Block, as indicated by minor

enarse clasties which thin and fine southwards.

The contact between the Arcocillinna Sand-

stone and the overlying Mount Johns Conglo-

Merate is sharp, indicating a possible hiatus

and thus subdivision of the Marla Group inio

two subgroups,

The Mount Johns Conglomerate is a fluvial

sequence of conglomerate und red-brown

sandstone which thins and fines southwards,

and which intertongues with shallow marine

claystone and siltstone that are dolomitic and

calcareous in part (Apamurra Member). A

sautherly thickening of these marine sediments

is suggested.

10 M. 0

The erosionally and transitionally fin the

north and south respectively) overlying

Trainor Hill Sandstone is a fluvial ta deltaic.

shallow marine sequence of fine to very fine

sandstone with minor interbedded red-brown

elaystone and siltstone. This formation thins

toward the north, Current directions ‘were

predominantly northeasterly, though the

oecurrence of southward-fining conglomerate

interbeds also indicate the Musgrave Block

continued to acl as a source area, Trace fossils.

particularly in the south, occur in the upper

part,

The Marla Group was eroded prior ta de-

position of the Karly Ordovician-Devonian

Munda Sequence. Sedimentation comrmenced

with a fitvialL kaolinific, cross-bedded sand-

stone with southward fining basal conglomerate

(Byilkaoora Formation). A murine trans-

gression from the south and west resulted in a

quick transition to the clean, well-sorted

arenites of the Mount Chandler Sandstone.

The Marla Group and Munda Sequence

ean be correlated with the Pertavorig Group

aid Larapinta Group (respectively) of the

Amadeus Basin (Wells ef al 1970). As with

BENBOW

the Amadeus Basin, the major source lay to

the south and west, while a sceond source

lay to the northwest of Mount lohns, Tectonic

conditions Were generally more stable in the

northeast part of the Officer Basin compared

with the Amadevs Basin, with considerably

less deposition,

Acknowledgements

Appreciation ts expressed for the help given

by G. W. Krieg {Dept of Mines & Energy)

who shared his knowledge and experience of

the northeastern Officer Basin, and to Dr

B. G. Borbes (Depr of Mines & Energy) and

two anonymous referees. Dr J, Jago (S.A,

Institute of Technology) examined and pro-

vided photographs of the trace fossils from

the Apamurra Member of the Mount Johns

Conglomerate. Dr A. H, White and D, Lock

of Comalco Ltd shared their knowledge of

Playa lake sedimentation, The efforts of the

typing-pool and drafting by M, Bailey and G.

Mighal are appreciated.

This paper is published with the permission

of the Director-General of Mines and Energy,

References

Abies, TR. 1, Banks, N. Lb, (1972) Recum-

bent-folded deformed crosshedding. Scdimen-

tology, 19, 25783.

Dany. B. (1956) The Cambrian in South Ans-

tralia. Jn J. Rodgers (EU.) “El sistema Cam-

brico, su paleogengrafia y el problerma de su

base’. Int geol. Congr, XX Sess. Mexico.

1956, (2), 91-147,

Cambrian Siraligraphy of the Flinders Ranges.

Sourh Australia. Trans. Ro Soe. S. Ase. BRL

129 44.

——, Jounson, J, E, & Coates R. P. (1964)

Blinman map sheet, Geolagical Atlas of South

Austtalia. 1:63 360 series (Geol. Surv. S. Aust

Adelaide }-

Luosrer, H. P. (1969) Inorganic bedded cherts

fram (he Mapadi area, Kenya, Contr, Mineral,

Peirol, 22, 1-31,

—— & Haro, L. A. (1978) Saline Lakes. Jv

A. Leenian, “Lakes: Chemistry, Geology and

Physics.” (Springer-Verlag: New York 283-8.

Fork. RK. L, (1968) Petrology of Sedimemtaury

Rocks. (Liniversity of Texas; Texas),

Garenouss, C, G. (1978) A fossil in the Obser-

yideory Bill Beds, Soni Australia. OQ. geo

Notes, geo), Sure. S&S Aust. 6 5-8.

Jacksom, M. 3. & Gaasrr, WS. EL van pe (1981)

Cevlagy of the Officer Basin. Bull, Bur. Miner.

Resour Boe,

Ince, J, B, & Youncs, B, C, (1980) Karly

A Austratia. Trans. R. Soe. S. Aust. Wd,

197-0.

Kries, G. W. (1969) Geologica| development in

(he eastern Officer Basin of South Australis.

Jo Aner Pet. Baplor. Assae, 9. 8-13,

—-- (19724) FVERARD map sheet, Geolovical

Atlas of South Australia #2250000 senes (Geol,

Sura. 5S. Aust, Adeluide).

—— (1972) The Ammaroodinina Intier. Queer,

Reel, Notes. weal. Surv. S. Atyt. AL, 3-7.

~e— (1973) EVERARD, South Austratia, Ex-

planatory Notes, 1:250000 geological series.

sheet SG/53-13. (Geol, Surv S. Aust. Ade-

fulde),

~~, Backsom, MT & Graare, W, 7, VAN DE

(1976) Officer Basin. 7 R. B, Leslie. H, J,

of Australia and Papun New Guinea,” 3,

Petroleum Australian Inst. Min, Metall. Mel-

bourne. 247-53.

Maror R. B. (1971) BIRKSGATE map sheet,

Geological Atlas of South Australia, 1-280 000

series, (Geol, Surv. 5. Aust, Adeluide),

— (1973) The Wirrildar Beds, Quort

Netes, geol, Surv. 9, Aust 45, 8-11

McKirpy. B. Mo & Kawister, A.J. (i980) Oil

gequhemistry and potential source rocks of the

Officer Basin, Sauth Australia. 1 Ayer Pet

E\iplor, Awoc, 2, 68-86,

Prov, G. M,, BeNBow, M. C, & Younas, Be,

(1980) A review of recent geological work tm

the Officer Basing South Australia. Jhfed. 2b

209-20.

Remeck, H. B,, Siwent, 1, B (1973) “Depositional

sedimentary Environments (Springer-Verlag:

New York}.

geal

CAMBRIAN STRATIGRAPHY NE OFFICER BASIN 211

SuRDAM, R. C. & STANLEY, K. O. (1979) Lacus-

strine sedimentation during culminating phase

of Eocene Lake Gosiute, Wyoming (Green

River Formation) Bull. geol. Soc. Am. 990,

93-110.

WELLS, A. T., FORMAN, D. J., RANFORD, L. C. &

Cook, P. J. (1970) Geology of the Amadeus

Basin, central Australia. Bull. Bur. Miner.

Resour. 100.

Waite, A. H. & Youncs, B. C. (1980) Cambrian

alkali playa-lacustrine sequence in the north-

eastern Officer Basin, South Australia. J. Sedim.

Petrol. 50, 1279-86.

WopFNER, H. (1969) Lithology and distribution

of the Observatory Hill Beds, eastern Officer

Basin. Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 93, 169-87.

OCCURRENCE AND DISTRIBUTION OF THE INLAND TAIPAN

OXYURANUS MICROLEPIDOTUS (REPTILIA: ELAPIDAE) IN SOUTH

AUSTRALIA

BY P. J. MIRTSCHIN

Summary

Prior to 1979, only four specimens of the elapid snake Oxyuranus microlepidotus were known from

South Australia and all were recorded from the extreme northeast of the State. Houston stated that

the species only appeared following plagues of the rat, Rattus villosissimus. One road killed

specimen was found in October 1979 near Clifton Hills Station, and in April 1980 three live

specimens were collected from the same area. Here we report a further three specimens (two

collected) and a skin slough near Clifton Hills Station, at a time when the Diamantina River,

Goyders Lagoon and Warburton River were in flood. Aerial examination of flooded areas revealed

that water had not covered the flood plain so that small elevated sections throughout the lagoon

remained dry.

BRIEF COMMUNICATION

OCCURRENCE AND DISTRIBUTION OF THE INLAND TAIPAN

OXNYURANUS MICROLEPIDOTUS (REPTILIA: ELAPIDAE)

IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA

Por to 1979, only fot specimens of the clapid

snike Oxyvuranus micrelepidetus were known

from South Australia und all were recorded from

the extreme northeast of (he State. Houston!

stated that the species only appeared following

plagues of the rat, Revias villosixsimus. One rvoud

killed speeinen was found in Oetober 1979 near

Clifton Hills Station, and in April 1980 three

live specimens and two skin sloughs were col-

lected frony the same drea*. Here we feporl a

further three specimens (two collected) and a

skin slough near Clifton Hills Station, at a time

when the Diamantina River, Goyders Lagoon and

Warburton River were in Hood, Aerial examina-

tion of flooded areas revealed thal water had

not covered the flood plain so that small clevated

sections throughout the lagoon remained dry.

Goydens Lagoon is an area of Pleistocene to

Holocene sediments consisting of gypsiferous sand

and clay, overlying Jacusttine gypsum beds. The

surficial sediment or soil is soft and easily com-

pactable as a cesult of tls high porosity and high

content of crystalline gypsum. Throughout the

raised areas, on which the snakes were cauent-

the surface igs pocked by shallow depressions,

many of which lead down into narrow cracks or

cavities up to 200 mm in width,

These holes, which appear to he desiccation

cracks enlarged by solution processes. form a

labyrinth of Uannels in the ground,

A cutting in a gravel pil, sixteen kilometres

south of Clifton Hills Statian, exposed a section

(hrough this sequence, showing the relationship

of the cavilies to the sand and underlying gypsunt.

(Fig. 1).

Two female GQ. niferdlepidetus. were collected

approximately 30 nm upart at the edge of Goyders

Lugoon, (26°39'S, 139°00'E), adjacent to the

Birdsville Track at 0730 hr 28.i,1981.. Ambient

temperature was approximately 24°C with 85-95%

clond cover and a» slight breeze. A skin slough

Was found jm the same area. Both snakes attempted

to escape down the holes which were abundant in

the area, The lizard Tympanecryptiy terrapere-

phora Was previously noted to use these holes.

An additional OQ. micralepldaris was observed

but nor captured, 7 km southwest on 30.ii1. 1981

at O8TO hits, The air temperature was also 24°C

with no wind and followed by 15 rom rain the

Previous afternoon. The area in which the snake

was observed is shbjected to occusional inundu-

tion by the Warburton Biver, The snake remained

motiontess with jis head alofe and wus approached

to within 1.5 m, After (hree minutes it hegan

iA peg:

mInURe OOGRAH SHOWING SOLUTION CAVITIFS IN GYPSIFEROUS

SAND AND Chat. OVEALATING BEDE GYPSUM LUPtoN Wilh

ARTA, 28

GYPSIPENRVUS SAND ARU LLAY

EL]

= BEDOE)) Gynsus

So.uT OM CAVITY

5 - a

7 ; ay ELFONDARY |feslm VEINS

lo move off; upon being disturbed by toneh, the

snake quickly withdrew its tail, hissed, and

slowly moved toward u solution hole ubout 20 m

away,

After collection of specimens in /98U ond 1981

Mr F. Wilson of Clifton Hills. recopnised the

Species and supplied further observations. He

gave co-ordinates for 22 other sightings in

Goyders Lagoon and the Warburton River.

ranging from 139"10°'E, 26°35'S to 138° 45 °BL

27°97'S. The data are treated with caulion be

cause there may be confusion With Psevdenija

species.

Current knowledge permits the interpretation

that O. ricrolepideruy is a permanent resident on

the flood pluins of the Diamantina River,

Goyders Lagoon and Warburton River. An addi-

tional specimen was collected by the N.P.W.S,

on a Cooper Creek fluod plain north of Moomha

since the Mareh expedition (D. Mount pers.

comm, }.

Observations of the nature of the terrain de-

rived from aerial surveys of the Warburtan

214

River and the Kallakoopah Creek, indicate that

the species could extend to Lake Eyre.

Of the specimens collected, four are kept by

P. Mirtschin at the Whyalla Fauna Park for

breeding studies. The other is under the care of

Mr J. Bredl at Renmark.

1Houston, T. (1973). Jn: South Australian Year

Book 8, 32-42.

2Mirtschin, P. J. (1981). Herpetofauna 13, 20-

23.

We thank G. Hughes for assistance with accom-

modation and use of a vehicle at Clifton Hills,

T. Schwaner, J. Covecevich and M. J. Tyler for

constructive criticism of the manuscript, G.

Johnston for assistance in the field and G. King-

dom for assistance with the illustration.

8Covacevich, J. (1981). Division of Health Educa-

tion & Information, Qld, p. 78.

P. J. MIRTSCHIN, 18 Creber St, Whyalla Playford, S. Aust. 5600 and R. B. REID, 13 Bean St,

Whyalla, S. Aust. 5600.

TOLERANCE OF BLUE CRAB, PORTUNUS PELAGICUS (L), TO HIGH

TEMPERATURE

BY V. P. NEVERAUSKAS AND A. J. BUTLER

Summary

From late spring to early autumn the portunid crab Portunus pelagicus (L.) is an important

constituent of the nektonic fauna in the waters around Torrens Island, Port Adelaide, approximately

16 km from the centre of Adelaide. The temperature tolerance of this species was investigated

briefly to ascertain whether there was concern about, and need for further studies of, the effects of

heated effluent water from the Torrens Island Power Station. The steam geneating station was built

in two stages, ‘A’ station with a capacity of 480 MW and ‘B’ station with four turbines rated at 200

MW apiece. At the time of this study (1977) only ‘A’ station was fully operational.

BRIER COMMUNICATION

TOLERANCE OF BLUE CRAB, PORTUNUS PELAGICUS (L),

TO HIGH TEMPERATURE

From late spring to carly autumn the portunid

crab Portunus pelaeivus (1) is an important

cunstituent of the neklonic fauna in the waters

around ‘Vorvens Island, Port Adelaide. approx|-

mitely 16 km from the centre of Adelaide. The

temperature tolerance of this species was inves-

\igaled briefly to ascertain whether there was

eadse for cuncern aboul, and need for further

studies of, rhe effects of heated ctfluent water

from the Yorrens Island Power Station. The steam

generating station was bnili in two stages. ‘A’

station wilh a capueity of 480 MW and ‘B’ station

with) four turbines rated at 200 MW apiece, At

ithe time of this study (1977) only °A* station was

fully operational.

Torrens Island is part of a sheltered-water

complex of mudflats, mangroves and salt marsh

dissecled by shallow channels!, The effluent water

discharges directly into such a channel, Angas

Intet, some 3 km in length. Ambient water tem-

peralure in the Port Adelaide River near Torrens

Island and at the Power Station’s intuke js ned

25°C diring, Summer*; Neverauskas recorded

temperatures of 35°C and 36°C in Angas Inlet

at summer peak periods,

Blue erabs were obtained between mid autumn

and early winter 1977 from the discharpe aren

of the power stalion where water temperatures

Were approx, 20°C, losufficient crabs could be

obtained to test sexes or Stages of development

separately. The ratio of femules t0 males in the

crabs wsed was e. t.121.0: males could not be

reliably classified mto developmental staves but

af the females +. 73% were in juvenile und

pubertal instars’ and the rest adult,

The method used to determine upper lethal

limits wus that developed by Bret and dis-

cussed by Fry? and Coutant

The crabs were placed in a glass tank with a

cupacity Of approx. 200 |, subdivided by per-

forated perspex sheets into 33 compartments, so

that the crabs were isolated from each other,

preventing fighting and cannibalism. To uvoid

fouling, no substrate wis provided and the animals

were nut fed. Water was replenished daily with

SU-100) 1 oof filtered sea warer ALL taeces were

siphoned from the tank. The water way con-

Imuously cycled through a polyester and chareoal

filler, and aerated through three diffusine stones

Salinity was kept at 35.00 (2° 2.5) ppt. in all

eXperiments, Water temperatures were controlled

by a Grant SUS" water heater, employing an oil

filed thermostat. A maximum/minimum thermo-

ineler recorded nu Mnetuations beyond -— O.1°C.

ai] of

°C}

ag 30°o

387 4

TEST TEMPERGTURE

365: s

22°C 130)

a5.

a no

‘TIME Ti 50% MORTALITY (min)

Fig, 1, Time to 50% mortality for Portunus

pelagicus exposed to various lest temperatures

after acclimation for 7 days ta four different

temperatures. Acclimation lemperature — is

shown above each line, with number of animals

tested in parentheses, Curves fitted hy eye,

Vo test for rate of acclimation would have re-

quired vastly more time and animals than avail-

able in this study but in view of carber findings*.7,

7 days was expected to be more than sufficient.

The blue crabs were acclimated for 7 days to

lemperatures of 22°, 25°, 28° and 30°C, and then

exposed to test temperatures near the estimated

upper lethal limits of their thermal tolerance.

Many went into “shock” (all locomotory move-

Ments ceuscd) but (heir balers continued ta work

und it was the cessation of this activity [hal Was

considered the point of death.

The results are displayed in Fig. |, fron. which

(he temperature required ta kill 50% of a test

sample during an indefinite exposure (Upper Inci-

pient Lethal Temperature, ULT-L.KY can be este

mated aus the tomperulure at which the curve

becomes approximately horizontal (Fig, Lt). The

ULL. tor animals acclimated to 22°, 25° and

28°C ippears to be near the lowest test tem-

peratures used. The sample which had been

acclimated to 30°C produced §0% mortality in an

unexpectedly short time (approx. 3 bours) at

39°C, ‘There were no more animals available to

test the effect of a lower temperature; the dashed

extrapolation of the curve in Fig. | suggests a

ULL. of 38.5°C, (There is of course no justifi-

cation for this extrapalation other than the shapes

of the other three curves. )

S 42

WW ZONE OF THERMAL RESISTANCE

a SE eS See

bP 3s

=i 34

fra L oe

S- 30

bar ZONE OF THERMAL TOLERANCE

1a 8 22 26 30 4 38

ACCLIMATION TEMPERATURE (°C)

Fig, 2. Upper Incipient Lethal Temperatures of

Portunus pelagicus acclimated for 7 duys to

four different temperatures. Bars indicate 95%

confidence limits. Curve fitted by eye. Dashed

line indicates Ultimate U.I.L. temperature.

Time to 50% mortality Was converted to loga-

rithms and linear regressions of log (lime) on test

temperature fitted. All slopes were significantly

different from zero and all coefficients of deter-

mination (r@) greater than 0.95. From. these

equations, 95% confidence limits for the U.LL,

values were calculated, The estimated ULL.

values and their 95% confidence limits are ploucd

in Fig. 2. Fig. 2 shows the changes in the U-T.L.

which can be achieved by acclimation, and sug-

gests that the Ultimate Upper Incipient Lethal

Temperature for the blue crab is near 395°C

(the dashed line).

\Butler, A, J., Depers, A, M., MecKillup, S.C, &

Thomas, D. P. (1977). Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust.

101, 35-44,

“Robertson, B. D. (1971), Meteorological Nole

No. 49. Bureau of Meteorology, Adelaide,

SNeverauskas, V. P, (1977). Some hiological

effects from warm effluent Water discharged

From the Torrens Island Power Station, M.Sc,

Thesis, University of Adeluide, (unpublished),

‘Meagher, T. D. (1971). Ecology of the crab

Portunus pelagicus (Crustacea; Portunidae) in

south western Australia. Ph.D. Thesis, Univer-

of Western Australia, (unpublished),

During warmest weather in this study and with

the station at peak load, the control room of the

Power Station recorded exhaust temperatures of

36°C with diurnal variations down to 31°C, It is

likely that these temperatures were restricted lo

the mixed waler immediately in front of Lhe outlet

and to a larger surface layer, bur they may be

considered as representative of a ‘maximal’ con-

dition.

Fry? suggests that acclimatisation under fluc-

tuating temperatures (such as those in question)

is determined by the highest temperature reuched,

If so, the blue crab would, prior to such a ‘maxi-

mal’ period, be ucclimatised to 30°C or more, Fig.

2 suggests that any acclimatisation above this level

would have litte effect on its temperature

tolerance, The data in Fig. 2 for acclimation at

30°C indicate that the temperature regimes al the

lime of this study would not cause 50% mortality

in blue crabs, Indeed, exhaust temperature re-

mained at least 2" below the estimated U-I.L.

temperature and therefore provided the 2" safety

margin which Coutunt! suggested would ensure

that no deaths occur,

This was a brief, exploratory study; its results

can serve as a basis for considering the effects of

the full operation of ‘B’ stution but its Limitations

must be borne in mind. Bricfly, it is not directly

known whether 7 days was a sufficient acclimation

period, and the crabs were housed artificially,

without substrate in which to bury, and not fed.

Any errors from either source are likely to have

caused Us to wder-estimate the U,I.L. temperature

of P. pelagicus.

“Brett, J, R.

70, 397-403,

OBrett, J, KR, (1952). J. Fish. Res. Bd Can. &,

265-309,

(1941). ‘Trans. Amer. Fish, Soe.

‘Fry, F. BE. J. (1967), Responses of vertebrate

poikilotherms to Lemperature. Jn; Rose, A, H.

(Ed.) Thermobiology. Academie Press, London.

pp, 375-406.

sCoutant, C, C. (1970), CRC Crit. Revs Environ.

Cont. 1, 341-381.

‘Coutant, C. C. (1972). hid, 3, 1-24,

V, P. NEVERAUSKAS and A, J. BUTLER, Deparment of Zoology, University of Adelaide, G.P.O.

Box 49%, Adelaide, S. Aust, 5001,

WONOKA FORMATION AND BILLY SPRINGS BEDS:

RECONNAISSANCE INTERPRETATION

BY CHRISTOPHER C. VON DER BORCH AND ALEX E. GRADY

Summary

The term Billy Springs Beds refers to a sequence of the late Proterozoic strata cropping out in the

northern Flinders Ranges. The beds occur on the COPLEY 1:250,000 Geological Sheet of the South

Australian Geological Survey where thay can be seen in two adjacent broadly synclinal zones near

the northern limit of outcrop of Adelaidean strata in the Flinders Ranges. Stratigraphically, the Billy

Springs Beds overlie the Wonoka Formation of the Wilpena Group and occur at the approximate

stratigraphic level of the Pound Subgroup (braided-stream fluvial and shallow-marine sandstones)

in aregion where the Pound Subgroup is absent.

BRIFE COMMUNIC ATION

WONOKA FORMATION AND BILLY SPRINGS BEDS:

RECONNAISSANCE INTERPRETATION

The term Billy Springs Beds! refers. to a

sequence Of lute Proterozoie strata cropping aut

in the northern Flinders Ranges. The beds occur

on the COPLEY 1:250,000 Geologicul Sheet of

the South Australian Geological Survey? where

they can be seen in two adjacent broadly synelinal

zones oer the northern limit of outcrop of

Adelaidean strata in the Flinders Ranges, Strati-

graphically, fhe Billy Springs Beds averlie the

Wonoka Formation of the Wilpena Group and

eecur at the approximate stratigraphic level of

the Pound Subgroup (braided-stream fvial and

shullow-marine sandstooes) in u region where the

Pound Subgroup is absent.

Brief descriptions ae published of the Billy

Springs Beds, und their relationship ta Gonpti-

guons uNlisl’. The beds ‘are estimated ta be

4.800 m (16,000 ft) thick and are divided into a

lower siltstone und wpper shale member. The

lower member is described to contain large scale

slump folds, and fo have a lenueular breccia al

the base. ‘Che upper member consists of piey-

green silty sites with imerbedded cross-bedded

quartviles, minor lenticular dolomitie marbles,

wid a mussive, sandy, oolfiie, grey dolomitic

marble, Quartales und red-brown — siltstones’

constittte highest exposed beds in the succession.

It has been suggested? that the facies of the

Billy Springs Beds tndicate deposition in part as

lurbidiles,

The purpose of this report is lo present a recon-

Huissance stratigraphic section (Fig, |) from the

buse of the Wonoka Formation 1.5 km NW of

Umberatana Statioa, through the Billy Springs

Beds in the vicinity of Mt Thomas Well. The

stratigraphic section wits logged at the sowhern

imitgin Of the maior syaclinal basin that hosts

ihe southern-most Billy Springs Keds. The section

lies 13 km east of a well-delined series of major

Sibimurne cunyon structures whielt incixe rhe

wiideeying Briching Formation and which wre

filled by slumps, turbidires and mudstones of the

Wonoke Formation, The stratigraphic seerian

(Fig. 1) ts divided inte eight informal Htholagicul

units which will be deseribed in sequence,

Wit lo bused ofistoytrante weit.

This noi, whieh overlies an eroded surface

on the largely progradational Brachima Formi-

tian! is approximately 20 m thick along the fine

al section. It cempriscs a slump-folded. matrix-

rieh, sumy divmictte very fine sand), with

oasis up to 0.5 a) in camer, Clasts are varied

und include quartzite and limestone, with cream-

weathering dolomite clasts teat the top. The

GRAVEL

LITHOLOGY

UNIT NO

ae Mota

Hiyles gynle geeudomiian

Upper mudstonn laminité

Lanedn unit

-~=

=e ad = or oe oe

Upper (laggy yandstune

Olestostiome ont

—— ——— — SILLY SPAiNGS BEDS— — —— ——

500,

Upper aiistostrome uni

Lower mudstone laminin

wot

reo

Lower Ilaogy Sandatane «

c1@35 0

Blistostrome anit

flaagy carbonaceous

Himestone wntt

-WOHOKA FORMAaTION—

GLEE ss

acy

ee Bass) olrstostiome whit

ARACHINA FORMATION

Fig. 1, Summary stratigraphic column of Wonoka

Formation and Billy Springs Beds, ML Thomas

Bore section: right column shows generalized

lithologies; left column summarizes dominant

sedimentary structiires; left-hand boundary of

left column graphs mean grainsize,

lithology and structure of unit | are consistent

Wi an ouigin by dewneslope mass movement.

Unlt 2, flagey carbonaceous linestane unit,

The basal olistostrome unit passes up abruptly

tow 130m thick, rhythmically inter-bedded, dark-

grey, pyritic limestone and shale, with a flagey

outcrop pullern, Carbonate intraclast breecia

lenses several centimetres thick occur at various

levels. Small-scale scour channels wecur Jovally,

and ripple cross-laminae within some carbonate

heds imply emplacement in the form of

caleprenites, although recrystallization has largely

obscured the original texture, Clasts of super

ficially similar carbomuceous limestones une

218

cammon in wsial breccias of Ihe Wonoka Forma-

uon submarine canyon systems developed ta the

west The rhythmic natire of the afien sharp-

bused laggy limestones of unit 2, und the presence

of channelized carbonate breecia bodies, suggest

that much of the wit has undergone resedimen-

jation down # busin slope, possibly as carbonate

jurbidily currents and localized slumps.

Umnir 3, lower flagey sandstane/olistostrome nt,

This unil is approximately 130 m thick. It is

mainly composed of flagay beds, 10-50 em thick,

of texturally mature arkosic sandstone, usually

with calcareous cement, interbedded with finer

sunds and shales, Intercalated lenticular, slump-

folded. very fine immature sandstones and silt-

stones are common. The faggy sandstones are

typically spaced about 1 m apart) Sands. have

sharp bases with flute casts. Parallel laminations

ot the base of uw particular sand “pulse” often

grade upwards to ripple cross-laminae or climbing

ripples. The sequence is interpreted lo be of tur-

bidite origin, with Bouma C-D divisions’.

Unit & lower miadstone laminite writ.

Turbidites of unil 2 pass upseetion ta mits and

very fine immature sands of dnit 4. This mono-

fonoue unit is (50 m thick along the section and

is dominated by fine parallel laminations suggest-

ing suspension setting of muds in quiet comei-

fiuns. Rare, very fine, immature siliclastic sands

averuging » Tew tens of eonfimetres thick, with

puvalle) laminations and possible hummocky cross-

stratification, complete the range of lithologies.

Unit 5, upper olistosirome unit.

This 50 m thick Unit comprises a slump-folded

mass of very fine to very coarse, immature,

arkosic sandstone, A course breceta wilh an

Immature sandy matrix ocenrs al the base. This

breccia hosts a wide variety of clasts including

white chert, bul dolomite and rounded pebbles

oF immature sandstone Unit 5 ntarks the base of

the Billy Springs Beds, Overall Uthologies une

structures are compatible with an origin by down-

slope mass movement,

Unit 6 upper fluegy sanidstone/olistusirame duit

Uyit 6, about 230 m thick, resembles nit 9 in

that it is composed of rhythmically-hedded, very

fine, nature, suh-arkosic sandstones with eal-

carcous cement, Each fagey sandstone 10-20 om

lhick has « sharp base und is interbedied with

shales. The sands, 1-2 m apan, are typically

lenucular and often show parallel Laminayons

passing up [o ripple crogs-laminae. Isolated,

Jehlicular masses of immature cuurse siltstones,

several metres thick, with spectacular slump folds,

occur at intervals throughout unit 4, These aluioyps

resemble (hose of unil 3 if every respect except

rhat they lock associated clasts, Cuspate folds

resembling tepee structures characterise many of

the Fagey sandstones, These structures, normally

teas of centimetres in amplitude, but in one cise

tens of metres, are apparently syn-sedimentary i

origin and may relate in some way to over-

pressuted pore fluids due to rapid deposition, The

rhythmic Taggy wnit, like unit 3, may be of tur

bidite origin, The intercalated lenticular slumps,

by unvlogy with unit 5, may represent olistos-

lromes.

trate 7, dipper mudstene laminite weit.

Unit 7, §20 om thick, has laminated grey-vreen

fine sands and sills at the base, and grades Up

to finely laminated sillstones. Limonite pseude-

morphs after pyrite cubes oecul seattered through

oul this drat) coloured doit, Near the top, colours

approach dark grey suggesting the presence af

corbonaceaus mater. Vhis unit was mainly de

posited by suspension senting of fine muds and

sands in a low energy envirenment.

Unil & mature siticcons qudrtz-arenite nit.

This unit, of undetermined thickness, represents

the highest stratigraphic level reached in the Mt

Thomas Well section, The base is defined by

quartzite bans several centimetres thick which

aeedr immediately below the main quartzite.

These bands, which are interbedded with unit 7?

type mindstones, pass upwards to a massive silica-

cemented, mature quartzite-arenite, This is

dominated by parallel Jaminahons with occasional

oscillation tipple marks and slumped beds, and

may represent deposition in relatively shallow

Willer.

The stratigraphic sexypdence described above may

have developed on a basin slope or near the

buse of 4 slope, ahead of u prograding delta

coniplex, Braided-stream fluvial sandstones of the

Bonney Sandstone Member of the Pound Sub-

croup mey represent the sub-acrial portion of

such uw delca complex. These major fluvial deposits

oveur preserved im the neighbouring synclinieal

steicnire TO km south (Gammon Ranges) ait a

stratigraphical Jevel equivalent fo that of the

Billy Springs Beds.

The Billy Sprags Beds uppear to have pra-

wraded over the Series of sediment-infilled sub»

marine cunyons, desenibed earlier to oulcrop IS

km wes! of the seclion Jeseribed iq this report.

These canyons av’é equivalent te the Patsy Springs

Canyon’ which outcrops 40 km soull of the

present sindy areca. They were incised und infilled

hy breccivs, muds and turbidite sands during

depusinon of Wonoka Formation sediments pos-

sibly early in the depositional cycle which culm

ated in sedimentnion of the Billy Springs Beds

and Pounml Sebsroup

1Coats, R. P. & Blissett, A. H. (1971). Bull. geol.

Surv. S. Aust. 43.

Coats, R. P. (1973). Explanatory notes

1:250,000 Geological Series sheet SG/54-9 Inter-

national Index, Geological Survey South Aus-

tralia.

’Forbes, B. G. (1966). Rep. Invest. geol. Surv.

S. Aust. 28.

4Plummer, P. S. (1978). Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust.

102, 25-38.

219

“Bouma, A. H. (1962). Sedimentology of some

flysch deposits: a graphic approach to facies

interpretation (Elsevier).

“Forbes, B. G. (1971). S. Aust. Dept Mines &

Energy Rept Bk 71/73 (unpubl.).

‘von der Borch, C: C., Smit, R. & Grady, A. E.

(1982). Bull. Amer. Ass. Petroleum Geol. 66,

332-347.

CHRISTOPHER C. VON DER BORCH and ALEX E. GRADY, School of Earth Sciences, Flin-

ders University of South Australia, Bedford Park, S. Aust. 5042.

ON THE STATUS OF LECHRIODUS FLETCHERI (BOULENGER)

(ANURA: LEPTODACTYLIDAE) IN NORTHEAST QUEENSLAND

BY K. R. MCDONALD AND J. D. MILLER

Summary

Three species of the leptodactylid frog genus Lechriodus occur in New Guinea and a fourth in

Australia. The Australian species, Lechriodus fletcheri, is well known and occurs from Ourimbah,

New South Wales to Cunningham’s Gap, southeast Queensland. Intensive surveys by the

Queensland National Parks and Wildlife Service, the Queensland Museum, other institutions and

individuals, have produced no further specimens in northeast Queensland. Hence, it is pertinent to

investigate the circumstances under which the isolated specimen was taken.

BRIEF COMMUNICATION

ON THE STATUS OF LECHRIODUS FLETCHER! (BOULENGER)

(ANURA: LEPTODACTYLIDAE) IN NORTHEAST QUEENSLAND

Three species of the leplodactylid frog genus

Leehriodus occur in New Guinea and a fourth in

Australia! The Australian species, Lechriodus

fleicheri, is Well known and occurs trom Ourim-

buh, New South Wales to Cunningham's Gap,

southeast Queensland and one specimen has been

reported from northeast Queensland,®. Intensive

surveys by the Queensland National Parks wnd

Wildlife Service, the Queensland Museum, other

institutions and individuals, have produced no

further specimens in northeast Queensland, Hence,

it is pertinent to investigate the circumstances

under which the isolated specimen was taken.

In October 1978, one of us (K.M.) examined

the specimen in question (AMNH 19947) and

confirmed the identification, It was collected by

H. C, Raven, a collector of mammals for the

American Museum of National History, A label

with the specimen reads "near Ravenshoe Decem-

ber [921", Ravenshoe is situated on the western

edge of the Atherton Tableland, northeast Queens-

land (17°36°S, 145°29'B),

Records in the AMNH show that in mid-July

1921, prior to going to northeast Queensland,

Raven and W. K, Gregory collected around Bbor,

NLS.W. On 17.vii,192) they obtained o series of

Ranidella signifera (AMNH 20070-20077), Litoria

verreanxi, (AMNH 19951-20061), and Pseudo-

phryne hibroni (AMNH. 20065-20069 ).

Some ume after this Raven left for northwest

Queensland and by 22.xi.1921 had begun collect-

ing mammals in the Ravenshoe district, 1560 km

north of Ebor.

Raven collected specimens of Litorin gracileniy

(AMNH 40303 and 40304) in 1921 at Babinda

Creck und in 1922 at Vine Creck, Ravenshoe.

Vine Creek is about 14.5 km (9 miles) SSE of

Ravenshoe and is probably the general locality

from which mammals had been collected it

November and December, 1921, Raven wis most

specific in giving the locality “as 9 miles SSE of

Ravenshoe” on his mammal specimens but did

not do this for his specimen of LZ. fletcherf. The

hubitat ¥ miley SSE of Ravenshoe appears (a be

suitable for £. fleteheri; however, extensive

ittempts to locate the frog in this area have been

unsuccessful,

‘Zweifel, R. G, Amer. Mus, Novil,

(23507), 1-41

(1972).

Ebor, N.S,W. from where Raven collected dur-

ing July 1921, is within the range of ZL, fletcheri

hased upon Queensland Museum, Australian Mu-

seum, and Queensland National Parks and Wild.

life Service records (Fig. 1), In Queensland, the

species is restricted to southeast Queensland with

a noticeable absence from the ranges north of

Cunningham's Gap, The specimen from Raven+

shoe was probably collected from the Ebor district

during the period when Raven was there and sub-

sequently mixed with his specimens trom north-

eas! Queenshind, It 1s therefore suggested that the

locality record for the AMNH specimen is erro-

neous.

We thank C, J, Limpus and R, G, Zweifel for

reading, the manuscript. A. B. Greer (Australian

Museum) and G. Ingram (Queensland Museum)

supplied locality data on specimens in their core.

L, Bridges prepared fig. |.

| gow SAVE rreroe 4

f QUEENSLAND

——

~“ ra

a otlemane 7

een aah =

a '. — :

m ™

(

NEW ’

SOUTH ae | .

wor f aa a

WALES {

o-*

- i

o 100k=

LL BY srowey jr

Fiz, |. Collection localities for Lechrioduy flet-

cheri. Line symbol may cover more than one

locality.

“Moore, J. A, (1961). Bull, Amer. Mus. Nat

Hist, l2t, 149-366,

kK. R, McDONALD, Queensland National Parks and Wildlife Service, Pallarenda, Townsville, Old 4810

and |,

D. MILLER, Dept of Zoology, University of New England, Armidale, N.S W. 2351,